Oliver Travel Trailers Legacy Elite II Guide

2021

LEGACY ELITE & LEGACY ELITE II

FEATURES

COMPONENT MANUALS

VIEW THIS MANUAL ONLINE AT OLIVERTRAVELTRAILERS.COM

64-65

66-101

102-130

131-192

193-199

200-205

206-222

223-230

4-6

7-9

10-11

12-24

25-26

27-38

39-52

53-63

231-246

247-249

250-256

257-268

269-296

STANDARD FEATURES COMPONENT MANUALS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

STANDARD COMPONENT WARRANTY INFORMATION

BARKER STABILIZATION JACK (TONGUE)

BULLDOG COUPLER

HIGH POINTE MICROWAVE

RV SAFE LP/CO DETECTOR

DOMETIC PORCELAIN TOILET AND PARTS LIST

DOMETIC STOVE

DOMETIC THERMOSTAT

FIRE EXTINGUISHER

FURRION STEREO

GARNET SEELEVEL II TANK MONITOR

GIRARD POWERED AWNING

MAXXAIR FAN/REMOTE

MAXXAIR BATH FAN

NORCOLD REFRIGERATOR

PROGRESSIVE DYNAMICS POWER CONVERTER

PROGRESSIVE INDUSTRIES SURGE PROTECTOR

SHURFLO WATER PUMP

SMOKE DETECTOR

SUBURBAN WATER HEATER

VIZIO TV


AirXcel MAXX Fan & Bath Fan

AirXcel

3050 N. Saint Francis St., Wichita, KS 67219

Email: [email protected]

Phone: 316-832-3468

Warranty: 2-Year Limited

Anderson “No-Sway” Weight Distribution Hitch

Andersen Hitches

3125 North Yellowstone Highway, Idaho Falls, ID 83401-1709

Email: N/A

Phone: 800-635-6106

Warranty: Limited Lifetime

Barker’s VIP 3000 and VIP 3500 Power Jacks

Barker Manufacturing

1125 Watkins Road, Battle Creek, MI 49015


Phone: (888) 367-6978

Warranty: 2-Year Extended

Bulldog Collar-Lok Coupler – 7,000 lbs.

Cequent Performance Products, Inc.

47912 Halyard Drive Suite 100, Plymouth, MI 48170

Email: N/A

Phone: 888-521-0510

Warranty: 1-Year

Cooper Tires

Cooper Tire & Rubber Company

701 Lima Ave., Findlay, OH 45840


Phone: (800) 854-6288

Warranty: 50,000 miles

Dexter Axles and EZ Flex Suspension

Dexter Axle Corporate Headquarters

2900 Industrial Parkway East, Elkhart, IN 46516

Email: N/A

Phone: (574) 295-7888

Warranty: 2-Years

4

STANDARD COMPONENT WARRANTY INFORMATION STANDARD COMPONENT WARRANTY INFORMATION

Dometic A/C and Thermostat

Dometic

2320 Industrial Pkwy, Elkhart, IN 46516


Phone: 800-544-4881


*Refer to thermostat manual for AC

Dometic Cooktop

Dometic



Phone: 800-544-4881


Dometic Furnace

Dometic



Phone: 800-544-4881


Dometic Toilet

Dometic



Phone: 800-544-4881


Furrion - Stereo & Speakers

Furrion

52567 Independence Ct., Elhart, IN 46514


Phone: 888-354-5792


Girard Awning

Girard Systems

1361 Calle Avanzado, San Clemente, CA 92673

Phone: (800) 382-8442


5

6


High Pointe Microwave

Contact Oliver Travel Trailers Service Department for Warranty


ITC RV Fontana Exterior Shower

ITC Global Headquarters

230 East Lakewood Blvd., Holland, Michigan 49424


Phone: 616-396-1355


Norcold Refrigerator

Thetford Corp

7101 Jackson Road, Ann Arbor, MI 48103

Email: N/A

Phone: 800-543-1219


Progressive Dynamics Converter/Power Center

Progressive Dynamics, Inc.

507 Industrial Road, Marshall, MI 49068


Phone: 269-781-4241

Warranty: 2-Years

Progressive Industries EMS-HW30C Surge Protector

Progressive Industries, Inc.

1020 Goodworth Dr., Apex, NC 27539


Phone: 919-462-8280

Warranty: Limited Lifetime

Suburban Water Heater

Suburban Manufacturing Co.

676 Broadway Street, Dayton, TN 37321

Email: N/A

Phone: 423-775-2131 Ext. 7107


Vizio TV

Contact Oliver Travel Trailers Service Department for Warranty


STANDARD COMPONENT WARRANTY INFORMATION BARKER STABILIZATION JACK (TONGUE)

VIP 3000 POWER JACK OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS

P/N 30826(WHITE) OR P/N 31696, 31837 (BLACK )

H&H Engineering VIP 3,000 Power Jack is designed to lift up to 3,000 pounds a full 18". It's design also includes a night light, a build in leveling device, attached foot plate, and an emergency crank handle.

An important part of owning and using VIP Jack is being sure it is properly installed and serviced.

GENERAL SAFETY:

Read and understand the Jack installation instructions. Always block trailer wheel when using the jack. Remove jewelry (watches, rings, etc.)

BEFORE INSTALLATION:

Remove present jack

Raise your travel trailer's front end and place blocks or stabalizing jacks under the front "A" frame.

Lower the trailer until it rests securely on stabilizing jacks or blocks. Retract present jack and remove.

INSTALLATION:

Install Jack in hole and secure with 3 bolts & 3 internal tooth lockwashers

(bolt holes are threaded)

Attach the foot plate to VIP Jack with .50-20 bolt and .50" lockwasher

30 amp slow blow fuse

3000

Supplied by customer

"A" frame coupler

30

AMP

(+)

VIP Jack travel trailer battery

Connect the lead-wire directly to the positive (+) lead of the travel trailer's battery using a twelve (12) gage wire.

Be sure the connection is a good one.

THE 30 AMP SLO-BLO FUSE MUST BE INSTALLED

AS SHOWN.

IMPORTANT

To insure a good electrical ground an internal tooth lockwasher must be in place for this bolt.

Make sure powdercoat or paint is removed from

"A" frame coupler under washer and that tagged hole is used.

IMPORTANT NOTICE:

If it is necessary to change the position of the powerhead relative to the post and flange (in order to provide clearance between powerhead and LP gas bottle or LP gas cover, or more clearance between the lift gate and the powerhead) loosen set screws and rotate head without lifting off coupling. Retighten set screws when head is in desired position.

H&H ENGINEERING

DIVISION OF BARKER MFG. CO.

730 E. MICHIGAN AVE. / P.O. BOX 460

BATTLE CREEK MI 49016 / (269) 965-2371

©

Copyright H&H Engineering 1989

PAGE: DATE: FORM #:

1 OF 4 21 APR 08 30842

REV. LETTER:

E

ECN#:

13855

APPROVED:

7




OPERATION (ELECTRIC)

REMEMBER TO KEEP HANDS AND FEET FROM

UNDER THE FOOT PLATE WHEN USING POWER JACK.

The "night-light" is controlled by this toggle switch

.

.

.

When VIP JACK reaches the end of it's travel

(either raising or lowering) the internal clutch activates

Dolly wheels are not recommended.

UP

Jack will raise and lower by this toggle switch Warning

DOWN

AVOID THE RISK OF INJURY OR DEATH TO YOURSELF AND OTHERS:

USE THE JACK FOR LIFTING THE TRAVEL TRAILER ONLY.

NEVER GET BENEATH THE TRAILER WHEN IT IS SUPPORTED BY THE JACK.

SUPPORT THE VEHICLE WITH THE APPROPRIATE MEANS.

HIGH POWER

SERIES

3000

OPERATION (MANUALLY):

If an electrical failure should occur the emergency handle may be inserted into the jack post and the jack can be raised or lowered.

(Access can be obtained by twisting cap off.)

If the powerhead is removed crank can still be used to raise and lower jack.

SERIES

High

3000 e

WARNING!!!

Do not use toggle switch with crank handle in place.

Breaking this rule will cause serious injury or death.

WARNING

Don't risk serious injury or

death in a shearing or squeezing accident. Keep body, hands, and feet away.

.

.

19989

BREAKING THESE RULES WILL CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.

8

H&H ENGINEERING



BATTLE CREEK MI 49016 / (269) 965-2371

©


DATE: FORM #:

2 OF 4 21 APR 08 30842

APPROVED:




STRAP ATTACHMENT:

1. Press strap (1) onto the stud (2) at the bottom of the cap.

2. Press the retaining ring (3) on stud

(2) snug it down against the strap (1).

3. Repeat this process (4) on the stud found on the inside of the cover.

MAINTENANCE:

Once a year, the powerhead should be removed and a liberal amount of grease (preferably a grease with high melting point) applied directly to the coupling on which the drive pin rests.

DO NOT POUR OIL into top of the jack post.

THIS WILL SECURE YOUR CAP.

BOTTOM OF CAP

3

2

COVER,

INSIDE

1

4

Once a year, the housing cover should be removed and the gears inspected for proper lubrication.

Remove 4 screws and tap around edge of housing to free cover.

DO NOT insert screw driver blade! (This may damage mating surfaces.)

Before replacing cover, clean mating surfaces.

If lubrication is needed, use Mobilith 460 grease or equivalent.

SCHEMATIC WIRING DIAGRAM

P/N 16263

MOTOR

H&H ENGINEERING



BATTLE CREEK MI 49016 / (269) 965-2371

©


DATE:

REVISION LETTER: ECN#:

13855

FORM #:

3 OF 4 21 APR 08 30842

APPROVED:

9

BULLDOG COUPLER

Bulldog Collar-Lok

™

Couplers

®

Read, Understand, Follow and Save These Instructions

Read, understand and follow all of these instructions and warnings (Instructions) before installing and using this product. Install and use this product only as specified in these instructions. Improper installation or use of this product may result in property damage, serious injury, and/or death.

Never allow installation or use of this product by anyone without providing them with these instructions. You must read, understand and follow all instructions and warnings for any product(s) to which this product is used in conjunction with or installed. Save these instructions with the product for use as a reference for any future installation and use of the product.

WARNING

Failure to follow these warnings and instructions may result in property damage, serious bodily injury, and/or death.

• Purchaser/owner must ensure that product is installed according to these instructions.

• Purchaser/owner must not alter or modify product.



Operator and bystanders should never position any part of body under

 any portion of this product or the load being supported.

Do not allow children to play on or around this product or the load being supported.

• Weigh your trailer plus added load. Do not exceed lesser of mounting bracket, coupler, hitch, vehicle, ball, or trailer weight ratings (including load).

• Never exceed maximum rated capacity. Refer to stamped markings or decals on product to obtain rated capacity. If uncertain, contact Cequent

Performance Products at 1-800-632-3290 or www.cequentgroup.com

• Use only the proper ball for this coupler as indicated on the coupler body.

If uncertain, contact Cequent Performance Products at 1-800-632-3290 or www.cequentgroup.com

• Always secure load, vehicle and trailer (by blocking wheels) before latching/unlatching coupler.

• Use caution when uncoupling as tongue may rise suddenly due to negative tongue load.

• After installing channel and/or coupler, if coupler operation has been impared in any way, do not use it.

• Keep the ball pocket and mechanism clean. When parking or storing your trailer, keep the coupler off the ground so dirt and/or other foreign material will not build up in the coupler ball pocket.

• Do not tow if ball is not fully seated and/or coupler is not closed.

• All welding must be performed by a AWS certified welder.

• This product rated according to SAE J684.

Before Towing:

• Check vehicle, channel, hitch, hitch ball and coupler for signs of wear or damage and that the coupler handle opens and closes freely. If coupler and/or channel is deformed or damaged, replace complete coupler and bracket.

• Always replace bent, broken, or worn parts before using this product.

• Check that the hitch ball is fully seated in the coupler ball pocket, close coupler and insert pin behind the collar or through the latch.

• Check channel hardware for wear and proper tightness. Replace bent, broken, or worn hardware. Tighten hardware to appropriate SAE proofload specifications (See table specs). Use only grade 5 hardware.

• Make sure that the trailer safety chains are properly connected to the towing vehicle and trailer according to SAE J684.

• Make sure that all trailer lighting is hooked up and working properly.

Coupler Installation

Warning: Failure to follow all installation instructions could result in coupler failure.

Before mounting the coupler confirm that there will be no interference from the tow vehicle, tongue, ground, and any other mounted accessories while stationary or in motion. Before installing, check for interference in open and closed positions. Check for interference again after installation is complete. All welding must be performed by an AWS certified welder. The coupler must be rigidly attached to the trailer in order for the coupler to support its maximum rated load according to SAE J684. After installation, check to make sure that coupler operation has not been impaired in any way. Do not use coupler if its operation has been impaired.

Weld-on Instructions:



All welding must be performed by an AWS certified welder.

• Assure the coupler internal stop is butted against the end of the trailer tongue for maximum overlap.

• If using a weld-on coupler, weld 3/16” around the interface between coupler and tongue. See illustrations below. No undercut or washout while welding.

2B, 4B and 5B Models

3B Model

Minimum Tongue Overlap - 7”

Minimum Tongue Overlap - 6.5”



(Tongue may fit over or into coupler)

Bolt-on Instructions:

• Assure that the coupler internal stop is butted against the end of trailer tongue for maximum overlap before securing.

• Torque grade 5 bolts with locknuts to appropriate SAE proof load specifications (See table specs). No deformation of trailer tongue end allowed.

• The number and size of fasteners required must be specified by the trailer manufacturer.

3.0” Channel

(Not included)

Torque Specs

Ø 3/8” - 23 ft.lbs.

Ø 1/2” - 55 ft. lbs.

Ø 5/8” - 110 ft. lbs.

Retaining Pin Supplied

Hardware

10

Minimum Tongue Overlap - 8.5” Minimum Tongue Overlap - 7”

Keep ball pocket and mechanism clean. The following procedures should be performed at least annually:

Check welds and mounting bolt torque.



• Grease ball pocket.

• Oil pivot points with SAE 30 wt. motor oil.

• Inspect retaining pins and replace if necessary.

Oil

Maintenance

Oil

Oil

Grease

(Ball Pocket)

Printed in Mexico F3290 (Rev E-4718) 1/15

M-Style Coupler

Pin

L-Style Coupler

Lever Pin

BULLDOG COUPLER

Operation

To Couple:

1) Block trailer wheels.

2) Align hitch ball beneath coupler.

3) If the coupler is closed, open it by removing the pin behind the collar and sliding the collar away from the ball pocket. Be sure the coupler cap is open and holds the collar back.

4) Lower the trailer onto the hitch ball.

5) Visually check that the hitch ball is fully seated in the coupler.

6) After the hitch ball is seated in the coupler, carefully close the coupler cap. Be sure the collar springs toward the ball pocket and captures the coupler cap.

7) Reinsert the pin behind the collar. Do not tow without pin in place.

8) Always secure safety chains to vehicle before towing according to SAE J684 .

To Uncouple:


2) Open the coupler by removing the pin behind the collar and sliding the collar away from the ball pocket.

Be sure the coupler cap is open and holds the collar back.

3) Raise the trailer from the hitch ball.

Coupler is Open

Cap is Open

Coupler is Closed

Collar is Capturing Cap

Collar

(Back)

H-Style Coupler

Pin

Cap (Open) Body

Collar

(Forward) Cap (Closed) Body

To Couple:


2) Align hitch ball beneath coupler.

3) If the coupler is closed, open it by removing the pin in the latch and lifting the latch. Be sure the coupler cap is open and holds the collar back.

4) Lower the trailer onto the hitch ball.

5) Visually check that the hitch ball is fully seated in the coupler.

6) After the hitch ball is seated in the coupler, carefully close the coupler cap and lower the latch. Be sure the collar springs toward the ball pocket and captures the coupler cap.

7) Reinsert the pin in the latch. Do not tow without pin in place.

8) Always secure safety chains to vehicle before towing according to SAE J684 .

Latch

To Uncouple:


2) Open the coupler by removing the pin in the latch and lifting the latch. Be sure the coupler cap is open and holds the collar back.

3) Raise the trailer from the hitch ball.

How to Order

Use only Cequent Performance Products’ parts or parts of equal quality for repair. Replacement parts are available through Cequent Performance

Products’ Customer Service Department, 1-800-632-3290. Please specify product model number.

Limited Five Year Warranty

Limited Warranty. Cequent Performance Products, Inc. (“We” or “Us”) warrants to the original consumer purchaser only (“You”) that the product will be free from material defects in both material and workmanship for a period of five years, ordinary wear and tear excepted; provided that

installation and use of the product is in accordance with product instructions. There are no other warranties, express or implied, including the

warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. If the product does not comply with this limited 5 year warranty, Your sole and

exclusive remedy is that We will replace the product without charge to You and within a reasonable time or, at our option, refund the purchase price.

This warranty is not transferable.

Limitations on the Warranty. This limited warranty does not cover: (a) normal wear and tear; (b) damage through abuse, neglect, misuse, or as a result of any accident or in any other manner; (c) damage from misapplication, overloading, or improper installation, including welds; (d) improper maintenance and repair; and (e) product alteration in any manner by anyone other than Us, with the sole exception of alterations made pursuant to product instructions and in a workmanlike manner.

Obligations of Purchaser. To make a warranty claim, contact Us at 47912 Halyard Dr. Suite 100, Plymouth, MI 48170, 1-800-632-3290, identify the product by model number, and follow the claim instructions that will be provided. Any returned product that is replaced or refunded by Us becomes our property. You will be responsible for return shipping costs. Please retain your purchase receipt to verify date of purchase and that You are the original consumer purchaser. The product and the purchase receipt must be provided to Us in order to process Your warranty claim.

Remedy Limits. Repair or replacement is Your sole remedy under this limited warranty or any other warranty related to the product. We shall not be liable for service or labor charges incurred in removing or replacing a product or any incidental or consequential damages of any kind.

Assumption of Risk. You acknowledge and agree that any use of the product for any purpose other than the specified use(s) stated in the product

instructions is at Your own risk.

Governing Law. This limited warranty gives You specific legal rights, and You also may have other rights which vary from state to state. This

limited warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Michigan, without regard to rules pertaining to conflicts of law. The state courts located

in Oakland County, Michigan shall have exclusive jurisdiction for any disputes relating to this warranty.

47912 Halyard Dr. Suite 100

Plymouth, MI 48170 USA

800/632-3290 www.cequentgroup.com

11


12

Microwave Oven

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Model:EM925AQR

PRECAUTIONS TO AVOID POSSIBLE EXPOSURE

TO EXCESSIVE MICROWAVE ENERGY

Read these instructions carefully before using your microwave oven, and keep it carefully.

with the safety interlocks.

If you follow the instructions, your oven will provide you with

the oven door closes properly and that there is no damage to the:

(1) DOOR (bent)

(2) HINGES AND LATCHES (broken or loosened)

qualified service personnel.

ADDENDUM

If the apparatus is not maintained in a good state of cleanliness, its surface could

be degraded and affect the lifespan of the apparatus and lead to a dangerous situation.

Specifications

Model:

Rated Voltage:

EM925AQR

120V~ 60Hz

1350W Rated Input Power(Microwave):

Rated Output Power(Microwave):

Oven Capacity:

Turntable Diameter:

External Dimensions:

Net Weight:

Warning:

900W

1.0

Cu.ft.

10.6 inch

19.1

8

Approx.28.2 Lbs

Handling the cord on this press or cords associated with accessories sold with this product, will expose you to lead a chemical known to the state of California to cause cancer, and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.

2


SAFETY

1. The oven must be on a level surface.

2. The turntable and turntable roller rest must be in the oven during cooking. Place the

cookware gently on the turntable and handle it carefully to avoid possible breakage.

3. Incorrect use of browning dish may cause the turntable to break.

4. Use only the specified bag size when using Popcorn.

5. The oven has several built-in safety switches to ensure that the power remains off when

the door is open. Do not tamper with these switches.

6. Do not operate the microwave oven empty. Operating the oven with no food or food that

is extremely low in moisture can cause fire, charring or sparking.

7. Do not cook bacon directly on the turntable. Excessive heating of the turntable

may cause the turntable to break.

8. Do not heat baby bottles or baby food in the microwave oven. Uneven heating

may occur and could cause physical injury.

9. Do not heat narrow-necked containers, such as syrup bottles.

10. Do not attempt to deep-fry in your microwave oven.

11. Do not attempt home canning in this microwave oven, as it is impossible to be sure all

contents of the jar have reached boiling temperature.

12. Do not use this microwave oven for commercial purposes. This microwave oven is made

for household use only.

13. To prevent delayed eruptive boiling of hot liquids and beverages or scalding yourself,

stir liquid before placing the container in the oven and again halfway through cooking

time. Let stand in the oven for a short time and stir again before removing the container.

14. Use carefully when cooking food in the microwave oven to avoid burning due to

excessive cooking.

15. Failure to maintain the oven in a clean condition could lead to deterioration that could

adversely affect the life of the appliance and possibly result in a hazardous situation.

Radio Interference

1. Operation of the microwave oven may cause interference to your radio, TV

or similar equipment.

2. When there is interference, it may be reduced or eliminated by taking the

following measures:

1) Clean door and sealing surface of the oven

2) Reorient the receiving antenna of radio or television.

3) Relocate the microwave oven with respect to the receiver.

4) Move the microwave oven away from the receiver.

5) Plug the microwave oven into a different outlet so that microwave oven

and receiver are on different branch circuits.

3

13

14


IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING

To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, injury to persons or exposure to excessive microwave oven energy when using your appliance, follow basic precautions, including the following:

1. Read all instructions before using the

appliance.

2. Read and follow the specific: "PRECAU-

TIONS TO AVOID POSSIBLE EXPOSURE

TO EXCESSIVE MICROWAVE ENERGY"

on page 2.

3. As with most cooking appliances, close

supervision is necessary to reduce the risk

of a fire in the oven cavity.

If materials inside the oven ignite:

1. Keep the oven door closed.

2. Turn the oven off, and unplug the appliance.

3. Disconnect the power cord, shut off power at the fuse or circuit breaker panel.

4. Do not overcook food. Carefully attend the appliance when paper, plastic, or other combustible materials are placed inside the oven to facilitate cooking.

5. Do not use the oven cavity for storage purposes. Do not store combustible items such as bread, cookies, paper products, etc. inside the oven.

6. Remove wire twist-ties and metal

handles from paper or plastic containers/bags before placing them in the oven.

7. This oven must be grounded. Connect

only to properly grounded outlet. See

"GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS" on

page 5.

8. Install or locate this oven only in

accordance with the installation instructions provided.

9. Some products such as whole eggs, water with oil or fat, sealed to explode and therefore should not be heated in this oven.

10. Use this appliance only for its intended

uses as described in this manual. Do

not use corrosive chemicals or vapors

in this appliance. This oven is

specifically designed to heat or cook

food. It is not designed for industrial or

laboratory use.

11. As with any appliance, close

supervision is necessary when used

by children.

12. Do not operate this oven if it has a

damaged cord or plug, if it is not

working properly or if it has been

damaged or dropped.

13. This appliance should be serviced only

by qualified service technicians.

Contact the nearest authorized service

facility for examination, repair or

adjustment.

14. Do not cover or block any vents on the

oven.

15. Do not store or use this appliance

outdoors.

16. Do not use this oven near water, for

example, near a kitchen sink, in a wet

basement, near a swimming pool, or

similar locations.

17. Do not immerse cord or plug in water.

18. Keep cord away from heated surfaces.

19. Do not let cord hang over edge of

table or counter.

20. When cleaning door and oven

surfaces use only mild, nonabrasive

soaps or detergents applied with a

sponge or soft cloth.

4


21. Liquids, such as water, coffee, or tea are able to be overheated beyond the boiling point

without appearing to be boiling. Visible bubbling or boiling when the container is

removed from the microwave oven is not always present. THIS COULD RESULT IN

VERY HOT LIQUIDS SUDDENLY BOILING OVER WHEN THE CONTAINER IS

DISTURBED OR A SPOON OR OTHER UTENSIL IS INSERTED INTO THE LIQUID.

i) Do not overheat the liquid.

ii) Stir the liquid both before and halfway through heating it.

iii) Do not use straight-sided containers with narrow necks.

iv) After heating, allow the container to stand in the microwave oven for a short time

before removing the container.

v) Use extreme care when inserting a spoon or other utensil into the container.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

To Reduce the Risk of Injury to Persons

GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS

DANGER

Electric Shock Hazard plugged into an outlet that is properly installed and grounded.

Consult a qualified electrician or serviceman if the

Touching some of the internal grounding instructions are not completely understood components can cause serious or if doubt exists as to whether the appliance is personal injury or death. Do not disassemble this appliance.

WARNING

properly grounded. If it is necessary to use an extension cord, use only a 3-wire extension cord that has a 3-pronged grounding plug, and a 3-slot

Electric Shock Hazard

Improper use of the grounding can result in electric shock. Do receptacle that will accept the plug on the appliance.

The marked rating of the extension cord shall be equal to or greater than the electrical rating of the appliance.

not plug into an outlet until

1. A short power-supply cord is provided to reduce the appliance is properly installed

risks resulting from becoming entangled in or and grounded.

tripping over a longer cord.

Three-pronged

(grounding) plug

2. Longer cord sets or extension cord is provided to

reduce the risks resulting from becoming entangled

in or tripping over a longer cord.

3. If a long cord sets or extension cord is used:

1) The marked electrical rating of the cord set or

extension marked electrical rating of the cord set or a grounding plug. The plug must be

extension cord should be at least as great as the

This appliance must be grounded. In the event of an electrical short circuit, grounding reduces the risk of electric shock by providing an escape wire for the

electrical rating of the appliance.

2) The extension cord must be a grounding-type

3-wire cord.

3) The longer cord should be arranged so that it will

not drape over the countertop or tabletop where it with a cord having grounding wire with

can be pulled on by children or tripped over

unintentionally.

5

15

16


UTENSILS

CAUTION

Personal Injury Hazard

Tightly-closed utensils could explode. Closed containers should be opened and plastic pouches should be pierced before cooking.

See the instructions on "Materials you can use in microwave oven or to be avoided in microwave oven."

There may be certain non-metallic utensils that are not safe to use for microwaving. If in doubt, you can test the utensil in question following the procedure below.

Utensil Test:

1. Fill a microwave-safe container with 1 cup of cold

water (250ml) along with the utensil in question.

2. Cook on maximum power for 1 minute.

3. Carefully feel the utensil. If the empty utensil is

warm, do not use it for microwave cooking.

4.

Do not exceed 1 minute cooking time.

Materials you can use in microwave oven

Utensils Remarks

Aluminum foil

Browning dish

Dinnerware

Glass jars

Glassware

Oven cooking bags

Paper plates and cups

Paper towels

Shielding only. Small smooth pieces can be used to cover thin parts of meat or poultry to prevent overcooking. Arcing can occur if foil is too close to oven walls. The foil should be at least 1 inch (2.5cm) away from oven walls.

Follow manufacturer’s instructions. The bottom of browning dish must be at least 3/16 inch (5mm) above the turntable. Incorrect usage may cause the turntable to break.

Microwave-safe only. Follow manufacturer's instructions. Do not use cracked or chipped dishes.

Always remove lid. Use only to heat food until just warm. Most glass jars are not heat resistant and may break.

Heat-resistant oven glassware only. Make sure there is no metallic trim.

Do not use cracked or chipped dishes.

Follow manufacturer’s instructions. Do not close with metal tie. Make slits to allow steam to escape.

Use for short–term cooking/warming only. Do not leave oven unattended while cooking.

Use to cover food for reheating and absorbing fat. Use with supervision for a short-term cooking only.

Use as a cover to prevent splattering or a wrap for steaming.

Parchment paper

Plastic Microwave-safe only. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions. Should be labeled "Microwave Safe". Some plastic containers soften, as the food inside gets hot. "Boiling bags" and tightly closed plastic bags should be slit, pierced or vented as directed by package.

Plastic wrap Microwave-safe only. Use to cover food during cooking to retain moisture. Do not allow plastic wrap to touch food.

Thermometers Microwave-safe only (meat and candy thermometers).

Wax paper Use as a cover to prevent splattering and retain moisture.

6


Materials to be avoided in microwave oven

Utensils Remarks

Aluminum tray

Food carton with metal handle

Metal or metaltrimmed utensils

Metal twist ties

Paper bags

Plastic foam

Wood

May cause arcing. Transfer food into microwave-safe dish.

May cause arcing. Transfer food into microwave-safe dish.

Metal shields the food from microwave energy. Metal trim may cause arcing.

May cause arcing and could cause a fire in the oven.

May cause a fire in the oven.

Plastic foam may melt or contaminate the liquid inside when exposed to high temperature.

Wood will dry out when used in the microwave oven and may split or crack.

SETTING UP YOUR OVEN

Names of Oven Parts and Accessories

Remove the oven and all materials from the carton and oven cavity.

Your oven comes with the following accessories:

Glass tray 1

Turntable ring assembly 1

Instruction Manual 1

F

A

G

7

E D C B

A) Control panel

B) Turntable shaft

C) Turntable ring assembly

D) Glass tray

E) Observation window

F) Door assembly

G) Safety interlock system

17

18


Turntable Installation

Hub (underside)

Glass tray

Turntable shaft

Turntable ring assembly

Countertop Installation

Remove all packing material and accessories.

Examine the oven for any damage such as dents or broken door. Do not install if oven is damaged.

Installation

1. Select a level surface that provides

enough open space for the intake

and/or outlet vents.

3.0 inch(7.5cm)

12 inch(30cm)

OPEN

3.0 inch(7.5cm) a. Never place the glass tray upside down. The glass

tray should never be restricted.

b. Both glass tray and turntable ring assembly must

always be used during cooking.

c. All food and containers of food are always placed

on the glass tray for cooking.

d. If glass tray or turntable ring assembly cracks or

breaks, contact your nearest authorized service

center.

Cabinet: Remove any protective film found on the microwave oven cabinet surface.

Do not remove the light brown Mica cover that is attached to the oven cavity to protect the magnetron.

(3) Blocking the intake and/or outlet openings can damage the oven.

(4) Place the oven as far away from

radios and TV as possible.

Operation of microwave oven may

cause interference to your radio or TV

reception.

2. Plug your oven into a standard household

outlet. Be sure the voltage and the

frequency is the same as the voltage

and the frequency on the rating label.

(1) Leave a minimum clearance of 12 inches (30cm) above the oven.

(2) Do not remove the legs from the

bottom of the oven.

A minimum clearance of 3.0 inches

(7.5cm) is required between the oven and any adjacent walls. One side must be open.

WARNING: Do not install oven over a range cooktop or other heat-producing appliance. Unless using manufactures built-in kit and instructions. If improbably installed near or over a heat source, the oven could be damaged and the warranty would be void.

For Built-in kits: a.Model number and brand of built-in kit:KITR2501S,HIGH POINTE b.MWO model number and brand which employ built-in Kit:EM925 AQR ,HIGH POINTE

IMPORTANT: This Built-In Kit is ONLY For Use With HIGH POINTE Microwave Ovens

Model EM925 AQR Where This Built-In Kit, Model KITR2501S Is Specified On .

The Back Of The Unit And In The INSTRUCTION MANUAL.

8


OPERATION

Control Panel and Features

(1)

(2)

(3)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(4)

(5)

(10)

(11)

(1) Time Defrost

(2) Time Cook

(3) Power

(4) Number keys

(5) Stop/Cancel: clears all previous settings

pressed before cookingstarts. During

cooking: press once to stop oven; twice

to stop and clear all entries.

(6) Weight Defrost

(7) Clock

(8) Kitchen Timer

(9) Auto Menu

(10) Start/ +30SEC.

(11) Memory

9

19

20


OPERATION

1. Power Level

11 power levels are available.

Level

Power

Display

10

100%

PL10

9

90%

PL9

8

80%

PL8

7

70%

PL7

6

60%

PL6

5

50%

PL5

4

40%

PL4

3

30%

PL3

2

20%

PL2

1

10%

PL1

0

0%

PL0

2. Clock Setting

(1) Press " CLOCK "once, "00:00" will display.

(2) Press the number keys and enter the current time. For example, time is 12:10 now, please press " 1, 2, 1, 0 " in turn.

(3) Press " CLOCK " to finish clock setting. ":" will flash and the clock will be lighted.

(4) If the numbers input are not within the range of 1:00--12:59, the setting will be invalid

until valid numbers are input.

Note: (1) In the process of clock setting, if the " STOP/CANCEL " button is pressed or if

there is no operation within 1 minute, the oven will go back to the former setting automatically.

(2) If the clock need to be reset, please repeat step 1 to step 3.

3. Kitchen Timer

(1) Press " KITCHEN TIMER " once, the screen will display 00:00, the first hour figure flash.

(2) Press the number keys and enter the timer time. (The maximum cooking time is

99 minutes and 99 seconds.)

(3) Press " START/+30SEC. " to confirm setting.

(4) When the timer time arrives, the buzzer will ring 5 times.

If the clock has been set (12-hour system), the screen will display the current time.

Note: 1) The kitchen time is different from 12-hour system. Kitchen Timer is a timer.

2) During kitchen timer, any program cannot be set.

4. Microwave cook

(1) Press " TIME COOK " once, the screen will display "00:00".

(2) Press number keys to input the cooking time; the maximum cooking time is 99

minutes and 99 seconds.

(3) Press " POWER " once, the screen will display "PL10". The default power is 100% power.

Now you can press number keys to adjust the power level.

(4) Press " START/+30SEC.

" to start cooking.

a. Press " TIME COOK " once. "00:00" displays.

b.Press "1", "5", "0", "0" in order.

c.Press " POWER " once, then press "5" to select 50% microwave power.

d.Press " START/+30SEC.

" to start cooking.

Note:1) In the process of setting , if the " STOP/CANCEL " button is pressed or if there is no operation within 1 minute, the oven will go back to the former setting automatically.

2) If "PL 0" selected, the oven will work with fan for no power. You can use this level to

remove the odour of the oven.

3)During microwave cooking, " POWER" can be pressed to change the power you need.

After pressing " POWER ",the current power flash for 3 seconds, now you can press number

button to change the power. The oven will work with the selected power for the rest time.

5. Speedy Cooking

(1) In waiting state, instant cooking at 100% power level can be started by select a cooking

time from 1 to 6 minutes by pressing number pads1 to 6. Press " START/+30SEC.

" to

increase the cooking time; the maximum cooking time is 99 minutes and 99 seconds.

(2) In waiting state, instant cooking at 100% power level with 30 seconds' cooking time can

be started by pressing " START/+30SEC ". Each press on the same button will increase

cooking time by 30 seconds. the maximum cooking time is 99 minutes and 99 seconds.

Note: during microwave cooking and time defrost, time can be added by pressing

" START/+30SEC.

" button.

6. Weight Defrost Function

(1) Press " WEIGHT DEFROST "once, the screen will display "dEF1".

(2) Press numerical buttons to input weight to be defrosted.

Input the weight ranged between 4~100 Oz.


" to start defrosting and the cooking time remained will be

displayed.

11

Example: to cook the food with 50% microwave power for 15 minutes.

a. Press " TIME COOK " once. "00:00" displays.

b.Press "1", "5", "0", "0" in order.

c.Press " POWER " once, then press "5" to select 50% microwave power.

d.Press " START/+30SEC.

" to start cooking.

Note:1) In the process of setting , if the " STOP/CANCEL " button is pressed or if there is no operation within 1 minute, the oven will go back to the former setting automatically.

2) If "PL 0" selected, the oven will work with fan for no power. You can use this level to

remove the odour of the oven.

3)During microwave cooking, " POWER" can be pressed to change the power you need.

After pressing " POWER ",the current power flash for 3 seconds, now you can press number


5. Speedy Cooking

(1) In waiting state, instant cooking at 100% power level can be started by select a cooking

time from 1 to 6 minutes by pressing number pads1 to 6. Press " START/+30SEC.

" to

increase the cooking time; the maximum cooking time is 99 minutes and 99 seconds.

(2) In waiting state, instant cooking at 100% power level with 30 seconds' cooking time can

be started by pressing " START/+30SEC ". Each press on the same button will increase

cooking time by 30 seconds. the maximum cooking time is 99 minutes and 99 seconds.

Note: during microwave cooking and time defrost, time can be added by pressing

" START/+30SEC.

" button.

6. Weight Defrost Function

(1) Press " WEIGHT DEFROST "once, the screen will display "dEF1".

(2) Press numerical buttons to input weight to be defrosted.

Input the weight ranged between 4~100 Oz.


" to start defrosting and the cooking time remained will be

displayed.

7. Time Defrost Function

(1) Press " TIME DEFROST " once, the screen will display "dEF2".

(2) Press number pads to input defrosting time. The effective time range is 0:01~99:99 .

(3) The default microwave power is power level 3. If you want to change the power level,

press " POWER " once, and the screen will display "PL 3", then press the number pad

of the power level you wanted.

11


" to start defrosting. The remained cooking time will be

displayed.

8 .

POPCORN a) Press " POPCORN " repeatedly until the number you wish appears in the display,

"1.75", "3.0" ,"3.5" Oz will display in order.

For example, press " POPCORN " once, "1.75" appears.

b) Press " START/+30 SEC.

" to cook, bu zzer sounds once. When cooking finishes,

buzzer will sound fiven times and then turn back to waiting state.

9 .

POTATO a) Press " POTATO " repeatedly until the number you wish appears in the display,

"1", "2", "3" will display in order.

"1"SET : 1 potato (approximate 8 Oz)

"2"SETS: 2 potatoes (approximate 16 Oz)

"3"SETS: 3 potatoes (approximate 24 Oz )

For example, press " POTATO " once, "1" appears.

b) Press " START/+30 SEC. " to cook, buzzer sounds once. When cooking finishes, buzzer

sounds five times and then turn back to waiting state.

10 .

FROZEN VEGETABLE a) Press " FROZEN VEGETABLE " repeatedly until the number you wish appears in the

display, "4.0", "8.0", "16.0" Oz will display in order.

For example, press " FROZEN VEGETABLE " once, "4.0" appears.



11 .

BEVERGAE a) Press " BEVERAGE " repeatedly until the number you wish appears in the

display, "1", "2", "3" cup will display in order. One cup is about

120ml. For example, press " BEVERAGE " once, "1" appears.


" to cook, buzzer sounds once. When cooking finish , buzzer


es

12

21

22

7. Time Defrost Function

(1) Press " TIME DEFROST " once, the screen will display "dEF2".

(2) Press number pads to input defrosting time. The effective time range is 0:01~99:99 .

(3) The default microwave power is power level 3. If you want to change the power level,

press " POWER " once, and the screen will display "PL 3", then press the number pad

of the power level you wanted.


" to start defrosting. The remained cooking time will be

displayed.

8 .

POPCORN a) Press " POPCORN " repeatedly until the number you wish appears in the display,

"1.75", "3.0" ,"3.5" Oz will display in order.

For example, press " POPCORN " once, "1.75" appears.


" to cook, bu zzer sounds once. When cooking finishes,

buzzer will sound fiven times and then turn back to waiting state.

9 .

POTATO a) Press " POTATO " repeatedly until the number you wish appears in the display,

"1", "2", "3" will display in order.

"1"SET : 1 potato (approximate 8 Oz)

"2"SETS: 2 potatoes (approximate 16 Oz)

"3"SETS: 3 potatoes (approximate 24 Oz )

For example, press " POTATO " once, "1" appears.



10 .

FROZEN VEGETABLE a) Press " FROZEN VEGETABLE " repeatedly until the number you wish appears in the



" once, "4.0" appears.



11 .

BEVERGAE a) Press " BEVERAGE " repeatedly until the number you wish appears in the

display, "1", "2", "3" cup will display in order. One cup is about

120ml. For example, press " BEVERAGE " once, "1" appears.


" to cook, buzzer sounds once. When cooking finish , buzzer


es

12 .

DINNER PLATE

12 a) Press " DINNER PLATE " repeatedly until the number you wish appears in the


For example, press " DINNER PLATE " once, " 0" appears.



13. PIZZA a) Press " PIZZA " repeatedly until the number you wish appears in the display,

"4.0", "8.0", "14.0" Oz will display in order.

For example, press " PIZZA " once, "4.0" appears.



14. MEMORY FUNCTION

(1) Press " 0/MEMORY " to choose memory 1-3 procedure. The screen will display 1, 2, 3.

(2) If the procedure has been set, press " START/ +30 SEC.

" to use it. If not, continue to

set the procedure. Only one or two stages can be set.

(3) After finishing the setting, press " START/ +30 SEC.

" once to save the procedure.

If press " START/ +30 SEC.

" again, it will start cooking.

Example: To set the following procedure as the second memory, that is memory 2.

To cook the food with 80% microwave power for 3 minutes and 20 seconds.

The steps are as follow: a. In waiting states, press "0/MEMORY " twice, stop pressing until the screen displays "2".

b.Press " TIME COOK " once, then press "3", "2", "0" in order.

c. Press " POWER " once, "PL10" displays, then press "8" and "PL8" displays.

d. Press " START/ +30 SEC.

" to save the setting. Buzzer sounds once and the screen will

display "2". If you press " START/+30SEC.

" again, the procedure will be saved as the

memory 2 and operated.

e. If the electricity is not cut off, the procedure will be saved all the time. If it is, the

procedure need to reset.

f. If you want to run the saved procedure, in waiting state, press " 0/MEMORY " twice, screen displays "2", then press " START/+30SEC.

" to run.

13


15. Multi-stage cooking

At most 2 stages can be set for cooking. In multi-stage cooking, if one stage is

defrosting, then defrosting shall be placed at the first stage automatically.

Note : Auto cooking cannot work in the multi-stage cooking.

Example: if you want to cook with 80% microwave power for 5 minutes + 60% microwave

power for 10 minutes. The cooking steps are as following:

(1) Press " TIME COOK " once, then press "5", "0", "0" to set the cooking time;

(2) Press " POWER " once, then press "8" to select 80% microwave power.

(3) Press " TIME COOK " once, then press "1", "0", "0", "0" to set the cooking time;

(4) Press " POWER " once, then press "6" to select 60% microwave power.

(5) Press " START/ +30 SEC.

" to start cooking.

16. LOCK FUNCTION FOR CHILDREN

Lock: In waiting state, press " STOP/CANCEL " for 3 seconds, there will be a long "beep" denoting the entering into the children-lock state; meanwhile, screen will display " ".

Lock quitting: In locked state, press " STOP/CANCEL " for 3 seconds, there will be a long

"beep" denoting that lock is released.

17. INQUIRING FUNCTION

(1) In cooking state, press " CLOCK ", the oven will display clock for three seconds.

(2) In the microwave cooking state, press " POWER " to inquire microwave power level, and

the current microwave power will be displayed. After three seconds, the oven will turn back

to the previous state. In multi-stage state, the inquiring way can be done by the

same way as above.

18. COOKING END REMINDING FUNCTION

When the cooking is over, the buzzer will sound 5 "beep"s to alert user the cooking is finished.

19. OTHER SPECIFICATIONS

(1) In standby state , if the set clock digital tube displays current time, the icon " : " would

flash; otherwise, it shows " 0:00 ".

(2) In setting function state, the screen displays corresponding setting.

(3) In working or pause state, the screen displays surplus cooking time.

14

23

24


Maintenance

Troubleshooting

Check your problem by using the chart below and try the solutions for each problem. If the microwave oven still does not work properly, contact the nearest authorized service center.

TROUBLE

Oven will not start

Arcing or sparking

Unevenly cooked

foods

Overcooked foods

Undercooked foods

Improper defrosting

POSSIBLE CAUSE a. Electrical cord for oven is

not plugged in.

b. Door is open.

c. Wrong operation is set.

a. Materials to be avoided in

microwave oven were

used.

b. The oven is operated when

empty.

c. Spilled food remains in the

cavity.


microwave oven were

used.

b. Food is not defrosted

completely.

c. Cooking time, power level

is not suitble.

d. Food is not turned or stirred.

Cooking time, power level is not suitable.


microwave oven were used.

b. Food is not defrosted

completely.

c. Oven ventilation ports are

restricted.

d. Cooking time, power level is

not suitable.


microwave oven were used.

b. Cooking time, power level is

not suitable.

c. Food is not turned or stirred.

POSSIBLE REMEDY a. Plug into the outlet.

b. Close the door and try

again.

c. Check instructions.

a. Use microwave-safe

cookware only.

b. Do not operate with oven

empty.

c. Clean cavity with wet towel.


cookware only.

b. Completely defrost food.

c. Use correct cooking time,

power level.

d. Turn or stir food.

Use correct cooking time, power level.


cookware only.

b. Completely defrost food.

c. Check to see that oven venti-

lation ports are not restricted.

d. Use correct cooking time,

power level.


cookware only.

b. Use correct cooking time,

power level.

c. Turn or stir food.

15

PN:16170000A27964

For High Pointe Microwave Warranty (1-year) issues, contact the

Oliver Travel Trailer Service Department at 1-888-526-3978


25

26


EN

Gravity-flush toilet

Instruction manual


310 and 320 Series

Gravity-Flush

Toilets

1

27


STOP

IF SERVICE OF THIS TOILET IS EVER REQUIRED,

READ THIS BEFORE SERVICING PRODUCT.

DO NOT REMOVE TOILET FROM VEHICLE.

DO NOT SEPARATE CERAMIC BOWL FROM PLASTIC BASE.

DO NOT REMOVE FOOT PEDAL FROM BASE.

DISASSEMBLY OF COMPONENTS MAY VOID WARRANTY.

SEE MANUAL AND REPLACEMENT KITS FOR SERVICE INFORMATION.

Dometic Corporation

Sanitation Division

Call Customer Service: 1-800-321-9886 (8 a.m. – 5 p.m. ET)

TOILET DOES NOT NEED TO BE REMOVED FROM VEHICLE FOR BASIC REPAIRS (if necessary)

Flush ball seal – Dometic’s revolutionary ball seal allows future replacement of worn or damaged ball seals without requiring tools or toilet disassembly. The ball seal can be changed in just a few minutes without removing the toilet from the floor. Detailed replacement instructions are included with replacement ball seal kits.

Snap-in water valve cartridge –

Allows easy replacement of worn or damaged water valves. In cold climates, be sure to follow winterizing procedure in owner’s manual to help avoid water valve failure.

Refer to replacement instructions in new water valve kit prior to removal or installation of water valve assembly.

Factory-sealed bowl-to-base assembly – Unlike other Dometic footpedal toilets, the bowl and base of

310 and 320 series toilets should not be separated for any reason .

28

2

Each Dometic toilet is 100% factory-tested to assure a watertight seal in the toilet bowl before it is shipped.

After installation at the RV or other vehicle factory, the entire toilet and waste tank system is floodtested for leaks by filling the system with water to the rim of the toilet bowl. This process requires holding the flush ball open with a device which may temporarily distort the ball seal from its original shape and, as a result, cause the seal to leak water into the waste tank during normal use. The ball seal may need to be reconditioned to its original shape.

IF NEW TOILET DOES NOT HOLD WATER IN BOWL…

Please follow the procedures below before attempting to replace the seal.

1. Hold flush ball in full open position by pressing on pedal.

2. Using finger, apply moderate downward pressure around edge of ball seal.

3. Close flush ball.

4. Keeping flush ball closed, pour one quart of hot tap water into toilet bowl.

5. Let water cool completely.

6. Check for leak.

If leak still persists, flush ball seal should be replaced. Follow instructions provided with replacement seal kit.


Dometic Gravity-Flush Toilet

1

A

B

G

2

H

B

C

C

F

D

E

J

I

A

F

D

3 F

E G

E

A B

4

C D

5

A

C

B

3

29

30


Notes on using the manual Dometic Gravity-Flush Toilet

Table of contents

EN

1 Notes on using the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

2 General safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

3 Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

4 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6

5 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

6 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 7

7 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

8 Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

9 Winterization and storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 9

10 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

11 Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

12 Customer service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

1 Notes on using the manual

Caution!

Safety Instruction: Failure to observe this instruction can cause material damage and impair the function of the device.

Note

Supplementary information for operating the device.

fig. 1 A, page 3 : This refers to an element in an illustration. In this example, item A in figure 1 on page 3.

2 General safety instructions

The manufacturer will not be held liable for claims for damage resulting from the following:

• Faulty installation or connection

• Damage to the unit from mechanical influences, misuse or abuse

• Alterations to the unit without express written permission from the manufacturer

• Use for purposes other than those described in this manual

2.1 Warnings

The following statements must be read and understood before installing, servicing and/or operating this product. Modification of this product may result in property damage.

1. Do not use chlorine or caustic chemicals, such as laundry bleach or drain-opening types, in the system. These products damage the seals in toilets and other plumbing valves.

2. Do not permit foreign objects (paper towels, paper cups, diapers, sanitary napkins, etc.) to be flushed through the toilet.

3. Mechanical seal toilets are designed to only discharge directly into a holding tank. Horizontal pipe runs as found in conventional residential or commercial plumbing systems cannot be accommodated.

4. Toilet bowl must be regularly cleaned and winterized according to “Cleaning” and “Winterization and storage” procedures on pages 8-9, or your warranty coverage may be voided.

4


Dometic Gravity-Flush Toilet Intended use / Specifications

3 Intended use

Dometic 310 and 320 series toilets provide lightweight, residential-size toilets for installation directly above a holding tank.

3.1 Benefits

PowerFlush technology.

Improved pressurized rim flow creates high-speed, full bowl rinsing.

Premium user comfort.

Full-size seat, deep bowl and 18-in. (457 mm) seat height result in greater homelike performance.

Easy installation. Two-bolt design fits most existing toilet floor flanges – great for new or replacement installations. Just place on floor flange, tighten bolts, connect water, and it’s ready.

Compact design.

Small footprint with 10-inch or 11-inch (254 or 279 mm) rough-in.

Ergonomically enhanced pedal operation. Lower pedal height for easier use; “one-direction” action to add water and flush.

4 Specifications

4.1 Materials

Materials

Toilet bowl: vitreous ceramic

Model 310 toilet seat: polypropylene

Model 320 toilet seat: wood

Flush ball seal: nitrile butyl rubber

4.2 Minimum installation requirements

Base, foot pedal, water valve: polypropylene

Water valve: polypropylene

Vacuum breaker: ABS/polypropylene

Floor seal: nitrile rubber, foam

Water

Supply

Discharge

Fitting

Flow rate

Static pressure

Floor flange

0.5 in. NPT

3.0-5.0* gpm / 11.4-18.9 lpm recommended

2.0 gpm / 9.5 lpm minimum

30-100 PSI / 206.8-689.5 kPa

3 in./76 mm ID, 1/4-7/16 in. (6-11 mm) thick

* Water supply that exceeds 5.0 gpm / 18.9 lpm may require a flow restrictor at toilet inlet.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

4.3

D

E

F

A

B

C

Ref.

Toilet dimensions (fig. 2 , page 3)

Dimensions

Model 310

20 in. / 508 mm

15 in. / 381 mm

19 in. / 483 mm

18 in. / 457 mm - seat height

14.75 in. / 375 mm

33 in. / 838 mm - seat lid up

Model 320

20 in. / 508 mm

15 in. / 381 mm

22 in. / 559 mm

18 in. / 457 mm - seat height

16 in. / 406 mm

33 in. / 838 mm - seat lid up

5

31

32


Dometic Gravity-Flush Toilet Installation / Operation

6.2 Toilet installation

1. To replace an older toilet , turn off water supply to toilet. Remove and drain water supply line.

Remove toilet hold-down bolts/screws. Remove toilet from floor. Remove and discard old floor flange seal and hold-down bolts. Verify center of floor flange is at least 10 inches / 254 mm (for model 310) or 11 inches / 279 mm (for model 320) from back wall (fig. 3 A, page 3). Make sure top surface of floor flange is clean and free of any debris or sealant.

2. If installing a new floor flange, make certain that toilet mounting holes are located at the correct angle (fig. 3 B, page 3). Floor flange must be secured to floor with a minimum of four screws

(8 is preferred). Insert two supplied T-bolts into slots in floor flange (fig. 4 , page 3).

3. Verify that floor flange seal is installed on base of toilet (fig. 5 A, page 3). Carefully set toilet over floor flange. Align holes in toilet base with T-bolts as toilet is lowered onto floor flange.

Toilet must be aligned so that outlet of base fits inside of floor flange outlet hole.

Note

Entire toilet base does not rest completely on floor yet. Floor seal must be compressed in following steps.

4. Install floor mounting nuts and washers onto T-bolts. Carefully torque nuts to 30-40 inchpounds. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN. Alternate between sides when tightening to prevent distortion of base. When tight, base should be securely attached and flat against floor.

Attach bolt covers onto nuts. (Fig. 5 B, page 3)

5. If toilet is being installed in a shower stall, apply a bead of caulk around base of toilet to prevent water seepage under base.

6. Connect water supply line and torque connection to 30-40 inch-pounds.

DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN. (Fig. 5 C, page 3)

7. Turn on water supply line. Flush toilet several times and check for leaks.

7 Operation

7.1 Add water to bowl

To add water to the toilet, press the flush pedal part way down. Water flows into the bowl while flush ball remains closed. If the flush ball moves, let up on the pedal slightly. Adding water to an empty bowl helps prevent holding tank odors from entering the living space. Adding water is recommended prior to flushing solids and toilet paper.

Flush directions are located under toilet seat lid.

7.2 Flush toilet

To flush, press pedal down until it contacts the floor. Release pedal after complete flush.

• When flushing liquids, press the pedal for 1-2 seconds.

• When flushing solids, press pedal until contents are rinsed from bowl. Flushing longer than necessary will cause holding tank to fill too quickly.

A small amount of water will collect in the bowl after a flush to create an airtight seal.

Note

To prevent holding tank odors from entering the living space, make sure a small amount of water remains in the toilet bowl.

7


Cleaning / Winterization and storage Dometic Gravity-Flush Toilet

8 Cleaning

8.1 Routine toilet cleaning

For routine cleaning, use SeaLand ® Toilet Bowl Cleaner. If you cannot find it in your area, contact

Dometic for your nearest dealer. If the cleaner is not available, use most any non-abrasive bathroom and toilet bowl cleaner. Please follow label instructions.

8.2 Flush ball/seal cleaning

After a period of time, mineral deposits from hard water may build up on the flush ball or seal, resulting in a slow water leak. To prevent this, periodically clean the flush ball and seal.

1. Remove minor debris from the flush ball and seal by slowly pressing and releasing the flush pedal several times. This will loosen and rinse debris from the surfaces.

Repeat several times for stubborn buildup.

2. If step 1 does not fully clean the ball and seal, clean with a soft bristle brush and SeaLand toilet bowl cleaner. Fully clean the top of the flush ball and under the seal where it contacts the flush ball. After cleaning underside of seal, apply light downward pressure to top of seal while brushing around full perimeter of seal.

3. If this does not correct a leaking seal, it may require replacement.

9 Winterization and storage

When a Dometic toilet is stored for long periods of time or may be exposed to temperatures below freezing, the toilet must be winterized or stored according to one of the following procedures.

Caution

This toilet is not intended for use when exposed to temperatures below freezing.

Caution

Never use automotive-type antifreeze (ethylene glycol) in freshwater systems.

Note

Use nontoxic antifreeze (propylene glycol) designated for potable water systems.

(See vehicle owner’s manual.)

Storage options

Non-toxic Antifreeze Winterization (recommended method)

1. Pour antifreeze in potable water tank according to instructions from antifreeze manufacturer.

2. Flush toilet several times until antifreeze has flowed completely through toilet. For toilets with hand sprayer, the hand sprayer must be turned on to assure antifreeze is cycled through the sprayer.

Drain Water from Toilet

1. Turn off water supply to toilet.

2. Remove water supply line from water valve.

3. Place a small container under water valve inlet to catch draining water.

(continued on next page)

8

33

34


Dometic Gravity-Flush Toilet Winterization and storage

4. Press flush pedal and allow water to completely drain from water valve and vacuum breaker.

5. Leave water line disconnected until threat of freezing temperature is past.

Note

Never leave vehicle or premises unoccupied for extended periods of time with municipal water supply or onboard water pump turned on when there is a possibility of freezing temperature.

IMPORTANT:

Toilet warranty does not cover freeze-damaged water valve

The Dometic 310 and 320 series toilet warranty expressly excludes coverage for any damages to the toilet or vehicle that may occur as a result of improper winterization of the toilet. An indicator of improper winterization is freeze damage to the water valve which results in leaks.

Dometic 310 and 320 series toilet water valves exceed maximum water pressure as defined by

North American plumbing code agencies. However, if trapped water freezes in piping that supplies water to the toilet, it expands and creates extremely high pressure that can damage the valve (see photo).

To avoid this, winterize the toilet as described in this manual. If freeze-damage occurs as a result of improper winterization, replace the water valve with a 300/310/320 toilet water valve kit, part number

385311641. IF WATER VALVE IS RETURNED FOR

WARRANTY CLAIM, DOMETIC RESERVES THE

RIGHT TO DENY CLAIM IF PROBLEM IS CAUSED

BY FREEZE DAMAGE.

6

A

B

Fig. 6 A – Freeze Damage Indicator Window: white stress marks indicate freeze damage

B – Water valve damage due to severe exposure to below-freezing temperature

9

Troubleshooting



10 Troubleshooting

Problem

1. Water will not stay in bowl.

Possible Cause a. Flush ball seal is not properly positioned.

b. Flush ball or seal is dirty.

c. Worn or damaged flush ball seal.

Service Instruction a. Press pedal to hold flush ball open, then lightly press down around edge of ball seal with finger to conform to flush ball.

b. Clean flush ball and seal.

c. Replace seal.

2. Odor from toilet when flush ball is open.

3. Odor from toilet when flush ball is closed.

a. Plugged holding tank vent.

b. Odor from holding tank contents.

a. Clear obstruction from vent.

b. Add deodorant to holding tank.

a. No water in bowl.

b. Damaged flush ball seal.

c. Damaged floor flange seal.

a. Add water to bowl.

b. Replace seal.

c. Replace floor seal.

4. Flush ball will not close completely.

a. Too much friction between flush ball and seal.

a. Clean and lubricate flush ball and seal with silicone spray or furniture polish.

a. Worn or defective water valve.

a. Replace water valve.

5. Water flow into toilet will not stop.

6. Water does not enter toilet bowl properly.

a. Insufficient water flow rate at toilet inlet.

b. Screen at water valve inlet is clogged.

c. Water valve is worn or damaged.

d. Plugged rim wash holes in toilet.

a. Make sure flow rate at toilet inlet is 3.0-5.0 gpm / 11.4-18.9 lpm

(recommended rate).

b. Clean screen.

c. Replace water valve.

d. Clean rim wash holes.

a. Hand sprayer is defective.

a. Replace hand sprayer.

7. Hand sprayer leaks (hand sprayer is not provided with all models).

8. Water is leaking from water valve.

a. Water line connection is loose or not seated properly.

b. Water valve is damaged or defective.

a. Insure that threads are not cross-threaded and tighten connection.

b. Replace water valve.

9. Water is leaking from toilet base.

a. Toilet is not secure to floor.

b. Worn or defective floor flange seal.

10. Water is leaking from rear of toilet.

a. Loose vacuum breaker.

b. Damaged or defective vacuum breaker.

c. Cracked or defective toilet bowl.

a. Tighten toilet mounting bolts.

b. Replace floor flange seal.

a. Make sure vacuum breaker stem is pushed fully into sealing grommet in back of bowl. b. Replace vacuum breaker.

c. Replace toilet.

10

35

36


Dometic Gravity-Flush Toilet Warranty / Customer service

11 Warranty

Manufacturer’s Two-Year and Ten-Year Limited Warranty

Dometic Corporation warrants, to the original purchaser only, that this Dometic ® gravity discharge toilet, if used for personal, family or household-like purposes, is free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of two (2) years from the date of purchase.

Dometic also warrants, to the original purchaser only, that the ceramic portion of the toilet bowl will not scratch or craze for a period of ten (10) years if used for personal, family or household-like purposes, and is regularly cleaned as described in the product owner’s manual.

If this Dometic product is placed in commercial or business use, it will be warranted, to the original purchaser only, to be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of purchase.

Dometic reserves the right to replace or repair any part of this product that proves, upon inspection by Dometic, to be defective in material or workmanship. All labor and transportation costs or charges incidental to warranty service are to be borne by the purchaser-user.

EXCLUSIONS

IN NO EVENT SHALL DOMETIC BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, FOR DAMAGES

RESULTING FROM IMPROPER INSTALLATION, OR FOR DAMAGES CAUSED BY NEGLECT, ABUSE, ALTERATION, OR

USE OF UNAUTHORIZED COMPONENTS. THIS INCLUDES FAILURES WHICH MAY RESULT FROM NOT FOLLOW-

ING THE WINTERIZATION OR CLEANING PROCEDURES AS DESCRIBED IN THIS OWNER’S MANUAL. ALL IMPLIED

WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR

PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO A PERIOD OF ONE (1) YEAR FROM DATE OF PURCHASE.

IMPLIED WARRANTIES

No person is authorized to change, add to, or create any warranty or obligation other than that set forth herein.Implied warranties, including those of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited to one (1) year from the date of purchase for products used for personal, family or household-like purposes, and ninety (90) days from the date of purchase for products placed in commercial or business use.

OTHER RIGHTS

Some states do not allow limitations on the duration of an implied warranty, and some states do not allow exclusions or limitations regarding incidental or consequential damages; so, the above limitations may not apply to you.

This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may have other rights which vary from state to state.

To obtain warranty service, first contact the local dealer from whom the product was purchased or go to http://www.dometic.com/enus/Americas/USA/Customer-Support/ for a dealer near you.

12 Customer service

12.1 Toilet model identification

The toilet model identification label is located on the toilet base under the water valve. Please have this information ready if contacting Dometic for customer service.

12.2 Contact information

There is a strong, worldwide network to assist in servicing and maintaining your toilet system. For the Authorized Service Center near you, please call from 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. (ET)

Monday through Friday.

You may also contact or have your local dealer contact the Parts

Distributor nearest you for quick response to your replacement parts needs. They carry a complete inventory for the Dometic product line.

Telephone: 1 800-321-9886 U.S.A. and Canada

330-496-3211 International

Fax: 330-496-3097

330-496-3220

U.S.A. and Canada

International

Web site: http://www.Dometic.com

11



Dometic Group is a customer-driven, world-leading provider of leisure products for the RV, automotive, truck and marine markets. We supply the industry and aftermarket with a complete range of air conditioners, refrigerators, awnings, cookers, sanitation systems, lighting, mobile power equipment, comfort and safety solutions, windows, doors and other equipment that make life more comfortable away from home.

Dometic Group supplies a wide range of workshop equipment for service and maintenance of built-in air conditioners. Dometic Group also provides specially designed refrigerators for hotel rooms, offices, wine storage and transport and storage of medical products.

Our products are sold in almost 100 countries and are produced mainly in wholly-owned production facilities around the world.

® Registered; ™ Trademark of Dometic Corporation

© Dometic Corporation

600346504-book 05/11

12

DOMETIC CORPORATION, SANITATION DIVISION

13128 SR 226 | PO BOX 38

BIG PRAIRIE, OHIO 44611 USA www.Dometic.com

37

38


DOMETIC STOVE

HOT PRODUCTS

COOKTOP

D21

EN

FR

D21 Drop-in Cooktop

Installation and Operating Manual . . . . . . . . . .2

Plaque de cuisson encastrable D21

Manuel d’installation et d’utilisation . . . . . . . .14

WARNING: If the information in this manual is not followed exactly, a fire or explosion may result, causing property damage, personal injury, or death.

– Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance.

– WHAT TO DO IF YOU SMELL GAS

• Do not try to light any appliance.

• Do not touch any electrical switch.

• Do not use any phone in your recreational vehicle.

• Clear the recreational vehicle of all occupants.

• Turn off the gas supply tank valve(s) or main gas supply.

• Immediately call your gas supplier for instructions.

• If you cannot reach your gas supplier, call the fire department.

– Have the gas system checked and leakage source corrected by a qualified installer, service agency, manufacturer or dealer, or the gas supplier.

Recreational Vehicle

Gas Cooking Appliance

39

DOMETIC STOVE

D21 Drop-in Cooktop

NORTH AMERICAN ADDRESS INFORMATION

USA & CANADA

Service Office

Dometic Corporation

1120 North Main Street

Elkhart, IN 46514

Service Center & Dealer Locations

Visit: www .dometic .com

REVISION E | Form No . 50269 07/19 | ©2019 Dometic Corporation

I

Read these instructions carefully. These instructions must stay with this product.

CONTENTS

1 Explanation of symbols and safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

3 Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

4 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

5 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

6 Maintenance, cleaning, and storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

7 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

8 Replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

Limited two-year warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

40

EN

2

DOMETIC STOVE

3

D21 Drop-in Cooktop

1 EXPLANATION OF SYMBOLS AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

This manual has safety information and instructions to help you eliminate or reduce the risk of accidents and injuries .

1.1 Recognize safety information

This is the safety alert symbol . It is used to alert you to potential physical injury hazards . Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death .

1.2 Understand signal words

A signal word will identify safety messages and property damage messages, and will indicate the degree or level of hazard seriousness .

indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury .

indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury .

is used to address practices not related to physical injury .

I indicates additional information that is not related to physical injury .

1.3 Supplemental directives

Read and follow all safety information and instructions to avoid possible injury or death .

Read and understand these instructions before installation, use, and maintenance of this product .

Incorrect installation, operation, and maintenance of this product can lead to serious injury .

The installation must comply with all applicable local or national codes, including the latest edition of the following standards:

U.S.A.

• ANSI/NFPA70, National Electrical Code (NEC)

• ANSI/NFPA 1192, Recreational Vehicles Code

• ANSI Z21 .57, Recreational Vehicle Code

1.4 General safety messages

Canada

• CSA C22 .1, Parts l & ll, Canadian Electrical Code

• CSA Z240 RV Series, Recreational Vehicles

Failure to obey the following warnings could result in death or serious injury:

• This product must be installed by a qualified service technician .

• Dometic gas-operated cooking units are for use with LP gas only and for installation in recreational vehicles only (e .g . travel trailers, motor homes, tent campers, etc .) . Any other uses can lead to property damage, serious injury, or death .

• Improper installation, adjustment, service, or maintenance can cause injury, property damage, or death . Refer to this manual . For assistance or additional information, consult a qualified installer, service agency, manufacturer, or the gas supplier .

• Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance .

• Shut off all gas appliances and pilot lights when refueling gasoline or LP tanks, or when the vehicle is in motion . Failure to do so can result in property damage, serious injury or death .

• Gas flames consume oxygen, which must be replaced to assure proper combustion . A window or air vent should be open slightly while using any cooking appliance . Failure to provide fresh air during combustion can lead to carbon monoxide poisoning and could result in serious injury or death .

• When the Cooktop is in use, the Cover must be fully open and in the upright position .

EN

41

42

DOMETIC STOVE

D21 Drop-in Cooktop

Do not use the Cover as a griddle or cooking surface . Doing so could result in property damage or injury .

The Cover must be closed when the vehicle is in motion .

I

Have the installer or dealer show you where the main gas shut off valve is located so that you will know how and where to turn off the gas supply when necessary .

2 GENERAL INFORMATION

I

The images used in this document are for reference purposes only . Components and component locations may vary according to specific product models . Measurements may vary ±0 .38 in . (10 mm) .

Included Parts

#6 x 3/4" Screws

(2) Nylon Washers

Corner Pieces

Quantity

2

2

4

Recommended Tools

Drill

#2 Drive Screwdriver

3/32" Drill Bit

Crescent Wrenches (2)

Optional Parts*

Metal Cover

Glass Cover

Reference Number

50236

50255

* The glass cover is preinstalled on the SECG model and the metal cover is preinstalled on the BPWM models . Available as an accessory for all other models .

3 INTENDED USE

This Drop-in Cooktop (hereinafter referred to as “Cooktop”) is designed and intended for use inside, or for temporary use outside, the recreational vehicle (hereinafter referred to as “RV”) for which it is supplied . Use these instructions to ensure correct installation, function, and operation of the Cooktop . While this Cooktop is approved for outside installation, portable or outdoor installations into an enclosure not made from metal or wood must be approved by Dometic prior to use . Do not store the Cooktop outdoors . This Cooktop is not designed for installation adjacent to another Cooktop .

The manufacturer accepts no liability for damage in the following cases:

• Faulty assembly or connection .

• Damage to the product resulting from mechanical influences and excess voltage .

• Alterations to the product without express permission from the manufacturer .

• Use for purposes other than those described in the operating manual .

Dometic Corporation reserves the right to modify appearances and specifications without notice .

EN 4

5

DOMETIC STOVE

D21 Drop-in Cooktop

4 INSTALLATION

FIRE, EXPLOSION, OR BURN HAZARD . Do not use matches, candles, or other sources of ignition to test fittings and gas lines for leaks . Doing so could result in an explosion, causing serious injury or death .

I

The gas line material between the Cooktop and the bottom shield must be rated for a minimum of

300°F (149°C) exposure .

4.1 Constructing the cabinet

For proper operation, the cabinet must:

• Be properly constructed of wood or metal, to the dimensions shown .

• Be squared to the counter top and cabinet face .

• Have the cabinet opening be level from side to side and from front to rear .

• Be positioned so that no combustible material can be placed next to the Cooktop sides . If there is a gap between the Cooktop and an adjacent cabinet, you must close the gap prior to installing the Cooktop .

1

J

I

C

F

B

G

A

E

H

D

A ‡

13 .75"

(350 mm)

B ‡

17 .875"

(455 mm)

C

1 .875"

(48 mm)

D

2 .25"

(58 mm)

E

0 .75"

(20 mm)

F §

2 .625"/1 .125"

(67 mm/29 mm)

G

4 .125"

(105 mm)

H †

19 .50"

(20 mm)

I *

*

J

¥

¥

‡ For proper fit, these dimensions must be within +/- 1/8" (3 .2 mm) .

§ 2 .625" (67 mm) for all models without preinstalled cover . 1 .2" (31 mm) for models with preinstalled cover

(SECG and BPWM models) .

† 19 .50" (H) [20 mm] is the minimum vertical distance between combustible material and the Cooktop . Installer must follow requirements of table 2-6 .7 .2 of ANSI 1192 .

* > nominal width of the Cooktop

¥ 13 .00" (J) [331 mm] is the maximum depth of cabinets installed above cooking tops per ANSI Z21 .57, Clause

1 .25 .1 .L .

EN

43

DOMETIC STOVE

D21 Drop-in Cooktop

4.2 Placing your cooktop

Inside installation

Screw

2

Nylon

Washer

Cooktop

Outside installation

3

RV Exterior

Corner

Piece Counter

Cutout

Drilled Hole

➤ Locate and cut the opening in the countertop according to the dimensions in "4 .1

Constructing the cabinet" on page 5 .

➤ Drill holes in the countertop to match the location of the screw holes on the Cooktop .

➤ Place one corner piece (supplied) at each corner of the opening, so that the lip of the corner piece is flat against the countertop .

➤ Insert the screws and nylon washers (supplied) to install the Cooktop .

➤ Place the Cooktop into the opening so that is rests on top of the corner pieces . Hand-tighten the screws to the countertop .

➤ Verify the Cooktop is level from side to side and front to rear .

➤ Tighten the screws to secure the Cooktop to the countertop using a #2 screwdriver . Do not overtighten .

Cooktop

I

Do not store the Cooktop outside .

44

EN 6

7

DOMETIC STOVE

4.3 Connecting the propane gas

4

(Rear of unit)

D21 Drop-in Cooktop

4.4 Connecting the 12 V ignition

5

Switch

+ –

L N

Gas

Hose

Igniter

Electrode

DO NOT CONNECT T

+

Y.

T

TS

AC.

Igniter

Electrode

Gas

Connection (Bottom)

➤ Run a propane-certified hose from the propane supply tank to the gas connection on the

Cooktop .

➤ Tighten according to appropriate RV and gas codes . Use two wrenches when tightening .

Hold regulator in place while tightening hose .

➤ Turn ON the gas supply by turning the gas shutoff valve on the tank counterclockwise .

➤ Check for leaks using a non-corrosive leak detection fluid . Do not use a soap and water solution . Leak test pressures in excess of

13 .9" W .C . (1/2 psi) of air pressure will invalidate the warranty .

➤ After confirming there are no leaks, turn OFF the gas supply by turning the gas shut-off valve on the tank clockwise .

Ground

➤ Connect the positive and negative wires to the terminal block on the back of the Cooktop .

I

Connecting the wires to the wrong terminal will cause the igniter not to operate and can damage the ignition coil .

I

For 12 V circuits only . Connecting to a higher voltage circuit can cause ignition coil damage

EN

45

46

7

DOMETIC STOVE

D21 Drop-in Cooktop

4.3 Connecting the propane gas

4

(Rear of unit)

4.4 Connecting the 12 V ignition

5

Switch

+ –

L N

Gas

Hose

Igniter

Electrode

DO NOT CONNECT T

+

TS Y.

T

AC.

Igniter

Electrode

Gas

Connection (Bottom)

➤ Run a propane-certified hose from the propane supply tank to the gas connection on the

Cooktop .

➤ Tighten according to appropriate RV and gas codes . Use two wrenches when tightening .

Hold regulator in place while tightening hose .

➤ Turn ON the gas supply by turning the gas shutoff valve on the tank counterclockwise .

➤ Check for leaks using a non-corrosive leak detection fluid . Do not use a soap and water solution . Leak test pressures in excess of

13 .9" W .C . (1/2 psi) of air pressure will invalidate the warranty .

➤ After confirming there are no leaks, turn OFF the gas supply by turning the gas shut-off valve on the tank clockwise .

Ground

➤ Connect the positive and negative wires to the terminal block on the back of the Cooktop .

I

Connecting the wires to the wrong terminal will cause the igniter not to operate and can damage the ignition coil .

I

For 12 V circuits only . Connecting to a higher voltage circuit can cause ignition coil damage

EN

DOMETIC STOVE

D21 Drop-in Cooktop

5 OPERATION

5.1 Operating/safety guidelines

BURN HAZARD, FIRE, EXPLOSION, AND/OR CARBON MONOXIDE HAZARD Failure to obey the following warnings could result in damage, a burn hazard, possible explosion, carbon monoxide buildup, serious injury, or death:

• Avoid negative draft or positive draft situations or the operation of this Cooktop during excessively windy conditions . Negative draft caused by air moving across the Cooktop may blow out the burner flame or move the flame into the Cooktop, resulting in damage, a burn hazard, possible explosion, carbon monoxide buildup, injury, or death . Do not operate the Cooktop in excessively windy conditions as this may cause a negative or positive draft . Doing so may blow out the top burner flame during use, and can result in an explosion, fire hazard, injury, or death .

• The Cooktop must be completely separated and/or sealed from other air moving or air-consuming devices such as, but not limited to, furnaces, microwave ovens, clothes dryers, cooling fans, and doors or drawers in common cabinets . Failure to do so can affect the appliance(s) combustion air supply by creating either a negative or positive draft, which can result in serious injury or death .

• Do not use the Cooktop for space heating . Doing so may cause overheating of the Cooktop and/or could cause carbon monoxide poisoning, resulting in serious injury or death .

• While operating the Cooktop, frequently check the temperature of contents within cabinet areas above the Cooktop . Do not store flammable or combustible material in cabinets above, or above and adjacent to, the Cooktop . Failure to follow this instruction could result in a fire, serious injury, or death .

• Do not heat unopened containers . They could explode . The hot contents may cause burns and container particles may cause injury .

• Do not store flammable materials on, in, or near Cooktop . Any fumes can create an explosion and/or fire hazard .

• Do not operate Cooktop if it is damaged or not working properly .

• Verify sufficient gas supply before attempting to light any burner . Air in the gas supply line will significantly delay burner ignition, and a burner may light unexpectedly as the air in the line clears out and is replaced by LP gas; this unexpected ignition may burn you . Air may be introduced into the supply line when the vehicle gas bottle is replaced, during servicing of other gas appliances, etc .

• If any burner should extinguish (after initially lighting or due to accidental blowout), turn all burner knobs clockwise to OFF and WAIT 5 MINUTES before attempting to re-light the burner .

• Do not touch burners, burner grates, or areas near burners during and after use . Do not let clothing or other flammable materials contact burners or areas near burners until these areas have had sufficient time to cool .

• Use large enough pans to cover the burner area and contain the cooked food . This will reduce or eliminate heavy splattering or spills that can ignite and burn you .

• Be sure that glass cooking utensils are safe for use on the Cooktop . Only certain kinds of glass utensils are suitable for surface or burner use without breaking due to sudden changes in temperature .

• Never leave burners unattended when in use, as pan contents may boil over, resulting in smoke or a grease spill that may ignite .

• Turn pan handles inward, but not over other top burners . This reduces the chance of burns due to bumping a pan .

• Because grease is flammable, never allow grease to collect around top burners or on the Cooktop surface . Wipe up any grease spills immediately .

• Never use water on grease fires, and never pick up a flaming pan . Smother a flaming pan with a tightfitting lid or cookie sheet . Flaming grease outside of the pan can be extinguished with baking soda or a multipurpose dry chemical or foam-type fire extinguisher .

• Use care when lighting a burner by hand . If the burner lights unexpectedly, or your hand is close to the burner, you may be burned .

• Burner flame should not extend beyond the edge of the cooking utensil . The flame could burn you and cause poor cooking results .

• Control knobs must be turned OFF when not cooking . Someone could be burned or a fire may start if a

EN

8

47

DOMETIC STOVE

D21 Drop-in Cooktop burner is accidentally left ON .

5.2 Operating your cover

This section describes how to open and close the glass and metal covers on the Cooktop . The glass cover is preinstalled on the SECG model and the metal cover is preinstalled on the BPWM models . Covers are available as accessories for all other models .

Opening the glass cover Opening the metal cover

6 7

48

9

➤ Lift the Cover from the corner slot . Raise it completely, then gently lower the Cover down to rest on the back of the Cooktop .

Closing the glass cover

8

➤ Lift the Cover from the center slot . Raise it completely, then gently lower the Cover down to lock into the back of the Cooktop .

➤ Unclip the wind guards, open them, and lower them into position between the Cooktop and the grate .

Closing the metal cover

9

Metal

Pin

Hinge

➤ Lift the Cover up, then gently lower it down onto the Cooktop .

➤ Fold the wind guards, clip them together, and lift them up .

➤ Lift up the Cover, then gently lower it down onto the Cooktop .

EN

DOMETIC STOVE

D21 Drop-in Cooktop

5.3 Preparing your cooktop for use

Glass can be easily scratched . Use care when setting items on the top of the cover . Avoid sliding items across the cover . Do not drop objects onto the cover, as this may cause breakage .

10 11

Top Cover

Gas Shut-Off

Valve

Cooktop

(Rear of unit)

Gas Connection

➤ Turn the gas ON at the gas shut-off valve

(counterclockwise) .

I

If your Cooktop is equipped with a top cover, lift the top cover when operating the Cooktop .

See "5 .2 Operating your cover" on page 9 .

5.4 Lighting the burner

All burner controls operate counterclockwise and must be pressed inward when turning to light . Do not attempt to light more than one burner at a time .

Burner Match

12 13

Burner

Knob

➤ To light the Cooktop with a match, turn the knob counterclockwise and IMMEDIATELY hold a lit match near the burner .

Knob

Spark Igniter

➤ To light the Cooktop using a spark igniter, turn the knob counterclockwise and press the spark igniter button until it clicks and the burner ignites .

EN

10

49

DOMETIC STOVE

14 Burner

D21 Drop-in Cooktop

Electronic Ignition

Knob

➤ To light the Cooktop using the electronic ignition, turn the knob counterclockwise, then press and hold the electronic ignition button until the burner lights .

5.5 Extinguishing the burner

15

5.6 Changing the battery

(battery ignition)

16

Knob

➤ To extinguish the burner, turn the knob to the

“OFF” position to stop the flow of gas to the burner .

Ignition Switch Cover

Battery

➤ Unscrew the ignition switch cover .

➤ Remove and replace the AAA battery .

EN

50

11

DOMETIC STOVE

D21 Drop-in Cooktop

6 MAINTENANCE, CLEANING, AND STORAGE

BURN HAZARD, FIRE, EXPLOSION, AND/OR CARBON MONOXIDE HAZARD . Keep

Cooktop area clear of combustible cleaning materials, gasoline, and other flammable vapors and liquids .

Failure to obey this warning could result in damage, a burn hazard, possible explosion, carbon monoxide buildup, serious injury, or death .

Failure to obey the following cautions could result in damage or injury:

• All Cooktop surfaces, burner grates, and burners must be cool before cleaning or disassembling the

Cooktop .

• Clean all surfaces quickly after spills .

• Use warm soapy water only to clean the burner grates, burner box, painted surfaces, porcelain surfaces, stainless steel surfaces, and plastic items on your Cooktop . Do not use gritty or acid-type cleaners . Do not use steel wool or abrasive cleaners, as they will damage your Cooktop . Use only non-abrasive plastic scrubbing pads .

• Do not allow foods containing acids (such as lemon juice, tomato juice, or vinegar) to remain on porcelain or painted surfaces . Acids may remove the glossy finish . Pitting and discoloration will result if spills are allowed to remain for any length of time on stainless steel . Do not allow spills to remain on burner caps . Caps could be permanently stained if spills are not cleaned up promptly .

I

Proper installation and care will help keep your Cooktop looking and operating like new . Most cleaning can be performed using normal household items .

6.1 Cleaning your cooktop 6.2 Storing your cooktop

17 18

Vegetable Oil

Grill

Gas Hose

Burner Box

➤ Remove the grill from the Cooktop .

➤ Dry all surfaces and the burner box then spray surfaces with vegetable oil or a similar product to help prevent the surface from rusting during storage .

I

Clean oil off of the surface of the Cooktop before reinstalling and operating the Cooktop .

I

Refer to your installation manual for additional detail and safety messaging .

➤ Disconnect the gas hose from the Cooktop .

Remove the screws securing the Cooktop and lift the Cooktop out of the cutout .

➤ Pack the Cooktop in its original packaging, or other suitable materials, to protect it from damage .

7 DISPOSAL

Place packaging material only in the appropriate recycling waste bins, whenever possible . Do not dispose of the range or slide-in without consulting a local recycling center or specialist dealer for details about how to dispose of the range or slide-in in accordance with the applicable national and local regulations .

EN 12

51

DOMETIC STOVE

D21 Drop-in Cooktop

8 REPLACEMENT PARTS

BURN HAZARD, FIRE, EXPLOSION, AND/OR CARBON MONOXIDE HAZARD . Use only

Dometic replacement parts and components, which are specifically approved for use with the Drop-In

Cooktop . Failure to obey this warning could result in damage, a burn hazard, possible explosion, carbon monoxide buildup, serious injury, or death .

For the most current parts information, visit www .eDometic .com .

LIMITED TWO-YEAR WARRANTY

LIMITED TWO-YEAR WARRANTY AVAILABLE AT WWW .DOMETIC .COM/WARRANTY .

IF YOU HAVE QUESTIONS, OR TO OBTAIN A COPY OF THE LIMITED WARRANTY FREE OF CHARGE,

CONTACT:

DOMETIC CORPORATION

CUSTOMER SUPPORT CENTER

1120 NORTH MAIN STREET

ELKHART, INDIANA, USA 46514

1-800-544-4881 OPT 1

EN

52

13


CAPACITIVE TOUCH THERMOSTAT

MODEL

COOL/FURNACE

3316410.XXX COOL/FURNACE/HEAT STRIP

COOL/FURNACE/HEAT PUMP

Read these instructions carefully. These instructions MUST stay with this product.

REVISION A

Form No. 3316464.000 12/15

(French 3316465.000_A)

©2015 Dometic Corporation

LaGrange, IN 46761

USA

SERVICE OFFICE

Dometic Corporation

2320 Industrial Parkway

Elkhart, IN 46516

CANADA

Dometic Corporation

46 Zatonski, Unit 3

Brantford, ON N3T 5L8

CANADA

Service Center &

Dealer Locations

Please Visit: www.eDometic.com

53

54


INTRODUCTION

This Capacitive Touch thermostat (hereinafter referred to as “CT thermostat” or “product”) is designed and intended for use in a Recreational Vehicle (hereinafter referred to as RV). Use these instructions to ensure correct installation, function, and operation of product.

Dometic Corporation reserves the right to modify appearances and specifications without notice.


INTRODUCTION ...........................................................................................................................................2

DOCUMENT SYMBOLS ...............................................................................................................................2

FAMILIARIZATION ........................................................................................................................................3

A. Features ....................................................................................................................................3

B. System Initialization ...................................................................................................................3

C. Factory Preset Settings .............................................................................................................3

D. Quick Reference ........................................................................................................................3

PROGRAMMING AND OPERATION ............................................................................................................4

A. On / Off ......................................................................................................................................4

B. Temperature Format ºF / ºC .......................................................................................................4

C. Inside Temperature ....................................................................................................................5

D. Mode Selection ..........................................................................................................................5

E. Fan Speed .................................................................................................................................6

F. Temperature Set-Point ...............................................................................................................6

MODE DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................................................7

A. “Off” - Off Mode..........................................................................................................................7

B. “Cool” - Cool Mode ....................................................................................................................7

C. “Furnace” - Furnace Mode .........................................................................................................7

D. “Heat Pump” - Heat Pump Mode (Select Models) .....................................................................7

E. “Heat Strip” - Heat Strip Mode (Select Models) .........................................................................8

F. “Fan” - Fan Mode .......................................................................................................................8

SPECIAL FEATURES....................................................................................................................................8

A. Capacitive Touch Interface ........................................................................................................8

B. Auto Fan ....................................................................................................................................8

C. Compressor Time Delay ............................................................................................................9

D. Defrost Cycle .............................................................................................................................9

E. Low Ambient Heat Pump Lock Out ............................................................................................9

F. Power Interruption .....................................................................................................................9

G. LCD Error Code .........................................................................................................................9

GENERAL INFORMATION ..........................................................................................................................10

A. Frost Formation On Cooling Coil .............................................................................................10

B. Heat Gain ................................................................................................................................10

C. Condensation ..........................................................................................................................10

MAINTENANCE .......................................................................................................................................... 11

A. Air Filter ................................................................................................................................... 11

B. CT Thermostat ......................................................................................................................... 11

SERVICE - UNIT DOES NOT OPERATE .................................................................................................... 11

DOCUMENT SYMBOLS

Indicates additional information that is NOT related to physical injury.

Indicates step-by-step instructions.

2


FAMILIARIZATION

To familiarize yourself with the operation of your new CT thermostat, review the following diagrams and accompanying text explaining functional characteristics of this system.

A. Features

● Capacitive Touch Interface

● Blue LED Backlight

● Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)

● Auto Fan

● Indoor Temperature Display

● Air conditioner can provide additional indoor air circulation during furnace operation.

B. System Initialization

A system initialization will need to be performed by installer after system installation.

1. Make sure CT thermostat is Off. See “D. Quick Reference” on page (3).

2. Press the button, and simultaneously press and hold the / Mode button for three seconds. LCD will show “ - ”.

This completes system initialization.

Furnace On / Off temperature differential should be set at this time. See “C. “Furnace” - Furnace Mode” on page (7) for more information.

C. Factory Preset Settings

The CT thermostat is pre-programmed. Review settings below and adjust for personal comfort level.

Factory Preset Settings

Heating 68ºF / 20ºC

Cooling 72ºF / 22ºC

Fan Speed

Mode

Furnace Differential

Auto

Off

2ºF

D. Quick Reference

See (FIG. 1) for control button quick reference.

55

33

56


FAMILIARIZATION

FIG. 1 Press To

Increase

Temperature

Set-Point

Press To

Power On, Off,

And Toggle

Between

Modes of

Operation

Press To

Decrease

Temperature

Set-Point

PROGRAMMING AND OPERATION

A. On / Off

1. To turn On the CT thermostat, press / Mode button. To turn Off the CT thermostat press the

/ Mode button and toggle through modes until Off is shown is lower right hand of LCD. LCD will remain backlit for approximately 15 seconds, then go out.

B. Temperature Format ºF / ºC

1. Simultaneously press the and buttons to toggle between Fahrenheit and Centigrade format. See (FIG. 2).

FIG. 2

4



C. Inside Temperature

1. To display the Inside Temperature, CT thermostat must be in Off Mode. Press either or button to display the Inside Temperature. See (FIG. 3).

FIG. 3

Inside

Temperature

D. Mode Selection

1. Press / Mode button to advance through available modes. Each successive press will advance to next available mode. See (FIG. 4).

Dependent upon systems installed, options will be Off, Fan, Cool, Furnace, Heat Pump, or

Heat Strip. See “Mode Description” on page (7) for more information.

FIG. 4

5

57

58



E. Fan Speed

1. Press / Mode button until Fan icon appears. See (FIG. 5). The LCD will show “Low”, “High”, or “Auto”. Press the or button to select desired fan speed. See “B. Auto Fan” on page

(8) for more information.

FIG. 5

Fan Speed Fan Icon

F. Temperature Set-Point

1. Press / Mode button to change the mode (Cool / Furnace / Heat Pump / Heat Strip) to adjust temperature set-point of selected mode. Temperature set-point is indicated by two digits on

LCD. Press to increase or to decrease temperature. The maximum set-point for the system is 90ºF. The minimum set point is determined by active operating mode. For heating, the minimum is 40ºF and minimum for cooling is 55ºF. See (FIG. 6).

FIG. 6

Temperature

Set-Point

6


MODE DESCRIPTION

A. “Off” - Off Mode

1. When selected, Off will appear in the lower right hand corner of LCD. The LCD will remain backlit for 15 seconds, then turn off.

B. “Cool” - Cool Mode

1. In Cool Mode, system will cycle compressor On and Off based on room air temperature and temperature set-point on CT thermostat. Fan will turn on first, followed by the compressor approximately 2 minutes later. There are 3 fan speeds in Cool Mode.

a. “Low”: Fan operates continuously at low speed. The compressor cycles On and Off.

b. “High”: Fan operates continuously at high speed. The compressor cycles On and Off.

c. “Auto”: Fan speed will vary depending on difference between the temperature set-point and room air temperature. The compressor and the fan will cycle On and Off with thermostat. See “B. Auto Fan” on page (8) for more information.

C. “Furnace” - Furnace Mode

1. There are 3 fan speeds in Furnace Mode.

a. “Low”: Fan operates continuously at low speed. b. “High”: Fan operates continuously at high speed. c. “Auto”: Fan is Off.

If additional indoor air circulation provided by the air conditioner is NOT desired during

Furnace Mode of operation, select “Auto” in the Fan Mode to shut the air conditioner fan off. If “Low” or “High” is selected, the air conditioner fan will continue to operate at selected speed.

2. In Furnace Mode system will cycle RV furnace On and Off based on room air temperature and temperature set-point on CT thermostat. CT thermostat can be configured to operate us ing an On / Off differential of either 1ºF or 2ºF. This feature is programmed during the system initialization. See “B. System Initialization” on page (3).

3. To set temperature differential, system must be Off. Press button and simultaneously press and hold / Mode button for three seconds. Press button to toggle between “d1” and “d2”, “d1” for 1ºF differential and “d2” for 2ºF differential.

D. “Heat Pump” - Heat Pump Mode (Select Models)

1. In Heat Pump Mode, system will cycle compressor On and Off based on room air temperature and temperature set-point on CT thermostat. When system calls for heating there will be a delay of approximately 2 minutes. There are 3 fan speeds in Heat Pump Mode.

a. “Low”: Fan operates continuously at low speed. The compressor cycles On and Off.

b. “High”: Fan operates continuously at high speed. The compressor cycles On and Off.

59

7


MODE DESCRIPTION

c. “Auto”: Fan speed will vary depending on difference between the temperature set-point and room air temperature. The compressor and the fan will cycle On and Off with thermostat. Compressor shuts off first followed by fan in approximately 15 seconds. See “B.

Auto Fan” on page (8) for more information.

2. This mode of operation is a customer option usually selected when temperatures are below

70ºF and customer needs warmth in living space rather than cool down. This reverses refrigerant flow in the air conditioner, causing warm air to be dispensed inside rather than cold, and cold air is dispensed outside rather than warm.

3. This mode of operation can cause a dilemma where the outside coil, which is now dispensing cold air can freeze up due to cold air blowing across the coil mixed with outside temperature. A system freeze up can render heat pump inoperable. There is a defrost feature that will prevent this from happening. See “D. Defrost Cycle” on page (9) for more information.

E. “Heat Strip” - Heat Strip Mode (Select Models)

1. In Heat Strip Mode, system will cycle heat strip On and Off based on room air temperature and temperature set-point on CT thermostat. There are 3 fan speeds in Heat Strip Mode.

a. “Low”: Fan operates continuously at low speed. Heat strip cycles On and Off.

b. “High”: Fan operates continuously at high speed. Heat strip cycles On and Off.

c. “Auto”: Fan operates in low speed and will cycle On and Off with thermostat.

F. “Fan” - Fan Mode

1. There are 3 fan speeds in Fan mode.

a. “Low”: Fan operates continuously at low speed. b. “High”: Fan operates continuously at high speed. c. “Auto”: Fan is Off.

SPECIAL FEATURES

A. Capacitive Touch Interface

The capacitive touch interface provides a clean, modern user interface.

Capacitive touch interface requires skin contact to function, therefore it will NOT work through gloves, bandages, etc...

Moisture, including wet fingers, on the capacitive touch interface can cause sensors to become unresponsive until the water evaporates.

60

B. Auto Fan

When auto fan is selected fan speed will vary depending on room temperature and temperature set-point. In auto fan compressor and fan cycle On and Off with thermostat.

When difference is:

> 5ºF Fan operates on HIGH

< 4ºF Fan operates on LOW

8


SPECIAL FEATURES

C. Compressor Time Delay

A time delay of approximately 2 minutes occurs anytime compressor is required to begin cooling or heat pump cycle.

D. Defrost Cycle

During heat pump operation, if outside coil begins to freeze up, a defrost cycle is initiated that temporarily puts heat pump back into air conditioning mode. This reverses the refrigerant flow and melts ice forming on outside coil. Typically this occurs when outside temperatures are below

42ºF and repeats every 25 minutes of compressor run time. During this cycle the unit will cease to provide hot air flow temporarily. This is normal and is NOT and indication of malfunction.

Defrost cycling SHALL continue until measured temperature of Outside Sensor is < 30ºF or > 42ºF.

E. Low Ambient Heat Pump Lock Out

All heat pumps are constrained to operation at a temperature range determined by outside conditions. Since all heat pumps lose efficiency at low outside ambient temperatures, the heat pump has a lock out feature that prevents heat pump mode of operation when temperatures fall below

30ºF. If system is set in Auto Mode fan will be turned OFF. Fan will remain ON if fan setting is set to Low or High, however compressor will not run and there will be no heat function below 30ºF.

F. Power Interruption

In the event power to air conditioner or control is interrupted, system will restart with previous setpoints once power is restored.

G. LCD Error Code

When system determines one of the faults listed has occurred, an error code will be displayed on LCD.

Error Code:

E1 Loss of communication between CT thermostat and module board. LCD will cycle between E1 and previous mode setting. System will shut down.

E2 Open circuit or out of range Indoor Temperature Sensor. Heating and cooling operation will be locked out. Fan operation can continue to operate.

E3

E4

E5

Shorted Indoor Temperature Sensor. Heating and cooling operation will be locked out.

Fan operation can continue to operate.

Open circuit or out of range Outdoor Temperature Sensor (select models). Heat Pump operation will be locked out. Air Conditioner, Fan, and Furnace operation can continue to operate.

Open Circuit or out of range Freeze Sensor. Air Conditioner mode of operation will be locked out, but displays the last temperature set-point.

9

61

62


GENERAL INFORMATION

A. Frost Formation On Cooling Coil

1. Frost on a small portion of the coil is not unusual. Under certain conditions, ice may form on the evaporator coil. This is indicated by very cold output at very low air speed and the icing can be seen through the air inlet hole with the filter removed. If this should occur, inspect the filter and clean if dirty. Make sure air vents are open and not obstructed. Units have a greater tendency to frost when the outside temperature is relatively low. This may be prevented by adjusting the thermostat set-point to a warmer temperature. Should frosting continue, operate on any FAN ONLY setting until the cooling coil is free of frost; then resume normal operation.

If frost condition persist, contact your local service center for assistance.

B. Heat Gain

The ability of this air conditioner to maintain the desired inside temperature depends on the heat gain of the RV.

Some preventative measures taken by the occupants of the RV can reduce the heat gain and improve the performance of the air conditioner. During extremely high outdoor temperatures, the heat gain of the RV may be reduced by:

1. Parking the RV in a shaded area

2. Using window shades (blinds and/or curtains)

3. Keeping windows and doors shut or minimizing usage

4. Avoiding the use of heat producing appliances

Operation on High Fan/Cooling mode will give optimum or maximum efficiency in high humidity or high outside temperatures.

Starting the air conditioner early in the morning and giving it a “head start” on the expected high outdoor ambient will greatly improve its ability to maintain the desired indoor temperature.

For a more permanent solution to high heat gain, accessories like Dometic outdoor patio and window awnings will reduce heat gain by removing the direct sun. They also add a nice area to enjoy company during the cool of the evening.

C. Condensation

The manufacturer of this unit will not be responsible for damage caused by condensation forming on ceilings, windows, or other surfaces. Air contains water vapor which condenses when temperature of a surface is below Dew point. During normal operation this unit is designed to remove a certain amount of moisture from the air, depending on the size of the space being conditioned. Keeping doors and windows closed when this air conditioner is in operation will greatly reduce the chance of condensation forming on interior surfaces.

10


MAINTENANCE

A. Air Filter

1. Periodically (a minimum of every 2 weeks of operation) remove the return air filter located be hind the return air vent grille and wash it with soap and warm water, let dry and then reinstall.

NEVER run unit without return air filter in place. This will plug the unit evaporator coil with dirt and may substantially degrade the performance of the unit over time.

B. CT Thermostat

1. Clean CT thermostat with a dry soft cloth.

Do NOT spray water directly on CT thermostat. Do NOT use solvents for cleaning.

If a moist soft cloth is needed to clean the CT thermostat surface, the sensors may become unresponsive. If this happens, it will be necessary to allow the water enough time to evaporate for sensors to regain responsiveness.

SERVICE - UNIT DOES NOT OPERATE

If your unit fails to operate or operates improperly, check the following before calling your service center.

● If RV connected to motor generator, check to be sure motor generator is running and producing power.

● If RV connected to power supply by a land line, check to be sure line is sized properly to run unit load and it is plugged into power supply.

● Check your fuse or circuit breaker to see if it is open. Insure fuse is not burnt, or circuit breaker is “ON” and not activated.

● After the above checks, call your local service center for further help. This unit must be serviced by qualified service personnel only.

When calling for service, always give the following:

●

●

Unit model and serial number found on the identification label located on base pan of unit bottom. Return air vent grille must be removed from ADB to view.

ADB model and serial number found on rating plate located on ceiling template. Observe this rating plate through the filter opening.

11

63

64


User’s Manual

Auto Fire Extinguishers

M08-0039-001 M 07/04 Model FESA5

IMPORTANT! Please read carefully and save.

This user’s manual contains important information about your fire extinguisher’s operation. If you are installing this fire extinguisher for use by others, you must leave this manual—or a copy of it—with the end user.

Read extinguisher label and the entire user’s manual carefully before installing or using the unit. Make sure everyone in your household is completely familiar with the operation of the extinguisher, and review the instructions regularly. In an emergency, you will not have time to read instructions.


Important Information About Fire Extinguishers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1

Read Before Installing or Using This Fire Extinguisher . . . . . . . . .1

Where to Install This Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1

How to Install This Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1

Checking and Inspecting the Fire Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1

How to Operate Your Fire Extinguisher in a Fire Emergency . . . .2

After the Fire is Extinguished . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2

How to Clean After Using a Fire Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2

If Your Fire Extinguisher Needs Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2

Disposing of a Used Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2

Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2

All Rights Reserved. © 2004 BRK Brands, Inc.

First Alert ® , 3901 Liberty Street Road, Aurora, IL 60504-8122

Consumer Affairs: (800) 323-9005 • www.firstalert.com

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

NOTE: Be sure the extinguisher is rated to fight the type of fire most likely to occur in the area you choose to install it. Since household fires commonly start in the kitchen, you should always install an extinguisher in the kitchen. For added security, you should also install additional extinguishers in utility areas, and other living areas in your household.

Fire extinguishers are classified by fire type. The A, B and C rating system defines the kinds of burning materials each fire extinguisher is designed to fight. The numbers in front of the A,

B, or C indicate the rating for size of the fire the unit can extinguish. Using the wrong type of fire extinguisher can do more harm than good. Make sure you understand which fire extinguisher to use on each class of fire!

Class A rating: The agent/powder is suitable for fighting small fires involving wood, paper, cloth, rubber, and some plastics.

Class B rating: The agent/powder is suitable for fighting small fires involving grease, oil, gasoline, kerosene, and other flammable liquids.

Class C rating: The agent/powder is suitable for fighting small fires in "live" electrical equipment.

Model FESA5 is rated 5-B:C. It is NOT rated to fight Class A fires.

READ BEFORE INSTALLING OR USING

THIS FIRE EXTINGUISHER!

• This extinguisher is designed for use against small fires that have just started and are small enough to fight safely. It is not designed to fight large fires that are burning out of control. If the fire is too hot or smoky for you to get within 6 feet

(2 meters) of it, do not try to fight it yourself. Warn everyone, evacuate the premises, and have someone call the Fire

Department from outside the building. Trying to fight a large fire yourself can result in injury or death.

• Do not puncture or burn any fire extinguisher. The contents are under pressure, and the extinguisher could explode.

• Never locate this extinguisher close to an engine, stove or other source of heat. It is pressurized and could rupture or explode if exposed to temperatures over 150° F (66° C).

• This extinguisher contains a dry powder extinguishing agent. The agent/powder is nontoxic, but can irritate skin. When using this unit, avoid breathing the powder. Always ventilate the area after use.

1

WHERE TO INSTALL THIS EXTINGUISHER

This extinguisher is designed to be used in your car or other vehicle. It has a special mounting bracket to keep the unit from discharging accidentally. We recommend you mount the extinguisher to keep it safe from puncture or other damage. Since not every vehicle can accommodate the mounting bracket, the bracket is also designed to keep the extinguisher from rolling if you do not mount it.

This Fire Extinguisher may be mounted:

• In the trunk of a vehicle

• On an inside panel of a vehicle

Do NOT mount this

Fire Extinguisher:

• To the dashboard of the vehicle

• To the exterior of a vehicle

• On a clean, dry surface where the temperature does not go above 120° F

(49° C) or below –40° F

(–40° C)

• To the engine of a vehicle

• On or near any other source of heat

HOW TO INSTALL THIS EXTINGUISHER

NOTE: Since surface types vary, mounting screws are not included.

Purchase screws or bolts specifically designed for the surface on which you will mount the fire extinguisher. The fire extinguisher label lists its maximum weight.

Installing the Mounting Bracket in A Vehicle

• This extinguisher has a quick-release bracket for mounting. Mount the extinguisher as shown in “Installing the

Mounting Bracket.”

• Do not use sheet metal screws or wood screws; vehicle vibrations may loosen them.

• Do not make holes in the vehicle structure if you are not sure what is on the other side. You may accidentally cause severe damage to electrical lines, gasoline lines or tanks, or other vehicle systems.

• Do not break the plastic loop holding the safety pin in place!

This loop prevents accidental discharge of the fire extinguisher. Break the loop only in an emergency before using the fire extinguisher.

Remove mounting bracket from extinguisher by unlocking the clasp and pulling the bracket away from the extinguisher. Use two strong screws (such as #8 machine screws) to mount the bracket securely onto metal or another solid surface that can support the weight of the fire extinguisher. The mounting bracket must be secure so you can remove the extinguisher quickly in an emergency.

Installing the

Mounting Bracket

1. Install the mounting bracket as shown in “Installing The

Mounting Bracket” using strong screws (such as #8 machine screws) with washers and nuts.

The screws should not be longer than necessary to accommodate a washer and nut. Mounting screws, washers, and nuts are not included (see

Note above.)

2. After installing the mounting bracket, replace the extinguisher on the bracket with the nose of the extinguisher pointing into the bracket.

CHECKING AND INSPECTING

THE FIRE EXTINGUISHER

DO NOT CHECK THE PRESSURE OR TEST THE FIRE

EXTINGUISHER BY SQUEEZING THE TRIGGER, EVEN BRIEFLY.

ONCE USED IT WILL GRADUALLY LOSE PRESSURE AND WILL

NOT BE FULLY CHARGED FOR USE IN AN EMERGENCY.

1. Inspect and test the extinguisher once a week. Start by removing the extinguisher from the mounting bracket/cap.

Check the extinguisher pressure by pressing the green button on top of the cap as shown in “Checking the

Pressure.” If the button pops back up, the extinguisher is properly pressurized and ready to use. If the button stays down, the extinguisher has lost pressure and must be replaced.

2. Check for signs of damage or misuse.

Make sure you can still read all the text on the label. Carefully examine the surface of the extinguisher for corrosion.

You can help prevent corrosion by

Checking the

Pressure cleaning the extinguisher if it gets wet or dirty. If you notice corrosion during the warranty period, return the unit to First Alert ® (see

"Limited Warranty" at the end of this manual).

3. Make sure the tamper indicator

(“safety seal”) is still intact as shown in “Location Of The ‘Safety Seal’” and

Location of the

“Safety Seal” the nozzle is clean and unobstructed.

4. When you finish inspecting the fire extinguisher, always put it back into the mounting bracket. Make sure the handle is locked down and the safety seal is intact.

For more information about fire extinguishers, consult the NFPA

Standard #10, “Portable Fire Extinguishers,” available from the

National Fire Protection Association, Inc., Batterymarch Park, Quincy,

MA 02169, USA.

HOW TO OPERATE YOUR FIRE

EXTINGUISHER IN A FIRE EMERGENCY

• Make sure your extinguisher may be safely and effectively used on the small fire you want to fight. Always use extreme caution when fighting any fire. Fight a fire only where there is a clear escape path to allow you to get out safely if the fire gets worse.

• Avoid breathing smoke and heated fumes; stay low if necessary. Burning materials will release toxic fumes. Inhaling these fumes may cause injury or death.

• Always stand back far enough away from the fire—near an exit—and make sure nothing is between you and your escape route. If you get too close to a fire, you risk getting burned or hit by splattering material like grease. If the fire is too hot or smoky for you to get within 6 feet (2 meters), DO

NOT try to fight the fire yourself. Evacuate immediately and call the Fire Department.

• For fires on a kitchen stove, turn oven or burners off immediately if possible. If you can’t reach the oven or burner controls safely, extinguish the fire first, then turn them off.

• Fight the fire from an upwind direction with your back to any strong air current. Trying to fight a fire with currents blowing towards you can result in serious injury.

TO FIGHT THE FIRE

• Turn off the engine immediately if you suspect a vehicle fire.

Evacuate the car, sending passengers a safe distance away.

If you see flames escaping from under the vehicle’s hood, the fire is too large to fight. DO NOT attempt to open the hood or fight the fire; instead move a safe distance from the car and call for help immediately. Trying to fight this size fire could result in injury or death.

• If there are no visible flames and you attempt to fight a small fire, always use extreme caution if lifting your vehicle’s hood. Flames may flash when you open the hood, which can cause severe injury or death.

• This unit will not operate with mounting bracket attached.

The extinguisher must be removed from the mounting bracket or it cannot discharge its contents to fight a fire.

If You Suspect a Vehicle Fire:

1. Pull vehicle over, away from all traffic.

2. Turn off vehicle engine.

3. Evacuate all passengers and move them a safe distance from the vehicle. Do not plug a cellular phone into your own vehicle to call the Fire Department.

4. Remove the extinguisher from the mounting bracket.

5. Hold the extinguisher firmly, with the nozzle facing away from you. Pull out the pin to break the ‘Safety Seal.’ You won’t be able to squeeze the trigger until the safety seal is removed.

6. Stand back 6 feet (2 meters) from the fire and make sure the fire is not between you and your exit.

7. Hold the extinguisher upright and aim the nozzle at the base of the fire.

8. Press and hold the trigger to discharge the powder.

9. Sweep the spray at the base of the burning material, using quick side-to-side motions.

(If the spray scatters the fire, move back.)

Breaking the

Safety Seal

Press and Hold

Trigger To

Discharge Powder

10. Move slowly towards the fire as the extinguisher spray pushes the fire back. Maintain a 6-foot (2 meter) distance between you and the front of the fire at all times.

11. Completely discharge the contents of the extinguisher and make sure the fire is completely out. Flashbacks are common with fires.

AFTER THE FIRE IS EXTINGUISHED

Do not start the vehicle up or plug in any electrical accessories

(cellular phone, CD player, TV or VCR, etc.) until the vehicle has been cleaned up completely. It is very important to remove the powder from electrical equipment after a fire. If the powder gets wet, it can conduct electricity. (Using a dry chemical extinguisher on wet electrical equipment can be hazardous for this reason.)

This may worsen an electrical leakage problem, impair the equipment’s insulation, or create an electrical shock hazard.

If you think the fire had an electrical origin:

• Turn off the engine and do not touch any electrical wires, fuses or accessories.

• Leave the vehicle and stay a safe distance away until the Fire

Department arrives.

• Do not restart the vehicle or plug in any electrical appliances or accessories until a licensed mechanic has inspected the vehicle’s electrical system.


HOW TO CLEAN AFTER USING A FIRE

EXTINGUISHER

NOTE: The powder spray from the extinguisher may spread over a wide area, and may soil upholstery, carpets and walls.

• Sweep/vacuum up as much of the powder as possible. Then use a damp cloth to wipe off the remaining agent.

• If you have any questions about cleaning appliances that the agent has come into contact with, please contact the appliance manufacturer.

IF YOUR EXTINGUISHER NEEDS SERVICE

This fire extinguisher is a disposable device that is NOT rechargeable.

Do not try to service or repair this fire extinguisher under any circumstances. Do not try to remove the nozzle or valve assembly.

This is a pressurized device that can cause serious injury if tampered with.

If there is a problem and it is still under warranty, please see “How to

Obtain Warranty Service” in the Limited Warranty.

DISPOSING OF A USED EXTINGUISHER

Completely discharge the extinguisher outdoors by turning the unit upside down and pulling the trigger. Dispose of the empty unit properly and replace it with a new fire extinguisher.

Never puncture, burn or expose this fire extinguisher to temperatures over 150° F (66° C) even if it is fully discharged. The contents are under pressure and it could explode.

LIMITED WARRANTY

BRK Brands, Inc. ("BRK") the maker of First Alert ® brand products, warrants that for a period of five years from the date of purchase, this product will be free from defects in material and workmanship. BRK, at its option, will repair or replace this product or any component of the product found to be defective during the warranty period.

Replacement will be made with a new or remanufactured product or component. If the product is no longer available, replacement may be made with a similar product of equal or greater value. This is your exclusive warranty.

This warranty is valid for the original retail purchaser from the date of initial retail purchase and is not transferable. Keep the original sales receipt. Proof of purchase is required to obtain warranty performance.

BRK dealers, service centers, or retail stores selling BRK products do not have the right to alter, modify or any way change the terms and conditions of this warranty.

This warranty does not cover normal wear of parts or damage resulting from any of the following: negligent use or misuse of the product, use on improper voltage or current, use contrary to the operating instructions, disassembly, repair or alteration by anyone other than

BRK or an authorized service center. Further, the warranty does not cover acts of God, such as fire, flood, hurricanes and tornadoes.

BRK shall not be liable for any incidental or consequential damages caused by the breach of any express or implied warranty. Except to the extent prohibited by applicable law, any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose is limited in duration to the duration of the above warranty. Some states, provinces, or jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages or limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitations or exclusion may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights that vary from state to state, or province to province.

How to Obtain Warranty Service:

Service: If service is required, do not return the product to your retailer. In order to obtain warranty service, contact the Consumer Affairs

Division at 1-800-323-9005, 7:30 AM to 5:00 PM, Central Standard

Time, Monday through Friday. To assist in serving you, please have the model number and date of purchase available when calling.

Address: 303 Nelson Avenue, Neosho, MO 64850-8806

2

First Alert ® is a registered trademark of the First Alert Trust.

M08-0039-001 M 07/04

65

FURRION STEREO

Entertainment System DV1230

Système de divertissement

DV1230

Sistema de entretenimiento

DV1230

Instruction Manual

Manuel d'instructions

Manual de instrucciones

66

Product picture is for reference only.

La photo du produit est aux fins de référence seulement.

La imagen del producto es solo de referencia.

Model/Modèle/Modelo:

DV1230

1

FURRION STEREO

Welcome

Thank you and congratulations for purchasing the Furrion ® DV1230 Entertainment System.

Before operating your new product, please read these instructions carefully. This instruction manual contains information for safe use, installation and maintenance of the product.

Please keep this instruction manual in a safe place for future reference. This will ensure safe use and reduce the risk of injury. Be sure to pass on this manual to new owners of this product.

The manufacturer does not accept responsibility for any damages due to not observing these instructions.

If you have any further questions regarding our products, please contact us at [email protected]

67

68

FURRION STEREO

Contents

Welcome ...........................................................................................................1

Contents ...........................................................................................................2

Safety and Notice ..............................................................................................3

Safety ..............................................................................................................................................3

Class 1 Laser Product ....................................................................................................................3

Notice of compliance .....................................................................................................................4

Introduction ......................................................................................................5

What’s in the box ............................................................................................................................5

Precautions ....................................................................................................................................5

Features .........................................................................................................................................5

Supported Format ..........................................................................................................................6

Functional Overview .........................................................................................7

Control Panel .................................................................................................................................7

Remote Control .............................................................................................................................8

Before Operation ..............................................................................................10

Wiring Diagram ..............................................................................................................................10

View of Wiring Connecting Socket .................................................................................................10

Description of Wiring Connecting Cables ......................................................................................11

Prepare the Remote Control ..........................................................................................................14

Quick Reference Guide ...................................................................................................................15

Common Operation ........................................................................................................................18

Radio Operation .............................................................................................................................20

Basic Disc / USB Operation ...........................................................................................................21

Advanced Disc / USB Operation .....................................................................................................22

Set up the DVD System Menu ........................................................................................................25

Bluetooth Operation .......................................................................................................................30

App Operation ................................................................................................................................31

Maintenance .....................................................................................................32

Maintenance and Cleaning of Discs ..............................................................................................32

Troubleshooting ................................................................................................33

Specifications ...................................................................................................35

Warranty ...........................................................................................................36

2

FURRION STEREO

Safety and Notice

Safety

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER ( OR

BACK). NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER

SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO

RAIN OR MOISTURE.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance

(servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.

Class 1 Laser Product

3

Laser product symbol:

Located on the rear panel of the unit, this symbol indicates this unit is a class 1 laser product that only uses weak laser and produces no hazardous radiation outside of the unit.

1. Read through this instruction manual before installation and use.

2. Do not touch the power plug with wet hands.

3. Switch off the power when the unit is not in use. (Disconnect the power plug from the power outlet when you do not intend to use the unit for a prolonged period of time.) Before moving the unit, remove the disc from the unit/tray first.

4. Do not open the cover or touch any of the components inside of the unit. Only a qualified technician should service the unit.

5. To avoid damaging the unit, do not expose the unit to direct sunlight or objects that radiate heat.

6. Do not place the unit in moist or humid conditions. Moisture will affect normal operation and damage the unit.

7. Place the unit on a flat, well-ventilated location. Please ensure the ventilation holes are not covered to avoid overheating and malfunction.

8. Clean the panel and case with a soft dry cloth only. Do not apply any kind of thinner, alcohol or sprays.

9. The apparatus should not be exposed to dripping or splashing. Do not place objects filled with liquids (such as vases) on the apparatus.

WARNING

● Do not ingest the battery contained within the remote control supplied with the unit as this battery represents a chemical burn hazard.

● This product contains a coin/button cell battery.

● If the coin/button cell battery is swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns in just 2 hours and can lead to death.

● Keep new and used batteries away from children.

● If the battery compartment does not close securely, stop using the product and keep it away from children.

● If you think batteries might have been swallowed or placed inside any part of the body, seek immediate medical attention.

69

70

FURRION STEREO

Safety and Notice

CAUTION

● Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

● Replace only with the same or equivalent battery type.

● The battery should not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine or fire.

Notice of compliance

The device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC rules

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC

Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

● Relocate the receiving antenna.

● Increase the separation between equipment and receiver.

● Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

● Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

FCC Radiation Exposure Statement

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.

This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

All registered and unregistered trademarks are property of their respective owners.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

4

FURRION STEREO

Introduction

What’s in the box

Thanks for purchasing the Furrion DV1230 Entertainment System. This manual will help you set up and begin using your product. Please read this manual thoroughly and keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

First, check the contents of your box with the parts checklist below:

● Main set

● Remote control

● Harness (200mm)

● Audio RCA adapter cable (1.5m)

● Hang tag

● Printed materials

Precautions

Connect this unit to a 12V DC negative ground battery system which is standard in North

American and European vehicles.

Ensure when installing the unit, all wire ends which are not being used are terminated with an insulated end to avoid wires shorting or earthing which can lead to the risk of fire or electrical shock.

Avoid inserting foreign objects into the disc loading slot of the unit as this will cause malfunction.

Do not expose this unit to moisture or wet environments. If condensation is present on the screen, wait for 1 hour or more for the moisture to evaporate.

If the interior of the vehicle is extremely hot, do not use the unit until the vehicle's internal temperature has cooled down.

Do not use cleaning products on the front face of the unit. Only use a slightly damp cloth for cleaning.

Do not attempt to disassemble or adjust this unit. Contact a service center for assistance.

Features

5

● Digital AM / FM Tuner

● DVD/CD-R/RW/MP3/MP4/WMA Compatible

● Bluetooth with NFC function

● Auxiliary inputs on front and rear

● USB input with charging function

● 3 - zone multiroom independent audio output

● 1 x HDMI output with ARC function

● 1 x HDMI input

● 1 x RCA audio/video output for connecting additional TV

● 1 x RCA audio/video input

● 1 x coaxial audio input

● 1 x optical audio input

●

● 1 x headphone output

●

1 x subwoofer output

Clock / alarm clock

71

72

FURRION STEREO

Introduction

Supported Format

Supported Video Format

File

Extension Container

.avi

.divx

.mpg

.dat

.vob

.mp4

AVI

MPG

DAT

VOB

MP4

File Extension

.mp3

Video Codec Audio Codec

MPEG-4 Visual

DivX

4.xx/5.xx/6.xx/3ivX

XviD

MPEG-1

MPEG-1/MPEG-2

MPEG-1/MPEG-2

Dolby Digital (AC3)

WMA/PCM/LPCM

AAC-LC (2ch)

MPEG-Audio

(MP1/MP2/MP3)

Dolby Digital (AC3)

LPCM

MPEG-Audio

(MP1/MP2/MP3)

Dolby Digital (AC3)

LPCM

MPEG-Audio

(MP1/MP2/MP3)

MPEG-1/MPEG-2 Dolby Digital (AC3)

MPEG-4 Visual

Dolby Digital (AC3)

WMA/PCM/LPCM

AAC-LC (2ch)

MPEG-Audio

(MP1/MP2/MP3)

Supported Audio Format

Resolution

720 x 480 (30fps)

720 x 576 (30fps)

720 x 480 (30fps)

720 x 576 (30fps)

720 x 480 (30fps)

720 x 576 (30fps)

720 x 480 (30fps)

720 x 576 (30fps)

720 x 480 (30fps)

720 x 576 (30fps)

Audio Codec

MP3

Bit Rate

16kbps - 320kbps

Sampling Rate

8k - 48kHz

.wma

WMA 16kbps - 320kbps 8k - 48kHz

Remark

Remark

Only WMA7/

WMA8/WMA9

(CBR/VBR) supported (only

353 format supported)

Note: Compatibility with the above file formats is not guaranteed.

6

FURRION STEREO

Functional Overview

Control Panel

7

1

Turn on the unit or switch to standby mode.

2

Eject the loaded disc.

3

4

5

ZONE 1/ZONE 2/ ZONE 3

Turn on or off the audio source in each of the different areas where your speakers are connected.

Number buttons (1 - 6)

Select and enter numbers.

1/MENU : Display the title list during

DVD/VCD playback.

3/RDM : Select random playback mode.

4/RPT : Select repeat playback mode.

Disc slot

6

7

SEL EQ

Select various system settings.

Select a preset sound effect.

Source buttons

Select the corresponding sound source:

DISC/USB, AM/FM, BT, or AUX.

8 NFC detection area

9 LCD screen

10 IR sensor for remote control

11 AUX socket

Connect to the 3.5mm audio output socket on an auxiliary device.

12 socket

Connect a headphone.

13 HDMI IN socket

Connect to the HDMI output socket on an AV device.

14

Enter alarm setting mode.

15 USB socket

Connect a USB storage device.

16 RESET

Reset the unit and load its factory default settings.

17 MIC

Built-in microphone.

18 / OK

Adjust brightness of the LCD screen.

Confirm your selection.

19

Mute or un-mute the audio output.

20

Stop playback.

73

Control Panel

74

FURRION STEREO

1

31

30

29

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

28

27


21 VOLUME -/+ knob

Turn the knob clockwise / counterclockwise to increase / decrease volume.

22 /

Accept or make a call.

(Press and hold) Reject or end a call.

23 /

Skip to the previous/next track.

Fast backward/forward within a track.

Tune to a radio station.

24

Start (resume) / pause playback.

Remote Control

2 3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

1

2

PWR

Turn on the unit or switch to standby mode.

EJECT

Eject the loaded disc.

3 Source buttons

Select the corresponding sound source:

DVD/USB, AM/FM, AUX (ARC, F AUX, R

AUX, AV, HDMI, COAXIAL, or OPTICAL), or AV IN.

4

Return to the previous menu.

5 /

Navigate left / right in a menu.

6 OK

Confirm your selection.

7 /

Navigate up / down in a menu.

8

9

/ ( CLEAR )

Skip to the previous/next track.

Fast backward / forward within a track.

Tune to a radio station.

( CLEAR ): Clear a wrong input.

Start (resume) / pause playback.

10 Number buttons (0 - 9) and 10+

Select and enter numbers.

0/TA : (For Europe only) Enable / disable

TA (Traffic Announcement) mode.

5/-10 : Skip 10 tracks backward during

MP3/WMA playback.

6/+10 : Skip 10 tracks forward during

MP3/WMA playback.

9/AF : (For Europe only) Enable / disable

AF (Alternative Frequency) mode.

10+ / PTY : Input a number larger than 9.

(For Europe only) Select a PTY (Program

Type).

8

FURRION STEREO

9


11 SEARCH

Show or hide the search window during disc playback.

12 APS/

Start automatic programming of radio stations.

Scan preset radio stations.

Reject or end a call.

13 RPT

Select repeat playback mode.

14 RDM

Select random playback mode.

15 SUBT/REDIAL

Select the caption language during DVD playback (if available).

Redial the last dialed number.

16 TITLE/PBC

Display the title list during DVD/VCD playback.

Turn on / off PBC (PlayBack Control) of a disc (if available).

17 STEP/

Play a DVD/VCD frame by frame.

Accept or make a call.

18 MUTE/LOUD

Mute or un-mute the audio output.

Enable or disable the loudness effect.

19 OSD

Display the playback status.

20 PROG

Access or exit program playback.

21 AUDIO

Select a subtitle language (if available) during DVD playback.

Select a sound mode (MONO LEFT,

MONO RIGHT, or STEREO) during VCD playback.

22 A-B

Play a specific segment in a chapter / track repeatedly.

23

EQ

Select a preset EQ sound effect.

24 ZOOM

During DVD/VCD playback, zoom in / out on images.

25

ST/ANGLE/#

In FM mode, switch between stereo and mono sound output.

During DVD playback, adjust the viewing angle (if available).

26

LOC/SLOW.FWD/*

In radio mode, enable or disable local mode.

During disc playback, select a slow forward speed.

27

CLOCK

Enter clock setting mode.

Display the clock.

28

Stop playback.

29

+/-

Increase / decrease volume.

30

SETUP

Access or exit the DVD system menu.

31

SEL

Select various system settings.

Select a preset sound effect.

75

76

FURRION STEREO

Before Operation

Wiring Diagram

View of Wiring Connecting Socket

10

11


Description of Wiring Connecting Cables

FURRION STEREO

77

FURRION STEREO


78

12

13

FURRION STEREO


Location

1. Choose a mounting location away from humid areas, water sources, appliances or any equipment that can radiate heat.

2. Select an area on a wall or cabinet which is free from cables, fuel or brake lines.

Ensure the area behind the unit has a vent hole or if it is an enclosed box, it has adequate room around the rear of the unit for cooling.

3. Ensure when the unit is mounted the wires at the rear are not pressed against the heat sink.

Installing the unit

● Before installing the unit, connect the wiring temporarily and make sure the unit and the system work properly.

● Fix the unit with screws according to the following diagram.

1. Remove the plastic shell from the front panel on the unit.

2. Fix the unit with 4 pieces of #8 pan head self tapping screws.

3. Put back the plastic shell on the front panel of the unit.

79

80

FURRION STEREO


Prepare the Remote Control

1. Before using the remote control for the first time, pull the insulating sheet out of the remote control in the direction indicated by the arrow. (Fig.1)

Remote control battery note

1. Improper use of a battery may cause overheating or an explosion that could result in injury or fire.

2. Battery leakage may cause damage to the remote control. Battery Life: 6 months with normal use in normal room temperature.

3. Do not short the battery.

4. Do not throw the battery into fire.

5. To avoid the risk of accident, keep the battery out of reach of children.

Fig. 1

2. Press the movable block hold in the direction indicated by arrow A (Fig.2), then pull the battery holder out of the remote control as the direction indicated by arrow

B. (Fig.2)

Fig. 2

3. Replace the old battery with a new one, with the (+) polarity side upward. (Fig.3)

4. Insert the battery holder into the original position in the remote control. (Fig.3) side up

Fig. 3

14

FURRION STEREO

15

Operation

Quick Reference Guide

Power on/off, switch to standby mode

Mute

Select a source

Adjust volume

Select a feature / setting

Select a preset EQ

Set clock

Set alarm

Turn alarm on/off

General Operation

Press to turn the unit on or enter standby mode.

Press and hold to turn the unit off.

Press MUTE to mute sound. The icon flashes on the display.

Press MUTE again to restore the sound.

Press DISC/USB, AM/FM, AUX, BT to select Disc (with a disc loaded), USB (with a USB storage device connected), AM/FM, AUX, or BT.

Rotate the VOLUME -/+ knob to adjust volume.

1. Press SEL

2. Rotate the

EQ once or more to select VOL, BAS (without EQ preset), TRE

(without EQ preset), BAL, LOUD ON/OFF, LOC ON/OFF, ST ON/OFF, BEEP ON/

OFF, SUB ON/OFF, or CLOCK.

VOLUME -/+ knob to select a feature / setting.

Press and hold

EQ OFF.

SEL EQ once or more to select CINEMA, ROCK CLASSIC, FLAT, or

1. Press SEL EQ on the front panel once or more (or press and hold CLOCK on the remote control) to enter clock setup mode.

2. Rotate the

3. Press / to enter minute setting.

4. Rotate the

VOLUME -/+

VOLUME -/+ knob knob

to adjust the hour.

to adjust the minute.

The time on the clock is set automatically after a few seconds of inactivity.

Press and hold once or more to enter alarm clock and source settings.

Repeat the operations in clock setting to set the alarm.

Two alarm sources are available for selection: TUNER and USB.

Press to turn on or off the set alarm.

When the alarm is set, the icon will stay on the LCD.

Adjust brightness

Select speakers

Reset

Press once or more to select a brightness level for the front panel: LOW,

MIDDLE or HIGH.

Press and hold ZONE 1, ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 to select speaker output. The corresponding zone number will be displayed on the LCD once selected.

Press RESET with a sharp object to reset the unit and load its factory default settings.

81

82

FURRION STEREO

Operation

Select radio region

Manual tuning

Radio Operation

Press and hold AM/FM for 2 seconds to set the AM/FM radio region

(USA1/USA2/AUSTRALIA/EUROPE).

Press / to move the radio frequency down or up one step at a time.

Automatic tuning Press and hold / to search for the next strongest station automatically.

Select a band

Store and recall a preset station

Store stations automatically

Scan preset stations

Press AM/FM once or more to select FM1, FM2, FM3, AM1, or AM2.

Press and hold any one of the six preset buttons (1-6) to store the current frequency. Press the corresponding preset number button to recall the stored frequency.

Press and hold APS on the remote control (or on the front panel) to automatically store the six strongest stations on the current band.

Up to 18 FM stations and 12 AM stations can be stored.

Press APS on the remote control (or on the front panel) to scan presets 1-6 on the current band.

LOC Press LOC on the remote control to turn on / off the LOC (local) function.

Stereo/mono In FM mode, press SEL one or more to select stereo or mono sound output.

16

17

FURRION STEREO

Operation

Insert a disc

Eject the disc

Select a chapter / track

Fast backward / forward

Pause playback

Stop playback

Repeat

Random

Title

Disc / USB Operation

With the label facing up, insert a disc into the disc slot. The disc will automatically begin playback.

Press EJECT to eject the disc.

Press / to skip to the previous or next chapter / track.

Press and hold / to fast backward / forward.

Press to temporarily stop playback.

Press again to resume playback.

Press once to pause playback. Then you can press to resume.

Press twice to stop playback. Then press to start playback from the beginning of the first chapter / track.

Press RPT to select RPT ONE/RPT DIR/RPT ALL/RPT OFF MODE.

Press RPT again to resume.

Press RDM to play each track in random order.

Press RDM again to resume.

In DVD/VCD mode, press TITLE on the remote control to display the title list.

Accept or make a call

Reject or end a call

Bluetooth Operation

Press / on the front panel (or on the remote control) to accept an incoming call, or dial or redial a telephone number.

Press and hold / to reject or end a call. on the front panel (or press on the remote control)

83

84

FURRION STEREO

Operation

Common Operation

Turn the unit on or switch to standby mode

Press to turn the unit on or switch to standby mode.

Select a source

DISC / USB - Once a DVD or USB is inserted into the unit, the unit will automatically switch to the corresponding source. If a disc has already been inserted and the unit is playing from another source, you can press

DVD / USB to select DVD.

AM/FM - Press this button to scroll through

FM1, FM2, FM3, AM1, and AM2.

Press and hold this button once or more to select the radio region: USA1, USA2, AUSTRALIA, or EUROPE.

BT - Press this button to enable Bluetooth connection.

AUX - Press this button to scroll through the

AUX inputs available for the unit.

F AUX - Connection on the front of the unit to connect an external audio source.

R AUX - Connection on the rear of the unit, normally used to connect TV sound input.

AV - Connection on the rear of the unit to connect an external audio source.

HDMI - Connection on the front of the unit.

COAXIAL - Connection on the rear of the unit.

OPTICAL - Connection on the rear of the unit.

HDMI OUT (ARC) - Connection on the rear of the unit, used to connect a TV with Audio

Return Channel function. Make sure the ARC function of the TV is on.

● For details on setting and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.

About Audio Return Channel (ARC)

ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways under HDMI Control. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control and ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you can output video/ audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, use the TV’s speakers.

Adjust volume

Rotate the VOLUME -/+ knob clockwise to increase volume, or rotate counterclockwise to decrease volume.

Mute

1. Press MUTE to mute sound output in any source mode.

'MUTE' will be displayed on the screen.

2. Press MUTE again to resume.

Display and set the clock

1. To display the clock on the LCD screen, press CLOCK on the remote control.

In standby mode, the clock time will stay on the LCD.

2. To adjust or set the clock, press SEL EQ on the front panel once or more to enter clock setup mode.

Press / to switch between hour and minute setting .

Rotate the VOLUME -/+ knob to adjust the hour / minute.

The time on the clock is set automatically after a few seconds of inactivity.

18

FURRION STEREO

19

Operation

Set the alarm

1. Press and hold once or more to enter alarm clock and source settings.

2. Repeat the operations in clock setting to set the alarm.

Two alarm sources are available for selection: TUNER and USB.

● Press to turn on or off the set alarm.

When the alarm is set, the icon will stay on the LCD.

Select a preset EQ mode

Press and hold SEL EQ to select the preset music equalizer curves: CINEMA, ROCK, CLASSIC,

FLAT, or EQ OFF.

Turn on / off LOUD mode

Press SEL EQ

on the front panel once or more to turn on / off LOUD mode.

Adjust the sound equalizer curves

1. Press SEL EQ

on the front panel once or more to select a sound equalizer curve:

VOL, BAS (without preset EQ), TRE (without preset EQ), BAL, LOUD ON/OFF, LOC ON/

OFF, ST ON/OFF, BEEP ON/OFF, or SUB

ON/OFF .

2. Rotate the VOLUME -/+ knob on the front panel to select a sound feature .

Select ZONE 1 / ZONE 2 / ZONE 3

Press and hold ZONE 1 / ZONE 2 / ZONE 3 to turn on or off the audio source in each of the different areas where your speakers are connected.

The corresponding zone number will be displayed on the LCD once selected.

Note: ZONE 3 supports independent audio output control.

● Press ZONE 3 to activate independent audio selection mode.

The "ZONE 3" icon will flash on the LCD.

● Select the media source (DISC/USB, AM/

FM, BT, F AUX/R AUX, AV, HDMI, COAXIAL,

OPTICAL), then adjust the audio effect and preset EQ independently.

● After setting ZONE 3 audio output, you can press ZONE 3 again to switch back to

ZONE1/ZONE 2 audio output control mode

(ZONE 1 and ZONE 2 in the same group) .

The "ZONE 3" icon will stop flashing.

− If ARC is selected as the media source of ZONE 3 (ZONE 1/ZONE 2), the media source of ZONE 1/ZONE2 (ZONE 3) can be selected as DISC/USB, AM/FM, BT, F AUX,

R AUX, AV, or ARC.

− If AM/FM or BT is selected as the media source of ZONE 3 (ZONE 1/ZONE 2), the media source of ZONE 1/ZONE2 (ZONE

3) can be selected as DISC/USB, AM/FM,

BT,F AUX, R AUX, AV HDMI, COAXIAL,

OPTICAL, or ARC.

− If USB/DISC is selected as the media source of ZONE 3 (ZONE 1/ZONE 2), the media source of ZONE 1/ZONE2 (ZONE 3) can be selected as AM/FM, BT, F AUX, R

AUX, or AV.

Reset the unit

In case of incorrect display, button failure, or distorted sound, you can press RESET with a sharp object such as a clip to reset the unit and load its factory default settings.

85

86

FURRION STEREO

Operation

Radio Operation

Select a radio region

In radio mode, press and hold AM/FM to select your desired radio region: USA1/USA2/

AUSTRALIA/EUROPE.

Select AM/FM band

In radio mode, press AM/FM once or more to select your desired radio band: FM1, FM2,

FM3, AM1, or AM2.

The selected band will be displayed on the front panel.

Tune to / search for radio stations

In radio mode:

● Press and hold panel (or /

/ on the front

on the remote control) to automatically search down/up

● for an available station from the current frequency.

Press

(or /

/ on the front panel

on the remote control) to manually search up or down for your desired station from the current frequency.

Use the / APS button

In radio mode:

1. Press and hold on the front panel (or

APS on the remote control) to search for radio frequencies with sufficient signal strength (starting from the lowest frequency and ending until the search cycle is finished).

Then the 6 strongest stations are preset to the memory bank of the corresponding preset number. The AS operation is implemented in each bank of the selected band. When the AS operation is finished, radio broadcast will resume on M1. (A total of 3x6 stations for FM and 2x6 stations for

AM can be stored.)

2. Press on the front panel (or APS on the remote control) to search for each preset radio station starting from M1. When the field strength level is above the threshold of the stop level, the radio holds at that preset number for a few seconds, and then searches again. The search stops on

M1 when the search cycle is finished.

NOTE:

On FM band, FM1, FM2, FM3 is checked once at a time.

On AM band, AM1, AM2 is checked once at a time.

Use the preset number button (1-6)

In radio mode:

1. To store the current frequency on the current band, press and hold any one of the six preset number buttons (1-6).

2. To recall the preset memory on the current band, press one of the preset buttons (1-6).

Switch between STEREO/MONO

Press SEL EQ

on the front panel (or ST on the remote control) once or more to select ST ON or ST OFF mode in FM mode.

Use the LOC ON / OFF function

1. In radio mode, when the signals of the distant radio stations are very weak and the reception is poor during tuning, press

SEL EQ

on the front panel (or LOC on the remote control) once or more to select

LOC OFF mode, and then tune again for the distant radio stations.

2. In radio mode, too strong signals from the local radio stations may lead to interference. You can press SEL EQ

on the front panel (or LOC on the remote control) once or more to select LOC ON mode, and then re-tune to the local stations if required.

20

FURRION STEREO

21

Operation

Basic Disc / USB Operation

Start playback

1. Press to turn on the unit.

2. Turn on the TV set, from which the video output is connected to the video input of the unit. If nothing displays on the TV screen when the unit is turned on, ensure that the TV is set to the right video input

(not TV channel). For example, if the TV is connected with the unit via the VIDEO

1 INPUT, then you need to set the TV to

VIDEO1.

3. Insert a disc into the disc slot (with the label side facing up).

NOTE:

● Discs that are seriously scratched or of poor manufacturing or recording quality may not play.

● If the unit cannot read a disc in normal conditions, please try to eject and reload the disc.

● In addition to normal CD and DVD, this unit supports CD-R, CD-R/W, DVD-R and

DVD-R/W playback as well. However, depending on the conditions of the recording equipment, recording program or the disc itself, some CD-R, CD-R/W,

DVD-R or DVD-R/W may not play.

● When dealing with CD-R, CD-R/W, DVD-R or DVD-R/W recording, too high recording speed may result in poor signal quality and therefore, it is recommended to select as low recording speed as possible.

Pause playback

When playing DVD/VCD/CD/MP4/MP3/WMA discs, press to pause playback. You can press again to resume normal playback.

Stop playback

● When playing DVD/VCD/MP3/WMA/CD discs, press once to pause playback, then you can press to resume normal playback.

● During playback, press twice to stop playback, then you can press to start playback from the beginning of the first chapter / track.

Select a chapter/track

Press

/

/ the front panel (or on the front panel (or to select the previous / next chapter or track for playback.

Note: You can press and hold / on

on the remote control) to fast backward / forward within a chapter / track.

on the remote control) during playback

Select a chapter / track with the number buttons

● When playing DVD/VCD (PBC OFF)/MP3/

WMA/CD discs, use number buttons ( 0 -

9 ) to directly select and play a chapter / track numbered 1 to 9.

● To play a chapter / track with the serial number larger than 9, use the 10+ and 0

- 9 buttons. For example, to play the 13th chapter / track, first press the 10+ button once, then press the 3 button; to play the

34th chapter / track, first press the 10+ button 3 times, then press the 4 button.

Note: You can press and hold the 5/-10 or

6/+10 buttons to skip 10 tracks forward / backward (for MP3/WMA only).

87

88

FURRION STEREO

Operation

Select a chapter / track from the root/PBC menu (if available)

For DVD:

1. Press TITLE on the remote control to display the title list.

2. Press the navigation buttons to select your desired title, and then press OK or to open the root menu of the selected title.

3. Press the navigation buttons to select your desired chapter, then press OK or

to play the selected chapter.

● During playback, you can press 1/MENU on the front panel (or press and hold

TITLE on the remote control) to display the root menu of the current title directly, and then perform the same operation to resume normal playback.

For VCD:

1. When PBC is enabled, the beginning of the disc will play with the PBC menu (if available) displayed on the TV screen.

2. Press the number buttons to select your desired track to play.

For MP3/WMA:

● During playback, the root menu is displayed on the TV screen all the time

( TITLE/PBC unavailable).

● Press the navigation buttons to select your desired folder, and then press OK or

to open the folder.

Press the navigation buttons to select your desired file, and then press OK to play the selected file.

For CD:

The TITLE/PBC button is disabled.

Terminate playback

1. Press EJECT to eject the disc.

2. Press and hold on the front panel (or press on the remote control) to turn off the unit.

Advanced Disc / USB Operation

Fast backward / forward

During normal playback, press and hold

/ on the front panel (or / on the remote control) once or more to fast backward or forward at the following speed: x2, x4, x8, x20, or normal.

During fast backward / forward, press to resume normal playback.

Slow forward

● During playback, press SLOW_FWD on the remote control to slow forward.

● Press SLOW_FWD consecutively to decrease the playback speed as follows: x1/2, x1/3, x1/4, x1/5, x1/6,x1/7, normal.

● During slow forward, press to resume normal playback.

Note: The function is only available for video playback.

Play frame by frame

1. During DVD/VCD playback, press STEP on the remote control consecutively to play frame by frame forward.

2. Press to resume normal playback.

Play repeatedly

Repeat One / All

1. During DVD playback:

Press RPT to select REP CHAPTER, REP

TITLE, REP ALL, or REP OFF.

2. During VCD (PBC OFF)/CD playback:

Press RPT to select REP ONE, REP ALL, or OFF.

The RPT button is unavailable when PBC is enabled during VCD playback.

3. During MP3/WMA playback:

Press RPT to select REP ONE, REP DIR,

REP ALL, or OFF.

22

FURRION STEREO

Operation

23

Repeat A-B

Use this function if you want to repeat a specific segment on a disc that you define:

1. Press A-B at a point (A) where you want it to be the start point of the repeat segment.

2. Press A-B again at a point (B) where you want it to be the terminal point of the repeat segment.

Then the segment will be played repeatedly.

● To cancel A-B repeat mode and resume normal playback, press A-B for the third time.

Note:

During DVD/VCD/MP3/WMA/CD playback, points A and B must be within the same track.

Play from a specified chapter / track or specified time

During DVD playback:

1. Press SEARCH on the remote control to display a search box, with the title field highlighted.

2. Use the number buttons to input the serial number of a title.

3. Use the navigation buttons to highlight the chapter field, and then use the number buttons to input the serial number of a chapter.

4. Press OK or to play the selected chapter.

During VCD/MP3/WMA/CD playback:

1. Press SEARCH on the remote control to display a search box, with the track field highlighted.

2. Use the number buttons to input the serial number of a track, and then press

OK or to play the selected track.

Play randomly

During DVD/VCD (PBC OFF)/MP3/WMA/CD playback, press RDM once or more to switch between RANDOM ON and RANDOM OFF.

In RANDOM ON mode, the chapters / tracks will be played randomly.

Play from different angles

During DVD playback, press ANGLE on the remote control once or more to view from different angles.

Note:

− This function is only available for DVD discs recorded with different camera angles.

− The ANGLE button is unavailable for VCD/

MP3/WMA/CD discs.

Zoom in / out during playback

1. During DVD/VCD playback, press ZOOM on the remote control once or more to enlarge a certain area of the images on the screen with these multiples:

ZOOMx2, ZOOMx3, ZOOMx4, ZOOMx1/2,

ZOOMx1/3, ZOOMx1/4, ZOOM OFF.

2. Press one of the navigation buttons to select the area you want to enlarge.

Change the caption language

When playing DVDs, press SUBT on the remote control once or more to select the caption language or turn off the caption (if available).

Note: This function is unavailable for VCD/

MP3/WMA/CD discs.

Change the audio language

● When playing DVDs, press AUDIO on the remote control once or more to select the desired language type (if available).

● When playing VCD discs, press AUDIO on the remote control once or more to select

MONO L, MONO R, AUTO L, AUTO R, or

Stereo (no language function).

● For CD/WMA/MP3, the AUDIO button is invalid.

89

90

FURRION STEREO

Operation

Check the playback status

When playing DVD/VCD/CD discs, press OSD on the remote control once or more to turn on or off playback status display.

● For DVD discs, this function allows you to check such information as the current title and chapter numbers, and the elapsed and remaining time of both the current title and chapter etc.

● For VCD/CD discs, this function allows you to check such information as the current track number, and the elapsed and remaining time of both the current track and the whole disc.

Program playback

This function allows you to play some titles / chapters / tracks on a DVD/VCD/MP3/WMA/

CD disc in your specified order.

1. During playback, press PROG on the remote control to enter a program interface as follows:

For DVDs

For VCD/MP3/WMA/CD discs

2. Use the navigation buttons to move the cursor onto the desired place for inputting the sequence number.

3. Use the number buttons to input the title

/ chapter / track sequence numbers you want in your desired order.

4. Press directly, or use the navigation buttons to move the cursor onto PLAY , and then press OK on the remote control to play the programmed titles / chapters / tracks in the programmed order.

● To exit program playback, press followed by , or press PROG twice again.

● To remove all programmed sequence numbers, move the cursor onto CLEAR , and then press OK on the remote control.

● To change the programmed sequence, move the cursor onto the item you want to change, and then input the desired sequence number.

● During VCD playback with PBC enabled,

PBC will be disabled when you enter program playback.

Play a JPEG picture CD

In disc mode, the root menu is displayed on the screen with MP3/WMA files being played at the same time. ( TITLE / PBC button unavailable).

In the root menu, the left file sort icon is for MP3/WMA files, the middle one is for video files, and the right one is for JPEG files. If one of these 3 sorts of files does not exist, you cannot move the cursor onto the corresponding file sort icon.

1. Press the navigation buttons to select your desired folder, file or file sort icon from the root menu.

2. Press OK or to open the selected folder, or play the selected file, or play the selected sort of files only.

● In the root menu, you can also use the number buttons to select a file for playback.

24

FURRION STEREO

25

Operation

● After selecting the JPEG file sort icon and entering the folder, you can use the navigation buttons to select your desired

JPEG file, and then press OK or to start full-screen playback starting from the selected JPEG picture.

● During JPEG playback, use the navigation buttons to change the angle of the displayed picture as follows:

: 90 degrees clockwise

: 90 degrees counterclockwise

: Up <--> Down

: Left <--> Right

● During JPEG playback, press PROG on the remote control to change the picture refresh mode.

● During JPEG playback, press to stop playback and return to the root menu.

● During JPEG playback, the following buttons are unavailable: SLOW-FWD ,

SUBT , TITLE/PBC , ANGLE , STEP , AUDIO ,

RDM and A-B .

● In JPEG mode, the other operations are the same as those in MP3/WMA mode.

Play MP4

In disc mode, the root menu is displayed on the screen and the first file will be played automatically.

During playback, you can press to stop playback and return to the root menu.

1. Press the navigation buttons to select your desired folder or file from the root menu.

2. Press OK or to open the folder, or play the selected file.

● In the root menu, you can also use the number buttons to select a file for playback.

● The ANGLE , PROG , RDM , and TITLE/PBC buttons are invalid.

● The other functions are the same as those in DVD operation, while the repeat function is the same as that in MP3/WMA operation.

ESP and ID3 functions

● The unit supports the ESP (Electrical

Shock Protection) function to ensure smooth disc playback on the move.

● During MP3/WMA playback, the current file and folder names as well as the

ID3 information (if available in V1.0/2.0 format) will scroll on the LCD screen. The

ID3 information includes the song title, and the artist and album name.

USB operation

Power on the unit, then connect a USB storage device to the USB socket.

The screen will display the root menu of the

USB storage device.

This unit supports picture (JPEG format), audio (MP3 or WMA format) and video (MP4 format) playback. All the operations are the same as those of the corresponding format.

NOTE:

1. Compatibility with all file formats is not guaranteed.

2. Not all USB products can be charged from the unit.

Set up the DVD System Menu

1. Press SETUP on the remote control to access the DVD System Menu on the TV screen.

There are 6 setup pages in total.

2. Press / to select a desired setup page.

3. Press / to select a setup item on the selected setup page.

4. Press to enter the setup item.

5. Press / to select an option for the setup item, and then press OK to confirm.

● Press to return to the upper level.

● Press SETUP on the remote control again or use the navigation buttons to highlight

EXIT SETUP and then press OK to exit the

System Menu.

91

92

FURRION STEREO

Operation

The 6 setup pages of the DVD System Menu are as follows:

SYSTEM SETUP

TV SYSTEM

The unit supports output of various TV systems.

If your TV only supports NTSC or PAL system, the screen will blink and become colorless when the wrong TV system is selected. In this case go to TV SYSTEM and select NTSC, PAL or AUTO to match the system of your TV.

RESOLUTION

Select the resolution level.

TV TYPE

Select an option below to match your TV screen size.

4:3 PS : Choose the item when connecting a

TV set with 4:3 screen. When playing pictures of 16:9 size, the left and right parts of the video will be cut out, and displayed on full screen.

4:3 LB : Choose the item when connecting a

TV set with 4:3 screen. When playing pictures of 16:9 size, the top and bottom parts of the

TV screen will be turned into a black square respectively.

16:9 : Choose the item when connecting a TV set with 16:9 wide screen.

PASSWORD

Lock or unlock the rating level of Parental

Control.

The default state is locked, and the default password is 0000.

You can set a new password that you like:

Select PASSWORD and then press to enter the setup item.

Input the original password 0000, and then press OK to unlock it.

Press to enter the setup item again, then input a new password that you like and finally press OK to confirm.

RATING

Set a new rating level for Parental Control.

● Select PASSWORD and then press to enter the setup item.

Input the set password, and then press

OK to unlock the rating level setting for

Parental Control.

● Select RATING and then press to enter the setup item.

Use the navigation buttons to select your desired rating level, and then press OK to confirm.

● Select PASSWORD again and then press to enter the setup item.

Input the password and then press OK to lock the new rating level setting for

Parental Control.

DEFAULT

Reset all settings to their original status.

LANGUAGE SETUP

OSD LANGUAGE

Select the language of the system menu and all interfaces displayed during playback.

AUDIO LANG

Select the audio language.

SUBTITLE LANG

Select the subtitle language.

26

FURRION STEREO

Operation

MENU LANG

Select the disc menu language.

AUDIO SETUP

SHARPNESS

Adjust the sharpness of video output.

SPEAKER SETUP

AUDIO OUT

Select a digital output method: SPDIF/OFF ,

SPDIF /RAW , or SPDIF/PCM .

HDMI AUDIO:

AUTO : Selected to output the audio automatically by RAW or PCM type.

VIDEO SETUP

DOWNMIX

Select your desired sound effect when there is no center speaker or subwoofer.

LT/RT : When playing a disc with PRO LOGIC

Dolby stereo effect, choose the item to output audio signal with vivid theatre effect.

STEREO : If you choose this item, for audio signal with 5.1 channels, only signal of the left and right channels will be output; for audio signal with 2 channels, the common stereo signal will be output.

VSS : If you choose this item, for a disc recorded with 5.1 channels, the main channel speakers can output audio signal with VSS effect.

DIGITAL SETUP

BRIGHTNESS

Adjust the brightness of video output.

CONTRAST

Adjust the contrast of video output.

HUE

Adjust the hue of video output.

SATURATION

Adjust the saturation of video output.

DYNAMIC RANGE

After selecting the compression mode of

LINE OUT , you can set this item to adjust the linear compression ratio.

FULL : Set the Peak-to-Peak value of the audio signal to minimum.

OFF : Set the Peak-to-Peak value to maximum.

27

93

94

FURRION STEREO

Operation

DUAL MONO

Select a desired audio output mode for the left and right channels of signal.

It is mainly for Karaoke of Ac3.

There are 4 modes in all:

STEREO, MONO L, MONO R, MIX MONO

About Parental Control

Q: After insertion of a DVD into the disc slot, a dialogue box appears, asking for a password of 4 digits. Why?

A: This is because the movie you are playing was rated with Parental Control, and the current rating level of the unit is lower than the one of the current disc. You must input the right password and enter it into the

Parental Control setup menu and then set an equal or higher rating level than the one of the current disc.

Note:

● If you have not changed the password, the factory preset password for the unit will be empty. You will need to input a desired password and verify it by inputting the password again before entering the

Parental Control setup menu.

● For the rating level setup of Parental

Control of the unit, please refer to the relative content of the SYSTEM SETUP menu for details.

Accessories: Parental Control

The Parental Control function of a DVD player can be used to control playback of movie scenes on a DVD disc set with a rating level.

You can set the DVD player (including the software player on a PC) with a certain rating level via the SETUP MENU on the TV screen.

If the rating level set in the disc is higher than the one set in the DVD player, the DVD player cannot play the disc. Sometimes the

Parental Control sequences in some discs are different from each other. The rating level setup can be protected with a password.

If you select Unlock , the Parental Control function will be invalid, and the whole content of the disc can be played.

A DVD disc can be designed with different rating levels of Parental Control so that the

DVD player can play different versions of scenes from the same movie based on the set rating levels. Depending on the DVD feature of seamless switching, the scenes unsuitable for children will be cleared or replaced by other suitable scenes automatically.

All rating levels of Parental Control are as follows:

Unlock

1. Kid Safe

2. G

3. PG

4. PG 13

5. R

6. NC 17

7. Adult

28

29

Operation

Region Code

Q: No DVD playback. REGION ERROR is displayed after insertion of a disc into the disc slot. Why?

A: Because the DVD player and disc have different region codes. If they do not match, the DVD player cannot play the disc.

Appendix: Region code of DVD

The Motion Picture Association of America

(MPAA) divided the world into 6 regions, and allocated every region a code, named the region code. The region codes and the countries or areas represented by the region codes are as follows:

Region I: America, Canada, East-Pacific

Islands;

Region 2: Japan, West Europe, North Europe,

Egypt, South Africa, Middle East;

Region 3: South-east Asian countries including Taiwan, Hong Kong,

South Korea, Thailand, Indonesia, etc.;

Region 4: Australia, New Zealand, Central

South America, South Pacific

Islands;

Region 5: Russia, Mongolia, Indian Peninsula,

Middle Asia, East Europe, North

Korea, North Africa, North-west

Asia etc.;

Region 6: China mainland.

FURRION STEREO

95

96

FURRION STEREO

Operation

Bluetooth Operation

Pair DV1230 with your mobile phone

1. Activate Bluetooth mode on your mobile device. Then press BT on the front panel of DV1230 to enter pairing mode.

2. When DV1230 is detected by your mobile phone, the device name FURRION

DV1230-XXXX (where X can be any character from A-Z or number from 0-9) is shown on your mobile phone.

3. Select the device name on your mobile phone, then an input box will pop up, asking you to input a password.

4. Input 0000 and confirm. Upon successful pairing and connection, 'LINK OK' will appear on the LCD of DV1230.

Note:

1. Some mobile phones support automatic re-connection after first-time pairing with DV1230. Some other mobile phones may need you to select the device name

( FURRION DV1230-XXXX ) from the list of paired Bluetooth devices to confirm reconnection.

2. In case of casual disconnection, select the device name ( FURRION DV1230-XXXX ) from the list of paired Bluetooth devices to confirm re-connection.

Disconnect / unpair DV1230 from your mobile phone

1. To disconnect:

On your mobile phone, select the connected device name ( FURRION

DV1230-XXXX ) from the list of paired

Bluetooth devices and confirm disconnection.

2. To unpair:

Press and hold BT on the front panel of

DV1230 for about 5 seconds to clear the pairing information.

Operate your mobile phone via

Bluetooth

When the Bluetooth connection is ready, the call you make or receive will be transferred from your mobile phone to DV1230.

1. When connected: Use controls on your mobile phone to switch sound output between DV1230 and the mobile phone.

2. To dial a number with the remote control of DV1230:

● Use number buttons 0-9 to enter a telephone number.

* You can press CLEAR to cancel a wrong input if necessary.

● Press / on the front panel (or on the remote control) to call out.

3. To redial a number:

/ on the front panel (or on ● Press the remote control) to show the last dialed number on the LCD and call out.

4. To accept a call:

When there is an incoming call, press / on the front panel (or on the remote control) to accept the call.

5. To reject a call:

When there is an incoming call, press and hold / on the front panel (or press on the remote control) to reject the call.

6. To end a call:

During a call, press and hold / on the front panel (or press on the remote control) to end the call.

Note: When there is an incoming call, the calling number will be displayed on the screen of DV1230.

30

31

FURRION STEREO

Operation

Play an audio file from another

Bluetooth device to DV1230

"LINK OK" is displayed when DV1230 is paired and connected with another Bluetooth device.

If the Bluetooth device supports A2DP, you can stream music from the Bluetooth device to

DV1230 for playback.

To play audio through Bluetooth, you must activate Bluetooth mode on your mobile device.

If the Bluetooth device supports AVRCP, you can use the basic audio playback control functions

(such as play/pause) from DV1230.

Note: In other modes (except during a call via

Bluetooth), press BT on the front panel to switch between different modes.

Set up Bluetooth connection using

NFC (only supporting mobile phones with NFC function)

1. Enable the NFC function of your mobile phone and make sure the screen is active and unlocked.

2. Move your mobile phone towards DV1230 so that the NFC detection area on your mobile phone touches that on DV1230.

You can now connect your mobile phone with or disconnect it from DV1230 conveniently.

Note: For first-time pairing and connection, you will be asked to enter a password. Please enter "0000".

App Operation

● With the Furrion ES control App (either

Android or iOS version), you can use your mobile device as a remote control.

● The App uses BT Low Energy (BLE) technology to connect to DV1230 instead of infrared in the physical remote control, thus getting free of line-of-sight connection.

● While the App checks for compatibility, you can cross-check the specifications of your mobile device to see if it supports

BLE technology before installation.

● Find and download “Furrion ES Control” from Google Play (Android) or App Store

(iOS) on your mobile device. Run the App as instructed.

● The App works with various models in the

Furrion DV range entertainment system.

Install and use the App

1. Install the ES Control App on your mobile phone.

2. Enable Bluetooth on your mobile phone, and run the APP.

3. Select the device name " DV1230-4.0-

XXXX " (where X can be any character of

A-Z or number 0-9 ) to connect.

4. Use the available functions on the App to control DV1230 freely.

97

98

FURRION STEREO

Maintenance

Maintenance and Cleaning of Discs

Disc Maintenance

1. To keep the disc clean, handle the disc by its edge, and do not touch the disc surface of the play side.

2. Do not stick paper or tape on the disc. If there is glue on the disc surface, wipe it off before using.

3. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight, or nearby heat sources such as caliduct, or leave it in a car parked in direct sunlight where there can be a considerable rise in temperature.

4. Put the disc inside a disc case after finishing playback.

Disc Cleaning

1. Before playing, wipe the disc with a clean cloth, wipe the disc outwards from the disc center.

2. Do not use petrol, thinners, commercially available cleaners or anti-static sprays for plastic

LPs to wipe discs.

32

FURRION STEREO

33

Troubleshooting

Please read the user manual carefully before using the product. If you have any problems with this product, please refer to the below troubleshooting guide to help you resolve the issue.

TROUBLE/SYMPTOM SOLUTION

No picture, sound and indication

No sound but picture

OK

Ensure that the power switch is on.

Ensure that the wall inlet is OK.

Ensure that the power cord is not damaged or the fuse is not blown.

Ensure that the power connection is OK.

Ensure that the audio output of the unit is in good connection with the

TV's audio input.

Check whether the audio connector is damaged.

Check whether you have turned down the volume.

Ensure that the AUDIO setup of the unit is correct.

Ensure that the audio is not muted.

Black and white picture or screen rolling

Ensure that the TV SYSTEM (e.g. PAL, NTSC) setup is correct.

No picture but sound

OK

Flaws in picture or sound

No disc or bad disc

Ensure that the video output of the unit is in good connection with the

TV's video input.

Ensure that you have turned your TV to the AV input channel connecting to the unit.

Check whether the video connector is damaged.

Ensure that the VIDEO setup of the unit is correct.

Check whether AUDIO setup is correct.

Check whether the disc is scratched or stained.

Check whether the AV connector and output terminal are stained.

Check whether there is condensation inside the lens. If so, leave the unit off for an hour or so, and then try again.

Check whether the installation angle is less than 30.

Ensure that you have inserted the disc into the disc slot.

Check whether the disc has been put in the reverse side.

Check whether the disc is distorted.

Check whether the disc is stained or scratched badly.

Ensure that the disc format is compatible with the unit.

Ensure that the temperature inside the car is not too high. If so, let the unit cool off until the ambient temperature returns to normal.

Insert another disc into the disc slot.

99

100

FURRION STEREO

Troubleshooting

TROUBLE/SYMPTOM SOLUTION

Remote control does not work

Check the battery of the remote control and make sure that it is not dead.

Direct the remote control to the IR sensor of the unit.

Check whether there are obstacles between the remote control and IR sensor.

Turn off the power, then turn on again.

Some function buttons do not work

Reset the unit, then turn on again.

Remove the front panel from the unit, then put it back and turn on again.

The radio does not work

Check whether the antenna cable is connected firmly, or manually tune for a station.

Functions locked or no response for

Bluetooth function

Press RESET with a sharp object such as a clip to reset the unit and load its factory default settings.

Specifications

General Specification

Power supply requirement

Total power

DC 12V

Dimensions

RMS (4x25W + 2x15W)

913/16" x 45/8" x 7" (249 x 118 x

178 mm)

DVD Deck Specification

Format

Video system

DVD/VCD/JPEG/MP4/WMA/CD

NTSC/PAL/PAL-M/PAL-N/

AUTO (optional)

Audio system 24 bit/96KHz

Loading system Auto Loading

Mounting angle 0 to +/-30

Video Specification

Video type

16:9 and 4:3

Load impedance: 75 ohms

Horizontal resolution

600

Audio Specification

Audio output

(Analog audio)

Frequency response

S/N ratio

(Audio)

2.0V

20Hz ~ 20KHz (at 1 KHz 0 dB)

≥60dB (at 1 KHz 0 dB)

Separation 50dB

Speaker output 4 Ω

Radio Specification

FM section

Frequency range

87.5MHz - 107.9MHz (US)

87.5MHz - 108.0MHz (EU)

87.5MHz - 108.0MHz (AUS)

Usable sensitivity

I.F frequency

AM section

3uV

10.7MHz

Frequency range

530KHz -1710KHz (US)

522KHz -1620KHz (EU)

522KHz -1710KHz (AUS)

Bluetooth Specification

Bluetooth

Version

Operation

Frequency

Bluetooth

Output

V4.0

2.4GHz ( ISM BAND)

4dBm

34

35

FURRION STEREO

Warranty

FURRION WARRANTS FOR A PERIOD OF 1 YEAR FROM DATE OF RETAIL PURCHASE BY THE

ORIGINAL END-USE PURCHASER, THAT THIS PRODUCT, WHEN DELIVERED TO YOU IN NEW

CONDITION, IN ORIGINAL PACKAGING, FROM A FURRION AUTHORIZED RESELLER AND USED

IN NORMAL CONDITIONS, IS FREE FROM ANY DEFECTS IN MANUFACTURING, MATERIALS,

AND WORKMANSHIP. IN CASE OF SUCH DEFECT, FURRION SHALL REPLACE OR REPAIR THE

PRODUCT AT NO CHARGE TO YOU. THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER: PRODUCTS WHERE

THE ORIGINAL SERIAL NUMBERS HAVE BEEN REMOVED, ALTERED OR CANNOT READILY

BE DETERMINED; DAMAGE OR LOSS CAUSED BY ACCIDENT, MISUSE, ABUSE, NEGLECT,

PRODUCT MODIFICATION, FAILURE TO FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS IN INSTRUCTION MANUAL,

COMMERCIAL OR INDUSTRIAL USE; DAMAGE OR LOSS CAUSED TO THE DECORATIVE

SURFACE OF PRODUCT; TO ANY DATA, SOFTWARE OR INFORMATION; AND NORMAL WEAR

AND TEAR. THIS WARRANTY ONLY PROTECTS THE ORIGINAL END-USER (“YOU”) AND

IS NOT TRANSFERABLE; ANY ATTEMPT TO TRANSFER THIS WARRANTY SHALL MAKE IT

IMMEDIATELY VOID. THIS WARRANTY IS ONLY VALID IN THE COUNTRY OF PURCHASE.

THIS WARRANTY AND REMEDIES SET FORTH ABOVE ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL

OTHER WARRANTIES, REMEDIES AND CONDITIONS, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, EXPRESS

OR IMPLIED. FURRION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR

A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IF FURRION CANNOT LAWFULLY DISCLAIM IMPLIED WARRANTIES

UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, ALL SUCH WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE LIMITED IN DURATION

TO THE DURATION OF THIS WARRANTY.

No Furrion reseller, agent, or employee is authorized to make any modification, extension, or addition to this warranty.

FURRION IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONDITION,

OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS,

DOWNTIME, GOODWILL, DAMAGE TO OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY EQUIPMENT OR PROPERTY, ANY

COSTS OF RECOVERING, REPROGRAMMING, OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM OR DATA STORED

IN OR USED WITH FURRION PRODUCTS. FURRION’S TOTAL LIABILITY IS LIMITED TO THE REPAIR

OR REPLACEMENT OF THIS PRODUCT PURSUANT TO THE TERMS OF THIS WARRANTY.

SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS ON THE DURATION OF IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY

TO YOU. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE

OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY BY STATE OR (WHERE APPLICABLE IN THE COUNTRIES WHERE

FURRION HAS NON-US/CANADIAN AUTHORIZED DEALERS) COUNTRY. NO ACTION OR CLAIM

TO ENFORCE THIS WARRANTY SHALL BE COMMENCED AFTER THE EXPIRATION OF THE

WARRANTY PERIOD.

Keep your receipt, delivery slip, or other appropriate payment record to establish the warranty period. Service under this warranty must be obtained by contacting Furrion at [email protected]

Product features or specifications as described or illustrated are subject to change without notice.

Furrion Innovation Center & Institute of Technology

● 52567 Independence Ct., Elkhart, IN 46514, USA ● Toll free:1-888-354-5792

● Email: [email protected]

©2007-2018 Furrion Ltd. Furrion ® and the Furrion logo are trademarks licensed for use by

Furrion Ltd. and registered in the U.S. and other countries.

©2007-2018 Furrion Ltd. Furrion ® et le logo Furrion sont des marques déposées par Furrion

Ltd. et enregistrées aux Etats-Unis et ailleurs.

©2007-2018 Furrion Ltd. Furrion ® y el logotipo de Furrion y son marcas comerciales con licencia de uso de Furrion Ltd. y están registradas en los Estados Unidos y en otros países.

FURRION.COM

IM-FAV00039 V2.0

36

101


S

EE

L

EVE

L II

TM

RV Tank Monitor

102

MODEL 709-P3

MANUAL

IMPORTANT OPERATOR INFORMATION

DATE INSTALLED: ____________________________________________________________________

SERIAL NUMBER: ____________________________________________________________________

Black Water Tank

Grey Water Tank

Fresh Water Tank

Signal Level Sender Height

Printed in Canada www.garnetinstruments.com


GARNET

S EE L EVE L II TM

Tank Monitor

MODEL 709-P3

Table of Contents

CHAPTER 1 - OVERVIEW .............................................................................................3

CHAPTER 2 - SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .....................................................................4

CHAPTER 3 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ..........................................................6

CHAPTER 4 - DISPLAY CALIBRATION .....................................................................7

CHAPTER 5 - SENDER PROGRAMMING ...............................................................9

CHAPTER 6 - INSTALLATION GUIDE ..................................................................... 13

CHAPTER 7 - TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ......................................................... 20

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................... 28

CHAPTER 9 - SERVICE AND WARRANTY INFORMATION ............................ 29

MAIL IN WARRANTY ................................................................................................. 31

Page 2

709-P3 Manual_v3.5 - 01-Sep-2018

709-P3 Manual

103


CHAPTER 1 - OVERVIEW

T he S

EE

L

EVE

L II TM Tank Monitor represents a massive leap forward in level measurement technology for the Recreational

Vehicle industry. The SeeLeveL has a combination of features, accuracy, reliability, and diagnostic capability that have never been available before.

Model 709-P3 will monitor the battery voltage, the fresh water and sewer holding tanks, and includes a pump switch. The information is displayed on a 3-digit alpha-numeric LED display. In addition, the system can display the operating characteristics of each of the tank sending units, giving it unsurpassed diagnostic capability.

WARNING: All power circuits must be fused. If a fuse is not provided with the system then it is the installer’s responsibility to install a fuse with a maximum rating of 7.5 amps. A relay is required if more than 7.5 amps is needed for the pump.

For more detailed information please refer to Chapter 7

“TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE” and section “ current” .

How to avoid damaging the display or pump switch due to excessive

104

709-P3 Manual Page 3


CHAPTER 2 - SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

T he SeeLeveL consists of a display unit that mounts inside the

RV, and sender panels that stick to the side of the holding tank.

A single 2 conductor wire is used to connect all the sender panels to the display.

The Sender: (DFKVHQGHUSDQHOLVDÁH[LEOHVHOIDGKHVLYHSULQWHG circuit board which is adhered to the side of the holding tank.

The sender panel can be cut to length to match the height of the tank, and it auto calibrates itself so that it can read from Empty to Full regardless of the height of the tank. The sender scans the water level through the tank wall using advanced digital techniques programmed into the sender microprocessor. When the sender transmits the water or sewer level information to the display, it sends a digital code that has built in error detection, making it highly unlikely for the display to read an incorrect level, even if the wiring is marginal. In addition to the level, the sender also transmits diagnostic information about its operation. This information can be used to determine if there is buildup of sludge on the inside of the tank, or to determine if the sender is damaged or delaminating from the side of the tank. If sludge buildup in the

WDQNEHFRPHVH[WUHPHWKHJDXJHZLOOFHDVHWRRSHUDWHSURSHUO\ so by monitoring the signal power the tank can be cleaned before

WKHEXLOGXSJHWVH[FHVVLYH7KUHHGLIIHUHQWVHQGHURSWLRQV-6

710ES, and 710SS) and the ability to double stack the senders provide accurate level measurement for tank heights ranging from

4 ½” to 34”.

The Display: The display receives the information from the three sender panels via a single 2 conductor wire, and displays the level information in percent of full on a 3-digit LED display. When the button for a particular tank is pressed, the display shows the level for that tank. If the button is pressed and released, the display will show the level for about 5 seconds and then shut down automatically. If another button is pressed before the display shuts down, then the new level will immediately be shown. If the same water or waste button is pressed twice, the display will hold on that tank and continue to show updated levels for 5 minutes

EHIRUHVKXWWLQJRII7KLVDOORZVWKHXVHUWRPRQLWRUWKHÀOOLQJRU draining of a tank. By pressing two buttons at once, the diagnostic functions can be accessed; these are described in detail in the troubleshooting chapter.

Page 4 709-P3 Manual

105


If a sender is operating properly and connected to the display with good wiring, then the display will show the level normally. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted, or cut, or if the sender panel is defective, then the display will indicate an error code. The various error codes are shown in the troubleshooting chapter.

With these diagnostic features and the digital nature of the tank level sensing technology, it is almost impossible for the system to indicate an incorrect water level, and in the very unlikely event it does occur, servicing is greatly aided with the diagnostic information.

The system also shows the RV battery voltage by measuring the voltage which powers the display. The voltage is shown with a resolution of 0.1 volt.

106



CHAPTER 3 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

T he display is the only system component that is accessed by the user. All user input to the display is done using the four buttons along the bottom of the display. Operation of the display is as follows:

To read a water or sewer tank level:

1. Press the button corresponding to the tank to be checked and release it, the display will show the level in percent on the LED display. If no other button is pressed, then the display will shut off after about 5 seconds.

2. ,I DQRWKHU EXWWRQ LQFOXGLQJ BATT ) is pressed before the

VHFRQG WLPH LV XS IRU WKH ÀUVW EXWWRQ WKH GLVSOD\ ZLOO immediately switch to showing the new level or voltage. The

5 second timeout is restarted every time a button is pressed.

3. To continuously display a reading, press and release the desired button, and then press the same button a second time. When the button is released, the display will be in hold mode, which is indicated by the decimal point on the right hand side turning on. While the display is in the hold mode it will recheck the level once per second so the user can watch

WKHOHYHOFKDQJHZKLOHWKHWDQNLVEHLQJÀOOHGRUGUDLQHG7KH display will automatically shut off after 5 minutes in hold mode. To end the hold mode before the 5 minutes is up, press any tank button, and the display will shut off.

To read the battery voltage:

1. Press the BATT button and release it, the display will show the battery voltage on the LED display.

2. If no other button is pressed, then the display will shut down after about 5 seconds. If the BATT button is held down, the display will continuously recheck the voltage and show

WKHXSGDWHGYDOXH7KHUHDGLQJPD\ÁLFNHUEDFNDQGIRUWK

EHWZHHQWZRYDOXHVIRUH[DPSOHDQGYROWV7KLVLV normal behavior for a digital voltage display.

3. If another button is pressed before the 5 second time is up for the BATT button, the display will immediately switch to showing the value for the new button. The 5 second timeout is restarted every time a button is pressed.

4. There is no hold mode for the battery voltage.


107

108


CHAPTER 4 - DISPLAY CALIBRATION

To program the LED brightness:

1. If the display is to be used inside the coach, the LED brightness should be low. If it is to be used in the service bay area where sunlight can reach it, the LED brightness should be high.

2. To program the LED brightness, the display needs to enter the brightness programming mode. To do this, press and hold down the BATT button, the display will show the battery voltage.

3. While continuing to hold down the BATT button, press and hold down the GREY button. Continue to hold down both buttons for about 5 seconds until the display shows “ bri ” to indicate the brightness programming mode. When this occurs release both buttons.

4. The display will now indicate the brightness that is currently programmed by showing “ b-1 ”, “ b-2 ”, “ b-3 ”, or “ b-4 ”, where

“ b-1 ” is the minimum brightness and “ b-4 µLVWKHPD[LPXP brightness.

5. Press the GREY tank button to increase brightness, or the

FRESH tank button to decrease brightness.

6. When the display shows the correct brightness, press the

BATT EXWWRQWRH[LWWKHSURJUDPPLQJPRGH

To program the number of senders for each tank:

1. To program the number of senders for each tank, the display needs to enter the sender programming mode. This should only be done at the time of installation, there is no reason to change the number of senders afterward. Make sure that the number of senders programmed into the display matches with the number of senders connected, otherwise the display will show an error.

2. To enter the sender programming mode, press and hold down the button for the tank to be programmed, the display may show a level or an error message for that tank.

3. While continuing to hold down the button for the tank, press and hold down the BATT button. The display will immediately show ” dIA µGLDJQRVWLFVFRQWLQXHWRKROGGRZQERWKEXWWRQV until the display enters the programming mode, this should take about 5 seconds.



4. When the programming mode is entered, the display will show “ FrS ” if entering the number of senders for the fresh tank, “ GrS ” if entering the grey tank, or “ bLS ” if entering the black tank. When this occurs release both buttons.

5. The display will now show “ 1SE µRQHVHQGHURU´ 2SE µWZR senders), based on what is currently programmed into the display. These are the only two options, the display will not work with more than two senders per tank.

6. To change the number of senders, press the tank button, each time the button is pressed the display will switch to the other number.

7. When the display shows the correct number of senders, press the BATT EXWWRQWRH[LWWKHSURJUDPPLQJPRGH(DFKWDQN will need to be calibrated individually using this procedure.

The battery voltage is calibrated at the factory, this should never need to be changed.


109

110


CHAPTER 5 - SENDER PROGRAMMING

To program the 710ES or 710SS sender for the correct tank:

1. Since the senders are all connected in parallel to save wiring and to simplify installation, the senders must be programmed so they know which tank they are on. The senders can be programmed for either the fresh, grey, or black tank. This is done with the two tabs on the top corners of the sender. See the following diagram.

2. The senders default to fresh tank operation if the programming is not altered. Consequently, if the sender is for the fresh tank, nothing further needs to be done to it.

3. If the sender is for the grey tank, remove the tab that says

“ GRY µQH[WWRLW

4. If the sender is for the black tank, remove the tab that says

“ BLK µQH[WWRLW

5. This is all that is required to program the senders for the correct tank. However, if you make an error, you have one chance to correct it, as described below.

6. If the “ GRY ” tab has been removed and it should be a black tank sender, or if the “ BLK ” tab has been removed and it should be a grey tank sender, then cut out the recessed greyblack correction tab that says “ GBC µQH[WWRLW7KLVUHYHUVHV the effect of the grey and black tabs.

7. If either the “ GRY ” or “ BLK ” tabs have been removed and it should be for a fresh tank, then remove the other “ GRY ” or

“ BLK ” tab. When both the “ GRY ” and “ BLK ” tabs are removed, it is equivalent to neither of them being removed.

8. If the sender is single, no further programming is required.

9. If double stacked senders are used, the top sender must have additional programming, as described below.

10. Refer to the 710ES and 710SS sender programming diagram.

To program the 710ES or 710SS sender as top or bottom:

1. Since the senders are all connected in parallel to save wiring and to simplify installation, the senders must be programmed so they know whether they are a single, top, or bottom sender.

This is done with the tab at the top center of the sender. See the following diagram.


Page 10


2. The senders default to single or bottom operation if the programming is not altered. Consequently, if the sender is for single or bottom operation, nothing further needs to be done

WRLWEH\RQGSURJUDPPLQJLWIRUWKHFRUUHFWWDQN

3. For a top sender, remove the tab that says “ TOP µQH[WWRLW

4. This is all that is required to program the senders for single, top, or bottom use. However, if you make an error, you have one chance to correct it, as described below.

5. If the “ TOP ” tab has been removed and it should be a single or bottom sender, then cut out the recessed top correction tab that says “ TC µQH[WWRLW7KLVUHYHUVHVWKHHIIHFWRIWKH top tab.

6. Verify that both the top and bottom senders have been programmed for the correct tank.

To program the 710JS sender for the correct tank:

1. Since the senders are all connected in parallel to save wiring and to simplify installation, the senders must be programmed so they know which tank they are on. The senders can be programmed for either the fresh, grey, or black tank. This is done with the two tabs on the top corners of the sender. See the following diagram.

2. The senders default to fresh tank operation if the programming is not altered. Consequently, if the sender is for the fresh tank, nothing further needs to be done to it.

3. If the sender is for the grey tank, remove the tab that says

“ GRY µQH[WWRLW

4. If the sender is for the black tank, remove the tab that says

“ BLK µQH[WWRLW

5. This is all that is required to program the senders for the correct tank. However, if you make an error, you have one chance to correct it, as described below.

6. If the “ GRY” or “ BLK” tab has been removed by mistake, the sender can be changed to a fresh tank sender by cutting the

RWKHUFRUQHUWDE´ GRY” or “ BLK” ).

7. 5HIHUWRWKH-6VHQGHUSURJUDPPLQJGLDJUDP

709-P3 Manual

111


112

709-P3 Manual

710ES AND 710SS SENDER PROGRAMMING

Page 11


710JS SENDER PROGRAMMING


113


CHAPTER 6 - INSTALLATION GUIDE

1. Please refer to the “ Troubleshooting and Installation Tips ” section in Chapter 7 for details on avoiding installation issues.

2. The installation consists of mounting the display inside the RV, cutting and fastening the senders to the sides of the holding tanks, connecting wiring, and programming the display. When wiring DO NOT use spade connectors to join wires, only use crimp on butt connectors or solder the wires together.

3. Mount the display by cutting a hole in the wall 3” wide by 1 to the display panel connector.

7⁄8 ” high and bringing the wiring out through the hole to connect

4. Connect the wiring according to the following table. It is

HDVLHUWRFRQQHFWWKHZLULQJWRWKHGLVSOD\FRQQHFWRUÀUVWDQG then plug the connector into the display panel. The senders need to be grounded to a single ground wire from the display.

Make sure that the system ground is connected to the breaker panel ground.

Wire Color

Red 18 gauge

Black 18 gauge

Blue 18 gauge

White 18 gauge

Function

+12V power input to monitor

Ground

Tank senders

Pump indicator

5. Determine where to mount the senders on the tanks. They

ZLOO QHHG WR KDYH D ÁDW DUHD RQ WKH VLGH RI WKH WDQN ODUJH enough so the whole width of the sender is in contact with the side of the tank, all the way from the top to the bottom of the tank. Make sure that any metal is at least an 1” away from either side or the top and bottom of the sender, and at least 2” away from the face of the sender. Clean the area well so that there is no dust, grease, oil, water, etc., that would prevent the adhesive on the sender from sticking.

6. Measure the height of the tank to determine which sender

FRQÀJXUDWLRQ WR XVH DQG KRZ ORQJ WKH VHQGHUV VKRXOG EH

Refer to the following table. Note: '2127PL[VHQGHUW\SHV when stacking senders.

Page 13

114

709-P3 Manual

Page 14


Tank

Height

4 ½ ” - 5”

5” - 7”

7” - 13”

13” - 17”

17” - 25”

25” - 34”

Sender Options

Best Resolution Other Acceptable

-6 -

-6

ES stacked ES stacked ES stacked SS

ES

SS

SS stacked SS

-

For single sender applications:

The sender ends should be it is cut less than 4

¼ ” to ¾ ” away from the top and bottom of the tank, to allow for the thickness of the tank top and

ERWWRPDQGDQ\ERZVLQWKHPVHHWKHGLDJUDPV7KHVHQGHUV are calibrated to account for this distance from the bottom of the tank. The SS sender is cut to the nearest even 2” in length. The

(6VHQGHULVFXWWRWKHQHDUHVWHYHQµLQOHQJWKIRUH[DPSOH for a system with a tank height of 11.75”, cut the sender to be

10.5” long, this allows

YHUWLFDOO\RQWKHWDQN7KH-6VHQGHULVFXWWRWKHQHDUHVWµLQ length. IMPORTANT: DO NOT cut the 710SS sender shorter than

6”. This sender will not work if it is cut shorter than 6”. DO NOT cut the 710ES sender shorter than 4

½

5⁄8 ” at each end when the sender is centered

½ ”. This sender will not work if

µ'2127FXWWKH-6VHQGHUVKRUWHUWKDQ

4”. This sender will not work if it is cut less than 4”.

For double stacked sender applications:

For tall tanks, double stacked 710ES or 710SS senders are used.

The sender ends should be

H[DPSOHLIWKHWDQNKHLJKWLVµWKHQµ

10.5” long.

¼ ” to ¾ ” away from the top and bottom of the tank, to allow for the thickness of the tank top and

ERWWRPDQGDQ\ERZVLQWKHPVHHWKHGLDJUDPV7KHVHQGHUV are calibrated to account for this distance from the bottom of the tank. In addition, there needs to be a gap of 1⁄16 ” to 1⁄8 ” in between the double senders. Therefore the total length of both senders will be: tank height ¼ ”¼ ”1⁄8 ”, then rounded down to the nearest

µ(6VHQGHURUµ66VHQGHU7KHWRSDQGERWWRPVHQGHUV

VKRXOG EH DSSUR[LPDWHO\ WKH VDPH OHQJWK IRU EHVW UHVXOWV )RU

¼ ”¼ ”1⁄8 ”= 21 3⁄8 ”, so the total length of both ES senders will be 21”. Make both senders

709-P3 Manual

115


116

709-P3 Manual

710ES AND 710SS SENDER

Page 15


710JS SENDER


117

118


7. 7RPDNHWKHVHQGHUVWKHULJKWOHQJWKDVVXPLQJWKH\DUHWRR long) they will need to cut off with a pair of scissors. The end to be cut is the bottom end, which is the opposite end

IURPWKHWRSZKHUHWKHZLUHVFRPHRXWVHHWKHGLDJUDPV

DO NOT cut the sides, and DO NOT cut the 710ES sender shorter than 4 ½ ”, the 710SS sender shorter than 6” or the

-6VHQGHUVKRUWHUWKDQµ7KHFXWPXVWEHLQEHWZHHQWKH

VHQVRUSDGVDQGWKHFXWPXVWEHPDGHSDUDOOHOWRWKHH[LVWLQJ bottom end. Double check your measurements, if the sender is cut too short, it cannot be lengthened.

8. The senders need to be programmed so they know which tank they are on. This is done by selectively cutting off the tabs on the top of the sender. See the chapter entitled “SENDER

PROGRAMMING” for details.

9. For double stacked sender systems, the senders also need to be programmed so they know whether they are being used as top or bottom senders. See the chapter entitled “SENDER

PROGRAMMING” for details.

10. Once the sender is cut to length and programmed, do a test by taping the sender to the tank wall. Make sure there are no air gaps between the sender and the tank. Verify operation before permanently sticking the sender to the tank wall.

2QFHSURSHURSHUDWLRQKDVEHHQFRQÀUPHGFDUHIXOO\SHHOWKH backing paper off the adhesive. Do this slowly to prevent the adhesive from being ripped off the sender, and to prevent the backing paper from ripping. Be careful not to bend the sender sharply in the process. Position the sender over the side of the tank and carefully stick it down. MAKE SURE THAT

THE END WITH WIRES IS POINTING UP!! Position the bottom of the sender at least ¼ ” above the bottom of the tank, or slightly higher if required to equalize the space at the top and bottom of the tank. Make sure that the sender is square with the tank. You only have one shot at this, if you try to peel it off the tank once it is stuck the sender may be damaged by the sharp bending. Carefully press the sender down to the tank so that all of the adhesive is contacting the tank wall.

11. Do steps 5 to 10 for the other two holding tanks.

12. Connect all the blue wires from the senders together, and to the blue wire from the display. Connect the black wire from each sender to ground at the display. It is very important that the display and the senders have the same ground. Use crimp on butt connectors to fasten the wires together. Make sure that the wires from the sender are routed to the RIGHT side of the sender, away from the sender. NEVER route the wires to the left of the sender. If they drape over the sender they could affect the reading. Secure the wires with tie wraps


Page 18

GARNET SEELEVEL II TANK MONITOR or something similar so that the wires do not rattle or press against the sender, this may result in sender damage or wires breaking over time. Refer to the enclosed wiring diagrams.

13. All that remains now is calibration and testing. The tank senders will self calibrate to whatever length they are cut, so they will always read from 0% to 100%. The display needs to be set to a single or double sender system for each tank.

See the chapter entitled “DISPLAY CALIBRATION” and the section “To program the number of senders for each tank” for details. Make sure you do it for each tank.

14. For the initial test, have the tank at least ¼ full of water or sewage, and verify that the percent level reading looks correct

VHH WKH FKDSWHU HQWLWOHG “OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS” and the section “To read a water or sewer tank level” for details). Check to see that the signal power is at least 20%

VHH WKH FKDSWHU HQWLWOHG “TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE” and the section “To review the sender diagnostics” for details). If the signal power is too low, make sure that the

VHQGHUV LV ZHOO VWXFN WR WKH VLGH RI WKH WDQN DQG WKDW WKH tank is reasonably clean inside, as a large buildup will reduce

VLJQDO VWUHQJWK 7KH JDXJH ZLOO ZRUN ZLWK PD[LPXP VLJQDO strengths as low as 20%, but it is good to have at least 50% to

60% at installation so that there is some margin available for buildup in the tank. Note that the system “learns” about the characteristics of the tank with use, so the readings may be inaccurate when the tank is empty or almost empty when the

V\VWHPLVÀUVWWHVWHG2QFHWKHWDQNKDVEHHQÀOOHGDWOHDVW

¼ full the system will be properly “taught” and should read correctly after that.

15. If equipped, connect the pump switch as required.

16. WARNING: The pump switch is rated for a maximum of 7.5 amps. The use of a relay is required if more than 7.5 amps is needed. A 7.5 amp (max) fuse must be installed in the series with the 12V power circuit to the switch!

17. Verify that the battery voltage reads correctly. If it appears low, make sure you have good wiring for the 12 volt power and the ground.

709-P3 Manual

119


120

Typical Double Stacked 710ES or 710SS Sender Installation



CHAPTER 7 - TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Display trouble codes:

If a sender or its wiring is not operating properly, the following codes are shown on the display:

1. If a sender is unresponsive or there is an open circuit in the wiring so that the sender is not connected, the display will indicate an open circuit by showing “ OPn ” on the LED display.

2. If a sender is shorted or there is a short in the wiring, the display will indicate a short circuit by showing “ Sht ” on the

LED display.

3. If a sender is sending bad data, there is damaged wiring, or if there is electrical interference, the display will indicate a data error by showing “ Err ” on the LED display. Also, if the senders have not been programmed correctly, they can interfere with one another and result in “ Err ” on the LED display. Check all the senders to make sure they are programmed correctly. If they are, replace the sender that is creating the error.

4. If the display has been programmed for a single sender, and double stacked senders have been connected, the display will show “ StA ”. In this case, change the senders or reprogram the display as required. If only a top sender has been connected, the display will show “ nbo ”, indicating that no bottom sender has been received. If the tank should only have a single sender, correct the programming on the sender, it should not be a top sender.

5. If the display has been programmed for double stacked senders for tall tanks, and only the bottom sender is working and the top one is not, then the display will show “ ntP ” indicating that no top sender is being received. If the top is working but no bottom sender is being received, then the display will show

“ nbo ”. If neither sender is working, then the display will show

“ OPn ”. Check the wiring and the programming of the senders.

If all is OK with that, replace the bad sender.

6. The display contains a permanent memory which is used to store the programming for battery voltage calibration value and the tank sender signal levels. These signal levels are used to help the system adapt to the tanks, which increases sender accuracy at low tank levels. If this memory should fail, “ CAL ”

ZLOO EH ÁDVKHG RQ WKH /(' GLVSOD\ LQGLFDWLQJ D FDOLEUDWLRQ failure. It will be necessary to replace the display if this occurs.

7. There are no diagnostics for the battery voltage.


121

122


The diagnostics can be used to check the wiring and the senders:

1. If a short circuit is showing, disconnect the senders one at a time at the sender location. If the short circuit indication goes away when a sender is removed, then that sender is bad. If all the senders are removed but a short circuit still shows, then the wiring may be shorted. Disconnect the sender wire at the display, the short indication should go away. If it doesn’t, the display is bad.

2. If an open circuit for all the senders is showing, it is most likely a wiring open circuit or display failure, since it is unlikely that all three senders are bad. Try shorting the wiring together at the display, the display should indicate a short circuit. If it doesn’t, the display is bad. If it does, then remove that connection and short the wires together at the sender locations. If no short circuit is shown, then the wiring is open. If the display does show a short circuit, then the senders must be bad.

3. If a single sender is showing an open, try shorting the wiring together right at that sender. If a short now shows, the sender is bad or not wired properly. If no short circuit shows on the display, the wiring to that sender is open.

To review the sender diagnostics:

1. The sender diagnostics can be reviewed periodically to check for any degradation of the tank senders. If a sender appears to be malfunctioning, reviewing the diagnostics should be the

ÀUVWVWHSLQWKHWURXEOHVKRRWLQJSURFHVV

2. There are two diagnostics for the senders: the signal power, and the sender height.

The signal power is an indication of how much signal is being transmitted through the tank wall and picked up by the receive part of the sender. If the signal power is too low, it can indicate a sender which is detached from the tank, excessive buildup on the inside of the tank, bad wiring to the sender, low battery voltage, or a defective sender. Typical signal power should be

50% to 60%. The minimum signal power for proper operation is 20%.

The sender height is the number of receive segments present in the sender. To determine the length of the sender, multiply the calibration by 2.0 (SS sender) or 1.5 (ES sender) or 1.0 (JS sender) to get the length in inches. The senders always auto calibrate to the length that they are cut, so this diagnostic allows

WKHXVHUWRFRQÀUPWKHOHQJWKDQGWRPDNHVXUHWKDWWKHDXWR calibration is working properly.


Page 22


3. To check the diagnostics, press and hold the button for the tank to be checked, the display will show the level for that tank.

4. While continuing to hold down the button for the tank, press the BATT button. When the display shows ” dIA ”, release the buttons, the display will then change to showing the signal power diagnostic. This is indicated by a “ P ” showing on the

OHIWGLJLWIRUH[DPSOHµ P26 ” indicates a 26% signal power.

5. The signal power will show for 5 seconds. The display will then change to showing the sender height. This is indicated by a small “ h µVKRZLQJRQWKHOHIWGLJLWIRUH[DPSOH´ h 6 ” indicates that the sender has 6 receive segments, which is 6”

KLJKIRUD-6VHQGHUµKLJKIRUDQ(6VHQGHURUµKLJKIRU an SS sender.

6. After 5 seconds of showing the height, the display will shut off.

TROUBLESHOOTING AND INSTALLATION TIPS

What to do if the system freezes or is unresponsive:

1. If the display is unresponsive, it may be “hung” due to a static discharge or electrical noise. Try rebooting it by shutting off the 12V power to it for a few seconds, then turning it back on.

What to do if operation becomes erratic or stops completely:

1. Make sure all wiring connections are solid. Do not use spade connectors to join wiring as they will degrade over time. Use insulated crimp-on butt connectors or solder and insulate the wire connections.

What to do in dual console systems if the two displays do not read the same:

1. For dual display console applications, if the consoles disagree the most likely reason is a bad console ground. Both console grounds, and the sender grounds, must be connected together with ground wiring. Do not depend on metal chassis components. See item 2 in the following section for further details.

What to do if readings jump or are inaccurate

1. We have had a few instances where 120VAC interference has caused the readings to stall and create a gap; readings would skip from 50% to 70% and then begin to function again. The cause was wiring between consoles and senders being tied

709-P3 Manual

123

124


WRRFORVHWRHQWUDQFHER[HVIRUVKRUHSRZHURUEXQGOHGZLWK

RWKHUKLJK$&YROWDJHOLQHVRUMXQFWLRQER[HV

2. Always ground the senders and the console to the same ground circuit. This is very important; RV’s can have several ground circuits with resistance between them. We have had instances where two consoles are installed with a different ground for the service bay console and interior console. If you see different levels from each console on the same tank, then the ground circuit is not common. Connect both consoles to the same ground back to the breaker panel ground point.

What to do if the system indicates a residual or non-zero water level even though the tank is drained completely:

1. 7KLVFDQEHGXHWRDFRQYH[WDQNERWWRPRUDVORSHGWDQN

ERWWRP,QWKHFDVHRIWKHFRQYH[ERWWRPWDQNDULQJRIZDWHU may remain after draining. In the case of the sloped bottom

WRWKHGUDLQYDOYHVLGHDYHU\VPDOODPRXQWRIZDWHUOHIWLQ the tank will result in a non-zero level indication. In both of these cases, temporary installation of the sender using duct tape or masking tape will allow the installer to check

WKHWDQNOHYHOEHIRUHFRPPLWWLQJWRDÀQDOVHQGHUSRVLWLRQ

After cutting the sender to length and connecting the wires, be sure to tape down both sides of the sender to eliminate air gaps between the sender and tank surface which can cause low signal strength and unpredictable performance.

The ends of the sender must be at least ¼” to ½” away from the tank bottom and top to allow for wall thickness. The

H[WHULRUERWWRP WRSRIWKHWDQNDUHQRWWKHVDPHDVWKH

LQWHULRUERWWRP WRSGHSHQGLQJRQWKHWDQNZDOOWKLFNQHVV the inside height is ½” to 1” shorter than the outside height.

.QRZLQJWKHZDOOWKLFNQHVVRI\RXUWDQNZLOODOORZ\RXWRÀQG the optimal sender position; placing the sender where it can

“see” the water will ensure proper level calculation and sender operation.

2. The signal strength should be in the 50% range for best performance. If the signal strength is in the 20% range it is indicative of a high resistance in a connector, a bad ground,

RULPSURSHUERQGLQJRIWKHVHQGHUWRWKHWDQNDSRVVLEOHDLU gap on one or both sides of the sender).

3. With the console installed you can check the level on each tank, if you get an indicated level of 10% to 20% and you know this is too high, reposition the sensor board as follows:

,QWKHFDVHRIDFRQYH[WDQNERWWRPXVXDOO\IRXQGRQODUJHÁDW tanks, raising the sender is the best solution to accomplish a zero reading when the tank is empty. This may result in having to shorten the sender by an additional segment.


Page 24


On sloped tanks, which are used to promote complete draining, one alternative is to measure the end of the tank opposite from the drain valve. It may be necessary to extend the wire harness to be able to measure on the optimal side. On the drain valve side, the best choice is to elevate the sender to avoid reading a puddle at the drain valve.

4. 7KHFORVHSUR[LPLW\RIPHWDOWRWKHVHQGHUFDQEHPLVLQWHUSUHWHG as water, since they have similar electrical characteristics. Any metal such as steel, aluminum, copper, or brass can affect the sender reading if it is closer than about 2” brackets, straps, pipes, ducts, etc. close to the sender you may have to move the sender away from them. Again, trial positioning using

WDSH LV QHFHVVDU\ XQWLO WKH SUREOHP GLVDSSHDUV )OH[LEOH pieces of metal can be held away from the sender with rubber wedged between the sender and the metal. If the metal is off to the side of the sender, or just butting to the edge then it is usually not a problem, particularly on the right hand side of the sender.

5. Make sure that metal doors or covers are far enough away from the sender as well, once everything is closed up the

SRVLWLRQLQJPD\FKDQJH7KHV\PSWRPVRIH[SRVXUHWRODUJH metal components are usually a non-zero reading when the tank is empty, or the level appearing to jump suddenly as the

WDQNLVGUDLQHGRUÀOOHG

6. On fresh tanks there is sometimes a potential to not be able to use all the water in the tank, we suggest you elevate the fresh sender 1” off the tank bottom and position the top of

WKHVHQGHUWRDOORZIRUYHQWSRVLWLRQLIWKHYHQWLVRQWKHVLGH of the tank). This way you should see ‘0’ before the pump starts to suck air. Some tanks have a sump style draw system, in this case there is no concern with unusable water, just allow for the wall thickness when positioning the sender board

XVXDOO\óµWRµPDUJLQIURPWKHRXWHUVKHOO,IWKHVHQGHULV

SRVLWLRQHGDERYHWKHYHQWWKHQWKHPD[LPXPUHDGLQJPD\EH less than 100%.

7. There may be a buildup on the inside walls of black and grey tanks. We get calls occasionally about older coaches that have not been in service for a few years in which the black tank will now indicate a level even though it is empty. The likely cause is

WKDWWKHWDQNKDVDVLJQLÀFDQWEXLOGXSSUREDEO\H[FHHGLQJôµ

WRóµWKLFN5HGH[LVQRWDQDFFHSWDEOHFKHPLFDOWRSURPRWH clean tank walls; it is far too slow to get the breakdown action started. Use an RV type of liquid chemical, we suggest Tissue

Digester, Sensor Cleaner, or the latest we have used called

+DSS\ &DPSHUV +ROGLQJ 7DQN ([WUHPH &OHDQHU DYDLODEOH DW www.happycampersworld.com

7KH QH[W WLPH \RX WDNH D

709-P3 Manual

125

126

GARNET SEELEVEL II TANK MONITOR trip, leave with a high concentration of the chemical in the

WDQN DQG DSSUR[LPDWHO\ IXOO RI IUHVK ZDWHU +RSHIXOO\ you can drive for 2-3 days allowing the tank levels to rise

WKURXJK QRUPDO XVH :H UHFRPPHQG WKDW \RX H[FHHG WKH level that you see the system report when the tank is empty.

After the sloshing and the soaking hopefully the build-up will

EHÁXVKHGDZD\ZKHQWKHWDQNLVGUDLQHGDQGÁXVKHG,I\RX still have symptoms the treatment may required a few more times. The waste did not build up on the tank wall in one day, so it may not dissolve in one treatment! The build-up looks

OLNHZDWHUWRWKHV\VWHPVLQFHLWKROGVDVLJQLÀFDQWYROXPHRI

ZDWHULQWKHEXLOGXSDUHD,WWDNHVPXFKPRUHWKDQDÀOPRU piece of tissue to cause the error.

What to do if the system reads a zero water level at all times, or does not reach 100%:

1. 7KLVPD\EHGXHWRH[FHVVLYHWDQNZDOOWKLFNQHVV:HKDYH tested the sender on an actual tank with if it now works the tank wall thickness is well over crosscheck operation of the sender.

3⁄8 “ wall thickness

WRHQVXUHSURSHURSHUDWLRQ,I\RXHQFRXQWHUDQH[FHVVLYHO\ thick tank wall the symptom will be a zero reading regardless of the actual tank level. The cross check would be to test the sender on another tank by taping it in place temporarily,

3⁄8 “. You can also use a 1 gallon jug or a 5 gallon pail as a test tank to

2. A symptom we have seen is the sender will not indicate 100% when the tank is full. If the sender is positioned too high on the tank, then water cannot reach high enough on the sender for it to read 100%. The top of the sender must be at least

¼” to ½” away from the top of the tank to allow for wall thickness.

3. Another possibility is a tank wall thickness issue that may occur at the corners or edges of the tank. This has not been a common issue, and the only correction you can make is to move the board slightly lower, away from the thick area.

What to do if sender delamination occurs:

1. We have had reports of the senders literally falling off the tanks or showing serious delamination. This is likely caused by a lack of tank surface preparation. Surface prep is very simple, wipe the area to be adhered to with products like Pro Bond, alcohol, or acetone. Do not use thinners because they leave residues which attack the adhesive. Ambient temperatures of less than 60°F or 15°C prevent the bonding agents in the


Page 26

GARNET SEELEVEL II TANK MONITOR adhesive from working properly; use a heat gun to warm the tank surface if necessary. Also be sure the surface is dry, again a heat gun is the best way to dry the bonding area. Finally, the surface of the tank must be smooth. The adhesive works much better on smooth surfaces, if necessary use an orbital

VDQGHUZLWKÀQHJULWSDSHUJULWWRTXLFNO\DFFRPSOLVKWKH desired smoothness.

2. Another possibility is the wiring harness pulling on the sender.

Make sure the wiring to the tank sender is well supported so that it does not put a load on the sender. Be sure to support all connecting harnesses; do not let the board support the harness, this will in time cause delamination of the board from the tank. One simple way to do this is to use Gorilla tape across the top of the sender at a 90 degree angle to the sender orientation, with the wiring held in place by the tape.

The wires from the sender must be routed straight up or to the right for reliable operation.

How to protect the sender from road spray and debris:

1. 2QLQVWDOODWLRQVZKHUHWKHKROGLQJWDQNLVH[SRVHGWRXQGHU

FKDVVLVURDGVSUD\DQGÁ\LQJURFNVHWFZHUHFRPPHQGWKH use of an auto body undercoat, which is easily purchased in auto parts stores. This tar based material clings well to the senders and protects from water and debris.

2. One material in particular is 3M Professional Grade Rubberized

Undercoating, product code 03584. Another product that works well is a Dominion Sure Seal rubberized undercoating such as Gravel Guard Rocker Guard Coating.

3. After the system is completed and tested apply the undercoat over the complete board using two coats. Do not use lacquer, enamel paint, or plastic paint for auto bumpers as these contain chemicals that will dissolve the conformal coating on the board and cause malfunctions.

How to avoid damaging the display when mounting:

1. If mounting the display in a metal panel or wall there is a risk of permanent damage due to a jagged opening or too small of an opening. The metal panel can short circuit the display rendering it inoperable and requiring the installer to replace it. Ensure that the edges of the cutout are smooth and that no material is bent outward where it can dig into the display.

Make sure that the cutout is large enough so that the display can be easily inserted without having to angle it. There is a ½” border all around the display to cover the edge of the hole, so

709-P3 Manual

127

GARNET SEELEVEL II TANK MONITOR if the hole is a bit larger than the minimum requirement it will still be covered by the display.

2. When fastening the display to the panel, make sure that it is centered in the hole and not resting on one edge.

3. Non-conductive mounting spacers are available to help prevent damaging the display. Contact Garnet for further details.

How to avoid damaging the display or pump switch due to excessive current:

1. Please be aware that the water pump switch circuit has a limitation on current draw of 7.5 amps, some large pumps can draw over 10 amps. These high drain pumps must use a relay or the display console printed circuit will overheat and damage the display permanently.

2. If the 12V supply line from the electrical panel does not have a 7.5 amp fuse rating, please be sure to install the supplied fuse holder with a 7.5 amp automotive style fuse inline on the

+12V red wire.

3. WARNING: All power circuits must be fused. If a fuse is not provided with the system then it is the installer’s responsibility to install a fuse with a maximum rating of

7.5 amps. A relay is required if more than 7.5 amps is needed for the pump.

128



CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

Resolution

Accuracy:

Temperature range:

Sender materials:

Sender length range:

Display mounting panel:

System power requirements:

Wiring:

JS sender: ¼" (6 mm)

(6VHQGHUǪPP

SS sender: ½" (13 mm)

+/- 8% or better, limited by resolution and tank height and shape.

+32 to +140 °F (0 to + 60 °C)

0.008" thick glass epoxy circuit board with conformal coating for circuit protection. Laminated on the back with 3M 300LSE Bonding Adhesive.

JS sender: 4" to 6", which will measure tank heights

IURPò´WR´

ES sender: 4 ½" to 12", which will measure tank

KHLJKWVIURP´WR´VLQJOHVHQGHUDQGXSWR´

(dual senders).

SS sender: 6" to 16", which will measure tank heights

IURP´WR´VLQJOHVHQGHUDQGXSWR´GXDO senders).

Black panel, approximately 4" wide by 2.8" high by 1" thick (102mm wide X 71mm high X 25mm thick).

Panel screws to wall.

Display requires 12 volts from the RV battery, the system will function from 11 volts to 16 volts. Current drain is less than 200mA.

A single two wire conductor required from the display to the senders. All the senders are wired in parallel.

12 V power and ground required for display.

LPG:

Pump switch:

-

The pump switch is rated for a maximum of 7.5 amps.

The use of a relay is required if more than 7.5 amps is needed. A 7.5 amp (max) fuse must be installed in series with the 12V power circuit to the switch!


129

130


CHAPTER 9 - SERVICE AND WARRANTY INFORMATION

T he warranty will only apply only if the warranty card that is shipped with the equipment has been returned to Garnet Instruments Ltd.

DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY ON HARDWARE

Garnet Instruments Ltd. warrants equipment manufactured by Garnet to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of one year from the date of sale from Garnet or an Authorized Dealer. The warranty period will start from the date of purchase or installation as indicated on the warranty card. Under these warranties, Garnet shall

EHUHVSRQVLEOHRQO\IRUDFWXDOORVVRUGDPDJHVXIIHUHGDQGWKHQRQO\WRWKHH[WHQWRI*DUQHW·V invoiced price of the product. Garnet shall not be liable in any case for labor charges for indirect, special, or consequential damages. Garnet shall not be liable in any case for the removal and/or reinstallation of defective Garnet equipment. These warranties shall not apply to any defects or other damages to any Garnet equipment that has been altered or tampered with by anyone other than Garnet factory representatives. In all cases, Garnet will warrant only Garnet products which

DUHEHLQJXVHGIRUDSSOLFDWLRQVDFFHSWDEOHWR*DUQHWDQGZLWKLQWKHWHFKQLFDOVSHFLÀFDWLRQVRIWKH particular product. In addition, Garnet will warrant only those products which have been installed

DQGPDLQWDLQHGDFFRUGLQJWR*DUQHWIDFWRU\VSHFLÀFDWLRQV

LIMITATION ON WARRANTIES

7KHVHZDUUDQWLHVDUHWKHRQO\ZDUUDQWLHVH[SUHVVHGRULPSOLHGXSRQZKLFKSURGXFWVDUHVROGE\

*DUQHWDQG*DUQHWPDNHVQRZDUUDQW\RIPHUFKDQWDELOLW\RUÀWQHVVIRUDQ\SDUWLFXODUSXUSRVHLQ respect to the products sold. Garnet products or parts thereof assumed to be defective by the purchaser within the stipulated warranty period should be returned to the seller, local distributor, or directly to Garnet for evaluation and service. Whenever direct factory evaluation, service or

UHSODFHPHQWLVQHFHVVDU\WKHFXVWRPHUPXVWÀUVWE\HLWKHUOHWWHURUSKRQHREWDLQD5HWXUQHG

0DWHULDO$XWKRUL]DWLRQ50$IURP*DUQHW,QVWUXPHQWVGLUHFWO\1RPDWHULDOPD\EHUHWXUQHGWR

Garnet without an RMA number assigned to it or without proper factory authorization. Any returns must be returned freight prepaid to: Garnet Instruments Ltd, 286 Kaska Road, Sherwood Park,

Alberta, T8A 4G7. Returned warranted items will be repaired or replaced at the discretion of Garnet

Instruments. Any Garnet items under the Garnet Warranty Policy that are deemed irreparable by

Garnet Instruments will be replaced at no charge or a credit will be issued for that item subject to the customer’s request.

If you do have a warranty claim or if the equipment needs to be serviced, contact the installation dealer. If you do need to contact Garnet, we can be reached as follows:

CANADA

Garnet Instruments Ltd.

286 Kaska Road

Sherwood Park, AB T8A 4G7

CANADA email: [email protected]

UNITED STATES

Garnet US Inc.

5360 Granbury Road

Granbury, TX 76049

USA email: [email protected]


GIRARD AWNING

GG750 AWNING

INSTALLATION SERVICE and REPAIR

MANUAL

REV

01

22

2020

RV AWNING PRODUCTS

1361 CALLE AVANZADO, SAN CLEMENTE, CA 92673 (800) 382-8442 FAX (949)276-5500 www.girardrv.com

131

GIRARD AWNING

Upon receiving your shipment, it is your responsibility to check the contents. If any product is damaged upon receipt, it is your responsibility to refuse the shipment.

MODEL SERIAL No.

MODEL

MODEL

MODEL

SERIAL No.

SERIAL No.

SERIAL No.

132

WARNING

To prevent the motor from overheating do not exceed

4 minutes of operation per hour.

ALL ELECTRICAL WORK MUST BE CARRIED OUT BY QUALIFIED

PERSONNEL AND CONFORM TO APPLICABLE ELECTRICAL CODES

AND STANDARDS.

•

Turn off power before beginning any electrical work.

•

Please consult your RV’s wiring diagram to locate any wiring prior to any drilling or any installation procedures.

Page 2 of 49

GIRARD AWNING

•

Ensure that placement of controls, cables, and wires are not in any way obstructed. This can damage the components and obstruct electrical current.

•

Use only certified components.

Girard Systems awnings may be operated in light wind and rain conditions. When periods of heavy rain and or high wind are expected the awning must be closed. Never leave the awning open and unattended.

Damage caused by wind and rain is not covered by warranty.

All awnings must be closed prior to moving the vehicle for any reason. As an extra safety precaution a visual check that every awning is fully closed is required.

Damage caused by failure to comply with these instructions is not covered by warranty.

Before using your awning, ensure that the area into which the awning will be deployed is free of obstructions (Trees, walls, pillars, posts, other vehicles etc.)

Damage caused by collisions with any of the above or similar is not covered by warranty.

Before using your awning make sure that all of your electrical circuits are operating correctly.

Page 3 of 4 9

133

134

GIRARD AWNING

CONTENTS

Basic System Overview ……………………………………………………………………………........… 5

Installation Manual, Product Description ………………………………………………….............. 8

Tools Required ……………………………………………………………………………………….........… 9

Unpacking ……………….. ………………………………………………………….…………................. 9

Layout and Mounting the Brackets ………………………………………………………................11

Bracket placement chart ………………… …………………………………………....................… 12

Mounting the Awning ………………………………………………………………….…................…..15

Weather Stripping Installation (Sidewall Application) ………………………................…... 16

Electronic Controls Installation……………………………………………........…...................… 17

Rocker Switch Wiring ……………………………………………………………………….................. 17

Testing and Adjustments ……………………………………………………………….........…………. 30

Adjusting Motor Limit Switches …………………………………………….................…………… 30

Manual Override …………………………………………………………………..................………..….32

Adjusting Pitch and Elbow Height …………………………………………….……..…..................33

Testing the Motion Sensor ………………………………………………………………….................36

Adjusting the Lead Rail …………………………………………………………………….........

....

......37

Troubleshooting Guide ………………………………………………………………………….…..........39

Common Repair Procedures ………………………………………………………………….…...........40

Motor Replacement …………………………………………………………………………..…..............40

Fabric Replacement …………………………………………………………………………….............…43

Arm Replacement ………………………………………………………………………………................45

GG 750 Exploded View …………………………………………………………………………..…..........47

Component Identification …………………………………………………………………………...........48

Page 4 of 49

GIRARD AWNING

BASIC SYSTEM OVERVIEW

1 Mechanical system – consisting of:

• The enclosure (or cassette) protects the awning while closed.

• The roller tube which is mounted within the cassette.

• The top cover or fabric rolled onto the roller tube and connected to the lead rail that extends from the enclosure when the awning is opened.

• The folding arms that supports the lead rail and the fabric.

• (Option) tubular motor which is mounted inside of the roller tube that controls the extension and retraction of the awning.

• (Option) manual crank handle and drive system that controls the extension and retraction of the awning

2 Electronic controls – (Option) to power and operate the motor

• Motor Control module – 98GC1146C. This works in conjunction with the other electronic controls and the user controls included in the installation to extend and retract the awning as required.

• Motion Sensor – 98GC779, which enables automatic retraction of the awning during periods of high wind that may damage the awning syste

• Wired Motion Sensor – 98GC780B, Wired motion sensor that works in conjunction with 98GC781B and 98GC783B m.

wired wall switch controllers.

3 User Controls – (Option) Hand held remote controllers and wall mounted remote switches will differ according to the individual customer’s needs, single or multi-channel handsets, with or without LED switching facility, and wall switches will differ depending upon how many awnings they are required to control.

• 98GC104 – Single channel awning remote control

• 98GC1063 – Single channel remote with LED switching

• 98GC229 – Single channel remote wall switch

•

•

98GC781B – Wired wall switch controller

9 8G C783B – Wired wall switch controller

• 98GGC101 – Dual Rocker Switch

Page 5 of 49

135

GIRARD AWNING

98GC1146C

136

98GC779 98GC 780B

Page 6 of 49

GIRARD AWNING

AWNING REMOTE

SINGLE AWNING PART # 98GCK-57

DOUBLE AWNING PART # 98GCK-45D

137

GIRARD AWNING

INSTALLATION MANUAL

FOR PERSONAL SAFETY AND QUALITY OF INSTALLATION, TWO

INSTALLERS ARE RECOMMENDED FOR THIS PRODUCT.

WARNING

To prevent the motor from overheating do not exceed 4 minutes of operation per hour.

Overheating will destroy the motor.

138

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

The GG750 awning system provides protection from the sun at a touch of a button. The

GG750 awning is built to your specifications with the highest quality materials available, your unit features:

• A standard 12VDC motor that operates with a wireless motor control or rocker switch .

• Motion sensor that will retract the awning to prevent damage from the wind.

• A hand held remote control

• A wall mounted remote switch

• Options include; electronic automation controls to ensure proper closing at all times, a control to retract all awnings when the vehicles’ motor is started, and more….

The GG750 awning controls use an RF (radio frequency) link to communicate with each other. This simplifies the installation and maintenance by removing the need for extensive wiring. This RF network is called the G-Link system. For more information please refer to the G-Link manual that was included with your awning. All necessary power cables are supplied with this product.

Page 8 of 49

GIRARD AWNING

GETTING STARTED

Tools required:

• Electric Drill

• Tape measure

• (2) ladders

• Chalk line

• Flat head screwdriver (small)

• Phillips screwdriver

• Caulking gun

• (2) tubes silicone caulking

• Drill bits: 1/8”, 3/8”, 7/16”, 1/4”

• Allen wrenches: 4mm

• Open-end wrenches: 19mm, 17mm

• Keyhole saw

A. UNPACKING

1. Before starting any of the installation procedures unpack the awning and inspect the product for any possible damage that may have occurred during shipping.

2. Before starting any of the installation procedures ensure that the length , fabric, and motor placement of your awning are correct.

3. When you have determined that the product is to your satisfaction, remove the mounting brackets and place the awning in a safe location while preparing the RV.

a. To remove the brackets locate the slide lock that retains the bracket to the housing. (Figure 1) b. Using a 4mm Allen wrench, loosen the set screws on the slide locks.

c. Once the set screws have been loosened the slide locks should slide freely, clear the slide lock away from the bracket.

d. You should now be able to remove the bracket.

4. If you have discovered any damage or missing parts please contact your supplier.

Page 9 of 49

139

GIRARD AWNING

140

(Figure 1)

Page 10 of 49

GIRARD AWNING

B. LAYOUT AND MOUNTING THE BRACKETS

1.

SIDEWALL APPLICATION, AWNING BRACKET – NOTE: Please take into consideration all possible clearances, and obstacles before installing this awning. Items such as slide rooms, etc. vary from one manufacturer to another. Please consult Girard Systems if there are any questions regarding your installation.

a. The mounting brackets can accommodate ¼” lag bolts for mounting.

b. Determine the location for the final installation position of the awning, including height to be installed.

c. Mounting brackets must be installed at the locations shown in bracket placem e nt diagram (see Figure 2).

NOTE: When installing a three arm awning, make sure one of the

applicable center brackets is directly behind the shoulder of the middle arm.

Page 11 of 49

141

GIRARD AWNING

142

(Figure 2)

Page 12 of 49

GIRARD AWNING

Failure to follow these instructions will void the warranty of this product.

e. Now that you have determined the bracket locations, using the bracket as your template, mark the holes for fastening the bracket.

NOTE: Use chalk line to make absolute sure brackets are mounted in straight line. f. Using a 1/8” bit , pilot drill the centers of the marked holes. Inside of the RV verify the locations of the backing plates. Note: Please consult your

while drilling the hole.

g. Pre-drill four 1/4 inch holes per mounting bracket through the pilot holes.

h. Apply a liberal amount of silicone caulking around each hole before installing the brackets.

i. Install the 2 outer brackets, and then the middle bracket (s) (if required) with four

¼ x 1 1/2" carriage bolts, washers, lock nuts and backing plate per bracket. (Figure 2) j. Tighten bolts and then apply silicone caulking to the top edge and both sides of each bracket.

k. For the motorized option, on the motor side of the awning drill a 7/16 inch hole for the awning motor power cable to enter the RV near the electrical source.

Position the hole 4" inch from end of awning. Do not drill hole higher or lower than the bracket. This will ensure that it will not be seen after the awning is installed.

3.

SIDEWALL APPLICATION, AWNING RAIL MOUNTING a. Determine the location for the final installation position of the awning, including height to be installed.

b. Cut the awning rail to 6" less than the awning length.

c. Position the awning rail on the mounting location, making sure it is level.

d. To attach the awning to the awning rail, angle it at 90 degrees and then insert the corresponding track on the awning into the awning rail (Figure 3).

e. Once the awning rail is inserted, rotate the awning down so it is flush with the mounting surface and resting against it.

f. Open the awning to allow access to the inside of the main housing.

Page 13 of 49

143

GIRARD AWNING g. Use 1 lag screw and washer every 16" to secure the bottom of the awning to the vehicle, drilling through the back of the awning housing and into the vehicle

(Figure 3).

144

(Figure 3)

Page 14 of 49

GIRARD AWNING

C. MOUNTING THE AWNING.

1. Lift the awning into position for fastening to the vehicle mounted brackets.

a. Ladders are usually sufficient; however, a scaffold or forklift may be used.

b. If using a forklift use all necessary caution to protect the surface of the awning. Lift from the center of the awning to maintain product balance while elevating.

2. Place the awning onto the brackets while feeding the motor power cable through the hole. A small amount of lubricant may aid the feeding of the cable. Make sure the grooves of the awning are securely engaged into the channels on the bracket. (Figure 4)

(Figure 4)

3. Secure the awning by moving the slide locks along the bottom awning track until they are located under their respective brackets (Figure 5). The final position of the slide lock should be directly under the shoulder of the arm.

Page 15 of 49

145

GIRARD AWNING

(Figure 5)

4. Once the final location of the slide locks has been achieved, tighten both set screws on each slide lock with a 4mm Allen wrench (Figure 6). This secures the awning in place.

146

(Figure 6)

(OPTIONAL, WEATHER STRIPPING NOT INCLUDED, SIDEWALL

APPLICATION ONLY)

1. Trim weather stripping to the length of the awning and remove any overhang.

2. Make a small cut in the weather stripping to allow for the motor cord.

3. Apply generous beads of silicone along the weather stripping.

4. Push weather stripping firmly into place.

5. Wipe off excess silicone.

Page 16 of 49

GIRARD AWNING

D. ELECTRONIC CONTROLS INSTALLATION

A. Rocker Switch Wiring

The rocker switch is wired according to Figure 8.

(Figure 8)

Page 17 of 49

147

GIRARD AWNING

B. GC1146C DC Motor Controller Wiring

Wiring Diagram

148

NOTE: The larger (18) gauge red/black wire coming out of the control box is the incoming power. The smaller (22) gauge red/black wire is the LED outgoing power.

Page 18 of 49

GIRARD AWNING

C. Motion Sensor (98GC779G) and LED Connections

4 conductor power supply

Page 19 of 49

149

150

GIRARD AWNING

Programming the Motion Sensor (98GC779G)

Preparation for Pairing

NOTE: All electronic kits shipped from the factory are preprogrammed and do not require programming. This section is intended for reprogramming if required.

Remove the 2 small

Phillips screws which secure the motion sensor to the awning.

Fig.1

Then turn it over.

Fig.2

Page 20 of 49

GIRARD AWNING

Remove the 4 Phillips screws holding the module together.

Remove the base plate and silicone insert.

Base Plate

Insert

Magnet

Fig.3

Turn the base plate over

(Magnet down). Then place the motion sensor on top of it so that the magnet is aligned with the reed switch.

This is required to allow re-programming

Reed Switch

Adjustment Dial

Fig.4

LED

Programming

Button

Page 21 of 49

151

GIRARD AWNING

152

Page 22 of 49

GIRARD AWNING

D. Switch Control with Wired Motion Sensor

Description

The 98GCK-49 is a combination c ontroller (98GC781” B” or “W”) and Hard Wired Motion

Sensor (98GC780” B” or “W”) kit, it can be ordered in either Black or White.

The 98GCK-49 kit is used for a Single DC awning with LED. The 98GCK-49 also includes an Ignition Retract-Lock function to retract the awning if the engine is ON. See wiring diagram to see how to wire this function.

Page 2 3 of 49

153

GIRARD AWNING

Specification

• Operating Voltage: 11 VDC ~14VDC

• Current: Up to 10A

• LED light control

• RS485 communication to operate the motion sensor

• Maximum run time is 4 minutes

• Operating Temperature 32 to 120F

154

Fig. 1

Page 2 4 of 49

GIRARD AWNING

Mounting Diagram:

The required opening to install this Controller is 2 5/8" x 2 5/8" X 1 1/4" depth.

Fig. 2

Page 2 5 of 49

155

GIRARD AWNING

156

Page 2 6 of 49

Wired Motion Sensor

GIRARD AWNING

Fig. 3

This wired motion sensor communicates directly to the DC motor

Controller 98GC781(B), (W) by RS485 Protocol.

Attach the motion sensor to the lead rail using the mounting tab, see figure 3 above.

Page 2 7 of 49

157

GIRARD AWNING

Motion Sensor Installation view:

158

Fig. 4

Fig. 5

Page 2 8 of 49

E. Wiring Diagram:

GIRARD AWNING

Fig. 6

Page 2 9 of 49

159

GIRARD AWNING

160

TESTING AND ADJUSTMENTS

OVERVIEW

A. Adjusting Motor-limit switches

B. Manual Override

C. Adjusting Pitch and Elbow height

D. Motion Sensor Testing

A. ADJUSTING MOTOR LIMIT SWITCHES

TOOLS REQUIRED

Black plastic key provided with awning, or 4mm (5/32”) Allen wrench.

NOTE: The motor limit switches have been adjusted to the correct positions at the factory prior to shipment. When fully retracted the awning motor is set to stop the exact moment the awning box closes. When fully extended the fabric should be taut and the arms should be slightly bent, exposing a gap of about ¼” at the elbows.

Always check the motor limits after installation to ensure that the awning opens and closes correctly. Awning fabric can stretch over time, this will require an adjustment of the IN and/or OUT limit switch.

IMPORTANT: EXTREME CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN TO ENSURE THAT THE

MOTOR LIMIT TURNS OFF AT THE EXACT MOMENT THE AWNING BOX

CLOSES. FAILURE TO DO SO WILL CAUSE THE MOTOR TO RUN WHEN THE

AWNING IS CLOSED. THIS WILL DESTROY THE MOTOR.

1. The motors used in Girard Systems awnings are reversible.

2. The motor has limit settings for both OUT (extension) and IN (retraction).

Page 30 of 49

GIRARD AWNING

3. The limit switches can be adjusted by use of the black key provided with the awning, or you may use a 4mm (5/32”) Allen wrench.

4. Extend the awning a few feet to gain access to the motor. Locate the motor. The limit adjustment screws are located on the head of the motor. Using the symbols printed next to the adjustment screws, turn the black key (or 4mm Allen wrench) to make the necessary adjustments. The motors are labeled with a + or a – to indicate the adjustment direction.

5. Approximately ¼ turn of the adjustment screw represents about 1” of awning movement. NEVER set outward limits so that the fabric is slack with full arm extension. For proper adjustment set limit switch to stop the motor just before the arms lock. This will expose about a 1/4” gap at the elbow.

Page 31 of 49

161

GIRARD AWNING

B. MANUAL OVERRIDE

1. In case of motor issues, the GG 750 has a manual override to close the awning.

2. Remove the endcap opposite the motor, by removing the 3 Philips head screws.

3. Using a 13mm wrench, turn the manual override shaft in order to close the awning, see Figure 10. NOTE: The manual override is one-way, it can only close the awning.

4. Figure 10 is showing a right hand motor version of the GG750 .If you have a left

hand version, the manual override will be on the opposite side.

162

(Figure 10)

Page 3 2 of 49

GIRARD AWNING

C. ADJUSTING PITCH and ELBOW HEIGHT

NOTE: Adjustment of the Elbow height and pitch, will affect the height of the awning lead rail when it is fully deployed.

This adjustment is usually required after an arm replacement. Also, if the elbow of the arm hits the bottom of the casing as the lead rail closes.

Tools Required

• 17mm open-end wrench

• 19mm (3/4”) open-end wrench

• 4mm A llen wrench

1. ELBOW HEIGHT a. Extend the awning a pproximately 12” b.

To lower the elbow: Locate screw C located on the side of the shoulder, the top bolt. (Figure 11) Using a 17mm open-end wrench, rotate the bolt counter-clockwise to lower the arm positio tighten Screw D, the bottom bolt.

n .

Then use a 19mm wrench to c.

To raise the elbow: Locate screw C located on the side of the shoulder, the top bolt. (Figure 11) Using a 1 7 mm open-end wrench, rotate the bolt clockwise to raise the arm positio n .

Then use a 19mm wrench to loosen

Screw D, the bottom bolt.

d. Close the awning completely to ensure smooth operation, that the lead rail lies flush and square along the length of the cassette, and that the arms fold inside the cassette without interference.

Page 3 3 of 49

163

GIRARD AWNING

164

(Figure 11)

2. ADJUSTING PITCH a. Extend the awning to its fully extended length.

b. Locate screw A, adjustment nut located on front side of the shoulder assembly

(Figure 12, 13). Using a 17mm wrench rotate the nut counterclockwise to lower the pitch or clockwise to raise the pitch.

DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN AS THIS WILL RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE

.

AWNING LIFTING UP ON THE ARM SLIGHTLY TO RELIEVE PRESSURE

MAY BE NECESSARY.

c. Close the awning completely to ensure smooth operation and that the lead rail lies flush and square along the length of the cassette.

Page 3 4 of 49

GIRARD AWNING

(Figure 12)

Page 3 5 of 49

165

GIRARD AWNING

(Figure 13)

166

D. TESTING THE MOTION SENSOR (Wind Sensor)

1. Partially extend the awning (at least 3 feet).

2. Physically activate the motion sensor by shaking the awning lead rail.

3. At this point the awning should retract; if not, check that there is a 12VDC supply to the motion sensor and that the motion sensor is correctly programmed.

NOTE: The Motion sensor will send a retract signal to the motor of the awning it is programmed to on the RV. If there are multiple awnings extended that begin to retract

Page 3 6 of 49

Page 30 of 49

Page 30 of 49

GIRARD AWNING simultaneously under windy conditions, the power system of the vehicle must be able to withstand the resulting surge of current. The surge will be the greatest when the awnings are fully extended. When testing the system verify all of the awnings will close when fully extended.

E.

ADJUSTING THE LEAD RAIL

The lead rail on your awning has been preset at +/- 3 degrees. This allows the lead rail to rest firmly into the cassette and also creates a weather resistant seal for travel. To increase or decrease the pitch angle insert a 4mm Allen wrench into the Pitch adjustment screw, screw B (Figure 13). Turn clockwise to increase the pitch and turn counterclockwise to decrease the pitch. Ensure that the pitch adjustment screw is set evenly on all of the arms.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

PROBLEM:

The lead rail is binding on the side of the awning casing; i.e. the rail is offset from housing.

SOLUTION:

• Open the awning about 3 feet.

• Loosen the lead rail horizontal adjustment screws on all arms (Figure 14).

• Locate and remove the two fabric set screws that are on each end of the lead rail (Figure 14). The lead rail is now ready to be shifted.

• Retract the awning until the lead rail is about 4 inches from the fully closed position.

• Using a rubber mallet, tap the end of the lead rail to move it into the correct position.

• When proper alignment has been achieved tighten the lead rail horizontal adjustment screws (Figure 14), and then replace the fabric screws (Figure 15).

Page 3 7 of 49

167

GIRARD AWNING

(FIGURE 14)

(FIGURE 15)

PROBLEM:

The motor side of the awning closes when the awning is retracted but the opposite end does not.

SOLUTION:

Refer to “Adjusting the Lead Rail” on page 37. If this does not solve the issue please call the Girard Systems service line at (949)259-4000 or toll free at

(800)382-8442.

Page

3 8

of

49

168

Page

31

of

49

GIRARD AWNING

PROBLEM:

Motor will not operate.

SOLUTION:

• Check that the panel fuse on the 12VDC circuit is good

• If your vehicle has an Awnings Power Main Switch, locate that switch and make sure it is in the ON position.

• If this does not solve the issue please call the Girard Systems service line at

(949)259-4000 or toll free at (800)382-8442.

PROBLEM:

The motor will operate for 10-12” and then stop.

SOLUTION:

The motor may not be receiving enough power to operate correctly.

• Check to ensure that you have a minimum of 12VDC at the motor connection, if not switch on your generator or connect to shore power.

• If this does not solve the issue please call the Girard Systems service line at

(949)259-4000 or toll free at (800)382-8442.

PROBLEM:

The fabric is loose when the awning is fully extended; i.e. the roller keeps turning after the awning arms have locked open.

SOLUTION:

The motor’s OUT limits must be reset to factory standards. Please refer to the “Adjusting the Motors Limit Switches” section on page 30-31.

PROBLEM:

The motor stops before the lead rail has closed completely into the awning cassette on either or both sides. There is no apparent binding of the awning components.

SOLUTION:

The GG750 Awning is equipped with a manual override motor which has manual limit settings. The IN limit may need to be adjusted to allow the box to be closed tighter.

Refer to the “Adjusting the Motors Limit Switches” section on page 30-31.

Page

3 9

of

49

169

170

GIRARD AWNING

PROBLEM:

As the awning is closing, the elbow of one or more of the arms is hanging down preventing the case from closing.

SOLUTION:

Please refer to the “Adjusting Pi tch and Arm (Elbow) Height on page 34-35.

COMMON REPAIR PROCEDURES

MOTOR REPLACEMENT

NOTE: Replacement procedures vary due to motor styles, placement, factory installation methods, and preferences of different vehicle manufacturers.

These variations primarily effect how the motors are accessed; replacement operations are generally the same for any situation.

A. REMOVING THE OLD MOTOR

1.

Use tie straps on either side of the awning to secure the lead rail of the awning to the cassette. The strap will slide in between the awning and coach wall on each end. Take care to leave slack in the straps so when the motor side endplate is removed the lead rail will open approximately 2" to take pressure off the awning.

2.

Identify which side the motor is located on.

Proceed to take off the motor side endcap by removing the three #3 Philips screws, there are two located on the bottom and one on top.

Please take note that some RV manufacturers have requested the endcap top screw to be left out due to clearance issues

3.

with slide toppers.

Proceed to take off the motor endplate. (Figure 17) Take caution

4 .

pressure until it is separated from the motor. Upon removal of the plate the lead rail of the awning will open into the straps freeing the pressure from the motor.

C onfirm that there is no power heading to motor , cut motor wire close to motor leaving a small amount for warranty testing.

G rip motor by the head and pull out of tube making sure to hold the roller tube to keep it in position on other end of awning.

Page 40 of 49

Page 31 of 49

GIRARD AWNING

(Figure 16)

(Figure 17)

Page 4 1 of 49

171

Page 31 of 49

GIRARD AWNING

B. INSTALLING THE NEW MOTOR

1.

With the new motor in hand, align the notch in the drive (at the far end of the motor) with the indentation in the awning roller tube. Slide the motor all the way in.

Turn the motor until its inner notch also lines up with its indentation on the tube.

2.

Feed motor cable completely through the hole in the motor plate.

3.

Make sure the awning roller tube is still seated and connected into the roller tube support bracket at the opposite end of the awning.

4.

Rotate the motor and roller tube assembly until the motor wire is positioned towards the top of the awning.

5.

Reinstall the motor plate, lining the square motor peg up with the corresponding slot. Reinstall the 3 screws securing the motor plate (Figure 17).

6.

Cut and strip the motor wires preparing for heat shrink butt connection, slide a piece of heat shrink onto one end of the wires.

7.

Connect the new motor wires with heat shrink butt connectors and heat shrink.

8.

9.

10.

Test for the proper function of the new motor by using the Remote Control or the wall switch. NOTE: The motor limits are not adjusted yet, take care to only test motor to make sure it is moving in each direction a small amount to confirm.

After the motor has been replaced, the motors’ limit switches must be adjusted.

Please refer to the “ADJUSTING MOTOR LIMIT SWITCHES” section of this manual.

Replace motor side awning endcap with applicable screws.

Page

42

of

49

172

GIRARD AWNING

FABRIC REPLACEMENT

A. FABRIC REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

This procedure involves removal of the awning motor and roller tube to attach the replacement fabric to the existing tube.

NOTE: FOR PERSONAL SAFETY, AND BEST RESULTS IT IS RECOMMENDED

THAT TWO TECHNICIANS PERFORM THIS FUNCTION.

B. REMOVING THE OLD FABRIC

1.

Partially extend the awning approximately two feet, tie strap each side of lead rail

2.

to case to prepare for motor and tube removal. Open awning a few more inches until fabric is slack and pressure is off of fabric/motor.

Identify which side the motor is located on.

Proceed to take off the motor side endcap by removing the three #3 Philips screws, there are two located on the bottom and one on top. Please take note that some RV manufacturers have due to clearance issues with slide toppers.

3.

Proceed to take off the motor endplate. (#2 Philips, Figure 17) Take note that

4.

there will be no pressure on the endplate as long as the fabric is slack and the lead rail is being held by the tie straps.

Confirm that there is no power heading to motor , cut motor wire in the middle of wire leaving enough room for reconnection on either side of wire.

Leave

5.

Visually identify the white bushing on the non motor side where the roller tube is connected.

You will need to make sure upon removal of the tube that this bushing stays installed on the non motor side endplate and doesn't get lost.

6.

Take off both lead rail endcaps and remove fabrics screws on either side of lead rail. (Figure 18)

7.

The roller tube and fabric are now ready to be removed, take caution and remove tube from housing while sliding the lead rail end of the fabric out of the channel on lead rail, make sure that the motor does not fall out of tube.

(Figure 18)

Page 43 of 49

173

GIRARD AWNING

C. INSTALLING THE NEW FABRIC

IMPORTANT: REPLACEMENT FABRICS ARE ROLLED AND FOLDED FOR

SHIPMENT. THE SEAMS MUST FACE DOWNWARDS AS THE FABRIC IS

INSTALLED. THERE IS A SMALL WHITE POLY (POLYESTER) ROPE INSERTED

IN THE FABRIC THAT WILL SLIDE INTO THE LEAD RAIL.

1.

2.

3.

The old fabric's trim insert will need to be removed from the roller tube, it is held on by clear tape along the length of the tube and black duct tape on each end. Take note of how the trim insert sits in the channel of the tube as the new fabric trim insert will need to be inserted correctly and then taped in the same fashion as the existing insert was attached. even and tight as you can in the correct direction. (The fabric should roll from the bottom of the tube when the awning is extending) S lide the tube with the motor and fabric assembly awning as it came out .

Confirm the non motor side of the roller tube is correctly in the bushing that is mounted on the non motor side endplate.

Repeat steps 1-10 of motor installation section B.

174 manual.

Page

44

of

49

GIRARD AWNING

ARM REPLACEMENT

Follow this procedure when a damaged, spring loaded arm needs to be replaced. There are no repairable parts inside of the arm, if the elbow joint has broken the entire arm must be replaced.

TOOLS REQUIRED:

5mm Allen wrench, 17mm wrench, 19mm wrench, Tie down or duct tape

WARNING

• Follow installation instructions carefully.

• Awning arms are packaged under heavy spring tension.

• To avoid serious personal injury do not remove protective wrapping until directed to do so.

Check arm for wiring: if wired arm, wiring will need to be replaced

1 Support the lead rail and carefully open the awning a few feet. If the elbow is open tie a large rag around to prote c t the fabric from the elbow.

2 Remove the 5mm A llen head screw at the lead rail connection, slide out the arm from the lead rail, fold and use a tie down or tape to secure the arm in the folded position very carefully.

3 At the shoulder of the arm (connecting it to the main housing), loosen the

17mm and 19mm bolts on the side (Figure 11).

4 With the shoulder bolts loose, this will allow removal of the arm from the shoulder. Ensure the 17mm and 19mm bolts stay in place on the shoulder.

NOTE: MAKE SURE TO LOOSEN (NOT REMOVE) THE PITCH

ADJUSTMENT NUT (FIGURE 13) SO THAT THE ARM ATTACHMENT

BOLTS ARE NOT ANGLED WHEN INSERTING NEW ARM.

Page 45 of 49

175

176

GIRARD AWNING

5 Verify the metal sleeve is still on the 19mm bolt inside the shoulder.

Attach the new arm to the shoulder using the 17mm and 19mm bolts, tightening both evenly.

6 With the awning open about 18”, unband the high tension arm very carefully.

Slowly guide it into position on the lead rail and fasten it in place with the 5mm allen head screw.

7 Adjust the arms’ pitch angle to match the others by rotating the head of the pitch-adjustment screw (Figure 13, screw A) as follows; rotate in a clockwise direction to raise the arm, or rotate counterclockwise to lower it. Fully tighten both lock nuts on the shoulder assembly. Please refer to the “ADJUSTING THE

PITCH ANGLE” section of this manual.

8 The elbow height may need to be adjusted, using the 17mm and 19mm bolts

(Figure 11).

Page

46

of

49

GIRARD AWNING

Page 47 of 49

177

178

GIRARD AWNING

ITEM

24

25

26

27

20

21

22

23

28

29

30

31

16

17

18

19

13

14

15

9

10

11

12

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

GG750 COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION

DESCRIPTION

L Track Mount

Mounting Bracket

Sprinter Van Bracket Set

Roller Tube

Gudgeon

Bushing Insert

End Cap Hole Plug

Fabric Guide

Fabric Guide B

Shoulder Angle Guide

Foam Washer

Manual Crank Gearbox (Manual

Verison Only)

Washer Plastic Side Plate

Bushing Insert Cover

Screw for Gear Box

Fabric Screw Anchor

Fabric Screw

Poly Rope Roller Tube

Fabric Poly Rope

Wire Electrical for Arm

Main Housing

Lead Rail

End Cap Left

End Cap Right

Lead Rail End Cap Left

Lead Rail End Cap Right

Roller Tube Support Bracket

Shoulder Assembly Left

Shoulder Assembly Right

Arm Left 3 ’ 3 ”

Arm Right 3 ’ 3 ”

7523016-13

7523017-14

7523018-15

7523019-16

7523020-17

7523021-18

7523022-19

N/A

7523107-W21

7523108-W22

7523109-W23

7523110-W24

7523111-W25

7523112-W26

7523113-W27

7523114-W28

7523115-W29

7523116-W30

7523117-W31

PART NUMBER

(WHITE)

7523001-01

7523003-02

7523005-03

7523007-04

N/A

7526009-06

7523010-07

7523011-08

7523012-09

7523013-10

7523014-11

7523015-12

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

7523023-20

7523107-B21

7523108-B22

7523109-B23

7523110-B24

7523111-B25

7523112-B26

7523113-B27

7523114-B28

7523115-B29

7523116-B30

7523117-B31

PART NUMBER

(BLACK)

7523002-01

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

7523006-03

N/A

7523008-05

N/A

N/A

Item

31

32

33

34

30

31

30

Description

Arm Left 6 ’ 7 ”

Arm Right 6 ’ 7 ”

Arm Left 8 ’

Arm Right 8 ’

Lead Rail Connector Left

Lead Rail Connector Right

Manual Crank Handle (Manual

Version Only)

Part Number

(White)

7523118-W30

7523119-W31

7523120-W30

7523121-W31

7523122-W32

7523123-W33

7523124-W34

AWNING REMOTES

SINGLE AWNING PART # 98GCK-57

DOUBLE AWNING PART # 98GCK-45D

Page 48 of 49

(Black)

7523118-B30

7523119-B31

7523120-B30

7523121-B31

7523122-B32

7523123-B33

7523124-B34

Page 49 of 49

GIRARD AWNING

DC MOTOR CONTROLLER WITH

LED FUNCTION

GC1146C

INSTALATION AND PROGRAMMING GUIDE

REV.12312015

RV AWNING PRODUCTS

1361 CALLE AVANZADO, SAN CLEMENTE, CA 92673 (800) 382-8442 FAX (949)276-5500 www.girardrv.com

179

GIRARD AWNING

180

Girard Systems awnings may be operated in light wind and rain conditions. When periods of heavy rain and or high wind are expected the awning must be closed. Never leave the awning open and unattended.

Damage caused by wind and rain is not covered by warranty.

All awnings must be closed prior to moving the vehicle for any reason.

As an extra safety precaution a visual check that every awning is fully closed is required.

Damage caused by failure to comply with these instructions is not covered by warranty .

Before using your awning, ensure that the area into which the awning will be deployed is free of obstructions (Trees, walls, pillars, posts, other vehicles etc.)

Damage caused by collisions with any of the above or similar is not covered by warranty.

Before using your awning make sure that all of your electrical circuits are operating correctly. Recreational Vehicles can generate AC power from three separate sources. The electrical system transfer switch in your vehicle will select power for the awning as follows:

Shore Power – if connected;

Generator Power – if the generator is running;

Inverter Power – batteries must be charged for inverter operation.

Girard Systems awnings are supplied with an electric motor appropriate to the product.

Page 2 of 14

GIRARD AWNING

CONTENTS

Product description ………………………………………………………………………………………. 3

Installation Wiring Diagram …………………………………………………………………………… 4

PAIRING WITH A REMOTE DEVICE ……………………………………………………………. 5-12

98GC229 Single channel wall switch ………………………………………………………………. 5

GC661B 5 Channel wall switch ………………………………………………………………………. 6

Single Channel Handsets ………………………………………………………………………………. 7

Multi-Channel Handsets ………………………………………………………………………………… 8

Pairing with Additional devices ………………………………………………………………………. 9

Removing an additional device …………………………………………………………………….. 10

Pairing with an Anemometer ………………………………………………………………………… 11

Pairing with a Motion sensor ………………………………………………………………………… 12

THE G–LINK SYSTEM

The G-Link motors and control modules provided by Girard Systems communicate by use of RF signals on a frequency of 433.92 MHZ. This eliminates the need for wiring and the drilling of holes in the vehicle. These components must be electronically matched, programmed or paired before use. This is usually done at the Girard Systems factory. Should the need arise for the user to pair a device with the motor controller they must refer to the appropriate manual for the devices applicable to their particular installation.

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

The GC1146C is a 12v DC Motor Control Module which requires a 20 Amp Circuit breaker or fuse protected power supply, designed to control a single awning motor. The thicker RED and BLACK wires are the module’s input power supply which should be connected to the vehicle’s Power distribution panel. The thinner RED and BLACK wires are the 12v output to the LED lighting strip. The BLUE and BROWN wires are the 12v output which should be connected to the awning motor. The longer White wire is the modules RF antenna. The GC1146C has an operating frequency of 433Mhz, and a range of up tp 650’ in the open or 110’ where there are obstructions. This module can be paired with up to 20 compatable RF remote devices. If additional devices are paired with the GC1146C, previously paired devices will be overwritten in turn from the second device onward.

Page 3 of 14

181

182

GIRARD AWNING

WARNING

“To reduce the risk of electric shock the operator power is to be provided from a weatherproof junction box in the case of permanent wiring, as per 314.15 of the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70.”

To prevent the motor protector from tripping do not exceed 2 minutes of operation per hour.

Page 4 of 14

GIRARD AWNING

PAIRING WITH REMOTE DEVICES

The following pages give instructions on how to pair the GC1146C Motor controller with various compatable RF remote control devices. Please ensure that the correct set of instructions are followed for the device being paired with the Motor controller.

GC660B SINGLE CHANNEL WALL SWITCH

The faceplate can be removed easily by holding the module firmly in one hand at the left and right edges and push the STOP button with two fingers of your other hand.

Fig.1 below shows how the batteries must be inserted.

Fig.1

Fig.2

When pairing with the GC1146C it is advised that the awning to be controlled is manually extended couple of feet to enable the programmer to see if the awning is responding in the correct direction when the buttons on the wall switch are pressed.

The programming window for this module is only 10 seconds so please ensure that the programming instructions are read and understood before attempting to execute them.

1) Supply power to the motor control module. (It will beep ONCE).

2) Press the P2 button on the wall switch TWICE. (The motor controller will beep with each press)

3) Press the IN button on the wall switch. (The awning should retract)

Page 5 of 14

183

GIRARD AWNING

If the awning extends at this point instead of retracting, press the STOP button immediately, then remove the power supply to the motor controller for at least 10 seconds.

Next repeat steps 1 and 2 above then press the OUT button on the wall switch to complete the programming procedure.

Ensure that the awning responds correctly to the wall switch by pressing the OUT,

STOP and IN buttons alternately.

GC661B MULTI CHANNEL WALL SWITCH

The faceplate can be removed easily by holding the module firmly in one hand at the left and right edges and push on the faceplate below the display screen with two fingers of your other hand. Fig.1 below shows how the batteries must be inserted.

Close the battery tray and replace the faceplate, you will find the pushbuttons clearly marked. See Fig.2 below.

Fig.1 Fig.2

184

When pairing with the GC1146C it is advised that the awning to be controlled is manually extended couple of feet to enable the programmer to see if the awning is responding in the correct direction when the buttons on the wall switch are pressed.


Page 6 of 14

GIRARD AWNING

First determine which channel of the wall switch is to be paired with the motor controller, then;

1) Select the desired channel on the wall switch using the CH button.

2) Supply power to the motor control module. (It will beep ONCE )

3) Press the P2 button on the wall switch TWICE. (The motor controller will beep with each press)

4) Press the IN button on the wall switch. (The awning should retract)


Next repeat steps 1 and 2 above then press the OUT button on the wall switch to complete the programming procedure.



Page 7 of 14

185

GIRARD AWNING

98GC1063 SINGLE CHANNEL HANDSET

186

Fig.1 Fig.2

The 9GC1063 is the simplest of devices, IN and OUT buttons clearly marked. If you should wish to stop the awning at any point press the center of the control pad. See

Fig.1 Above. On the back of the handset you will find the P2 button and the battery tray.


1) Supply power to the motor control module. (It will beep ONCE )

2) Press the P2 button on the handset TWICE. (The motor controller will beep with each press)

3) Press the IN button on the handset. (The awning should retract)


Next repeat steps 1 and 2 above then press the OUT button on the handset to complete the programming procedure.

Ensure that the awning responds correctly to the handset by pressing the OUT, STOP and IN buttons alternately.

Page 8 of 14

98GC1029 5 CHANNEL HANDSET

GIRARD AWNING

Fig.1 Fig.2

The 98GC1029 remote handset is a 5-channel RF transmitter, which is powered by a single 3v Lithium battery (CR2430) designed to control up to 5 awnings and operates the LED lighting strips by means of a multi-functional circular control pad. As shown in

Fig.1 above.

Note; when carrying out this part of the procedure each step must be executed within 10 seconds of the previous one or the module will revert to factory settings. It is highly recommended that you read and understand the following sequence before attempting to execute it.

1) Supply power to the Motor controller. (The GC1146C will emit a soft beep)

2) Select the desired channel on the remote handset.

3) Using an appropriate tool press the P2 button on the back of the Handset

TWICE. ( The GC1146C will Beep with each press)

4) Press the IN button on the wall switch and verify that the awning moves in the desired direction.


Next repeat steps 1, 2 and 3 above then press the OUT button on the wall switch to complete the programming procedure.



Page 9 of 14

187

188

GIRARD AWNING

PAIRING WITH ADDITIONAL DEVICES

As mentioned in the Product description the GC1146C can be paired with up to 20 compatible devices, wall switches handsets and others. The first device to be paired with the 98GC74 Motor Controller shall now be referred to as the PRIMARY REMOTE which is used to program all additional devices which shall be referred to as the

SECONDARY REMOTE or SECONDARY DEVICE. To add a secondary device to the motor controller, carefully follow the steps below.


1) First ensure that the Primary remote device is functioning correctly.

2) Ensure that the Secondary device has the battery /batteries inserted correctly.

3) Press the P2 Button on the Primary Remote TWICE (The Motor controller will beep with each press)

4) Press the P2 Button on the Secondary remote ONCE (The motor controller will beep again)

5) Press IN or OUT on the Secondary remote and ensure that the awning responds accordingly.

REMOVING AN ADDITIONAL DEVICE

Select the Secondary device that is to be removed from the 98GC74’s list and follow the steps below;

1) Press the P2 Button on the device ONCE (The Motor controller will beep in response.

2) Press the STOP Button on the device ONCE.

3) Press the P2 Button on the device again. The Motor controller will beep several times indicating that the secondary device has been cancelled.

Page 10 of 14

PAIRING WITH A GC116I ANEMOMETER

Wind Speed Dial P2 Button

GIRARD AWNING

UP Button

LED

Fig.1

• Fully extend the awning to ensure smooth operation, then retract the awning leaving it partially open (about 3 feet).

• Locate the P2 Button on the back of the Primary remote.

• Set the wind speed dial between 1 and 2 on the anemometer. See Fig.1 above.


1) Connect the Anemometer to a 12V DC Power source. (The Red LED will flash once when power is connected)

2) Press the P2 button on the back of the Primary remote TWICE (The Motor controller will beep with each press)

3) Press the P2 button on the Anemometer ONCE (The motor controller will beep several times to indicate that the program has been accepted)

4) Press the up button on the Anemometer or physically activate it by spinning the cups to retract the awning.

Page 11 of 14

189

190

GIRARD AWNING

PAIRING WITH A MOTION SENSOR

Identify the Primary remote which operates the Motor controller for the awning on which the motion sensor is to be mounted. There may be more than one on the vehicle.

Prepare the Motion Sensor for pairing by carrying out the following procedure.

Remove the 2 small

Phillips screws which secure the motion sensor to the mounting bracket.

The base of the module is magnetized so will need to be gently lifted off.

Fig.1

Then turn it over.

Fig.2

Page 12 of 14

Remove the 4 Phillips screws holding the module together.

Remove the base plate and silicone insert.

Base Plate

GIRARD AWNING

Magnet

Insert

Fig.3

Turn the base plate over

(Magnet down). Then place the motion sensor on top of it so that the magnet is aligned with the reed switch. If this is not done the default program cannot be changed.

Reed Switch LED

Adjustment Dial

Programming

Button

Fig.4

Fully extend the awning to ensure smooth operation, then retract the awning leaving it partially open (about 3 feet).

Locate the P2 Button on the back of the handset.

Page 13 of 14

191

192

GIRARD AWNING


1) Set the Motion sensor Adjustment Dial to 0. (See Fig.4).

2) Connect the GC779G Motion sensor to a 12volt DC circuit. At this point the

Purple LED will illuminate and then begin to blink. If it does not, the unit is not receiving the correct power. Ensure that the magnet and reed switch are aligned and verify the electrical connection before proceeding.

3) Using an appropriate tool, press the P2 Button on the back of the Remote

Controller TWICE. The GC1146C will bleep ONCE with each press.

4) Press the programming button on the GC779G Motion sensor ONCE (See Fig.4).

The GC1146C will bleep several times to indicate that the program has been accepted.

5) Ensure that the code was accepted by pressing the Program button on the

GC779G Motion sensor again. The Awning should make a small step IN or OUT.

Or shake the motion sensor and the Awning will fully retract.

6) If the Awning does not retract, repeat steps a. to d.

7) Set the Adjustment Dial to the desired sensitivity level 1 to 5. Never set higher than 5. (The factory setting is 3).

Once programming is complete, reassemble the Motion sensor module and mount it on the awning lead rail.

For queries or assistance with programming any of your G-Link devices please call Girard Systems TOLL FREE on 800–382–8442 between 7:30am and 3:30pm P.S.T.

Page 14 of 14


MAXXFAN

®

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS,

INFORMATION AND OPERATING GUIDE

FOR ALL MAXXFAN

® Deluxe

MODELS

5100K, 5101K, 5301K, 6200K, 6201K, 6401K,

7000K, 7001K, 7500K, 7501K, 8000K, 8001K,

8500K, 8501K, 8700K, 8751K, 8900K, 8951K

READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

NOTE: Refer to supplied Operating Instructions regarding the model you have purchased.

The MAXXFAN installs into a standard RV roof opening of 14” x 14”.

To determine if your roof opening is correctly sized, simply remove the interior ceiling garnish trim ring of your existing roof vent and measure the ceiling opening or verify the opening is large enough by sliding the MAXXFAN interior garnish trim ring into the opening.

Due to the EXHAUST / INTAKE LOUVERS that face the rear of the vehicle, the MAXXFAN requires a roof area clear of obstructions such as air conditioners, storage boxes, etc. for at

OHDVW´WRWKHUHDURIWKHH[LVWLQJVWDQGDUGURRIYHQWÀDQJHRXWHUUHDUHGJH

The MAXXFAN is designed for a minimum roof thickness of 1 1/8” to a maximum of 6 1/2”.

If your roof thickness is less than 1 1/8”, build additional thickness at the ceiling opening using wood or other suitable material.

The MAXXFAN UHTXLUHVDPLQLPXP9ROW'&DPSVHUYLFH&RQ¿UPWKDWWKHFLUFXLW you intend to use will accommodate the additional load. Use the proper gauge stranded wire for electrical connections.

WARNING! 7RUHGXFHULVNRI¿UHLQMXU\WRSHUVRQVRUGDPDJHWRSURSHUW\XVHRQO\ in the manner intended by AIRXCEL, INC. Should you have questions, please contact

AIRXCEL/MAXXAIR VENTILATION SOLUTIONS Customer Service at 316.832.4357.

P/N: 11D90001K

08-2017

193

194


MAXXFAN

®

2 YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY

AIRXCEL, INC. - RV PRODUCTS DIVISION / MAXXAIR

Ventilation Solutions warrants to be free of manufacturing defects, regardless of ownership for a period of two (2) years from the original date of purchase. If the product is installed as original equipment on a vehicle, the warranty period shall begin on the date of the original purchase of the vehicle. In all other instances, the warranty shall begin on the date the product was purchased. You must keep your original sales receipt.

RETAINING KNOB SERIAL NUMBER

This Limited Warranty does not include “Acts of God,” failure due to misuse, improper installation or accidental / incidental damages. Please call AIRXCEL, INC. at 1-316-832-4357 if you have any questions or need assistance.

Please have your original sales receipt and MAXXFAN Serial Number readily available.

AIRXCEL will correct the confirmed defect within 45 days by repair or replacement without charge for materials and labor. This limited warranty does not cover any freight costs for the return of the product to or from AIRXCEL, INC. or costs associated with installation, removal or reinstallation of the product.

We invite your comments and suggestions regarding our products. Any information you supply is for AIRXCEL / MAXXAIR’s internal use and will not be shared or sold to others.

The Serial Number for your MAXXFAN is located on the back page of this booklet and on the fan control plate under the round insect screen frame. (Your serial number may or may not be located in the same position as referenced in the above image). Reference your operating guide. Rotate the four retaining knobs 180° and remove the screen to view. DO NOT OPERATE the MAXXFAN with the screen removed.

CAUTIONS AND CARE OF YOUR MAXXFAN ®

This product has been manufactured using prime UV stabilized Polymers for maximum toughness and durability. However, the use of caustic or solvent based chemicals can cause cracking and product failure.

PLEASE CLEAN ALL PARTS WITH MILD SOAP AND WATER ONLY.

Do not use Petroleum Containing Additives or Solvent Based Products on any of the

MAXXFAN’s components or its corrosion resistant hardware.

LISTED BELOW ARE SOME KNOWN CHEMICAL PRODUCTS TO BE

AWARE OF:

NON COMPATIBLE CHEMICALS - DO NOT USE THESE:

Ketones, Esters, Acetone or other like solvents, Halogenated Hydrocarbons,

Amines, Aromatic Hydrocarbons, (Loctite Formulas), or any products containing references to: chemicals that are not to be used on plastics.

GENERALLY COMPATIBLE (But should be used in low concentration where possible)

Acids, Alcohol, Alkalis, Aliphatic Hydrocarbons, Mild Soap Solution (avoid strong

Alkaline Material), Silicone Oil or Greases (avoid those containing Aromatic

Hydrocarbons or other additives). Review the contents of your cleaning materials carefully.

For additional information regarding your NEW MAXXFAN ® Deluxe , please refer to the INFORMATION AND OPERATION GUIDES

FOR YOUR PARTICULAR MODEL ON THE FOLLOWING PAGES.

4



KEYPAD FOR MAXXFAN

® Deluxe

MODELS

5301K • 6401K

KNOB, VENT LID OPEN/CLOSE

Manual Opening

Pull to unlock prior to turning. Rotate Knob clockwise to Close Vent Lid; Rotate Knob counter-clockwise to Open Vent Lid. Push

“IN” to lock when Vent Lid is open or closed.

It may be necessary to slightly rotate the knob to properly align it while pushing it up to lock.

Do not use excessive force when operating

Knob.

KEYPAD CONTROLS

Use Keys on Keypad to control MAXXFAN functions (see descriptions below).

INSECT SCREEN RETAINER KNOB

Rotate all 4 knobs 1/2 turn to remove screen.

Caution: Never operate fan with screen removed.

CEILING FAN MODE

With the fan motor running, close the Vent Lid to enter Ceiling Fan Mode. The fan motor will continue to run and circulate air within the RV cabin.

SERIAL NUMBER LABEL

The serial number label is located underneath the round insect screen.

NOTE: The MAXXFAN is designed to be fully opened or fully closed when the vehicle is moving.

KEYPAD CONTROLS


® Deluxe

MODELS

5301K • 6401K

CAUTION: When removing insect screen for cleaning, turn the MAXXFAN OFF and remove the vehicle

12 volt power to the MAXXFAN. When cleaning your MAXXFAN, use only a mild detergent solution.

FAN ON

1-2-3-4

FAN

OFF

FAN ON

1-2-3-4

Turns the Fan Motor ON to the last selected speed

When the fan is running, cycles through four (4) speeds, once HIGH

SPEED is reached, fan motor cycles back to LOW SPEED

Turns the Fan Motor OFF at any selected speed

5

FAN

OFF

195

196




® Deluxe

MODELS

5100K, 5101K, 6200K, 6201K, 7000K, 7001K, 7500K, 7501K,

8000K, 8001K, 8500K, 8501K

KNOB, VENT LID OPEN/CLOSE

Manual Opening Models

Pull to unlock prior to turning. Rotate Knob clockwise to Close Vent Lid; Rotate Knob counter-clockwise to Open Vent Lid. Push

“IN” to lock when Vent Lid is open or closed.

Automatic Opening Models

Allows closing of the vent lid in the event of RV power loss. This knob does not lock. Do not push in or pull out. Rotate knob clockwise to close vent lid; rotate knob counter-clockwise to open vent lid.

Do not use excessive force when operating

Knob.

KEYPAD CONTROLS

Use Keys on Keypad to control

MAXXFAN functions

(see descriptions on next page).

NOTE: IR Sensor not on all models

INSECT SCREEN RETAINER KNOB

Rotate all 4 knobs 1/2 turn to remove screen.

Caution: Never operate fan with screen removed

THERMOSTAT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

CEILING FAN MODE

With the fan motor running, close the Vent Lid to enter Ceiling Fan Mode. The fan motor will continue to run and circulate air within the RV cabin.

SERIAL NUMBER LABEL

The serial number label is located underneath the round insect screen.

NOTE: The MAXXFAN is designed to be fully opened or fully closed when the vehicle is moving.

CAUTION: When removing screen for cleaning, turn the MAXXFAN OFF and remove the vehicle 12 volt power to the MAXXFAN. When cleaning your

MAXXFAN, use only a mild detergent solution.

6


KEYPAD CONTROLS

KEYPAD FOR

MAXXFAN ® Deluxe

INTAKE/EXHAUST MODELS

5100K, 6200K, 7000K, 7500K,

8000K, 8500K

KEYPAD CONTROLS

KEYPAD FOR

MAXXFAN ® Deluxe

EXHAUST ONLY MODELS

5101K, 6201K, 7001K, 7501K

8001K, 8501K

127($EHHSLQJVRXQGZLOOFRQ¿UPHDFKNH\SUHVV

ON/OFF: 8VHWKLVNH\WRVWDUWWKHIDQRUWRWXUQRႇWKHIDQ2Q$XWRPDWLF2SHQLQJ0RGHOV

WKHOLGZLOODOVRRSHQRUFORVHZKHQWKHIDQLVWXUQHGRQRURႇ2Q0DQXDO2SHQLQJ0RGHOV

SXVKLQJWKLVNH\ZKLOHLQ$XWR0RGHZLOOH[LW$XWR0RGHWXUQRႇWKHIDQDQGWKHOLGZLOOVWD\ in the position you selected. On Automatic Opening Models this button will exit Auto mode,

WXUQWKHIDQRႇDQGFORVHWKHOLG

IN/OUT: Use this key to reverse the direction of the fan, the fan will slow down and pause for two (2) seconds before resuming operation in the opposite direction. Note: In Auto

Mode the fan direction is automatically positioned to Exhaust, but may be overridden and changed to Intake by depressing this key. PLEASE NOTE: THIS KEY HAS BEEN

REMOVED ON EXHAUST ONLY MODELS

AUTO: Auto Mode allows the thermostat to turn the fan ON and OFF depending on the thermostat setting. Press this key once for less than three (3) seconds to enter Auto Mode,

WKUHHTXLFNEHHSVZLOOFRQ¿UPWKH0$;;)$1KDVHQWHUHG$XWR0RGH7R(;,7$XWR

Mode, press the ON/OFF key. Initial factory set point for the thermostat is 78°F/25°C. The green LED

ZLOOOLJKWWRLQGLFDWHWKH0$;;)$1LVLQ$XWR0RGH7RDGMXVWIROORZLQVWUXFWLRQVEHORZ

If no previous thermostat temperature was entered, or you wish to change a previous set temperature, press the HOLD TO SET key for more than 3 seconds and you will hear one long beep and the

WKHUPRVWDWZLOOEHUHVHWWR)7RIXUWKHUDGMXVWWKHVHWWHPSHUDWXUHLIGHVLUHGXVHWKHRU$UURZ

NH\VWRDGMXVWDWLQFUHPHQWVSHUSUHVV7KHIDQZLOOHPLWDEHHSLQJVRXQGWRFRQ¿UPWKLVVHWWLQJ,I a previous thermostat temperature was entered, the fan will remember this temperature setting and the next time you enter Auto Mode, the fan will start ventilating automatically as directed by the thermostat.

7KHIDQVSHHGZLOODXWRPDWLFDOO\DGMXVWEDVHGRQWKHFDELQWHPSHUDWXUH$VFDELQWHPSHUDWXUHULVHV the fan increases in speed. Note: If 12 volt RV power is removed from the MAXXFAN, the thermostat will be reset to 78°F/25°C.

ARROW - When in Auto Mode: 8VHWKH $UURZNH\VWRDGMXVWWKHWKHUPRVWDWVHW temperature up or down in 1° increments per press.

When in Manual Mode: 8VHWKH $UURZNH\VWRDGMXVWWKHIDQVSHHGXSRUGRZQ

When the fan speed reaches either the maximum or minimum speed, the fan will respond with 2 quick beeps to indicate this.

ARROW KEYS PRESSED TOGETHER: Automatic Lift Models Only

3UHVVWKH $UURZNH\VDWWKHVDPHWLPHWR2SHQRU&ORVHWKHOLG7KHIDQPRWRUZLOOUHPDLQLQ its current state.

7

197

198


REMOTE CONTROL OPERATING GUIDE

WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL FOR

MAXXFAN

® Deluxe

MODELS 7000K • 7500K

Optional for 8000K, 8500K, 8700K, 8900K Models

FAN ON & POWER OFF - Press this button:

• To start the fan

• 7RWXUQWKHIDQRႇ

• To exit Auto Mode

VENT LID POSITION - Press this button to open or close the vent lid

• While the fan is running in Manual Mode press once to close the vent lid and enter “Ceiling Fan” Mode.

NOTE: This button is not active in Auto Mode. If the fan loses 12volt RV power or power is removed from the fan, use the knob located at the ceiling to manually open or close the vent lid if desired.

AIR EXHAUST / INTAKE - Press this button to reverse the fan from intake or exhaust

NOTE: In Auto Mode, the fan direction is automatically positioned to Exhaust, but may be overridden and changed to Intake by depressing this key.

5HPRYHSURWHFWLYH¿OPIURP

Display Screen

FAN AUTO MODE - Press this button to enter Auto Mode

• Auto Mode allows the fan lid to automatically open and the fan motor to operate as dictated by the thermostat set point temperature. Once the cabin temperature cools and reaches the set point temperature, the fan lid will close

DQGWKHIDQPRWRUZLOOVKXWRႇ

• 3UHVVLQJWKLVEXWWRQZKLOHLQ$XWR0RGHZLOOVKXWRႇ$XWR0RGHFORVHWKHYHQWOLG

DQGVKXWRႇWKHIDQPRWRU

THERMOSTAT SET TEMPERATURE

TEMP + ~ Press this button to increase the Set Temperature for Auto Mode.

TEMP ~ Press this button to decrease the Set Temperature for Auto Mode.

NOTE: The thermostat temperature range is from 29°F to 99°F or -2°C to 37°C. To change from Fahrenheit to Celsius on the temperature display, press and hold both set temperature keys simultaneously.

LOW BATTERY

INDICATOR

FAN SPEED

Fan Speed + ~ Press this button to increase the fan speed. The fan has ten speeds.

Fan Speed ~ Press this button to decrease the fan speed. The fan has ten speeds.

NOTE: When the fan speed reaches either the maximum or minimum speed, the fan will respond with 2 quick beep sounds to indicate this.

SET

TEMPERATURE

AUTO MODE

INDICATOR

FAN ON

INDICATOR

FAN OFF

INDICATOR

TRANSMIT

CEILING FAN

FAN SPEED CEILING FAN MODE

LOW BATTERY

INDICATOR

• When the battery is at full charge, three black power bars are displayed.

• One or zero power bars displayed indicates the batteries need replacement.

AIR DIRECTION

INDICATOR

ROOM

TEMPERATURE

VENT LID IN

AUTO MODE

VENT LID

POSITION

TRANSMISSION SIGNAL

• This symbol is displayed on the screen when any button is pressed to indicate the signal was transmitted to the fan.

• A beep sound from the ceiling unit indicates the signal from the remote control was received by the fan.

8


REMOTE CONTROL OPERATING GUIDE

WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL FOR

MAXXFAN

® Deluxe

MODELS 7001K • 7501K

Optional for 8001K, 8501K Models

FAN ON & POWER OFF - Press this button:

• To start the fan

• 7RWXUQWKHIDQRႇ

• To exit Auto Mode

VENT LID POSITION - Press this button to open or close the vent lid

• While the fan is running in Manual Mode press once to close the vent lid and enter “Ceiling Fan” Mode.

NOTE: This button is not active in Auto Mode. If the fan loses 12volt RV power or power is removed from the fan, use the knob located at the ceiling to manually open or close the vent lid if desired.

5HPRYHSURWHFWLYH¿OPIURP

Display Screen

AIR OUT

FAN AUTO MODE - Press this button to enter Auto Mode

• Auto Mode allows the fan lid to automatically open and the fan motor to operate as dictated by the thermostat set point temperature. Once the cabin temperature cools and reaches the set point temperature, the fan lid will close

DQGWKHIDQPRWRUZLOOVKXWRႇ

• 3UHVVLQJWKLVEXWWRQZKLOHLQ$XWR0RGHZLOOVKXWRႇ$XWR0RGHFORVHWKHYHQWOLG

DQGVKXWRႇWKHIDQPRWRU

THERMOSTAT SET TEMPERATURE

TEMP + ~ Press this button to increase the Set Temperature for Auto Mode.

TEMP ~ Press this button to decrease the Set Temperature for Auto Mode.

NOTE: The thermostat temperature range is from 29°F to 99°F or -2°C to 37°C. To change from Fahrenheit to Celsius on the temperature display, press and hold both set temperature keys simultaneously.

LOW BATTERY

INDICATOR

FAN SPEED

Fan Speed + ~ Press this button to increase the fan speed. The fan has ten speeds.

Fan Speed ~ Press this button to decrease the fan speed. The fan has ten speeds.

NOTE: When the fan speed reaches either the maximum or minimum speed, the fan will respond with 2 quick beep sounds to indicate this.

SET

TEMPERATURE

AUTO MODE

INDICATOR

FAN ON

INDICATOR

FAN OFF

INDICATOR

TRANSMIT

CEILING FAN

FAN SPEED CEILING FAN MODE

LOW BATTERY

INDICATOR

• When the battery is at full charge, three black power bars are displayed.

• One or zero power bars displayed indicates the batteries need replacement.

AIR DIRECTION

INDICATOR

ROOM

TEMPERATURE

VENT LID IN

AUTO MODE

VENT LID

POSITION

TRANSMISSION SIGNAL

• This symbol is displayed on the screen when any button is pressed to indicate the signal was transmitted to the fan.

• A beep sound from the ceiling unit indicates the signal from the remote control was received by the fan.

9

199

200


MAXXFAN DOME

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS,


FOR MODELS 3810, 3812

READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

NOTE: Refer to Installation Instructions, Information and Operation Guides regarding the model you have purchased.

The MAXXFAN Dome fan is an exhaust fan only.

The MAXXFAN Dome fan installs into a 6 1/4 inch diameter opening.

To determine if your roof opening is correctly sized, simply remove the interior ceiling garnish trim ring of your existing roof vent and measure the ceiling opening or verify the opening is large enough by sliding the MAXXFAN Dome sleeve into the opening.

The MAXXFAN Dome is designed for a minimum roof thickness of 1 inch to a maximum of

6 inches.

The MAXXFAN Dome fan requires a minimum 12 Volt DC, 2 amp service. Confirm that the circuit you intend to use will accommodate the additional load. Circuit must be fused and use appropriate gauge stranded wire for electrical connections.

WARNING!

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY

TO PERSONS, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING: a) Use this unit in the manner intended by AIRXCEL, INC. If you have questions, contact the manufacturer. b) Before servicing or cleaning unit, switch power off at service panel and lock the service disconnecting means to prevent power from being switched on accidentally. When the service disconnecting means cannot be locked, securely fasten a prominent warning device, such as a tag, to the service panel .

CAUTION!

FOR GENERAL VENTILATION USE ONLY. DO NOT USE TO

EXHAUST HAZARDOUS OR EXPLOSIVE MATERIALS AND VAPORS.

P/N: 11A90041Z 08-09-2019


INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING! TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO

PERSONS, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING:

Installation work and electrical wiring must be done by qualified persons(s) in accordance with all applicable codes and standards, including fire-rated construction.

STEP 1

The MAXXFAN Dome fan requires a minimum 6 1/4 inch diameter roof opening. If you are replacing another type already installed, remove the old existing roof vent.

Remove all old roof sealant for a minimum of 2” entirely around the roof opening.

STEP 2

Prior to installing the MAXXFAN Dome in the roof opening, apply a continuous strip of

BUTYL tape or equivalent to the underside of the flange in the groove provided.

CAUTION! When installing your

MAXXFAN Dome fan, only use a caulking/sealant compatible with the flange (plastic product) and the roof surface. DO NOT use materials containing solvents such as or similar to

Xylene, Toluene, Methyl Ethyl Ketone

(MEK), Acetate or Acetone as they can damage the flange. Also, Polysulfide

(Thiokol) type sealants must be avoided.

If in doubt, please contact the manufacturer of your RV.

STEP 3

When inserting the MAXXFAN Dome fan into the roof opening:

• orient the fan with the button toward the front of the coach.

• ensure that the fan wires are hanging to the inside of the coach.

Center the fan in the opening.

Using the eight (8) screws provided, attach the flange to the roof at each dimple location along the flange.

Note: Opening the fan lid gives better access to the flange for assembling the screws.

Screw into the dimple to pierce the flange, making sure not to overtighten the screws to avoid cracking the flange.

STEP 4

After the MAXXFAN Dome fan has been installed, remove the excess BUTYL caulk that may have squeezed out. Using a sealer such as Dicor self-leveling lap sealant or similar caulking, apply a daub over every exposed screw head. In addition, apply a bead (approximately 3/16” dia.) along the outside edge of the flange all the way around the fan.

THIS COMPLETES THE ROOF TOP

PORTION OF THE INSTALLATION

201

202


CAUTION!

Disconnect main vehicle power before connecting 12 volt DC power to the MAXXFAN Dome exhaust fan .

STEP 5

• If the roof is thicker than 1 inch the extension sleeve must be used.

• A roof that is 6 inches thick will use the full-length extension sleeve without trimming.

VEHICLE

ROOF

THICKNESS

SLEEVE LENGTH TO CUTOFF

6.0

1.0 inch

LED

NONE (use full length sleeve)

Not Applicable,

Sleeve not used

NON-LED

NONE (use full length sleeve)

Not Applicable,

Sleeve not used

• If the roof is between 1 inch and 6 inches, the extension sleeve may need to be trimmed.

• Measure the distance from the vehicle ceiling to the base of the MAXXFAN Dome fan. Cut the extension sleeve longer than the dimension measured to accommodate the depth of the garnish ring. Refer to table below for additional length required.

NOTE: Mark and cut the extension sleeve per figure 5 shown above.

VEHICLE ROOF

THICKNESS

LENGTH TO ADD TO

CEILING THICKNESS

MEASUREMENT

LED NON-LED

15/16 inch 1/2 inch 1 1/8 to 5 7/8 inch

MAXXAIR BATH FAN opening. This will help center the garnish ring in the opening.

• Ensure that the wires are not pinched.

The wires should be routed on the outside of the sleeve. The excess wire should lay in the garnish ring to keep them contained.

STEP 6 Non-LED MAXXFAN Dome

Using the supplied wire splices, connect the

Positive (+) 12VDC supply wire to the

MAXXFAN Dome fan wire marked “POS

12VDC” and the Negative (-) 12VDC supply wire to the MAXXFAN Dome fan wire marked “Neg. 12VDC”.

• If the sleeve is needed, insert the sleeve into the garnish ring positioning the notch in the sleeve to line up the wiring.

• Raise the garnish ring to the ceiling ensuring that the garnish ring is centered over the fan opening.

• If using the sleeve, the sleeve will overlap the base that extends in the

• Secure the garnish ring to the ceiling with the four (4) screws provided in the small parts package.

• Reconnect the main vehicle power to the MAXXFAN Dome .

This completes the installation of the MAXXFAN Dome exhaust fan.

203

204


STEP 7 LED MAXXFAN Dome

Using the supplied wire nuts, connect the

Positive (+) 12VDC supply wire to the

MAXXFAN Dome fan wire and the LED light wire marked “POS 12VDC” and the

Negative (-) 12VDC supply wire to the

MAXXFAN Dome fan wire and the LED light wire marked “Neg. 12VDC”.

• If the sleeve is needed, insert the sleeve into the garnish ring positioning the notch in the sleeve to line up the wiring.

• Raise the garnish ring to the ceiling ensuring that the garnish ring is centered over the fan opening.

• If using the sleeve, the sleeve will overlap the base that extends in the opening. This will help center the garnish ring in the opening.

• Ensure that the wires are not pinched.

The wires should be routed on the outside of the sleeve. The excess wire and wire nuts should lay in the garnish ring to keep them contained.

• Secure the garnish ring to the ceiling with the four (4) screws provided in the small parts package.

• Reconnect the main vehicle power to the MAXXFAN Dome .

This completes the installation of the MAXXFAN Dome fan.


• To open the MAXXFAN Dome lid push the button on the handle to dis-engage

•

OPERATION OF YOUR

MAXXFAN Dome fan the clip and slide the handle up till the clip engages the upper opening.

To close the lid, push the button on the handle to dis-engage the clip and pull the handle down till the clip engages the lower opening.

USER INSTRUCTIONS SERVICING

Cleaning of your MAXXFAN Dome may be achieved with mild soap and water only. The screen can be removed for cleaning by removing the four (4) screws.

Before removing the screen for cleaning, ensure the fan is turned to the OFF position.

CAUTION: Do not operate the fan with the screen removed.

• Operation of your MAXXFAN Dome simply entails pushing the ON/OFF button on the fan to activate the exhaust fan.

The MAXXFAN Dome fan has a 5 amp fuse. To access the fuse, turn the fuse cap to the left to remove the cap. Replace the fuse with a 5 amp, type GMA fast acting fuse. Replace the fuse cap to secure the fuse in the fuse holder.

•

PLACE CONSUMER LABEL HERE garnish ring is operated by the push button on the garnish ring. The LED lighting and fan operate independently

Should you have questions, please contact

AIRXCEL / MAXXAIR VENTILATION

SOLUTIONS Customer Service at

316.832.4357.

• Close the lid to impede infiltration of air when exhaust fan is not in use.

• The MAXXFAN Dome fan should not be operated with the lid closed.

For WARRANTY information, please visit www.airxcel.com/maxxair.

For additional product information please visit www.AIRXCEL.com

AIRCEL, INC. – RV Products Division / MAXXAIR

3050 N. St. Francis St.

●

Wichita, KS 67219

●

316.832.3400

205


Owner’s Manual

For N41X models - 4.5 cu. ft., 2-way or 3-way, refrigerators.

For N51X models - 5.5 cu. ft., 2-way or 3-way, refrigerators.

The model numbers of 3-way refrigerators include “.3”. The model numbers of 2-way models do not.

The letter “X” in the model number above, stands for a letter or a numeral which means a refrigerator option.

!

WARNING

FIRE OR EXPLOSION HAZARD

If you smell gas:

1. Open Windows

2. Do not attempt to light appliance.

3. Do not touch electrical switches.

4. Extinguish any open flame

5. Shut off fuel supply.

6. Evacuate immediately and call emergency services.

Failure to follow these instructions could result in fire or explosion, which could cause property damage, personal injury, or death.

!

WARNING

Improper installation, adjustment, alteration, service or maintenance can cause injury or property damage. Refer to this manual. For assistance or additional information, contact a qualified installer, service agency, or the gas supplier.

FOR YOUR SAFETY

Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors and liquid in the vicinity of this or any other appliance.

NORCOLD, Inc.

P.O. Box 4248

Sidney, OH 45365-4248

English

Norcold Customer Support Dept.

Telephone: 800-543-1219

Fax: 734-769-2332

Web Site: www.norcold.com

Part No. 635480B (10/1/2014)

206


Table of Contents

For defined warranty terms, please see the one page warranty statement included in the product information packet.

Safety Awareness .....................................................................................................................................................................................2

Safety Instuctions .....................................................................................................................................................................................3

About Your Refrigerator ............................................................................................................................................................................3

Storage volume .................................................................................................................................................................................3

Leveling .............................................................................................................................................................................................3

Operation during travel ......................................................................................................................................................................3

Food compartment ............................................................................................................................................................................4

Flip-up shelf .......................................................................................................................................................................................4

Door bins ...........................................................................................................................................................................................4

Freezer compartment ........................................................................................................................................................................4

Door latch for travel and storage .......................................................................................................................................................4

Temperature control system ..............................................................................................................................................................4

Operating the Refrigerator Controls .........................................................................................................................................................5

Control Panel ............................................................................................................................................................................................5

Automatic mode operation ................................................................................................................................................................5

Removing the air from the propane gas supply lines ........................................................................................................................6

Set the controls to automatic mode operation ...................................................................................................................................6

Set the controls to manual mode operation.......................................................................................................................................7

Cooling unit sensing ..........................................................................................................................................................................7

Backup operating system ..................................................................................................................................................................8

DC Operation Precautions (3-way models only) ......................................................................................................................................8

DC Operation Guidelines (3-way models only) ........................................................................................................................................9

Effects of High Altitude on Propane Gas Operation .................................................................................................................................9

Effects of Freezing Temperatures on Refrigerator Operation ...................................................................................................................9

Refrigerator Care Checklist ......................................................................................................................................................................9

Defrosting ...............................................................................................................................................................................................10

Cleaning ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 11

Drip tray ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 11

Door Sealing ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 11

Refrigerator Maintenance Checklist .......................................................................................................................................................12

Refrigerator Storage ...............................................................................................................................................................................12

Refrigerator Maintenance .......................................................................................................................................................................13

Gas flame appearance ....................................................................................................................................................................13

Remove and clean the burner orifice ..............................................................................................................................................13

Remove the Refrigerator ........................................................................................................................................................................14

Reinstall the Refrigerator ........................................................................................................................................................................14

Replacement Parts .................................................................................................................................................................................15

Wiring Diagram and Pictorial ..................................................................................................................................................................15

Fault Codes ............................................................................................................................................................................................16

Safety Awareness

Read this manual carefully and understand the contents before you use the refrigerator.

Be aware of possible safety hazards when you see the safety alert symbol on the refrigerator and in this manual. A signal word follows the safety alert symbol and identifies the danger of the hazard. Carefully read the descriptions of these signal words to fully know their meanings. They are for your safety.

!

WARNING

This signal word means a hazard, which if ignored, can cause dangerous personal injury, death, or much property damage.

!

CAUTION

This signal word means a hazard, which if ignored, can cause small personal injury or much property damage.

Owner’s Manual 2

207


Safety Instructions

!

WARNING

- The storage of flammable materials behind or around the refrigerator creates a fire hazard. Do not use the area behind the refrigerator to store anything, especially flammable materials (gasoline, cleaning supplies, etc.)

- Do not remove the round ground prong from the refrigerator AC power cord. Do not use a two prong adapter or extension cord on the AC power cord.

- A circuit overload can result in an electrical fire if the wires and/or fuses are not the correct size. Either use the wire and fuse sizes as writtten in the “Installation Manual” or refer to your local codes or the applicable RVIA Standards for the correct wire and fuse sizes.

- Incorrect installation, adjustment, change to, or maintenance of this refrigerator can cause personal injury, property damage, or both. Have service and maintenance work done by your dealer or by an Norcold authorized service center.

- Disconnect both the AC and DC power sources before doing any maintenance work on the refrigerator. All service work on this refrigerator must be done by a qualified service technician.

- Do not bypass or change the refrigerator’s electrical components or features.

- When you discard an appliance, remove all doors to prevent accidental entrapment and suffocation.

- Do not spray liquids near electrical outlets, connections, or the refrigerator components. Many liquids are electrically conductive and can cause a shock hazard, electrical shorts, and in some cases fire.

- The refrigerator cooling system is under pressure. Do not try to repair or to recharge a defective cooling system. The cooling system contains sodium chromate. The breathing of certain chromium compounds can cause cancer. The cooling system contents can cause severe skin and eye burns, and can ignite and burn with an intense flame. Do not bend, drop, weld, move, drill, puncture, or hit the cooling system.

- At regular intervals, make sure that the refrigerator flue the burner, the vent areas, and the ventilation air pathway between the vents are completely free from any flammable material or blockage. After a period of storage, it is especially important to check these areas for any flammable material or blockage caused by animals.

!

CAUTION

- The rear of the refrigerator has sharp edges and corners. To prevent cuts or abrasions when working on the refrigerator, be careful and wear cut resistant gloves.

About Your Refrigerator

Storage Volume:

This refrigerator is made to store fresh and frozen foods and for making ice.

Total capacity

Freezer capacity

Food compartment capacity

N41X

4.50 cubic feet

.81 cubic feet

3.69 cubic feet

N51X

5.50 cubic feet

.81 cubic feet

4.69 cubic feet

Leveling:

!

CAUTION

The refrigerator is made to operate within 3° off level side-to-side and 6° off level front-to-back (as looking at the front of the refrigerator). Operating it at more than these limits can cause damage to the cooling system and create a risk of personal injury or property damage. Make sure the vehicle is level before you operate the refrigerator.

Owner’s Manual 3

208


Operation during travel:

While the refrigerator should be level when the vehicle is stopped, performance during travel is not usually effected.

Food compartment:

Ignite or start up the refrigerator and let it cool for eight hours before loading with food. If the refrigerator does not start to cool down after about two hours, contact your dealer or an authorized Norcold Service Center.

For the best cooling performance:

- Let air move freely inside the entire food compartment.

- Do not cover the shelves with plastic, paper, etc.

To decrease the amount of ice that collects on the cooling fins:

- Cover all liquids and moist foods.

- Let all hot foods cool before putting them in the refrigerator.

- Do not open the door any longer than necessary.

Flip-up shelf:

The flip-up shelf supplies a space to store tall bottles. To use the flip-up shelf, lift the center of the shelf and fold it up against the inside wall of the refrigerator.

Door Bins:

You may put the door bins [52] of the fresh food compartment in a location that best meets your need (See Art01114). To remove the bins, lift them over the locator and pull them forward. To install the bins, push them onto the locator.

NOTICE

Do not wash the door bins in a dishwasher. The door bins are not dishwasher safe.

Freezer compartment:

The freezer compartment is made to keep pre-frozen food frozen and not to quick freeze food.

Keep pre-frozen foods in the freezer compartment.

NOTICE

Do not put other items on the ice tray while the water is freezing. The water freezes more rapidly if the thermostat is at the coldest temperature setting.

Door latch for travel and storage:

During travel, the door latch prevents the door from opening. There are no chains, slides, or any devices that you must engage.

During storage, the door latch prevents the door from completely closing. Use it to prevent odors when the refrigerator is shut down for a long period of time.

To use the door latch for storage (See Art00979):

- Open the door just so the door latch [161] is between the ribs [166] of the latch plate

[162].

Temperature control system:

Although the refrigerator is not frost -free, it is made to limit frost on the cooling fins. At regular intervals, the temperature control system automatically melts most of the frost from the cooling fins. The water from the cooling fins drains into a collection cup that is attached to the back of the refrigerator. The heat of the cooling system evaporates the water from the collection cup.

166

52

161

162

Art01114

Art00979

Owner’s Manual 4

209


Operating the Refrigerator Controls

Control panel:

The refrigerator control panel (see Art01562) is above the refrigerator door. A 12 volt DC power supply is necessary for the control functions of the refrigerator to operate. The refrigerator receives DC power from the 12 volt system of the vehicle; either an auxiliary battery, a converter, or the vehicle engine battery.

35 36 32 31 30

The ON / OFF button [30] starts and shuts down the refrigerator:

- To turn on the refrigerator, push and release the ON / OFF button.

AC

AUTO

LP GAS

DC

1-COLD 9-COLDEST TEMP SET MODE ON/OFF

- To turn off the refrigerator, push the ON / OFF button for one second and then release.

33 34 164

Art01562

The TEMP SET button [32] controls the temperature adjustment of the freezer and the fresh food compartment. The temperature adjustment that you select does not change if the mode of operation of the refrigerator changes.

- Push the TEMP SET button and the temperature setting “1-9” appears in the center display [33].

- Push and hold the TEMP SET button and the temperature setting changes.

- When the desired temperature setting shows, release the TEMP SET button.

- The temperature setting shows for ten seconds and then the current operation mode of the refrigerator shows.

- The number “9” is the coldest temperature setting.

The MODE button [31] controls the operation mode of the refrigerator.

- Push and hold the MODE button and a light bar shows in the center display beside each of the four operating modes of the refrigerator, one at a time.

- There is one automatic mode of operation and two manual modes of operation.

NOTICE On 3-way models only, there are three manual modes of operation.

- When the light bar shows beside the mode of operation that you choose, release the MODE button to operate the refrigerator in that mode.

Automatic mode operation:

When the refrigerator is in AUTO mode, it automatically uses the most efficient energy source that is available for operation. During operation, if a more efficient energy source becomes available, the refrigerator controls change from the current energy source to the more efficient energy source as follows:

- The first choice is AC operation if 120 volts AC is available to the refrigerator.

- The second choice is propane gas operation if 120 volts AC is not available to the refrigerator.

- The third choice is DC operation (3-way models only) if neither 120 volts AC nor propane gas is available to the refrigerator.

Owner’s Manual 5

210


Removing air from the propane gas supply lines:

For safety reasons, the burner is made to ignite on propane gas within a specified amount of time. When starting the refrigerator for the first time, after storage, or after replacing propane gas tank, the propane gas supply lines can have air in them. Due to the air in the gas supply lines, the burner may not ignite on propane gas within the specified amount of time.

To remove the air from the propane gas supply lines:

- Make sure that all of the gas valves are open.

- Push the ON / OFF button to turn the refrigerator on.

- Push and hold the MODE button until the light bar beside LP GAS [36] shows.

- This means that the refrigerator is operating on propane gas.

- If the air in the propane gas supply lines prevents the burner from ignition on propane gas, the fault code “F” will appear in the center display.

- Push and hold the ON / OFF button for one second and then release to turn the refrigerator off.

- Push the On / Off button to turn the refrigeratro on.

- The refrigerator will start a 30 second trial for ignition.

- During the 30 second trial for ignition, the refrigerator controls open the gas safety valve and the igniter sparks.

- After 30 seconds, the refrigerator controls closes the gas safety valve and the igniter stops sparking.

- When the light bar beside the LP GAS shows and no fault code remains, this means that the refrigerator is operating on propane gas.

- At this time, all of the air is removed from the propane gas supply lines and you may select AUTO mode of operation if you wish.

- Depending on how much air may be in the propane gas supply lines, you may need to repeat the 30 second trial for ignition two or three times.

- If the burner does not ignite on propane gas after two or three attempts, stop and consult your local dealer or an authorized

Norcold Service Center.

Set the controls to automatic mode operation:


- Push and hold the MODE button until the light bar shows beside AUTO [34] and then release.

- If 120 volts AC is available to the refrigerator:

- The light bar beside AC [35] also shows in the center display.

- After ten seconds, the light bar beside AC goes off and only the light bar beside AUTO remains.

- This means that the refrigerator is operating on AC electric.

- If 120 volts AC is not available to the refrigerator:

- The light bar beside AC also shows in the center display.

- After a few seconds, the light bar beside AC goes off and the light bar beside LP GAS shows.

Owner’s Manual 6

211


- After 10 seconds, the light bar beside LP GAS goes off and only the light bar beside AUTO remains.


- On 2 way models only, if neither 120 volts AC nor propane gas is available to the refrigerator:

- The fault codes “F” and then “A” show in the center display.

- On 3-way models only, if neither 120 volts AC nor propane gas is available to the refrigerator:

- The refrigerator control will automatically change to DC electric operation.

NOTICE

DC electric operation is less efficient than AC electric and propane gas. Use DC electric operation only to maintain the refrigerator temperature while in transit and if the other energy sources are not available. Do not use DC electric to initially decrease the temperature of the refrigerator.

If an energy source is available to the refrigerator, but is not operating correctly:

- A fault code shows in the center display.

- The refrigerator controls try to change to a less efficient energy source.

- If a less efficient energy source is not available:


- Refer to the “Fault Codes” section of this manual.

Set the controls to manual mode operation:


- Push and hold the MODE button until the light bar shows beside AC [35] and then release.


- Push and hold the MODE button until the light bar shows beside LP GAS [36] and then release.


- Push and hold the MODE button until the light bar shows beside DC [164] and then release.


If the energy source is interrupted:


- Refer to the “Fault Codes” section of this manual.

Cooling unit sensing:

The controls have the ability to sense the operation of the cooling unit. If the controls sense that the cooling unit has stopped cooling:

- The heat sources to the cooling unit are turned off and are locked out by the controls.

- A fault code “n” shows in the Center display.

Owner’s Manual 7

212


You can reset the controls and remove this fault code one time. To reset the controls, shut off and then start the refrigerator.

- To turn off the refrigerator, push the ON / OFF button for one second and then release.

- To turn on the refrigerator, push and release the ON / OFF button.

If you reset the controls and the fault occurs again before the refrigerator completes a full cooling cycle:

- The heat sources to the cooling unit are turned off and are locked out.

- A fault code “n” shows in the Center display.

- This time you can not reset the fault. Have the refrigerator serviced by your dealer or a Norcold authorized Service Center as soon as possible.

Backup operating system:

This refrigerator has a backup operating system. The backup operating system allows the refigerator to continue to cool if the temperature sensor of the refrigerator should fail.

If this failure occurs:

- The refrigerator automatically changes to the backup operating system.

- When you push the TEMP SET button, the temperature setting flashes in the center display for ten seconds.

- After the temperature setting flashes, the mode of operation appears in the center dispaly.

- The backup operating system can overfreeze or thaw the contents of the freezer and the fresh food compartment.

- Make sure the temperatures of the freezer and the fresh food compartment are satisfactory.

NOTICE

If you open the door(s) too often, the temperatures inside the freezer and fresh food compartment do not become stable. Allow the refrigerator to operate for about one hour after each adjustment change before you examine the contents. The number “9” is the coldest temperature setting.

- If the temperature is too warm, push and hold the TEMP SET button to raise the temperature setting by one number.

- If the temperature is too cold, push and hold the TEMP SET button to lower the temperature setting by one number.

- Have the refrigerator serviced by your dealer or an Norcold authorized Service Center as soon as possible.

DC Operation Precautions (3-way models only)

This refrigerator is made to operate on DC power while your vehicle is “in transit” and AC power or propane gas sources are not available. Operate the refrigerator on DC power only when the vehicle engine is running.

For the refrigerator to operate correctly on DC power, the battery must be maintained in a fully charged condition.

For the battery to be fully charged at all times during refrigerator operation on DC, the vehicle engine must be running and the battery charging system must be in good operating condition.

Keep in mind the following electrical precautions for DC operation of the refrigerator:

- Good battery condition is necessary for correct DC operation.

- The capacity of the battery charging system must be more than what is necessary for the refrigerator and other DC appliances.

- While the vehicle engine is running, make sure the voltage of the DC power supply leads at the refrigerator is more than 11.5 VDC.

Owner’s Manual 8

213


DC Operation Guidelines (3-way models only)

DC operation is intended only to maintain the temperature of the refrigerator and its contents when they are already cool.

The DC operation is not intended for the initial start up and cooling of the refrigerator. Always use either the AC operation or propane gas operation to initially start up and cool the refrigerator. The refrigerator must be cooled and the temperature must be steady before you operate the refrigerator on DC.

Keep in mind the following guidelines for DC operation of the refrigerator:

- Use DC operation of the refrigerator while the vehicle is in transit.

- Do not use DC operation until the refrigerator and its contents are completely cooled.

- Only use DC operation if the vehicle battery and battery charging system are in good operating condition.

Effects of High Altitude on Propane Gas Operation

When you operate the refrigerator on propane gas at altitudes higher than 5500 feet above sea level:

- You may experience reduced cooling performance of the refrigerator.

- You may experience burner outages.

To avoid these possible problems, Norcold recommends that you operate the refrigerator on AC when at altitudes higher than 5500 feet above sea level.

Effects of Freezing Temperatures on Refrigerator Operation

A gas absorption refrigerator is not designed to operate in freezing temperatures. If the refrigerator is not equipped for low temperature operation, and if the cooling system of the refrigerator is exposed to temperatures of 32° F. or lower for an extended period of time, the refrigerator operation may be disrupted. The refrigerator operation will resume when the cooling system of the refrigerator warms sufficiently.

If the refrigerator is equipped for low temperature operation, the refrigerator will operate in temperatures down to 0° F.

Disrupted operation of the refrigerator, due to extended exposure to temperatures of 32° F. or lower, and any costs incurred to warm the cooling system of the refrigerator are not covered by the Norcold limited warranty. Please contact your local RV dealer for information about how to resume refrigerator operation or about how to equip your refrigerator for operation in freezing temperatures.

Do not change the installation or the venting of your refrigerator. Refrigerator failures, which are the result of changes to either the refrigerator installation or to the venting, are not covered by the Norcold limited warranty.

Refrigerator Care Checklist

Your refrigerator will give you years of trouble free service if you do these simple checks every three to six months:

- Keep the food compartment and the freezer clean. See “Cleaning”.

- Defrost the refrigerator as necessary. See “Defrosting”.

- Make sure the door seals correctly. See “Door Sealing“.

Owner’s Manual 9

214


- Be aware of any cooling changes that are not because of weather, loading, or gas control changes. If changes occur, contact your dealer or an authorized Norcold Service Center.

- Make sure the gas supply is propane gas only and not butane or a butane mixture.

Defrosting

The cooling fins of the refrigerator operate at below freezing temperature and will naturally form frost from humidity, which is always present in the air. The humidity inside the refrigerator increases:

- with higher outside temperature and humidity.

- with the storage of non-sealed fresh foods or warm foods.

- with the amount of time that the door(s) are open.

- with any air leakage into the refrigerator.

Although the refrigerator is not frost -free, it is made to limit frost on the cooling fins. At regular intervals, the temperature control system automatically melts most of the frost from the cooling fins. The water from the cooling fins drains into a collection cup that is attached to the back of the refrigerator. The heat of the cooling system evaporates the water from the collection cup.

It is normal for frost to collect inside the freezer. Excess frost decreases the cooling performance of the refrigerator. Defrost the refrigerator and freezer as necessary:

- Remove all food from the refrigerator.

- Turn the refrigerator OFF.

NOTICE Defrosting the refrigerator makes excess water inside the refrigerator.

- Remove the drain hose from the drip cup at the rear of the refrigerator.

- Put the drain hose into a half-gallon or larger container to capture water.

- Put dry towels (etc.) inside the refrigerator and freezer to absorb melted frost.

!

CAUTION

High temperatures can cause the inside surfaces of the refrigerator to warp or melt. Do not use pans of

HOT water, a hair dryer, or any other high temperature devices to defrost the refrigerator. Do not use any hard or sharp objects to remove frost. Damage to the interior of the refrigerator can occur.

- To increase the speed of defrosting, put pans of WARM water in the refrigerator and freezer.

- Remove the wet towels (etc.) and dry the interior.

- Remove the drain hose from the large container and put the drain hose back into the drip cup.

- Remove the large container from the enclosure.

- Start up the refrigerator.

- Allow the refrigerator to cool down.

- Return all food to the refrigerator.

Owner’s Manual 10

215


Cleaning

A good time to clean the refrigerator is just after you defrost it.

Clean the inside of the refrigerator as often as necessary to avoid food odors:

- Remove all food from the refrigerator.

NOTICE Do not use abrasive cleaners, chemicals, or scouring pads because they can damage the interior of the refrigerator.

- Wash the interior with a solution of liquid dish detergent and warm water.

- Rinse with a solution of baking soda and clean water.

- Dry with a clean cloth.

- Put all food in the refrigerator.

Drip tray:

To remove and clean the drip tray:

- Locate the plastic clip that is around the wire shelf in front of the drip tray.

- Remove and save the screw that attaches the plastic clip to the inside of the refrigerator cabinet.

- Pull the self forward to remove from the refrigerator

- Make sure that the drip tray is empty of water.

- Pull the drain tube plug out from the inside of the drip tray and out of the drain hose.

- Pull the drip tray forward to remove from the slots in the refrigerator cabinet.

- Clean the drip tray.

- Put the drain tube plug down into the drip tray and push the drip tray back into the original position.

- Push the drain hose back onto the drain tube plug.

- Put the wire shelf and plastic clip back in the original position.

- Attach the plastic clip with the screw.

Door Sealing

If the door does not seal correctly, excess frost will collect inside the refrigerator. Make sure the door seals correctly:

- Close the door on a piece of paper that is about the size and thickness of a dollar bill (See

Art00980).

- Gently pull the paper.

- You should feel a slight drag between the gasket and the cabinet.

- Do this on all four sides of the door.

Art00980

Owner’s Manual 11

216


- If you do not feel a slight drag on the paper, the door is not sealing correctly:

- Make sure the screws of the hinges are tight.

- Make sure the door gasket does not touch the door latch:

- If the door gasket touches the door latch, loosen the screws of the door latch.

- Raise the door latch just so it does not touch and tighten the screws of the door latch.

- Make sure the door latch holds the door closed.

Refrigerator Maintenance Checklist

Read and understand the following maintenance sections of this manual.

NOTICE

Norcold is not responsible for installation, adjustment, alteration, service, or maintenance performed by anyone other than a qualified RV dealer or an authorized Norcold Service center.

Have a qualified RV dealer or an authorized Norcold Service Center do these annual safety and maintenance checks:

- Examine the gas supply lines for leaks.

76

- Replace or repair if necessary.

- Make sure the propane gas pressure is 11 inches of water column.

75

- Adjust if necessary.

- Make sure the combustion seal is complete and intact.

- Replace or repair it if necessary.

- Make sure the burner and the burner orifice are clean (See Art00956).

- Clean if necessary.

- Make sure the electrode spark gap [167] is 1/8 - 3/16 inch (See Art00955).

- Adjust if necessary.

- Make sure the AC voltage is 108 - 132 volts and the DC voltage is 10.5 - 15.4 volts.

- Make sure the thermocouple tip is clean and secure.

- Make sure the area at the rear of the refrigerator is free of any combustible materials, gasoline, and other flammable vapors and liquids.

77

Art00955

80 79

167

78

Art 00956

Refrigerator Storage

Before the refrigerator is stored for an extended (seasonal) period of time:

- Defrost and clean the interior of the refrigerator.

- Close the doors with the storage latch.

If the refrigerator is stored for an extended period of time, before start up:

- Make sure there are no obstructions in the vents, the ventilation air pathway, the burner, the orifice, or the flue area.

Owner’s Manual 12

217


Refrigerator Maintenance

Gas flame appearance:

While in propane gas operation, examine the appearance of the gas flame:

- Push and hold temperature setting button until the “9” shows and then release.

- Open the lower intake vent.

!

CAUTION The burner box cover can be hot. Wear gloves to avoid burns.

- Open the burner box door [165] and look at the gas flame [75] (See Art00955 and

Art00975).

- The flame should be:

- a darker blue color on the inside of the flame and a lighter blue color on the outside of the flame.

- a constant shape without flickering.

- Contact your dealer or Norcold authorized service center if the flame is:

- yellow

- flickering or changing shape.

- Make sure the flame does not touch the inside of the flue tube [76].

49

91

- If the flame touches the inside of the flue tube, contact your dealer or an authorized Norcold Service Center.

- Close the burner box door.

165

Art00975

Remove and clean the burner orifice:

NOTICE Your dealer or an authorized Norcold Service Center must do this procedure.

To remove and clean the burner orifice:

- Close the valve at the propane gas tank(s).

- Close the manual shut off valve of the refrigerator.

- Shut down the refrigerator..

- Open the lower intake vent.

!

CAUTION

The burner box cover can be hot. Wear gloves to avoid burns.

- Remove the burner box cover by removing one screw.

!

WARNING

To avoid possible propane gas leaks, always use two wrenches to loosen and tighten the gas supply line at the refrigerator’s manual shut off valve.

- Remove the flare nut from the orifice assembly [77] (See Art00956).

- Remove the orifice assembly from the burner [78].

!

WARNING

Do not try to remove the orifice [79] from the orifice adapter [80] when cleaning. Removal will damage the orifice and seal of the orifice and can cause a propane gas leak. Leaking propane gas can ignite or explode which can result in dangerous personal injury or death. Do not clean the orifice with a pin or other objects.

Owner’s Manual 13

218


- Clean the orifice assembly with air pressure and alcohol only.

- Using a wrench, assemble the orifice assembly to the burner.

- Assemble the flare nut to the orifice assembly.

- Tighten the flare nut by hand.

- Hold the orifice assembly securely and, using a wrench, tighten the flare nut 1/4 revolution only.

- Examine all of the connections for gas leaks.

Remove the Refrigerator

NOTICE Your dealer or an authorized Norcold Service Center must do this procedure.

!

CAUTION

The rear of the refrigerator has sharp edges and corners. To prevent cuts or abrasions when working on the refrigerator, be careful and wear cut resistant gloves.

1. Close the valve at the propane gas tank(s).

!

WARNING


2. Open the lower intake vent and remove the gas supply line from the manual shut off valve of the refrigerator.

3. Remove the AC power cord from the receptacle.

4. Remove the DC wiring from the refrigerator:

- Remove the DC wiring from the battery or the converter of the vehicle.

- Put a mark on the DC wires so you can put them back in the correct location.

- Remove the DC wires from the refrigerator.5. Remove the screws which fasten the refrigerator to the floor.

6. Remove the door from the refrigerator.

7. Remove the screws which fasten the refrigerator to the wall.

8. Remove the refrigerator from the opening.

9. Attach the door to the refrigerator.

Reinstall the Refrigerator

NOTICE

!

Your dealer or an authorized Norcold Service Center must do this procedure.

WARNING

Make sure the combustion seal is not broken, is completely around the refrigerator mounting flanges, and is between the mounting flanges and the wall of the enclosure. If the combustion seal is not complete, exhaust fumes can be present in the living area of the vehicle. The breathing of exhaust fumes can cause dizziness, nausea, and in extreme cases, death.

1. Push the refrigerator completely into the enclosure.

2. Remove the door from the refrigerator.

Owner’s Manual 14

219


3. Put the screws though the mounting flanges and into the wall.

4. Attach the door to the refrigerator

!

CAUTION

The rear of the refrigerator has sharp edges and corners. To prevent cuts or abrasions when working on the refrigerator, be careful and wear cut resistant gloves.

5. Open the lower intake vent and put the screws through refrigerator and into the floor.

!

WARNING


6. Attach the gas supply line to the manual shut off valve of the refrigerator.

7. Open the valve at the propane gas tank(s).

!

WARNING

Do not allow the leak checking solution to touch the electrical components. Many liquids are electrically conductive and can cause a shock hazard,electrical shorts, and in some cases fire.

8. Examine the gas supply line for leaks.

9. Connect the DC wiring to the refrigerator:

- Install the DC fuse or connect the DC wiring to the battery or the converter.

- Connect the DC wires from the refrigerator.

10. Connect the AC power cord to the receptacle.

Replacement Parts

You may purchase replacement parts through your local RV dealer or an authorized Norcold Service Center.

Wiring Diagram and Pictorial

The parts of the wiring diagram are (See Art01775):

The parts of the wiring pictorial are (See Art01776):

AC heater .................................................................................................................................................................................................

A

Thermister ............................................................................................................................................................................................... B

Gas valve ................................................................................................................................................................................................. C

Igniter ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... D

Temperature switch (optional) ................................................................................................................................................................. E

Fan (optional) ...........................................................................................................................................................................................F

DC heater (optinal) ..................................................................................................................................................................................G

Chassis ground ........................................................................................................................................................................................ H

DC board (optional) ..................................................................................................................................................................................I

Switched 12 VDC .....................................................................................................................................................................................1

Fused continuous 12 VDC ........................................................................................................................................................................2

Communications .......................................................................................................................................................................................3

Display ground ..........................................................................................................................................................................................4

Auxiliary ground (optional) ........................................................................................................................................................................5

Auxiliary +12 VDC (optional) ....................................................................................................................................................................6

Gas valve +12 VDC ..................................................................................................................................................................................7

5 A Fuse DC ...........................................................................................................................................................................................F1

8A Fuse AC .............................................................................................................................................................................................F2

30 A Fuse DC .........................................................................................................................................................................................F3

Owner’s Manual 15

220


P1

1

2

I

* F1 30 AMP

DC_HTR

12VDC

12VDC

GND

YL/JN

+ 12 VDC/VCD

- 12 VDC/VCD

YL/JN

HTR_GND

GND

G

T1

1 2

P3

5 AMP

F1

12VDC

GND

RD/RG

2 7

D

WH/BC

6

7

8

9

10

P1

1

2

3

-

4

5

+

C

WH/BC

1

YL-GN-/JN-VE

BK/NR

WH/BC

WH/BC

RD/RG

6

H

LIMIT_OUT

LIMIT_IN

WH/BC

P2

1

2

5

6

3

4

AC_HT_HI2

AC_HT_HI

BK/NR

A

BK/NR

3

4

AC_HT_LO2

AC_HT_LO

F2

L2

L1

BU/BL

WH-VT/BC-VT

} 120 VAC

120 VCA

H

B

RD/RG

GN/VE

1

P1

2

WH/BC

3

4

5

6

7

P2

3

4

5

1

2

5

TEMP

E

BK/NR

RD/RG RD/RG

F

BK/NR

OVERLAY/REVÊTRMENT

MODE ON-OFF

DISPLAY BOARD/CARTE D’AFFICHAGE

Art01775

Owner’s Manual 16

OVERLAY/REVÊTRMENT

5

DISPLAY BOARD/

CARTE D’AFFICHAGE

6

4 2

A AC HEATER / ÉLÉMENT CHAUFFANT CA

*

*

*

*

2

C GAS VALVE / ROBINET DE GAZ

D IGNITER / ALLUMEUR

E TEMPERATURE SWITCH / INTERRUPTRUR DE TEMPÉRATURE

F FAN / VENTILATEUR

G DC HEATER / ÉLÉMENT CHAUFFANT CD

H CHASSIS GROUND / MASSE DU CHASSIS

T1 I

1

*

D

F1

F2

8 AMP

10 P1 1

* F1

G

1 SWITCHED 12VDC / COMMUTÉ 12VCD

2 FUSED CONTINUOUS 12VDC/ CONTINU

FONDU 12VCD

3 COMMUNICATIONS / COMMUNICATIONS

H

*

* 6 AUXILIARY +12VDC / AUXILIAIRE +12VCD

7 GAS VALVE +12VDC / ROBINET DE GAZ +12VCD

A

H

F1 5 AMP DC FUSE / FUSIBLE DE 5 AMPERES CD

4

F2 8 AMP AC FUSE / FUSIBLE DE 5 AMPERES CA

* F1 30 AMP DC FUSE / FUSIBLE DE 30 AMPERES CD

Art01776

1

3

1

B

F

*

*

*

*

A AC HEATER / ÉLÉMENT CHAUFFANT CA

B THERMISTOR / THERMISTANCE

C GAS VALVE / ROBINET DE GAZ

D IGNITER / ALLUMEUR

E TEMPERATURE SWITCH / INTERRUPTRUR DE TEMPÉRATURE

F FAN / VENTILATEUR

G DC HEATER / ÉLÉMENT CHAUFFANT CD

H CHASSIS GROUND / MASSE DU CHASSIS

I DC BOARD / PANNEAU CD

*

F1 5 AMP DC FUSE / FUSIBLE DE 5 AMPERES CD

F2 8 AMP AC FUSE / FUSIBLE DE 5 AMPERES CA

F1 30 AMP DC FUSE / FUS IBLE DE 30 AMPERES CD

221


Fault Codes

Fault Code

No display.

“F”

“A”

“C”

“n”

Temperature setting flashes for ten seconds and mode appears.

“H”

“r”

“S”

Fault Code Meaning

DC voltage is unavailable to the refrigerator control panel or the refrigerator is OFF.

The burner did not ignite or re-ignite.

AC voltage is unavailable to the refrigerator control.

DC voltage to the refrigerator control panel is too low.

The refrigerator cooling unit has stopped cooling.

The refrigerator is operating on the “Back

Up Operating System”.

This is a fault within the refrigerator controls.



Corrective Actions

Check:

- That the refrigerator is ON.

- That the battery charging equipment of the vehicle is operational.

- The the AC/DC converter is operational (if applicable).

- See your dealer or authorized Norcold Service Center.

Check:

- That the valve of the propane gas tank(s) is open.

- That the propane gas is at the correct pressure.

- That the manual shut off valve of the refrigerator is open.

- That there is no air in the propane gas supply line. See “Removing air

from the propane gas supply lines” section of this manual.

Check:

- That the refrigerator is plugged into a serviceable outlet.

- That the fuse or circuit breaker is intact.

- That the vehicle generator is operational (if applicable).


Check:

- That the battery charging equipment of the vehicle is operational.

- The the AC/DC converter is operational (if applicable).


1st time - Before reset

Check:

- That the vents are not blocked.

- That a door(s) is not open. Close door(s).

- That the vehicle is level.

2nd time - After reset.

This is not owner serviceable. See your dealer or authorized Norcold Service

Center.


Center.


Center.


Center.


Center.

Owner’s Manual 17

222


PD9100 / 9200 SERIES POWER CONVERTER

OWNERS MANUAL

PROGRESSIVE DYNAMICS, INC. POWER

CONVERTER LIMITED WARRANTY

I.

LIMITED WARRANTY: Progressive Dynamics, Inc. warrants its power converter to be free from defects in material or workmanship under normal use and service; and limits the remedies to repair or replacement.

II.

DURATION: This warranty shall extend for a period of two years from the original date of purchase, and is valid only within the continental limits of the United States and Canada.

III.

WARRANTY EXCLUSIONS: This warranty specifically does not apply to:

A.

Any power converter which has been repaired or altered in any way by an unauthorized person or service station;

B.

Damage caused by excessive input voltage, misuse, negligence or accident; or an external force;

C.

Any power converter which has been connected, installed or adjusted or used other than in accordance with the instructions furnished, or has had the serial number altered, defaced or removed;

D.

Cost of all services performed in removing and re-installing the power converter; and

E.

ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, LOSS OF USE OF ENJOYMENT OR OTHER

INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE, THE

PRODUCT. THIS INCLUDES DAMAGES TO PROPERTY AND, TO THE EXTENT

PERMITTED BY LAW, DAMAGES FOR PERSONAL INJURY. THIS WARRANTY IS IN LIEU

OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, INCLUDING IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

IV.

PROOF OF PURCHASE: A warranty claim must be accompanied by proof of the date of purchase.

V.

CLAIM PROCEDURE: Upon discovery of any defect, Progressive Dynamics, Inc. shall be supplied the following information at the address listed below:

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

Name and address of the claimant;

Name, model and serial number of the power converter;

Application in which the power converter was installed. (Includes manufacturer, model and model year where applicable)

Date of purchase; and

Complete description of the claimed defect.

Upon determination that a warranty claim exists (a defect in material or workmanship occurring under normal use and service,) the power converter shall be shipped postage prepaid to Progressive Dynamics, Inc. together with proof of purchase. The power converter will be repaired or replaced and returned postage prepaid.

Extended warranties are available for purchase at www.progressivedyn.com

Progressive Dynamics Inc.

507 Industrial Rd.

Marshall, MI 49068

[email protected]

www.progressivedyn.com

110953C

223

224


NOTES:

•

•


Horizontal mounting of the power converter, is recommended although it can be mounted in any position that provides unobstructed ventilation to the fan and vent holes.

The OEM should test the power converter under full load conditions in its intended mounting location. This will insure that there is sufficient unobstructed ventilation to the converter allowing it to operate at its maximum rated load.

Failure to provide adequate ventilation to the converter will cause the converter output to be reduced as it responds to ambient conditions.

Installation Steps:

1.

Secure converter firmly to mounting surface.

2.

Connect ground lug (found on unit base) to chassis.

• Ground wire to be between 6 and 12AWG wire.

• Tighten lug to 25 – 35 in-lbs.

3.

Disconnect battery from both positive (+) and ground (-) cables.

4.

Connect battery ground (-) to converter NEG (-) lug.

• Conductor to be between 2 and 14AWG

(follow all applicable codes when sizing conductor)

•

•

•

The INTELI-POWER converters are not designed for zero clearance compartments.

• Use a 5/32” hex driver to tighten the output screws. Do not exceed 50 in-lbs. torque on the output terminals.

The INTELI-POWER converters are not weather tight or designed for wet mounting locations.

They must be protected from direct contact with water.

Avoid the introduction of foreign materials into the case as this could damage or cause a malfunction of the converter.


5.

Disconnect any optional pendants or modules.

6.

Plug converter into appropriate outlet.

7.

Using a DC voltmeter, verify converter output.

The power converter is working properly if the voltage is above 13VDC (12V models), 26VDC

(24V models, 14.3VDC (12V 9100L models), and 28.4VDC (24V 9100-24L models). If no output is present, refer to the trouble shooting guide in this manual.

8.

Disconnect power to converter

9.

Connect battery positive (+) to converter POS (+) lug.

• Conductor to be between 2 and 14AWG

(follow all applicable codes when sizing conductor)


Note: When connecting battery to converter

POS (+), a spark may occur. This is normal.

10.

Reconnect battery to both positive (+) and ground

(-) cables.

11.

Reconnect any optional pendants or modules.

12.

Reconnect power to converter.


GENERAL INFORMATION

The INTELI-POWER series power converters are state-of-the-art electronic converter / battery chargers.

Their compact size and quiet operation gives greater flexibility in selecting the mounting location for either

OEM installation or after market replacement.

All INTELI-POWER series power converters have been designed and tested to provide maintenance free operation and undergone tens of thousands of hours of strenuous engineering testing to ensure years of trouble free operation.

The INTELI-POWER 9200 series converter incorporates the Charge Wizard  microprocessor which constantly monitors the battery voltage and automatically adjusts the converter output voltage to provide the proper charging voltage for fast recharges and long-term maintenance.

INTELI-POWER 9100 series converters incorporate the Total Charging Management System (TCMS) interface. The TCMS interface connects the converter to optional devices that can automatically control the output voltage of the converter thereby controlling the charge rate to the batteries. (See below for Charge functions and performance) W izard 

INTELI-POWER 9100L series converters do NOT

 support the Charge Wizard functionality or provide a TCMS interface. The 9100L series converters incorporate an interface for a remote shutdown module for use with a smart lithium battery system.

FEATURES

MULTIPLE BATTERY CHARGING ... INTELI-

POWER converters have the capability of charging multiple batteries at the same time! They can even charge a combination of different capacity batteries.

GFCI PROTECTION ... INTELI-POWER converters have the LOWEST ground fault leakage.

With this unit, the user can confidently utilize the

RV's AC outlets without being concerned about a ground fault interruption of the facilities power source.

REVERSE BATTERY PROTECTION prevents damage if battery leads are cross connected. Since the only consequence of cross connection is a blown fuse, damage to or possible replacement of the converter is avoided. Cross connection of battery leads is the only thing that will blow these fuses.

Replacement fuses are available at any automotive store.

CAUTION

IF THE REVERSE BATTERY

PROTECTION FUSES ARE BLOWN

DURING INSTALLATION, CHECK TO

SEE THAT THE BATTERY HAS BEEN

CONNECTED PROPERLY BEFORE

REPLACING THE FUSES. REPLACE THE

FUSES ONLY WITH THE SAME TYPE

AND RATING AS THE ORIGINAL FUSES.

USING OTHER FUSES MAY RESULT IN

CONVERTER DAMAGE, VEHICLE

DAMAGE, INJURY OR OTHER

CONSEQUENCES (SEE WARRANTY).

ELECTRONIC CURRENT LIMITING ... Should demand exceed the rated capacity of the converter or a short circuit occur, the output voltage of the converter drops to almost zero until the situation is corrected. This feature prevents blown fuses, damage to the converter, 12 volt motors and wiring.

AUTOMATIC THERMAL PROTECTION ...

Should an over temperature condition occur, the converter will reduce power output. The converter automatically resumes normal operation when a safe operating temperature is reached.

IGNITION PROTECTION ... All INTELI-POWER series converters are ignition protected.

VARIABLE SPEED COOLING FAN ... An electronic sensor monitors converter temperature.

Higher demand generates higher heat, requiring higher fan speeds. Lower demand means lower heat and fan speed. This means the fan may not operate at night or will operate at a very slow, quiet speed when demand is low and the owner is trying to sleep.

HIGH VOLTAGE PROTECTION ... This circuit shuts the converter down if a surge or spike in input voltage is detected. The converter will automatically return to normal operation when the condition is corrected.

LOW VOLTAGE PROTECTION … INTELI-

POWER converters automatically shut down if input voltage is insufficient for continued operation. When the low voltage situation is corrected, the INTELI-

POWER converter automatically resumes normal operation.

225

226


GENERAL OPERATION

The INTELI-POWER series converter will supply

"clean" power from input voltages that range from

90-130 VAC (205-265 VAC for 230 volt models).

The INTELI-POWER series of converters are primarily designed for use with a battery, however, the output of the INTELI-POWER converters are a regulated, filtered DC voltage that can power sensitive electronics without the need for a battery or other filtering.

At normal input voltages the full load rated capacity is available.

At input voltages less than 105 VAC (205 VAC for

230 volt models) the converter may not supply full rated output capacity.

9100L - The full rated load is available for load, battery charging or both. When functioning as a regulated battery charger the converter has a nominal voltage output of 14.6 VDC for 12 volt models and

29.2 VDC for 24 volt models. The system is designed to sense voltage on the battery and will taper the charging current as the battery becomes charged.

CAUTION

The 9100L series converter/chargers are designed to recharge lithium iron phosphate batteries.

DO NOT USE TO RECHARGE

LEAD/ACID BATTERIES!

9100 - The full rated load is available for load, battery charging or both. When functioning as a regulated battery charger the converter has a nominal voltage output of 13.6 VDC for 12 volt models and 27.2 VDC for 24 volt models. The system is designed to sense voltage on the battery and will taper the charging current as the battery becomes charged.

When the vehicle is to be stored for extended periods of time it is recommended that the batteries be disconnected, unless a TCMS Charge Wizard   is attached to the TCMS interface. Reconnect battery once a month to maintain a full charge.

9200 - The full rated load is available for load, battery charging or both. When functioning as a regulated battery charger the converter has a nominal voltage output of 13.6 VDC for 12 volt models and 27.2 VDC for 24 volt models. The system is designed to sense voltage on the battery and automatically selects one of three operating modes (normal, boost and storage) to provide the correct charge level to the batteries.

BOOST MODE: If the converter senses that the battery voltage has dropped below a preset level the output voltage is increased to approximately 14.4

VDC (28.8 VDC for 24 volt models) to rapidly recharge the battery.

NORMAL MODE: Output voltage set at approximately 13.6 VDC (27.2 VDC for 24 volt models).

STORAGE MODE: When the converter senses that there has been no significant battery usage for 30 hours the output voltage is reduced to 13.2 VDC

(26.4 VDC for 24 volt models) for minimal water usage. When in storage mode the microprocessor automatically increases the output voltage to 14.4

VDC (28.8 DC for 24 volt models) for approximately

15 minutes every 21 hours to help prevent sulfation of the battery plates.

CAUTION

IT IS IMPORTANT THAT THE FLUID

LEVEL OF ANY CONNECTED

BATTERIES BE CHECKED ON A

REGULAR BASIS. ALL BATTERIES

WILL “GAS” AND LOSE SOME FLUIDS

WHEN CONTINUOUSLY CONNECTED

TO ANY CHARGING SOURCE


CHARGE WIZARD  … The INTELI-POWER 9200 series converters have the Charge Wizard

 controlled charging module built in. The Charge Wizard  is a microprocessor-controlled device incorporated in Progressive

Dynamics 9200 Series INTELI-POWER converters which constantly monitors the battery, and automatically adjusts the converter output voltage based on its charge status. The Charge Wizard

Wizard 

 has four (4) operating modes

(BOOST, NORMAL, STORAGE and EQUALIZE). Each mode is automatically selected by the Charge and ensures a fast yet safe recharge for your battery. See chart below for details.

BOOST MODE EQUALIZE

MODE

NORMAL MODE

STORAGE MODE

NOTE: Converter output voltages are 2x the values listed in above table for 24 volt models.

Boost Mode (14.4V for 12V models and 28.8V for 24V models) - Boost mode is to rapidly recharge a battery up to

90% of full charge. Required 8 hours to return the battery to 90% of full charge and approximately 11 hours to reach full charge.**

Normal Mode (13.6V for 12V models and 27.2V for 24V models) - Normal mode is to safely complete the charge of a battery. Required 40 hours to return the battery to 90% of full charge and approximately 78 hours to reach full charge.**

Storage Mode (13.2V for 12V models and 26.4V for 24V models) – Storage mode is to maintain a batteries charge as well as help prevent battery stratification and sulfation. Required 60 hours to return the battery to 90% of full charge and approximately 100 hours to reach full charge.**

Equalize Mode (14.4V for 12V models and 28.8V for 24V models) - The Charge Wizard 

 will automatically switch to equalize mode for approximately 15 minutes every 21 hours the converter remains in storage mode. This will help prevent battery stratification, sulfation and loss of battery capacity (useful life).

** Times based on a PD9155 recharging a 125AH battery that has been discharged to 10.5V.

- All times and voltages provided above are approximate. -

The integrated Charge Wizard’s ability to change the output voltage of the converter will significantly reduce the amount of time it takes to recharge your battery. The lower voltage for Storage mode helps prevents gassing and reduces water loss during long-term storage.

227

228


OPTIONAL REMOTE PENDANT

Your INTELI-POWER 9200 converter may have been supplied with a Remote Pendant .

The Remote

Pendant is optional on OEM but is included with all retail models and plugs in to the accessory port of the

9200 series converter. While the built-in Charge

Wizard  automatically determines which operating mode is best suited to recharge or maintain optimum battery condition, the Remote Pendant allows for manual override and has an indicator light to indicate the mode of operation.

BOOST MODE - Indicated by green LED remaining on.

NORMAL MODE - When the battery is between

50% and 90% charged, the green LED will flash once per second. When the battery has reached 90% of full charge the green LED will flash 2 - 3 times per second.

STORAGE MODE - Indicated by green LED flashing every 6 - 8 seconds.

MANUAL BUTTON - The manual button has been provided to allow the operator to temporarily override the converter (not recommended) or to verify the converter is operating properly. For manual operation, press and hold the button. The indicator light will soon remain “ON” indicating Boost Mode.

Continue to hold the button and the light will blink rapidly indicating the converter is in the Normal

Mode. Continue to hold the button until the light blinks slowly indicating the converter is now in the

Storage Mode. After the manual button is released the converter will stay in the selected mode. When the battery charge status changes, the converter will return to the automatic mode of operation to prevent damage to the battery.

If a REMOTE PENDANT was not provided with your INTELI-POWER 9200 Series converter, you can purchase one from your local RV dealer or online at www.progressivedyn.com

OPTIONAL TCMS CHARGE WIZARD

Your INTELI-POWER 9100 converter is equipped with a TCMS interface. The TCMS Charge Wizard pendant plugs into the TCMS interface to provide computer control and monitoring of your batteries charge state. The Charge Wizard  automatically determines which operating mode is best suited to recharge or maintain optimum battery condition. The

Charge Wizard operation.

 Pendant allows for manual override and has an indicator light to indicate the mode of

BOOST MODE - Indicated by green LED remaining on.

NORMAL MODE - When the battery is between

50% and 90% charged, the green LED will flash once per second. When the battery has reached 90% of full charge the green LED will flash 2 - 3 times per second.

STORAGE MODE - Indicated by green LED flashing every 6 - 8 seconds.

MANUAL BUTTON - The manual button has been provided to allow the operator to temporarily override the converter (not recommended) or to verify the converter is operating properly. For manual operation, press and hold the button. The indicator light will soon remain “ON” indicating Boost Mode.

Continue to hold the button and the light will blink rapidly indicating the converter is in the Normal

Mode. Continue to hold the button until the light blinks slowly indicating the converter is now in the

Storage Mode. After the manual button is released the converter will stay in the selected mode. When the battery charge status changes, the converter will return to the automatic mode of operation to prevent damage to the battery.

The TCMS Charge Wizard Pendant can be purchased from your local RV dealer or online at www.progressivedyn.com

OPTIONAL REMOTE SHUTDOWN MODULE

Your INTELI-POWER 9100L converter is equipped with a Remote Shutdown Module interface. The converter can be shutdown using either a high or low side control, or by connecting two wires by means of a mechanical switch or relay contacts.

This allows the battery management system to shutdown the converter after battery charging and balancing are complete.


PROBLEM

1. No Output

2. External Fuses Blown

3. Low Output

TROUBLE SHOOTING GUIDE

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Proper AC power not connected

External Fuses Blown

Short Circuit

Unit has shutdown due to overheating

Unit has shutdown due to over voltage

(Also see Item 4 below)

(No over voltage protection for 230V units)

Optional remote shutdown module is active.

(PD9100L only)

Reverse Battery Hook Up

Excessive load for converter

Input voltage not between 105-130 VAC

(205-265 VAC for 230V units)

ACTION

Connect power supply

Check AC distribution panel for proper operation

Check for reverse polarity

Replace fuses with same type and rating

Trace circuits for possible fault

Check air flow

Allow unit to cool

Check input voltage

Converter will shut down if the input voltage exceeds 132 Volts

Correct input voltage

Remove remote shutdown module.

Correct hook up and replace fuses with same type and rating

Reduce load requirements or install larger converter

Correct input supply voltage

4. Intermittent or no Output on

Generator, works on Shore

Power

Bad battery cell(s)

Unit has shutdown due to over voltage.

Replace battery

Add another load to the generator, this may reduce the “spikes” to an acceptable level

Some generators exhibit excessive voltage spikes on the AC power output, this may cause the over voltage protection to shut the unit down

Remote Shutdown Module does not have stable voltage.

Contact generator manufacturer for possible defect in the generator

Confirm Remote Shutdown Module voltage is between 5 and 30

VDC

Do not replace the converter unless the following checks have been performed:

1.

Loosen the screw on the positive terminal and disconnect the positive wire. Read the converter output voltage using a

DC voltmeter. The power converter is working properly if the voltage is above 13VDC (12V models), 26VDC (24V models, 14.3VDC (12V 9100L models), and 28.4VDC (24V 9100-24L models).

2.

If the converter output is zero volts, use an AC voltmeter to check for proper voltage at the 120VAC outlet that the converter is plugged into. This voltage should be between 105 and 130 volts (206 and 265 volts for 230V models).

3.

Check the fuses located at the front of the converter. These fuses will only blow if the battery or DC output leads were connected in reverse, even for a moment. Replace the fuses and repeat step 1.

4.

Disconnect optional Remote Pendant, TCMS Charge Wizard, or Remote Shutdown Module. Read the converter output voltage using a DC voltmeter. The power converter is working properly if the voltage is above 13VDC (12V models), 26VDC (24V models, 14.3VDC (12V 9100L models), and 28.4VDC (24V 9100-24L models).

NOTES:

 When replacing fuse(s) it may be necessary to remove the TCMS plug or lithium shutdown module (if so equipped) to provide clearance for fuse replacement.

 Disconnect all power sources before replacing fuses.

229

230


PD9130(L)

Input: 105-130 VAC 60 Hz

500 Watts

Output: 13.6 VDC, 30 Amps

(9130L) – 14.6 VDC, 30 Amps

Dimensions: 4.5H x 8.25L x 7.25W

Weight: 4.5lbs

PD9_60(L)


1000 Watts


(9160L) – 14.6 VDC, 60 Amps

Dimensions: 3.6H x 8L x 9W

Weight: 5.8lbs

PD9_25-24(L)


775 Watts


(9125-24L) – 29.2 VDC, 25 Amps


Weight: 4.5lbs

INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

(Specifications subject to change without notice)

PD9140(L)


600 Watts


(9140L) – 14.6 VDC, 40 Amps


Weight: 4.5lbs

PD9_70(L)


1250 Watts


(9170L) – 14.6 VDC, 70 Amps


Weight: 5.8lbs

PD9_40-24A(L)


1300 Watts


(9140-24AL) – 29.2 VDC, 40 Amps


Weight: 6.0lbs

PD9_45(L)


725 Watts


(9145L) – 14.6 VDC, 45 Amps


Weight: 4.5lbs

PD9_80A(L)


1300 Watts


(9180AL) – 14.6 VDC, 80 Amps


Weight: 6.0lbs

PD9260-230

Input: 205-265 VAC 50/60 Hz

1000 Watts



Weight: 5.8lbs

NOT UL OR CUL LISTED

TCMS Charge Wizard Interface

(PD9100 only)

Remote Shutdown Module Interface

(PD9100L only)

Accessory Port

(PD9200 only)

DC

Distribution

Panel

Grounding Lug

(located on AC end)

Reverse Battery

Fuse(s)

Chassis Ground

CAUTION RISK OF FIRE:

Chassis bonding wire must be a separate wire ran directly from the grounding lug provided on the converter. DO

NOT connect output negative to chassis using the same wire.

-

Battery

+


Electrical Management System (EMS)

EMS-HW30C & EMS-HW50C

Installation & Operating Guide for:

Model

EMS-HW30C

Rated at 120V/30A and

Model

EMS-HW50C

Rated at 240V/50A

“Surgio Says”

Lifetime Warranty on all EMS & SSP Surge

Protection Models

231

232


Features

High/Low Voltage Protection | Whenever AC power lowers below 104 volts, or rises above 132 volts, the EMS automatically shuts down power to the RV. The EMS will monitor the power and once the AC power rises above 104 volts, or drops below the

132 volt level the time delay indicator flashes for the preset time and then automatically restores power to the RV.

Time Delay for A/C Compressor | If AC power is interrupted or the EMS detects a fault condition, the built in time delay is activated. There are two settings on the EMS: one is 136 seconds

(02:16), and the other is 15 seconds. Consult your air conditioner manual to see if it has a time delay built in. If so, use the 15 second delay, if not, use the 136-seconds delay. The factory setting is 15 seconds.

3-Mode Surge Protection (EMS-HW30C) | This feature provides full surge protection L-N, L-G, and N-G. Total Joule rating is 1,790J and 44,000A surge current. Response time <1

Nano second.

5-Mode Surge Protection (EMS-HW50C) | This feature provides full surge protection L-N, L-N, L-G, L-L, and N-G. Joule rating is

3,580J and 88,000A surge current. Response time <1 Nano second

Surge Indicator | In the event of a power surge and the surge protector circuit is damaged within the EMS-L-N or L-G the digital error code will read E10. This indicates the EMS needs to be serviced.

Reverse Polarity Protection | If AC power has a reverse polarity condition, the EMS will not allow power to the RV and the error code will read E 1

Open Neutral Protection |

If AC power has an open neutral, the display will not light and the

EMS will not allow power to the RV.

1 | ProgressiveIndustries.net


Open Ground Protection | If AC power has an open ground condition, the EMS will read an error code of E2, and power will not be allowed to the RV.

AC Frequency Protection | If AC power frequency deviates plus/minus 9 hertz from 60 cycles per second, the EMS will shut down AC power. An Error code of E 7 will be displayed when the frequency is high; and an Error code of E 8 will be displayed when frequency is low.

Accidental 240V Protection | If 240 volts is detected when plugging into AC power the EMS will NOT allow power to the

RV. If this condition occurs while power is applied to the RV, the

EMS shuts off power instantly. The display will read the voltage and E 3 for the error. NEVER BYPASS THE EMS WHEN

THIS OCCURS)

Remote Display | Continuously scrolls the AC power information, including voltage, current, frequency, error codes and previous errors. Each reading is displayed for two (2) seconds.

Previous Error Code | Previous error code (PE) indicates what error occurred and why power was interrupted. To delete code, disconnect power from EMS.

ByPass | This switch is located on the remote display and allows the user to bypass the EMS in the event of failure, thus allowing

AC power into the RV. This does not disable the surge protection portion of the EMS; however, all other features are disabled.

Modular Design | Replacement parts are designed for simple plug-and-play making repairs extremely user friendly.

Microprocessor Controlled | The computer and remote display are driven by state-of-the-art microprocessors that are programmed with software to drive the entire EMS unit.

Technical Support 919-267-6964 | 2

233

234


Warnings

• Do not exceed the rating on the EMS for any reason. These devices

are designed to be reduced down to 120V/15A and maintain full

protection.

• Do not modify the EMS in any way as this will void the warranty,

compromise protection and could result in possible shock, and/or a

fire hazard.

• It is important to always check the pedestal power outlet for

charring;; this condition means the AC receptacle is providing a

weak connection. Should this condition exists, DO NOT USE as it

could result in possible melting of the RV power plug.

• Progressive Industries recommends you have a certified electrician or

an authorized dealer perform the installation of the EMS.

• All AC power extension cords in conjunction with your EMS unit

should be rated 10 gauge for 120V, 30A systems or 6 gauge for

240V, 50A systems and rated for outdoor use to reduce the risk of

electrical shock. Small gauge cable will have a higher resistance and

can result in voltage loss or an electrical fire.

• Whenever servicing or installing the EMS, or any other AC powered

device, make sure AC power is disconnected.

• RV wiring is different than wiring found in homes; the neutral and

ground conductors are isolated in the RV, unlike in a home where

they are tied at the service panel. Therefore, never connect neutral

and ground together for any reason. This could result in a ground

fault condition, and may result in electric shock and/or a fire

hazard.

• Never solder the ends of the wires you attach during installation.

This includes the Red, Black and White whites

• Never plug the EMS into an inverter.



Installation Instructions Before Transfer Box

HW50C Visual Photo Library on page 11 | Wiring Diagram on page 13


For installation, in addition to the EMS Kit, you will need:

• 6 mounting screws

• In some cases you will need a jumper cable, length to be determined

based on the placement of the EMS

• Always use #10 wire.

1. Unplug RV from AC power and be sure generator is off.

2. Determine a location for the EMS control box.

3. Cut the RV power cord about three (3) inches greater than the distance

from the junction box to the desired location of the EMS control box.

Then strip back the outer insulation three (3) inches on input, and three

(3) inches on output cable. (See visual references on pages 11-13).

4. Strip back each conductor 3/8” on both stripped ends. (See visual

references on pages 11-13 ) and attach ring terminals to green ground

wires. If this wire is a solid wire, do not use ring terminals. Loop the

wire around the ground screw.

5. Remove the lid from the EMS. Next ,remove the display, cable and

pack of screws and then back off the six set screws from top of

contactor (L1, L2, etc.)

6. Take your long cable with the plug end and connect it to the input side

by sliding through the wire restraint on the end of the EMS control box.

Then connect the wires to the contactor by attaching black to L1, white

to L2, red to L3, and green to ground screw on side of box. (See visual

references on pages 11-13). Torque down set screws and ground nut to

secure connections.

7. Take the short cable coming from the junction box by sliding it through

the wire restraint output side of the EMS control box. Next slide the

black wire through the current sensor containing the green tape and

connect to T1, then connect the white wire to T2. Now slide the red

wire through the other sensor and attach to T3. The arrow side off

the sensor needs to fact T1 and T3.

[Continued on page 5]


235


Installation Before Transfer Box Cont’d

Attach the green ground wire to the ground screw on side of box. (See

visual references on pages 11-13). Make sure the wire colors match up

from each other. Torque down set screws and ground nut to secure

connections.

8. Double check all connections and make sure they are secure.

9. Remove the two screws on contactor where marked L1, L2, etc. Next

remove the top plastic plate with markings. Examine inside ensuring

there are no loose plastic pieces inside the contactor. If so, remove and

re-install cover with two screws. (See visual references on pages

11-13).

Caution: If you break off a tab and do not remove it, this may stop the contactor from working and allow 240 volts in the RV.

10. Secure cable ends by tightening down strain reliefs over the input and

output wires. Do not over tighten as this could bit through the

insulation and cause a short.

11. Set time delay jumper on the circuit board. The factory setting is for

15 seconds. Remove jumper to set for 136 seconds (02:16). See

Features Section on time delay to determine which to use. (See

visual references on pages 11-13).

12. Plug in remote display and cable. (This cable is not a phone cable,

but rather a data cable). NEVER PLUG IN DISPLAY WHILE RV

POWER IS ON.

13. Attach EMS lid with the six black machine screws provided.

14. Mount the EMS control box.

15. Installation is complete. Next, plug in and follow operating

instructions.

236



Installation After Transfer Box for

Protection from both Generator and AC Power



For installation, in addition to the EMS Kit, you will need:

• 6 mounting screws

• In some cases you will need a jumper cable, length to be determined

based on the placement of the EMS

• Always use #10 wire

1. Unplug RV from the AC power and be sure generator is off.

2. Locate transfer switch box; determine where the EMS control box will

be mounted.

3. Measure the distance between the transfer switch and the control box

and add one (1) foot. This is the length of cable that will be required for

the installation. Make sure 6-gauge, 4 conductor cables are used.

4. Remove lid from transfer box, disconnect and remove the output cable.

5. Take jumper cable and strip back one end three (3) inches and the other

end the same as the end removed from the transfer box. The cable

removed from the transfer box must have at least three (3) inches of the

outer insulation removed. (See visual references on pages 11-13).

6. Strip back all conductors 3/8” and attach ring terminals to green ground

wires. (See visual references on pages 11-13). If this wire is solid wire,

do not use ring terminals. Loop the wire around the screw.

7. Remove the lid from EMS. Remove the digital display, cable and

pack of screws and then back off the six set screws from top of

contactor. (L1, L2, etc.)

8. Take the jumper cable and connect it to the input side by sliding

through the wire restraint on the end of the EMS control box and then

connect black to L1; white to L2; red to L3, green to ground screw.

(See visual references on pages 11-13). Torque down set screws and

ground nut to secure connections.

[Continued on page 7]


237


Installation After Transfer Box for

Protection from both Generator and AC Power

Continued from page 6

9. The cable that came from the transfer box connects to the output side

of the EMS control box in the same manner. Next slide the black wire

through the current sensor containing the green tape and connect to

T1, then connect the white wire to T2. Now slide the red wire through

the other current sensor and attach to T3. The arrow side off the sensor

needs to face T1 and T3. Next, attach the green ground d wire to the

ground screw on side of box. (See visual references on pages 11-13).

Make sure the conductor’s colors match up across from each other.

Torque down the set screws and ground nut to secure connections.

10. Connect the loose end of the jumper cable to the transfer switch. See

wiring diagram on transfer switch if needed.

11. Double check all connections to ensure they are secure.

12. Secure cable ends by tightening down strain reliefs over the input and

output wires. Do not over tighten as this could bite through insulation

and cause a short.

13. Set time delay jumper on the circuit board. Factory setting is for 15

seconds. Remove jumper to change setting to 136 seconds (02:16). See

Features Section on time delay to determine which to use. (See visual

references on pages 11-13).

14. Plug in digital remote and cable. (This cable is not a phone cable,

but rather a data cable.) NEVER PLUG IN DISPLAY WHILE RV

POWER IS ON.

15. Attach lid with the six black machine screws provided and attach

transfer switch lid.

16. Mount the EMS control box.

17. Installation is complete. Next, plug in and follow operating

instructions.

238



Operating Instructions

1. Plug into A/C power.

2. Digital display will read 888 for one second and then begin

scrolling the voltage, amps, line frequency and error code, if any.

In addition, the time delay light will flash while the EMS is going

through its countdown and will stop when the unit engages

(Bottom right hand corner.) If delay light does not flash, a fault

condition is present. Look at the Error code chart to determine

what the AC power problem is.

3. You may notice when first plugging in, the display may read

E 9. This indicates the display has not received the data from the

computer yet. Do not be alarmed, this is normal. By the next

scroll through, it should read E 0 if the AC power is normal.

4. The digital display will give you a three digit number indicating

your line voltage. Next, it will give you a “0A” reading indicating

current (amps) Current (amps) will read zero until the time delay

is complete (136 seconds or 15 seconds, depending on your

settings). Then you will notice a number between 0 and 50. This

number indicates how many amps the RV is drawing. Next, you

will notice “60H”, indicating your line frequency. This number

should remain fairly consistent; however, it may read plus/minus

one or two. Lastly, note the E code. E 0 is normal and only when

E 0 or E10 is present will the delay light flash and allow power to

the RV. Refer to the Error code chart card that was provided or

see Error Code Chart for additional information.

5. Verify the error code E 0 is displayed and set up is now

complete.

IMPORTANT: The display will only read voltages between approximately 78 volts and 255 volts.

NOTE: If the wiring reads anything different than correct, the EMS will not turn on and we recommend you move to a different source of AC power or use your generator power. Also, if power is below

104 volts or above 132 volts, the EMS will not turn on, and we recommend using your generator power.


239


Error Code Chart

E 0 - Normal Operating Condition

E 1 - Reverse Polarity (hot and neutral wires reversed)

E 2 - Open Ground (no ground wire connection)

E 3 - Line 1 High Voltage (line voltage above 132V)

E 4 - Line 1 Low Voltage (line voltage below 104V)

E 5*- Line 2 Voltage High (Line voltage above 132V)

E 6*- Line 2 Voltage Low (Line voltage below 104V)

E 7 - Line Frequency High (line frequency above 69 cycles per

second)

E 8 - Line Frequency Low (line frequency below 51 cycles per

second)

E 9 - Data Link Down (call technical support)

E10 - Replace Surge Protector Module (call Progressive Industries

Tech support)

* Code only apply to EMS-HW50C models

Note: If the EMS cuts the power to the RV it will show a PE code following the E code. This denotes the previous error or why the

EMS shut down. Example: The EMS cuts power for low voltage on

Line 1, and then the power is restored. The Error Code reads E 0, but the PE code reads PE 4 which tells the user low voltage was the reason for the EMS previously cutting power. This PE error code will be deleted when power is disconnected from the EMS.

Accidental 240 volt Protection: Should this condition occur, the display will read 240 volts instead of displaying the voltage and the error code message will read E 3. AC power will shut down instantly.

DO NOT UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES BYPASS THE EMS;

OTHERWISE, THIS WILL RESULT IN SEVERE DAMAGE TO

THE RV.

240



Troubleshooting Guide

Common installation mistakes:

1. Check connections. Input is the plug side of the RV and black

should be attached to L1, white to L2. Output (going to the RV)

should match up. T1 is black, T2 white. The green ground gets

attached to the input and output on the side of the box.

2. Make sure the input wires are, in fact, the input wires. Connecting

the output to the input of the EMS will cause the device to

malfunction.

3. If the EMS is still not functioning at this point, follow instructions

below prior to calling Progressive Industries Technical Support.

In order for the on-call Technician to help troubleshoot the problem(s) you are experiencing and render the best possible solution, it is necessary you be at your RV when you place your call.

1. If the display is illuminated and scrolling information, note the

Error Code. If there is an Error code of 1-9, the device will

interrupt the power. See Error Chart for definition of AC power

problem. The device being off when an Error Code is present

indicates the product is working properly and protecting your

coach.

2. If the display is illuminated and reading Error code E 0, and yet no

power is present in the coach, please contact Progressive Industries

Tech Support. You must wait for the time delay light to stop flashing.

3. If the display is not illuminated and power is in the coach there

is a connection issue between the display and the main control box.

Contact Technical Support.

Progressive Industries Tech Support can only help if the above information is provided; therefore, please do not call until this information is obtained. Again, it is necessary for your to be at the RV when you place your call. To recap...

1. Are the connections correct?

2. What is the Error Code message being displayed?

3. Is the delay indicator flashing?


241


Photo Library for the

EMS-HW50C

Strip back the outer insulation three (3) inches on input, and three

(3) inches on output cable.

242



Photo Library for the

EMS-HW30C


243

244


Wiring Diagram for

EMS-HW50C

Wiring Diagram for

EMS-HW30C


Progressive Industries Warranty

Lifetime Warranty Information for Models:

EMS-PT30C | EMS-PT50C | EMS-HW30C | EMS-HW50C

EMS-LCHW30 | EMS-LCHW50 | SSP-30 | SSP-50

Progressive Industries, Inc. (PII) offers a Lifetime Warranty on all models listed above to be free from defects in material and workmanship. Products must be properly installed and maintained. PII cannot be responsible for neglect or misuse of product(s). In the event a properly installed unit proves defective under normal use, PII will repair or replace the defective unit at its discretion.

This warranty is exclusive to PII and in lieu of all other warranties, obligations or liabilities implied by PII.

This is a non-transferable Lifetime Warranty and is exclusive to the original owner and covers those products purchased from an authorized dealer, retailer or seller. This warranty does not cover unauthorized labor. Technical Support is available seven days a week, by phone to assist in diagnosing and directing the replacement of appropriate components.

Unforeseen circumstances whereby your EMS or SSP products are not covered include:

• Natural disasters: i.e., hurricanes, floods, earthquakes, etc.;

• Vehicle accidents on highways, streets or off-road;

• Failure to remove or unplug product prior to driving off; and,

• Failure to ensure pedestal plug is clean and maintains a snug fit when

you plug in, and make sure your cord is clean when plugging into the

portable unit.

For additional information regarding Progressive Industries’ Warranty and/or information on returning your unit for repair please visit our website at www.progressiveindustries.net

Technical Support is available 7 Days a Week!


245


246

Progressive Industries, Inc.

1020 Goodworth Drive

Apex, NC 27539

919.267.6948

ProgressiveIndustries.net

Our products are proudly made in the U.S.A.


SHURFLO

®

4008 RV REVOLUTION™ BY-PASS PUMP

INSTALLATION & OPERATION MANUAL

Switch

16 AWG [1.28mm] or heavier wire

Connector

Fuse

Red lead (+)

INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

Ground

Black

Surface Solide

Flexible Braided

High Flow Hose

Typical Pump Installation

Strainer

INSTALLATION PREPARATION

❚ Solid Surface within 6' of tank.

❚ Minimize flow restrictions in the system.

❚ No Accumulator needed.

❚ Flexible hose on inlet and outlet.

❚

Minimize plumbing elbows and valves.

❚ Accessible location.

❚ Strainer on pump inlet.

❚ Properly Sized wiring.

❚

Properly electrical protection.

❚ Properly sized plumbing.

The goal of installation is to provide a quiet, easy-to-maintain installation with good flow and low backpressure. This can be accomplished with the following guidelines:

❚ Mount on a solid surface in an accessible location for strainer cleaning and pump maintenance.

❚ 1/2" Male threaded models are intended to be used with SHURFLO swivel barb fittings which seal with an internal taper when hand tightened.

CAUTION: Sealers and Teflon tape may act as lubricant causing cracked housings or stripped threads due to over-tightening. Sealer may enter the pump inhibiting valve action, causing no prime or no shut-off. A failure due to foreign debris is not covered under warranty.

❚ Use flexible high-pressure hose on the pump inlet and outlet [such as SHURFLO

Kit 94-591-01] . The pumps ports and strainer should not be connected to plastic or rigid pipe, or the pump's normal motion will transmit through rigid plumbing causing noise, and possibly loosening or cracking components.

FLOW MANAGEMENT SOLUTIONS 911-1008 REV. K

❚ Pump must use an adequate 50-mesh strainer [such as SHURFLO 255 series strainers].

❚

Use a minimum of 1/2" [13mm]

Inner Diameter plumbing. Smaller ID plumbing will cause cavitation, high back pressure, low flow and noise.

❚ No need for an accumulator with bypass pumps.

❚ Pump is designed for intermittent duty only: Do not use these pumps for running a Reverse-Osmosis [RO]

Filtration System. High pressurecontinuous duty usage will shorten the life of the pump and is not covered under warranty.

❚ Wire Size is 16 GA MINIMUM , 12GA is recommended — See Wire Chart in

Electrical Section for minimum sizing.

❚

Minimum power requirement is a 10

Amp circuit.

❚ Reduce restrictions on inlet and outlet . This includes small inner diameter shut-off valves, winterizing valves and elbows.

❚

If the RV has an Intellitec Pump

Controller , it must be rated at 10 or 15 amps; If the controller is rated at 7.5

Amps, a new controller or a high-amp relay must be used.

MOUNTING

❚ Mount the pump within 6 feet of the tank for best performance and pump life. The pump will pull farther, but the farther it pulls the more work it does, increasing vibration and noise, and reducing the output and pump life.

❚ Mount pump in a space of at least 1 cubic foot for adequate ventilation to prevent overheating.

❚ Pump may be mounted in any position.

❚

Mount pump for easy access for cleaning strainer, maintenance and service.

❚ Mount pump on a solid surface to prevent vibration and noise.

1

247


ELECTRICAL ABOUT THE BY-PASS

❚ The pump works best on an individual filtered circuit, protected by the recommended fuse or breaker specified on the label.

❚

A 15-Amp switch is recommended and should be on the positive lead (red wire).

❚ Wire Sizing: Proper wire sizing is required for good pump operation. If the wire is too small, low voltage will affect the pump performance and can create a fire hazard. SHUT OFF POWER TO THE PUMP

WHEN LEAVING THE RV UNATTENDED.

0-25

Ft. [m]

[0-7.6]

AWG [mm 2 ]

16 [1.3]

25-50 [7.6-15.2]

50-70 [15.2-21.3]

70-110 [21.3-33.5]

14

12

10

[2.1]

[3.3]

[5.3]

Minimum Wire Size for a 10% voltage drop on a 12VDC, 15 Amp

Circuit. Length is the distance from the power source to pump and back to ground.

NOTE: By-pass adjustment should only be performed by a professional technician with proper gauges and equipment.

The by-pass is a spring loaded diaphragm that opens up allowing water from the discharge side back to the inlet side. The by-pass is set to begin opening at about 40 psi and creating full by-pass at about 62 psi (lower pressure pumps will vary depending on the by-pass and pressure shut-off settings). The pressure switch on the pump is set to shut off at 55 psi. If the switch or by-pass are adjusted too much, the by-pass and switch shut-off can overlap and THE

PUMP WILL NOT SHUT OFF.

Screw-

SANITIZING

PLUMBING

Installation of a strainer is required to prevent debris from entering the pump.

For noise and vibration reduction we recommend at least 18 in. [.5 M] of

1/2" [13mm] I.D. flexible high-pressure hose to both ports. The pump ports and strainer should not be connected to plastic or rigid pipe. This hose should be anchored where it meets the hard plumbing to reduce plumbing vibration.

Potable water systems require periodic maintenance to keep components working properly and deliver a consistent flow of fresh water. Sanitizing is recommended: prior to storing, after a period of storage, or any time the system is opened or contaminated, as follows:

NOTE: Check your Vehicle Owner’s

Manual for specific instructions.

By-pass any filters or remove filter cartridges.

1.

Determine the amount of common household bleach needed to sanitize the tank.

A) 2 ounces of bleach per 15 gallons tank size: 60 gallon tank [15 x 4] = 4 x

2 ounces = 8 ounces of bleach.

B) I ml bleach per 1 liter tank size:

300 liter tank = 300 milliliters of bleach.

OPERATION

This pump is designed for intermittent duty only. The pump operates normally up to about 40-psi, where a spring-loaded by-pass valve opens, allowing flow back from the output side to the input side, providing smooth, steady flow with virtually no cycling, all the way down to a trickle. As a faucet is opened back up, the pressure will drop, the by-pass will close and full flow is again obtained. This allows good flow, even with today’s restrictive showers and pullout sprayer faucets. Performance will vary, of course, depending on the voltage to the pump; lower voltage = lower flow, higher voltage = higher flow. Remember your electrical safety: It is always best to shut power to the pump OFF when leaving the RV unattended.

2

WINTERIZING

Refer to the vehicle owner’s manual for specific winterizing instructions.

If water is allowed to freeze in the system, serious damage to the plumbing and pump may occur. Failures of this type will void the warranty. The best guarantee against damage is to completely drain the pump and perform the following:

1.

Drain the water tank. If the tank doesn't have a drain valve, open all faucets allowing the pump to operate until the tank is empty.

2.

Open all the faucets (including the lowest valve or drain in the plumbing), allow the pump to purge the water from the plumbing, and then turn the pump OFF.

ing the switch screw in clockwise will raise the shut-off pressure. Unscrewing the switch screw counterclockwise will lower the pump shut-off pressure.

Screwing the by-pass screw in will raise the pressure at which the by-pass starts and raise the full by-pass pressure.

Unscrewing the by-pass screw counterclockwise will lower the pressure at which by-pass starts and lower the full by-pass pressure.

WARNING: If full by-pass is reached before the shut-off setting, the pump will not shut off.

Full by-pass pressure setting should be at least 10 psi higher than pump shut off pressure.

2.

Mix the bleach with water in a container such as a gallon jug. If tank is filled through a pressurized fitting, pour the bleach into the hose before attaching the hose to the city water entry.

3. Pour the bleach solution into the tank and fill the tank with potable water. Rock the RV back and forth to coat top and sides of potable water tank.

4.

Open all faucets (Hot & Cold) allowing the water to run until the odor of chlorine is detected. Allow four (4) hours of contact time to disinfect completely. Doubling the solution concentration allows for a contact time of one (1) hour.

5.

Drain the tank. Refill the tank and flush the system once or twice until the odor has decreased. The residual chlorine odor and taste is not harmful.

3.

Using a pan to catch the remaining water, remove the plumbing at the pump's inlet/outlet ports. Turn the pump ON, allowing it to operate until the water is expelled. Turn OFF power to the pump once the plumbing is emptied.

Do not reconnect the pump plumbing.

Make a note at tank filler as a reminder:

"Plumbing is disconnected".

4.

All faucets must be left open to guard against any damage.

5.

Potable anti-freeze may be poured down drains and toilets to protect p-traps and toilet seals. Sanitize the plumbing system before putting the plumbing system back in service.

248


TROUBLESHOOTING

Vibration induced by driving can loosen plumbing, strainers and pump hardware. Check for system components that are loose. Also, refer to the chart below for trouble-shooting tips.

PUMP WILL NOT START/ BLOWS

CIRCUIT

√ Electrical connections, fuse or breaker, main switch, and ground connection.

√ Is the motor hot? Thermal breaker may have triggered; it will reset when cool.

√ Is voltage present at the switch?

Bypass pressure sw. Does the pump operate?

√ Charging System for correct voltage

(±10%) and good ground.

√ For an open or grounded circuit, or motor; or improperly sized wire.

√ For seized or locked diaphragm assembly (water frozen?).

WILL NOT PRIME/SPUTTERS

(No discharge/Motor runs)

√ Is the strainer clogged with debris?

√ Is there water in the tank, or has air collected in the hot water heater?

√ Is the inlet tubing/plumbing sucking in air at plumbing connections

(vacuum leak)?

√ Is inlet/outlet plumbing severely restricted or kinked? Restrictive valves?

√ Proper voltage with the pump operating (±10%).

√ For debris in pump inlet/outlet valves or swollen/dry valves.

√ Pump housing for cracks or loose drive assembly screws.

RAPID CYCLING

√ For restrictive plumbing and flow restrictions in faucets/shower heads.

√ Water filter/purifier should be on separate feed line.

√ Shut-off pressure set too low.

PUMP WILL NOT SHUT-OFF / RUNS

WHEN FAUCET IS CLOSED

√ Output side (pressure) plumbing for leaks, and inspect for leaky valves or toilet.

√ For air trapped in outlet side (water heater) or pump head.

√ For correct voltage to pump (±10%).

√ For loose drive assembly or pump head screws.

√ Are the valves held open by debris or is the rubber swollen?

√ Pressure switch operation. By-pass set higher than shut-off.

NOISY OR ROUGH OPERATION

√ For plumbing which may have vibrated loose.

√ For a restricted inlet (clogged strainer, kinked hose, restrictive valves).

√ Is the pump plumbed with rigid pipe causing noise to transmit?

√ Does the mounting surface amplify noise (flexible)? Does it bang like a drum?

√ For mounting feet that are loose or are compressed too tight.

√ For air in the system. Check all fixtures for air and bleed system.

√ The motor with pump head removed. Is noise from motor or pump head?

LEAKS FROM PUMP HEAD OR SWITCH

√ For loose screws at switch or pump head.

√ Switch diaphragm ruptured or pinched.

√ For punctured diaphragm if water is present in drive assembly.

MAINTENANCE

Normal pump maintenance is all that is needed: Checking and cleaning of the strainer, normal sanitizing and winterizing and occasionally checking all plumbing hardware and fittings for tightness. Lack of sanitizing is the number one reason for premature pump failure and poor performance over time.

Lack of sanitizing will cause scale buildup on the diaphragm and valves, causing low flow and leak back [occasional pump cycling with no faucets open or tank filling up when hooked up to city water].

REPAIR KITS

ITEM COMPONENT PARTS KIT

1, 5

2

Upper Assembly 94-800-00

Valve Assembly 94-800-01

2.5° Drive Assembly 94-800-02 3

4

N/S

Motor

N/S Check Valve

1, 2, 3, 5 Pump Head

Pressure Switch

94-11-302-00

94-800-03

94-800-04

94-800-05

3

249

SMOKE DETECTOR

USER’S MANUAL

COMBINATION CARBON MONOXIDE & SMOKE ALARM

Features:

• Separate sensors to detect smoke and CO; the two alarm systems work independently

• Powered by two “AA” batteries

• Side access drawer for easy battery replacement

IMPORTANT! PLEASE READ CAREFULLY AND SAVE.

This user’s manual contains important information about your Combination Carbon Monoxide & Smoke

Alarm’s operation. If you are installing this Alarm for use by others, you must leave this manual—or a copy of it—with the end user.

M08-0117-011 Q 06/12 Printed in Mexico

CONFORMS TO

UL STD 217

AND

UL STD 2034

Model SCO5

© 2012 BRK Brands, Inc. All rights reserved. Distributed by BRK Brands, Inc.

3901 Liberty Street Road, Aurora, IL 60504-8122


All First Alert ® Smoke Alarms conform to regulatory requirements, including UL217 and are designed to detect particles of combustion.

Smoke particles of varying number and size are produced in all fires.

Ionization technology is generally more sensitive than photoelectric technology at detecting small particles, which tend to be produced in greater amounts by flaming fires, which consume combustible materials rapidly and spread quickly. Sources of these fires may include paper burning in a wastebasket, or a grease fire in the kitchen.

Photoelectric technology is generally more sensitive than ionization technology at detecting large particles, which tend to be produced in greater amounts by smoldering fires, which may smolder for hours before bursting into flame. Sources of these fires may include cigarettes burning in couches or bedding.

For maximum protection, use both types of Smoke Alarms on each level and in every bedroom of your home.

INTRODUCTION

FIRE SAFETY TIPS

Follow safety rules and prevent hazardous situations: 1) Use smoking materials properly. Never smoke in bed. 2) Keep matches or lighters away from children; 3) Store flammable materials in proper containers; 4) Keep electrical appliances in good condition and don’t overload electrical circuits;

5) Keep stoves, barbecue grills, fireplaces and chimneys grease- and debrisfree; 6) Never leave anything cooking on the stove unattended; 7) Keep portable heaters and open flames, like candles, away from flammable materials; 8) Don’t let rubbish accumulate.

Keep alarms clean, and test them weekly. Replace alarms immediately if they are not working properly. Smoke Alarms that do not work cannot alert you to a fire. Keep at least one working fire extinguisher on every floor, and an additional one in the kitchen. Have fire escape ladders or other reliable means of escape from an upper floor in case stairs are blocked.

BASIC SAFETY INFORMATION

• Dangers, Warnings, and Cautions alert you to important operating instructions or to potentially hazardous situations.

Pay special attention to these items.

• This Smoke/CO Alarm is approved for use in single-family residences. It is NOT designed for marine or RV use.

• This combination Smoke/Carbon Monoxide Alarm has two separate alarms. The CO Alarm is not designed to detect fire or any other gas. It will only indicate the presence of carbon monoxide gas at the sensor. Carbon monoxide gas may be present in other areas.

The Smoke Alarm will only indicate the presence of smoke that reaches the sensor. The Smoke Alarm is not designed to sense gas, heat or flames.

• This Smoke/CO Alarm cannot operate without working batteries.

Removing the batteries for any reason, or failing to replace the batteries at the end of their service life, removes your protection.

250

• NEVER ignore any alarm. See “If Your Smoke/CO Alarm Sounds” for more information on how to respond to an alarm. Failure to respond can result in injury or death.

• The Silence Features are for your convenience only and will not correct a problem. See "Using the Silence Features" for details.

Always check your home for a potential problem after any alarm.

Failure to do so can result in injury or death.

• Test this Smoke/CO Alarm once a week. If the Alarm ever fails to test correctly, have it replaced immediately! If the Alarm is not working properly, it cannot alert you to a problem.

• This product is intended for use in ordinary indoor locations of family living units. It is not designed to measure CO levels in compliance with Occupational Safety and Health Administration

(OSHA) commercial or industrial standards. Individuals with medical conditions that may make them more sensitive to carbon monoxide may consider using warning devices which provide audible and visual signals for carbon monoxide concentrations under 30 ppm. For additional information on carbon monoxide and your medical condition contact your physician.

FCC Compliance

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a

Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

However, there is no guarantee that the interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that of the receiver.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or TV technician for help.

Warning: Changes or modifications to the product, not expressly approved by First Alert / BRK Brands, Inc., could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

INSTALLATION

WHERE TO INSTALL THIS ALARM

Minimum coverage for Smoke Alarms , as recommended by the National

Fire Protection Association (NFPA), is one Smoke Alarm on every floor, in every sleeping area, and in every bedroom (See “Regulatory Information For

Smoke Alarms” for details on the NFPA recommendations).

For CO Alarms, the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) recommends that a CO Alarm should be centrally located outside of each separate sleeping area in the immediate vicinity of the bedrooms. For added protection, install additional CO Alarms in each separate bedroom, and on every level of your home.

NOTE: For added protection, install an additional Smoke/CO Alarm at least

15 feet (4.6 meters) away from the furnace or fuel burning heat source where possible. In smaller homes or in manufactured homes where this distance cannot be maintained, install the Alarm as far away as possible from the furnace or other fuel burning source. Installing the Alarm closer than 15 feet (4.6 meters) will not harm the Alarm, but may increase the frequency of unwanted alarms.

In general, install combination Smoke and Carbon Monoxide Alarms:

• On every level of your home, including finished attics and basements.

• Inside every bedroom, especially if people sleep with the door partly or completely closed.

• In the hall near every sleeping area. If your home has multiple sleeping areas, install a unit in each. If a hall is more than 40 feet (12 meters) long, install a unit at each end.

• At the top of first-to-second floor stairs.

• At the bottom of the basement stairs.

• For additional coverage, install Alarms in all rooms, halls, and storage areas, where temperatures normally remain between 40˚ F and 100˚ F

(4.4˚ C and 37.8˚ C).

1

USER’S MANUAL


RECOMMENDED PLACEMENT

SUGGESTED AREAS FOR INSTALLING

SMOKE ALARMS, CO ALARMS, AND COMBO UNITS

KEY:

SMOKE ALARMS

HOW TO INSTALL THIS ALARM

This combination Smoke/CO Alarm was designed to be mounted on the ceiling or wall. It is not a tabletop device.

You must install this device on the ceiling or wall as outlined below. Read “Where To Install This Alarm” before starting.

Features:








CONFORMS TO

UL STD 217

AND

UL STD 2034

Model SCO5

SMOKE ALARM WITH

SILENCE FEATURE

CO ALARMS

BOTH, OR COMBINATION

SMOKE/CO ALARMS

Suggested locations are based on

NFPA recommendations (NFPA 72 for Smoke Alarms and NFPA 720 for

Carbon Monoxide Alarms). Always refer to national and local codes before beginning any installation.

In new construction AC and AC/DC smoke alarms MUST be interconnected to meet NFPA recommendations.

�

• When installing on the wall, the top edge of Smoke Alarms should be placed between 4 inches (102 mm) and 12 inches (305 mm) from the wall/ceiling line.

• When installing on the ceiling, place the alarm as close to the center as possible.

• In either case, install at least 4 inches (102 mm) from where the wall and ceiling meet. See “Avoiding Dead Air Spaces” for more information.

NOTE: For any location, make sure no door or other obstruction could keep carbon monoxide or smoke from reaching the Alarm.

Installing Smoke/CO Alarms in Mobile Homes

For minimum security install one Smoke/CO Alarm as close to each sleeping area as possible. For more security, put one unit in each room. Many older mobile homes (especially those built before 1978) have little or no insulation.

If your mobile home is not well insulated, or if you are unsure of the amount of insulation, it is important to install units on inside walls only.

PARTS OF THIS SMOKE/CO ALARM

1 Test/Silence Button

2 Battery Compartment

3 Power/Smoke Alarm LED

4 CO Alarm LED

Tools you will need: pencil, drill with 3/16” or 5mm drill bit, flathead screwdriver, hammer.

• Do not connect this unit to any other alarm or auxiliary device. It is a single-station unit that cannot be linked to other devices. Connecting anything else to this unit may prevent it from working properly.

• Do not install this unit over an electrical junction box. Air currents around junction boxes can prevent smoke from reaching the sensing chamber and prevent the unit from alarming. Only AC powered units are intended for installation over junction boxes.









INTRODUCTION





WHERE THIS ALARM SHOULD NOT BE INSTALLED

Do NOT locate this Smoke/CO Alarm:

• In garages, furnace rooms, crawl spaces and unfinished attics. Avoid extremely dusty, dirty or greasy areas.

• Where combustion particles are produced. Combustion particles form when something burns. Areas to avoid include poorly ventilated kitchens, garages, and furnace rooms. Keep units at least 20 feet (6 meters) from the sources of combustion particles (stove, furnace, water heater, space heater) if possible. In areas where a 20-foot (6 meter) distance is not possible – in modular, mobile, or smaller homes, for example – it is recommended the Smoke Alarm be placed as far from these fuel-burning sources as possible. The placement recommendations are intended to keep these Alarms at a reasonable distance from a fuel-burning source, and thus reduce “unwanted” alarms. Unwanted alarms can occur if a

Smoke Alarm is placed directly next to a fuel-burning source. Ventilate these areas as much as possible.

• Within 5 feet (1.5 meters) of any cooking appliance. In air streams near kitchens. Air currents can draw cooking smoke into the smoke sensor and cause unwanted alarms.

• In extremely humid areas. This Alarm should be at least 10 feet (3 meters) from a shower, sauna, humidifier, vaporizer, dishwasher, laundry room, utility room, or other source of high humidity.

• In direct sunlight.

• In turbulent air, like near ceiling fans or open windows. Blowing air may prevent CO or smoke from reaching the sensors.

• In areas where temperature is colder than 40˚ F (4.4˚ C) or hotter than

100˚F (37.8˚ C). These areas include non-airconditioned crawl spaces, unfinished attics, uninsulated or poorly insulated ceilings, porches, and garages.

• In insect infested areas. Insects can clog the openings to the sensing chamber.

• Less than 12 inches (305 mm) away from fluorescent lights. Electrical

“noise” can interfere with the sensor.

• In “dead air” spaces. See “Avoiding Dead Air Spaces”.

If you want to lock the battery compartment, or lock the Smoke/CO

Alarm to the mounting bracket, please read the “Optional Locking

Features” section.

1. Hold base firmly and twist the mounting bracket counterclockwise (left) to separate it from the unit.

2. Hold the mounting bracket against the ceiling (or wall) so the vertical mounting slot is aligned in the 12 o’clock position and trace around the inside of the mounting slots (vertical and horizontal mounting).

3. Put the unit where it won’t get covered with dust when you drill the mounting holes.

4. Using a 3/16” (5 mm) drill bit, drill a hole through the center of the oval outlines you traced.

5. Insert the plastic screw anchors (in the plastic bag with screws) into the holes. Tap the screw anchors gently with a hammer, if necessary, until they are flush with the ceiling or wall.

6. Line the mounting bracket up over the plastic screw anchors.

7. Screw the mounting bracket to the ceiling or wall through the mounting slots using the two screws provided.

8. Before attaching the Alarm to the bracket, insert the two (2)

AA batteries (included) into the battery compartment. Match the terminals on the end of the battery with the terminals on the unit. Match “+” to “+” and

“-” to “-.” If the batteries are not fully inserted, the unit cannot receive battery power.

NOTE: The unit may beep briefly when you install the batteries. This is normal.

The GREEN Light flashes about every 60 seconds when the unit is receiving battery power.














KEY:

SMOKE ALARMS

�


CO ALARMS (OSHA) commercial or industrial standards. Individuals with medical conditions that may make them more sensitive to carbon

SMOKE/CO ALARMS monoxide may consider using warning devices which provide audible and visual signals for carbon monoxide concentrations under 30 ppm. For additional information on carbon monoxide and your medical condition contact your physician.

FCC Compliance

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a be interconnected to meet NFPA recommendations.


Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in

• When installing on the wall, the top edge of Smoke Alarms should be placed between 4 inches (102 mm) and 12 inches (305 mm) from the the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.


radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:


•

•

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that of the receiver.

• area as possible. For more security, put one unit in each room. Many older

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or TV technician for help.


the equipment.

WHERE THIS ALARM SHOULD NOT BE INSTALLED to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,

• Where combustion particles are produced. Combustion particles form when something burns. Areas to avoid include poorly ventilated kitchens,

INSTALLATION

WHERE TO INSTALL THIS ALARM home.

possible – in modular, mobile, or smaller homes, for example – it is recommended the Smoke Alarm be placed as far from these fuel-burning sources as possible. The placement recommendations are intended to keep these Alarms at a reasonable distance from a fuel-burning source, and thus reduce “unwanted” alarms. Unwanted alarms can occur if a

Smoke Alarm is placed directly next to a fuel-burning source. Ventilate area in the immediate vicinity of the bedrooms. For added protection, install additional CO Alarms in each separate bedroom, and on every level of your and cause unwanted alarms.



will not harm the Alarm, but may increase the frequency of unwanted alarms.


•

•

On every level of your home, including finished attics and basements.

Inside every bedroom, especially if people sleep with the door partly or completely closed.

•

•

•

•

•

In insect infested areas. Insects can clog the openings to the sensing chamber.

At the top of first-to-second floor stairs.

At the bottom of the basement stairs.

• For additional coverage, install Alarms in all rooms, halls, and storage

AVOIDING DEAD AIR SPACES

(4.4˚ C and 37.8˚ C).

To avoid dead air spaces, follow installation recommendations below.

On ceilings, install Smoke/CO Alarms as close to the center of the ceiling as possible. If this is not possible, install the Smoke/CO Alarm at least 4 inches

(102 mm) from the wall or corner.

1

For wall mounting (if allowed by building codes), the top edge of Smoke/CO

Alarms should be placed between 4 inches (102 mm) and 12 inches (305 mm) from the wall/ceiling line, below typical “dead air” spaces.

On a peaked, gabled, or cathedral ceiling, install first Smoke/CO Alarm within 3 feet (0.9 meters) of the peak of the ceiling, measured horizontally.

Additional Smoke/CO Alarms may be required depending on the length, angle, etc. of the ceiling's slope. Refer to NFPA 72 for details on requirements for sloped or peaked ceilings.


“Dead air” spaces may prevent smoke from reaching the Smoke/CO Alarm.








The battery door will resist closing unless batteries are installed. This warns you the unit will not operate without batteries.

9. Attach the Smoke/CO Alarm to the mounting bracket. Line up the guides on the alarm’s base with the guides on the mounting bracket. When guides are lined up, turn the base clockwise (right) until it snaps into place.

NOTE: Once the Smoke/CO Alarm is snapped onto the mounting bracket, you can rotate the Smoke/CO Alarm to adjust the alignment.

10. Test the Smoke/CO Alarm. See “Weekly

Testing” for details.

REGULAR MAINTENANCE

This unit has been designed to be as maintenance-free as possible, but there are a few simple things you must do to keep it working properly.

• Test it at least once a week.

• Clean the Smoke/CO Alarm at least once a month; gently vacuum the outside of the Smoke/CO Alarm using your household vacuum’s soft brush attachment. A can of clean compressed air (sold at computer or office supply stores) may also be used. Follow manufacturer instructions for use. Test the Smoke/CO Alarm. Never use water, cleaners or solvents since they may damage the unit.

• If the Smoke/CO Alarm becomes contaminated by excessive dirt, dust and/or grime, and cannot be cleaned to avoid unwanted alarms, replace the unit immediately.

Continued...

HOW TO INSTALL THIS ALARM REGULAR MAINTENANCE, Continued

OPTIONAL LOCKING FEATURES

The optional locking features are designed to discourage unauthorized removal of the batteries or Alarm. It is not necessary to activate the locks in single-family households where unauthorized battery or Alarm removal is not a concern.

ceiling or wall as outlined below. Read “Where To Install This Alarm” before starting.

• Relocate the unit if it sounds frequent unwanted alarms. See “Where This

Your Smoke/CO Alarm requires two standard AA batteries. The following batteries are acceptable as replacements: Duracell MN1500. These batteries

Tools you will need: • Needle-nose pliers or utility knife • Standard flathead screwdriver.




• Always use the exact batteries specified by this User’s Manual.

DO NOT use rechargeable batteries. Clean the battery contacts and also those of the device prior to battery installation. Install batteries correctly with regard to polarity (+ and -).

4 CO Alarm LED

TO LOCK THE BATTERY COMPARTMENT

Do not lock the battery compartment until you activate the battery and test the Smoke/CO

Alarm.

flathead screwdriver, hammer.

1.

Install the batteries before attaching the Alarm


to “-.” If the batteries are not fully inserted, the unit cannot receive battery power.

2. Push and hold Test/Silence button until the alarm sounds.



If the unit does not alarm during testing, DO


2. Hold the mounting bracket against the ceiling (or wall) so the vertical

3. Using needle-nose pliers or a utility knife, inside of the mounting slots (vertical and horizontal mounting).

detach one locking pin from the mounting


4. Push the locking pin through the hole near the battery door latch on the back of the

Smoke/CO Alarm.

• Please dispose of or recycle used batteries properly, following any

TO UNLOCK THE BATTERY COMPARTMENT your area. DO NOT DISPOSE OF BATTERIES IN FIRE. BATTERIES

1. Remove the Smoke/CO Alarm from the mounting bracket. If the unit is locked to

• Keep battery out of reach of children. In the event a battery is swallowed, immediately contact your poison control center, your physician, or the National Battery Ingestion hotline at 202-625-3333 as serious injury may occur.

head of the locking pin, and gently pry it out of the battery compartment lock. (If you plan to relock the battery compartment, save the locking pin.) replacement batteries for this unit. Regardless of the manufacturer’s suggested battery life, you MUST replace the battery immediately once the unit starts the battery door and reinsert locking pin in lock.

Alarm from the ceiling or wall):

4. Reattach the Smoke/CO Alarm to the mounting bracket.

and remove each battery.

3. Insert the new batteries, making sure they snap completely into the battery compartment.

Match the terminals on the ends of the

When replacing the batteries, always test

4. Close the battery compartment, and then test battery compartment.

AB

5. Insert the plastic screw anchors (in the plastic bag with screws) into the

TO LOCK THE MOUNTING BRACKET

IF YOUR SMOKE/CO ALARM SOUNDS

WHAT TO DO FIRST–IDENTIFY THE TYPE OF ALARM


1. Using needle-nose pliers or a utility knife, detach one locking pin from the mounting bracket.


AA batteries (included) into the shown in the diagram.

the terminals on the end of the

3. When you attach the Smoke/CO Alarm to the mounting bracket, the locking pin’s not fully inserted, the unit cannot receive battery power.

Type of Alarm bracket nearest to the locking pin.

(left) at the same time.

IF THE CO ALARM SOUNDS

What You See and Hear

CO LED: Flashes Red

Horn: 4 beeps, pause, 4 beeps, pause

Power/Smoke LED : Off

Power/Smoke LED : Flashes Red


CO LED: Off



WEEKLY TESTING

“ALARM-MOVE TO FRESH AIR”

If you hear the CO alarm horn and the CO red light is flashing, move everyone to a source of fresh air. DO NOT remove the batteries!

• NEVER use an open flame of any kind to test this unit. You might built-in test switch accurately tests the unit’s operation as required by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). NEVER use vehicle exhaust!

• DO NOT stand close to the Alarm when the horn is sounding.

Exposure at close range may be harmful to your hearing. When up, turn the base clockwise (right) until it snaps into place.

NOTE: Once the Smoke/CO Alarm is snapped onto the mounting bracket,

Smoke/CO Alarm.



2

You can test this Smoke/CO Alarm: Press and hold the Test/Silence button

Actuation of your CO Alarm indicates the presence of carbon monoxide

(CO) which can kill you. In other words, when your CO Alarm sounds, you must not ignore it!

IF THE CO ALARM SIGNAL SOUNDS:

1. Operate the Test/Silence button.

Power/Smoke LED

2. Call your emergency services, fire department or 911. Write down the number of your local emergency service here:

Power/Smoke

If the unit does not alarm, make sure the batteries are correctly installed, and test again. If the unit still does not alarm, replace it immediately.

Do a head count to check that all persons are accounted for. Do not reenter the premises, or move away from the open door or window until the emergency services responder has arrived, the premises have been aired






Continued...

4. After following steps 1-3, if your CO Alarm reactivates within a 24-hour period, repeat steps 1-3 and call a qualified appliance technician to investigate for sources of CO from fuel-burning equipment and appliances, and inspect for proper operation of this equipment. If problems are identified during this inspection have the equipment serviced immediately. Note any combustion equipment not inspected by the technician, and consult the manufacturers’ instructions, or contact the manufacturers directly, for more information about CO safety and this equipment. Make sure that motor vehicles are not, and have not, been operating in an attached garage or adjacent to the residence. Write down the number of a qualified appliance technician here:

__________________________________________________________________

NOTE: A qualified appliance technician is defined as “a person, firm, corporation, or company that either in person or through a representative, is engaged in and responsible for the installation, testing, servicing, or replac ement of heating, ventilation, air conditioning (HVAC) equipment, combustion appliances and equipment, and/or gas fireplaces or other decorative combustion equipment.”



IF THE SMOKE ALARM SOUNDS

RESPONDING TO AN ALARM

This Smoke/CO Alarm has two separate locking features: one to lock the battery compartment, and the other to lock the

Smoke/CO Alarm to the mounting bracket. You can choose to use either feature independently, or use them both.


Both locking features use locking pins, which are molded into the mounting bracket. Depending on which locking features you use, remove one or both pins from the mounting bracket using needle-nose pliers or a utility knife.

To permanently remove either locking pin, insert a flathead screwdriver between the locking pin and the lock, and pry the pin out of the lock.



Alarm.

1.

Install the batteries before attaching the Alarm to the bracket. Insert the two (2) AA batteries

(included) into the battery compartment. Match the terminals on the end of the battery with the terminals on the unit. Match “+” to “+” and “-” to “-.” If the batteries are not fully inserted, the unit cannot receive battery power.


TO UNLOCK THE BATTERY COMPARTMENT

1. Remove the Smoke/CO Alarm from the mounting bracket. If the unit is locked to the bracket, see the section “To Unlock the Mounting Bracket.”

2. Insert a flathead screwdriver under the head of the locking pin, and gently pry it out of the battery compartment lock. (If you plan to relock the battery compartment, save the locking pin.)

3. To relock the battery compartment, close the battery door and reinsert locking pin in lock.

• If the unit alarms and you are not testing the unit, it is warning you of a potentially dangerous situation that requires your immediate attention. NEVER ignore any alarm. Ignoring the alarm may result in injury or death.

• Never remove the batteries from a battery operated Smoke/CO

Alarm to stop an unwanted alarm (caused by cooking smoke, etc.).

Removing batteries disables the alarm so it cannot sense smoke, and removes your protection. Instead open a window or fan the smoke away from the unit. The alarm will reset automatically.

• If the unit alarms get everyone out of the house immediately.

WHAT TO DO IN CASE OF FIRE

• Don’t panic; stay calm. Follow your family escape plan.

• Get out of the house as quickly as possible. Don’t stop to get dressed or collect anything.

• Feel doors with the back of your hand before opening them.

If a door is cool, open it slowly. Don’t open a hot door. Keep doors and windows closed, unless you must escape through them.

• Cover your nose and mouth with a cloth (preferably damp).

Take short, shallow breaths.

• Meet at your planned meeting place outside your home, and do a head count to make sure everybody got out safely.

• Call the Fire Department as soon as possible from outside.

Give your address, then your name.

• Never go back inside a burning building for any reason.

• Contact your Fire Department for ideas on making your home safer.


NOT lock the battery compartment! Install new batteries and test again. If the unit still does not alarm, replace it immediately.



Smoke/CO Alarm.



When replacing the batteries, always test the Smoke/CO Alarm before relocking the battery compartment.

TO UNLOCK THE MOUNTING BRACKET

Alarms have various limitations. See "General Limitations of Smoke/CO

Alarms" for details.

USING THE SILENCE FEATURES

Never remove the batteries to quiet an unwanted alarm. Removing the batteries disables the alarm and removes your protection.

The Silence Feature is intended to temporarily silence the horn while you identify and correct the problem. Do not use the Silence Feature in emergency situations.

It will not correct a CO problem or extinguish a fire.

The Silence Feature can temporarily quiet an unwanted alarm for several minutes.

Press the Test/Silence button on the alarm cover for at least 3-5 seconds.

After the Test/Silence button is released, the Red LED blinks during the silence mode.


1. Insert a flathead screwdriver into the rectangular cut-out on the mounting bracket nearest to the locking pin.

2. Insert the locking pin through the hole on the back of the Smoke/CO Alarm as shown in the diagram.

2. Pry the Smoke/CO Alarm away from the bracket by pushing up on the screwdriver and turning the Smoke/CO Alarm counterclockwise


When the Smoke Alarm is Silenced When the CO Alarm is Silenced

The Smoke Alarm will remain silent for up to 15 minutes, then return to normal operation.

If the smoke has not cleared–or continues to increase–the device will go back into alarm.

The CO alarm will remain silent for up to 4 minutes.

After 4 minutes, if CO levels remain potentially dangerous the horn will start sounding again.

3. When you attach the Smoke/CO Alarm to the mounting bracket, the locking pin’s head will fit into a notch on the bracket.

WEEKLY TESTING

• NEVER use an open flame of any kind to test this unit. You might accidentally damage or set fire to the unit or to your home. The built-in test switch accurately tests the unit’s operation as required by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). NEVER use vehicle exhaust!

Exhaust may cause permanent damage and voids your warranty.


Exposure at close range may be harmful to your hearing. When testing, step away when horn starts sounding.

It is important to test this unit every week to make sure it is working properly. Using the test button is the recommended way to test this

Smoke/CO Alarm.

2


3-5 seconds until unit starts to alarm.

During testing, you will see and hear the following sequence:

• The Horn will sound 3 beeps, pause, 3 beeps. The Power/Smoke LED flashes Red and the CO LED will be Off.

• Next the Horn will sound 4 beeps, pause, 4 beeps. The Power/Smoke

LED will be Off and the CO LED flashes Red.


3

SILENCING THE LOW BATTERY WARNING

This silence feature can temporarily quiet the low battery warning “chirp” for up to 8 hours. Press the Test/Silence button on the alarm cover.

Once the low battery warning “chirp” silence feature is activated, the unit continues to flash the Green light once a minute for 8 hours. After 8 hours, the low battery “chirp” will resume. Replace the batteries as soon as possible; this unit will not operate without battery power!

To deactivate this feature: Press the Test/Silence button again. The unit will go into Test Mode and the low battery warning will resume (LED flashes and unit sounds “chirp” once a minute).

SILENCING THE END OF LIFE SIGNAL

This silence feature can temporarily quiet the End of Life warning “chirp” for up to 2 days. You can silence the End of Life warning “chirp” by pressing the

Test/Silence button. The horn will chirp, acknowledging that the End of Life silence feature has been activated.

After approximately 2 days, the End of Life “chirp” will resume.

4

REGULAR MAINTENANCE, Continued


Alarm Should Not Be Installed” for details.

Choosing a replacement battery:

Your Smoke/CO Alarm requires two standard AA batteries. The following batteries are acceptable as replacements: Duracell MN1500. These batteries are available at many local retail stores.



• Please dispose of or recycle used batteries properly, following any local regulations. Consult your local waste management authority or recycling organization to find an electronics recycling facility in your area. DO NOT DISPOSE OF BATTERIES IN FIRE. BATTERIES

MAY EXPLODE OR LEAK.


Actual battery service life depends on the Smoke/CO Alarm and the environment in which it is installed. All the batteries specified above are acceptable replacement batteries for this unit. Regardless of the manufacturer’s suggested battery life, you MUST replace the battery immediately once the unit starts

“chirping” (the “low battery warning”).

To replace the batteries (without removing


1. Open the battery compartment.

2. Press tabs A and B as shown in the diagram and remove each battery.


Match the terminals on the ends of the batteries with the terminals on the unit.

4. Close the battery compartment, and then test the unit by pressing the Test/Silence button.

AB



Type of Alarm

Carbon Monoxide (CO)


CO LED: Flashes Red



Smoke Power/Smoke LED : Flashes Red


CO LED: Off









__________________________________________________________________

3. Immediately move to fresh air—outdoors or by an open door or window.

Do a head count to check that all persons are accounted for. Do not reenter the premises, or move away from the open door or window until the emergency services responder has arrived, the premises have been aired out, and your CO Alarm remains in its normal condition.


__________________________________________________________________

NOTE: A qualified appliance technician is defined as “a person, firm, corporation, or company that either in person or through a representative, is engaged in and responsible for the installation, testing, servicing, or replac ement of heating, ventilation, air conditioning (HVAC) equipment, combustion appliances and equipment, and/or gas fireplaces or other decorative combustion

WHAT YOU NEED TO KNOW ABOUT CO

•

•

• typically do not produce CO.

These fuels include: Wood, coal, charcoal, oil, natural gas, gasoline, kerosene, and propane.

Common appliances are often sources of CO. If they are not properly maintained, are improperly ventilated, or malfunction, CO levels can rise quickly.


can “trap” CO inside.

SYMPTOMS OF CO POISONING

If the unit alarms get everyone out of the house immediately.

Mild Exposure: Slight headache, nausea, vomiting, fatigue (“flu-like” symptoms).

Medium Exposure: Throbbing headache, drowsiness, confusion, fast heart rate.

Extreme Exposure: Convulsions, unconsciousness, heart and lung failure.

Exposure to Carbon Monoxide can cause brain damage, death.



mum over a long period of time. The CO Alarm generally sounds an alarm


that they are not feeling well, but become disoriented and can no longer react well enough to exit the building or get help. Also, young children and


people can be more quickly and severely affected by CO. If you experience



FINDING THE SOURCE OF CO AFTER AN ALARM

Carbon monoxide is an odorless, invisible gas, which often makes it difficult

USING THE SILENCE FEATURES can make it difficult to locate sources of CO:

• House well ventilated before the investigator arrives.

• Problem caused by “backdrafting.”

• Transient CO problem caused by special circumstances.

Because CO may dissipate by the time an investigator arrives, it may be difficult to locate the source of CO.

BRK Brands, Inc. shall not be obligated to

POTENTIAL SOURCES OF CO IN THE HOME

Fuel-burning appliances like:

When the Smoke Alarm is Silenced When the CO Alarm is Silenced gas clothes dryer.

Damaged or insufficient venting:

If the smoke has not cleared–or continues to increase–the device


corroded or disconnected water heater vent pipe, leaking chimney pipe or flue, or cracked heat exchanger, blocked or clogged chimney opening.

Improper use of appliance/device: operating a barbecue grill or vehicle

SILENCING THE LOW BATTERY WARNING screened porch).

Transient CO Problems: “transient” or on-again-off-again CO problems can be caused by outdoor conditions and other special circumstances.

continues to flash the Green light once a minute for 8 hours. After 8 hours, the low battery “chirp” will resume. Replace the batteries as soon as possible; this unit will not operate without battery power!

To deactivate this feature: fresh air.

Press the Test/Silence button again. The unit will go into Test Mode and the low battery warning will resume (LED flashes and unit sounds “chirp” once a minute).

• Several appliances running at the same time competing for limited

SILENCING THE END OF LIFE SIGNAL water heaters.

• Obstructions in or unconventional vent pipe designs which can amplify

4. Car idling in an open or closed attached garage, or near a home.

These conditions are dangerous because they can trap exhaust in your home.

Since these conditions can come and go, they are also hard to recreate during a CO investigation.

HOW CAN I PROTECT MY FAMILY FROM

CO POISONING?

A CO Alarm is an excellent means of protection. It monitors the air and sounds a loud alarm before Carbon Monoxide levels become threatening for average, healthy adults.

A CO Alarm is not a substitute for proper maintenance of home appliances.

To help prevent CO problems and reduce the risk of CO poisoning:

• Clean chimneys and flues yearly. Keep them free of debris, leaves, and nests for proper air flow. Also, have a professional check for rust and corrosion, cracks, or separations. These conditions can prevent proper air movement and cause backdrafting. Never “cap” or cover a chimney in any way that would block air flow.

• Test and maintain all fuel-burning equipment annually. Many local gas or oil companies and HVAC companies offer appliance inspections for a nominal fee.

• Make regular visual inspections of all fuel-burning appliances. Check appliances for excessive rust and scaling. Also check the flame on the burner and pilot lights. The flame should be blue. A yellow flame means fuel is not being burned completely and CO may be present.

Keep the blower door on the furnace closed. Use vents or fans when they are available on all fuel-burning appliances. Make sure appliances are vented to the outside. Do not grill or barbecue indoors, or in garages or on screen porches.

• Check for exhaust backflow from CO sources. Check the draft hood on an operating furnace for a backdraft. Look for cracks on furnace heat exchangers.

• Check the house or garage on the other side of shared wall.

• Keep windows and doors open slightly. If you suspect that CO is escaping into your home, open a window or a door. Opening windows and doors can significantly decrease CO levels.

In addition, familiarize yourself with all enclosed materials. Read this manual in its entirety, and make sure you understand what to do if your

CO Alarm sounds.

REGULATORY INFORMATION FOR

SMOKE/CO ALARMS

REGULATORY INFORMATION FOR CO ALARMS

WHAT LEVELS OF CO CAUSE AN ALARM?

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Standard UL2034 requires residential CO

Alarms to sound when exposed to levels of CO and exposure times as described below. They are measured in parts per million (ppm) of CO over time (in minutes).

UL2034 Required Alarm Points*:

• If the alarm is exposed to 400 ppm of CO, IT MUST ALARM BETWEEN

4 and 15 MINUTES.


10 and 50 MINUTES.

• If the alarm is exposed to 70 ppm if CO, IT MUST ALARM BETWEEN

60 and 240 MINUTES.

* Approximately 10% COHb exposure at levels of 10% to 95% Relative

Humidity (RH).

The unit is designed not to alarm when exposed to a constant level of 30 ppm for 30 days.

CO Alarms are designed to alarm before there is an immediate life threat.

Since you cannot see or smell CO, never assume it’s not present.

• An exposure to 100 ppm of CO for 20 minutes may not affect average, healthy adults, but after 4 hours the same level may cause headaches.

• An exposure to 400 ppm of CO may cause headaches in average, healthy adults after 35 minutes, but can cause death after 2 hours.

Standards: Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Single and Multiple Station carbon monoxide alarms UL2034.

According to Underwriters Laboratories Inc. UL2034, Section 1-1.2: “Carbon monoxide alarms covered by these requirements are intended to respond to the presence of carbon monoxide from sources such as, but not limited to, exhaust from internal-combustion engines, abnormal operation of fuel-fired appliances, and fireplaces. CO Alarms are intended to alarm at carbon monoxide levels below those that could cause a loss of ability to react to the dangers of Carbon

Monoxide exposure.” This CO Alarm monitors the air at the Alarm, and is designed to alarm before CO levels become life threatening. This allows you precious time to leave the house and correct the problem. This is only possible if Alarms are located, installed, and maintained as described in this manual.

Gas Detection at Typical Temperature and Humidity Ranges: The CO Alarm is not formulated to detect CO levels below 30 ppm typically. UL tested for false alarm resistance to Methane (500 ppm), Butane (300 ppm), Heptane (500 ppm),

Ethyl Acetate (200 ppm), Isopropyl Alcohol (200 ppm) and Carbon Dioxide (5000 ppm). Values measure gas and vapor concentrations in parts per million.

Audible Alarm: 85 dB minimum at 10 feet (3 meters).

REGULATORY INFORMATION FOR SMOKE ALARMS

RECOMMENDED LOCATIONS FOR SMOKE ALARMS

Installing Smoke Alarms in Single-Family Residences

The National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), recommends one Smoke Alarm on every floor, in every sleeping area, and in every bedroom. In new construction, the Smoke Alarms must be AC powered and interconnected. See “Agency

Placement Recommendations” for details.

Continued...

5


WHAT IS CO?

CO is an invisible, odorless, tasteless gas produced when fossil fuels do not burn completely, or are exposed to heat (usually fire). Electrical appliances typically do not produce CO.



CO is a real danger now that homes are more energy efficient. “Air-tight” homes with added insulation, sealed windows, and other weatherproofing can “trap” CO inside.

RECOMMENDED LOCATIONS FOR SMOKE ALARMS, Continued

For additional coverage, it is recommended that you install a Smoke Alarm in all rooms, halls, storage areas, finished attics, and basements, where temperatures normally remain between 40˚ F (4.4˚ C) and 100˚ F (37.8˚ C). Make sure no door or other obstruction could keep smoke from reaching the Smoke Alarms.

More specifically, install Smoke Alarms:



• In the hall near every sleeping area. If your home has multiple sleeping areas, install a unit in each. If a hall is more than 40 feet long (12 meters), install a unit at each end.

• At the top of the first-to-second floor stairway, and at the bottom of the basement stairway.

AGENCY PLACEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS, Continued

California State Fire Marshal (CSFM)

Early warning detection is best achieved by the installation of fire detection equipment in all rooms and areas of the household as follows: A Smoke Alarm installed in each separate sleeping area (in the vicinity, but outside bedrooms), and Heat or Smoke Alarms in the living rooms, dining rooms, bedrooms, kitchens, hallways, finished attics, furnace rooms, closets, utility and storage rooms, basements, and attached garages.

ABOUT SMOKE ALARMS

Battery (DC) operated Smoke Alarms: Provide protection even when electricity fails, provided the batteries are fresh and correctly installed. Units are easy to install, and do not require professional installation.


These symptoms are related to CO POISONING and should be discussed with ALL household members.





This CO Alarm measures exposure to CO over time. It alarms if CO levels are extremely high in a short period of time, or if CO levels reach a certain minimum over a long period of time. The CO Alarm generally sounds an alarm before the onset of symptoms in average, healthy adults. Why is this important?

Because you need to be warned of a potential CO problem while you can still react in time. In many reported cases of CO exposure, victims may be aware that they are not feeling well, but become disoriented and can no longer react well enough to exit the building or get help. Also, young children and pets may be the first affected. The average healthy adult might not feel any symptoms when the CO Alarm sounds. However, people with cardiac or respiratory problems, infants, unborn babies, pregnant mothers, or elderly people can be more quickly and severely affected by CO. If you experience even mild symptoms of CO poisoning, consult your doctor immediately!


Carbon monoxide is an odorless, invisible gas, which often makes it difficult to locate the source of CO after an alarm. These are a few of the factors that can make it difficult to locate sources of CO:

Specific requirements for Smoke Alarm installation vary from state to state and from region to region. Check with your local Fire Department for current requirements in your area. It is recommended AC or AC/DC units be interconnected for added protection.

AC powered Smoke Alarms: Can be interconnected so if one unit senses smoke, all units alarm. They do not operate if electricity fails.

AC with battery (DC) back-up: will operate if electricity fails, provided the batteries are fresh and correctly installed. AC and AC/DC units must be installed by a qualified electrician.

Smoke/CO Alarms for Solar or Wind Energy users and battery backup power systems: AC powered Smoke/CO Alarms should only be operated with true or pure sine wave inverters. Operating this Alarm with most batterypowered UPS (uninterruptible power supply) products or square wave or

“quasi sine wave” inverters will damage the Alarm . If you are not sure about your inverter or UPS type, please consult with the manufacturer to verify.

Smoke Alarms for the hearing impaired: Special purpose Smoke Alarms should be installed for the hearing impaired. They include a visual alarm and an audible alarm horn, and meet the requirements of the Americans With Disabilities

Act. Can be interconnected so if one unit senses smoke, all units alarm.

Smoke alarms are not to be used with detector guards unless the combination has been evaluated and found suitable for that purpose.

All these Smoke Alarms are designed to provide early warning of fires if located, installed and cared for as described in the user’s manual, and if smoke reaches the Alarm. If you are unsure which type of Smoke Alarm to install, refer the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standard 72

(National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code) and NFPA 101 (Life Safety Code).

National Fire Protection Association, One Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA

02269-9101. Local building codes may also require specific units in new construction or in different areas of the home.


• Problem caused by “backdrafting.” AGENCY PLACEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS



BRK Brands, Inc. shall not be obligated to pay for any carbon monoxide investigation or service call.


Fuel-burning appliances like: portable heater, gas or wood burning fireplace, gas kitchen range or cooktop, gas clothes dryer.

Damaged or insufficient venting: corroded or disconnected water heater vent pipe, leaking chimney pipe or flue, or cracked heat exchanger, blocked or clogged chimney opening.

Improper use of appliance/device: operating a barbecue grill or vehicle in an enclosed area (like a garage or screened porch).


The following conditions can result in transient CO situations:

1. Excessive spillage or reverse venting of fuel appliances caused by outdoor conditions such as:

• Wind direction and/or velocity, including high, gusty winds. Heavy air in the vent pipes (cold/humid air with extended periods between cycles).

• Negative pressure differential resulting from the use of exhaust fans.

• Several appliances running at the same time competing for limited fresh air.

• Vent pipe connections vibrating loose from clothes dryers, furnaces, or water heaters.

• Obstructions in or unconventional vent pipe designs which can amplify the above situations.

2. Extended operation of unvented fuel burning devices (range, oven, fireplace).

3. Temperature inversions, which can trap exhaust close to the ground.





CO POISONING?





Standards: Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Single and Multiple Station Smoke

Alarms 217.

NFPA 72 Chapter 29

“For your information, the National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code , NFPA 72, reads as follows:”

29.5.1* Required Detection.

29.5.1.1* Where required by other governing laws, codes, or standards for a specific type of occupancy, approved single and multiple-station smoke alarms shall be installed as follows:

(1)*In all sleeping rooms and guest rooms

(2)*Outside of each separate dwelling unit sleeping area, within 21 ft (6.4 m) of any door to a sleeping room, with the distance measured along a path of travel

(3) On every level of a dwelling unit, including basements

(4) On every level of a residential board and care occupancy (small facility), including basements and excluding crawl spaces and unfinished attics

(5)*In the living area(s) of a guest suite

(6) In the living area(s) of a residential board and care occupancy

(small facility)

(Reprinted with permission from NFPA 72

®

, National Fire Alarm and Signaling

Code Copyright © 2010 National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, MA

02269. This reprinted material is not the complete and official position of the National Fire Protection Association, on the referenced subject which is represented only by the standard in its entirety), (National Fire Alarm and

Signaling Code ® and NFPA 72 ® are registered trademarks of the National

Fire Protection Association, Inc., Quincy, MA 02269).

Continued...

SPECIAL COMPLIANCE CONSIDERATIONS

This Smoke Alarm is suitable for use in apartments, condominiums, townhouses, hospitals, day care facilities, health care facilities, boarding houses, group homes and dormitories provided a primary fire detection system already exists to meet fire detection requirements in common areas like lobbies, hallways, or porches. Using this Smoke Alarm in common areas may not provide sufficient warning to all residents or meet local fire protection ordinances/regulations.

This Smoke Alarm alone is not a suitable substitute for complete fire detection systems in places housing many people—like apartment buildings, condominiums, hotels, motels, dormitories, hospitals, health care facilities, nursing homes, day care facilities, or group homes of any kind. It is not a suitable substitute for complete fire detection systems in warehouses, industrial facilities, commercial buildings, and special-purpose non-residential buildings which require special fire detection and alarm systems. Depending on the building codes in your area, this Smoke Alarm may be used to provide additional protection in these facilities.

In new construction, most building codes require the use of AC or AC/DC powered Smoke Alarms only. In existing construction, AC, AC/DC, or DC powered Smoke Alarms can be used as specified by local building codes.

Refer to NFPA 72 (National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code) and NFPA 101

(Life Safety Code), local building codes, or consult your Fire Department for detailed fire protection requirements in buildings not defined as “households”.

HUD MAP Program

Certain HUD battery powered Smoke Alarm applications, especially those that fall under HUD 223(f) MAP (Multi-family Accelerated Processing), may require a 10 Year sealed tamper resistant battery. This alarm does not meet that requirement. Substitute First Alert SA340B.

GENERAL LIMITATIONS OF SMOKE/CO ALARMS

This Smoke/CO Alarm is intended for residential use. It is not intended for use in industrial applications where Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requirements for Carbon Monoxide Alarms must be met. The Smoke Alarm portion of this device is not intended to alert hearing impaired residents. Special purpose

Smoke Alarms should be installed for hearing impaired residents (CO Alarms are not yet available for the hearing impaired).

adequate early warning. Recommended minimum protection is one alarm device in every sleeping area, every bedroom, and on every level of your home. Some experts recommend battery powered Smoke and CO Alarms be used in conjunction with interconnected AC powered Smoke Alarms. For details, see “About Smoke Alarms” for details.

Smoke/CO Alarms may not waken all individuals.

Practice the escape plan at least twice a year, making sure that everyone is involved – from kids to grandparents. Allow children to master fire escape planning and practice before holding a fire drill at night when they are sleeping. If children or others do not readily waken to the sound of the Smoke/CO Alarm, or if there are infants or family members with mobility limitations, make sure that someone is assigned to assist them in fire drill and in the event of an emergency. It is recommended that you hold a fire drill while family members are sleeping in order to determine their response to the sound of the Smoke/CO Alarm while sleeping and to determine whether they may need assistance in the event of an emergency.

Smoke/CO Alarms cannot work without power.

Battery operated units cannot work if the batteries are missing, disconnected or dead, if the wrong type of batteries are used, or if the batteries are not installed correctly. AC units cannot work if the AC power is cut off for any reason (open fuse or circuit breaker, failure along a power line or at a power station, electrical fire that burns the electrical wires, etc.). If you are concerned about the limitations of battery or AC power, install both types of units.

Smoke/CO Alarms may not be heard.

The alarm horn loudness meets or exceeds current UL standards of 85 dB at 10 feet (3 meters). However, if the Smoke/CO

Alarm is installed outside the bedroom, it may not wake up a sound sleeper or one who has recently used drugs or has been drinking alcoholic beverages. This is especially true if the door is closed or only partly open. Even persons who are awake may not hear the alarm horn if the sound is blocked by distance or closed doors.

Noise from traffic, stereo, radio, television, air conditioner, or other appliances may also prevent alert persons from hearing the alarm horn. This Smoke/CO Alarm is not intended for people who are hearing impaired.

The Alarm may not have time to alarm before the fire itself causes damage, injury, or death, since smoke from some fires may not reach the unit immediately. Examples of this include persons smoking in bed, children playing with matches, or fires caused by violent explosions resulting from escaping gas.

This Smoke/CO Alarm is not a substitute for life insurance.

Though this

Smoke/CO Alarm warns against increasing CO levels or the presence of smoke,

BRK Brands, Inc. does not warrant or imply in any way that they will protect lives.

Homeowners and renters must still insure their lives.

This Smoke/CO Alarm will not sense smoke or CO that does not reach the sensors.

It will only sense smoke or CO at the sensor. Smoke or CO may be




This Smoke/CO Alarm has a limited life.

Although this Smoke/CO Alarm and all of its parts have passed many stringent tests and are designed to be as reliable as possible, any of these parts could fail at any time. Therefore, you must test this device weekly. The unit should be replaced immediately if it is not operating properly.

This Smoke/CO Alarm is not foolproof.

Like all other electronic devices, this

Smoke/CO Alarm has limitations. It can only detect smoke or CO that reaches the sensors. It may not give early warning of the source of smoke or CO is in a remote part of the home, away from the alarm device.

or oil companies and HVAC companies offer appliance inspections for a nominal fee.

all rooms, halls, storage areas, finished attics, and basements, where temperaappliances for excessive rust and scaling. Also check the flame on the burner and pilot lights. The flame should be blue. A yellow flame



•



Battery (DC) operated Smoke Alarms:

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE electricity fails, provided the batteries are fresh and correctly installed. Units

You should...


escaping into your home, open a window or a door. Opening windows

Specific requirements for Smoke Alarm installation vary from state to state and from region to region. Check with your local Fire Department for current manual in its entirety, and make sure you understand what to do if your


It is recommended AC or AC/DC units be


SMOKE/CO ALARMS







4 and 15 MINUTES.


10 and 50 MINUTES.


60 and 240 MINUTES.


Humidity (RH).

The unit is designed not to alarm when exposed to a constant level

Standards:

Alarms 217.

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Single and Multiple Station Smoke

Horn "chirps" about once per minute.

Horn does three "chirps" every minute;

LED has 3 rapid flashes with "chirps".

installed by a qualified electrician.

Low battery warning.

MALFUNCTION SIGNAL.

Device is not working properly, and needs to be replaced.

Smoke/CO Alarms for Solar or Wind Energy users and battery backup power systems: AC powered Smoke/CO Alarms should only be operated with true or pure sine wave inverters. Operating this Alarm with most battery-

Carbon Monoxide Alarm ONLY:

CO Alarm goes back into alarm 4 minutes after you

Silence it.

will damage the Alarm

CO levels indicate a potentially dangerous situation.


CO Alarm sounds frequently even though no high The CO Alarm may be improperly located. Refer to


All these Smoke Alarms are designed to provide early warning of fires if smoke reaches the Alarm. If you are unsure which type of Smoke Alarm to

Smoke Alarm sounds when no smoke is visible.

Unwanted alarm may be caused by non-emergency




* For a list of acceptable replacement batteries, see “Regular Maintenance.”

Install two new AA batteries * .

Units under warranty should be returned to manufacturer for replacement. See “Limited

Warranty” for details.

Immediately replace the Alarm.

IF YOU ARE FEELING SYMPTOMS OF CO

POISONING, EVACUATE your home and call 911 or the Fire Department. Refer to "If The CO Alarm

Sounds" for details.

Relocate your Alarm. If frequent alarms continue, have home rechecked for potential CO problems.

You may be experiencing an intermittent CO problem.

Silence Alarm using Test/Silence button; clean the

Alarm’s cover with a soft, clean cloth. If frequent unwanted alarms continue, relocate your Alarm.

Alarm may be too close to a kitchen, cooking appliance, or steamy bathroom.


“For your information, the National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code , NFPA 72,

•

• reads as follows:”


adults after 35 minutes, but can cause death after 2 hours.

specific type of occupancy, approved single and multiple-station smoke alarms shall be installed as follows:


According to Underwriters Laboratories Inc. UL2034, Section 1-1.2: “Carbon

(2)*Outside of each separate dwelling unit sleeping area, within 21 ft (6.4 m) of any door to a sleeping room, with the distance measured along a path presence of carbon monoxide from sources such as, but not limited to, exhaust of travel and fireplaces. CO Alarms are intended to alarm at carbon monoxide levels below those that could cause a loss of ability to react to the dangers of Carbon

This Smoke Alarm is suitable for use in apartments, condominiums, townhouses, hospitals, day care facilities, health care facilities, boarding houses, group homes and dormitories provided a primary fire detection system already exists to meet fire detection requirements in common areas like lobbies, hallways, or porches. Using this Smoke Alarm in common areas ordinances/regulations.

This Smoke Alarm alone is not a suitable substitute for complete fire detection systems in places housing many people—like apartment buildings, condominiums, hotels, motels, dormitories, hospitals, health care facilities, additional protection in these facilities.

LIMITED WARRANTY may not provide sufficient warning to all residents or meet local fire protection

This is your exclusive warranty. This warranty is valid for the original retail purchaser from the date of initial retail purchase and is not transferable. Keep the original sales receipt.

Proof of purchase is required to obtain warranty performance. BRK dealers, service centers, or retail stores selling BRK products do not have the right to alter, modify or any way change the terms and conditions of this warranty.

nursing homes, day care facilities, or group homes of any kind. It is not a suitable substitute for complete fire detection systems in warehouses, industrial facilities, commercial buildings, and special-purpose non-residential buildings which require special fire detection and alarm systems. Depending on the building codes in your area, this Smoke Alarm may be used to provide




precious time to leave the house and correct the problem. This is only possible


Gas Detection at Typical Temperature and Humidity Ranges:

Audible Alarm:

Signaling Code ® and NFPA 72 ®

®

85 dB minimum at 10 feet (3 meters).


The CO Alarm alarm resistance to Methane (500 ppm), Butane (300 ppm), Heptane (500 ppm),

Ethyl Acetate (200 ppm), Isopropyl Alcohol (200 ppm) and Carbon Dioxide (5000 the National Fire Protection Association, on the referenced subject which is are registered trademarks of the National




Continued...

HUD MAP Program

Certain HUD battery powered Smoke Alarm applications, especially those that requirement. Substitute First Alert SA340B.

Date Purchased: __________________Where Purchased: _____________________


5 not yet available for the hearing impaired).

GENERAL LIMITATIONS OF SMOKE/CO ALARMS the Smoke Alarms must be AC powered and interconnected. See “Agency

Continued...





adequate early warning. Recommended minimum protection is one alarm device in every sleeping area, every bedroom, and on every level of your home. Some experts

First Alert is a registered trademark of the First Alert Trust.

interconnected AC powered Smoke Alarms. For details, see “About Smoke Alarms” for details.







Though this





It will only sense smoke or CO at the sensor. Smoke or CO may be present in other areas. Doors or other obstructions may affect the rate at which

CO or smoke reaches the sensors. If bedroom doors are usually closed at night, we recommend you install an alarm device (Combination CO and Smoke Alarm, or separate CO Alarms and Smoke Alarms) in each bedroom and in the hallway between them.

This Smoke/CO Alarm may not sense smoke or CO on another level of the home. Example: This alarm device, installed on the second floor, may not sense smoke or CO in the basement. For this reason, one alarm device may not give






Replace alarm 7 years after installation. Please write the date in the space provided: _____________/____________Month/Year

The alarm will also provide an audible End-of-Life Signal approximately

7 years after installation to remind you to replace the unit.

The End-of-Life Signal can be silenced for up to 2 days. Do not unplug the alarm or remove the batteries until you get replacement.

Printed in Mexico M08-0117-011 Q 06/12

7

If the Alarm...





Problem...




You should...





The light flashes GREEN and the horn sounds

5 “chirps” every minute.

END OF LIFE SIGNAL.

Alarm needs to be replaced.



Silence it.

CO Alarm sounds frequently even though no high levels of CO are revealed in an investigation.


The CO Alarm may be improperly located. Refer to

“Where to Install This Alarm” for details.






Smoke Alarm ONLY:


Unwanted alarm may be caused by non-emergency source like cooking smoke.





If you have questions that cannot be answered by reading this manual, call Consumer Affairs at 1-800-323-9005, M-F 7:30 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. (CST)


BRK Brands, Inc., ("BRK") the maker of First Alert ® brand products warrants that for a period of seven years from the date of purchase, this product will be free from defects in material and workmanship. BRK, at its option, will repair or replace this product or any component of the product found to be defective during the warranty period. Replacement will be made with a new or remanufactured product or component. If the product is no longer available, replacement may be made with a similar product of equal or greater value.



This warranty does not cover normal wear of parts or damage resulting from any of the following: negligent use or misuse of the product, use on improper voltage or current, use contrary to the operating instructions, disassembly, repair or alteration by anyone other than BRK or an authorized service center. Further, the warranty does not cover Acts of God, such as fire, flood, hurricanes and tornadoes or any batteries that are included with this unit.

BRK shall not be liable for any incidental or consequential damages caused by the breach of any express or implied warranty. Except to the extent prohibited by applicable law, any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose is limited in duration to the duration of the above warranty. Some states, provinces or jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages or limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitations or exclusion may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights that vary from state to state or province to province.

How to Obtain Warranty Service

Service: If service is required, do not return the product to your retailer. In order to obtain warranty service, contact the Consumer Affairs Division at 1-800-323-9005,

7:30 AM - 5:00 PM Central Standard Time, Monday through Friday. To assist us in serving you, please have the model number and date of purchase available when calling.

For Warranty Service return to: BRK Brands, Inc., 25 Spur Drive, El Paso, TX 79906

Battery: BRK Brands, Inc. make no warranty, express or implied, written or oral, including that of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose with respect to battery.

For your records, please record:


Date Installed: ____________/____________Month/Year


6






7

SMOKE DETECTOR

Features:

• Separate sensors to detect smoke

•

• work independently

Powered by two “AA” batteries

•



Alarm’s operation. If you are installing this Alarm for use by others, you must leave this manual—or a copy

UL STD 217

AND

AND

UL STD 2034





Ionization technology is generally more sensitive than photoelectric technology at detecting small particles, which tend to be produced in greater amounts by flaming fires, which consume combustible materials rapidly and spread quickly. Sources of these fires may include

Photoelectric technology is generally more sensitive than ionization technology at detecting large particles, which tend to be produced in greater amounts by smoldering fires, which may smolder for hours before bursting into flame. Sources of these fires may include cigarettes




Keep alarms clean, and test them weekly. Replace alarms immediately if they are not working properly. Smoke Alarms that do not work cannot alert you to a fire. Keep at least one working fire extinguisher on every floor, and an additional one in the kitchen. Have fire escape ladders or other reliable




The Smoke Alarm will only indicate the presence of smoke that reaches the sensor. The Smoke Alarm is not designed to sense


Removing the batteries for any reason, or failing to replace the

• NEVER ignore any alarm. See “If Your Smoke/CO Alarm Sounds” for more information on how to respond to an alarm. Failure to




• Test this Smoke/CO Alarm once a week. If the Alarm ever fails to test correctly, have it replaced immediately! If the Alarm is not



FCC Compliance

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

However, there is no guarantee that the interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equip-

• one or more of the following measures:

•


•


•


Warning: Changes or modifications to the product, not expressly approved by First Alert / BRK Brands, Inc., could void the user’s authority to operate




KEY:

KEY:

SMOKE ALARMS

SMOKE ALARMS



SILENCE FEATURE

CO ALARMS

CO ALARMS



SMOKE/CO ALARMS

�




NFPA recommendations (NFPA 72 for Smoke Alarms and NFPA 720 for refer to national and local codes refer to national and local codes before beginning any installation.


• �

• When installing on the wall, the top edge of Smoke Alarms should be placed between 4 inches (102 mm) and 12 inches (305 mm) from the

• wall/ceiling line.

•







•


•



•

• Within 5 feet (1.5 meters) of any cooking appliance. In air streams near kitchens. Air currents can draw cooking smoke into the smoke sensor

• and cause unwanted alarms.

•

•

• utility room, or other source of high humidity.

In direct sunlight.

•



•


•



•



starting.


You must install this device on the ceiling or wall as outlined below. Read “Where To Install This Alarm” before



4 CO Alarm LED



around junction boxes can prevent smoke from reaching the sensing chamber and prevent the unit from alarming. Only AC powered





3. Put the unit where it won’t get covered with dust when you drill the









The GREEN Light flashes about every 60 seconds when the unit is





(if allowed by building codes), the top edge of Smoke/CO from the wall/ceiling line, below typical “dead air” spaces.

within 3 feet (0.9 meters) of the peak of the ceiling, measured horizontally.

Additional Smoke/CO Alarms may be required depending on the length, angle,






•

•


•

•

Test it at least once a week.

Clean the Smoke/CO Alarm at least once a month; gently vacuum the brush attachment. A can of clean compressed air (sold at computer or office supply stores) may also be used. Follow manufacturer instructions for use. Test the Smoke/CO Alarm. Never use water, cleaners or solvents since they may damage the unit.

•

• If the Smoke/CO Alarm becomes contaminated by excessive dirt, dust and/or grime, and cannot be cleaned to avoid unwanted alarms, replace





Both locking features use locking pins, which are molded into the mounting bracket. Depending on which locking features you

251

1.


Alarm.

1.

Install the batteries before attaching the Alarm to the bracket. Insert the two (2) AA batteries the terminals on the end of the battery with the terminals on the unit. Match “+” to “+” and “-”




3. Using needle-nose pliers or a utility knife, detach one locking pin from the mounting



2. Insert a flathead screwdriver under the head of the locking pin, and gently pry it out of the battery compartment lock. (If you plan to relock the battery compartment, save the


the battery door and reinsert locking pin in lock.


When replacing the batteries, always test the Smoke/CO Alarm before relocking the






15 feet (4.6 meters) away from the furnace or fuel burning heat source where possible. In smaller homes or in manufactured homes where this distance cannot be maintained, install the Alarm as far away as possible from the furnace or other fuel burning source. Installing the Alarm closer than 15 feet (4.6 meters)

•

•



•

• In the hall near every sleeping area. If your home has multiple sleeping areas, install a unit in each. If a hall is more than 40 feet (12 meters) long,

•

•

• install a unit at each end.

At the top of first-to-second floor stairs.

•


1

1

1. Using needle-nose pliers or a utility knife, detach one locking pin from the mounting

2. Insert the locking pin through the hole on the back of the Smoke/CO Alarm as

3. When you attach the Smoke/CO Alarm to the mounting bracket, the locking pin’s





2

2

1. Insert a flathead screwdriver into the rectangular cut-out on the mounting



You can test this Smoke/CO Alarm:


Press and hold the Test/Silence button


• The Horn will sound 3 beeps, pause, 3 beeps. The flashes Red and the CO LED will be Off.

Power/Smoke LED

• Next the

LED

Horn will sound 4 beeps, pause, 4 beeps. The will be Off and the CO LED flashes Red.

Power/Smoke


3

3




Choosing a replacement battery: batteries are acceptable as replacements: Duracell MN1500. are available at many local retail stores.

These batteries

•



•


•







Match the terminals on the ends of the


AB

AB

Type of Alarm



CO LED: Flashes Red



Power/Smoke LED

Horn:

: Flashes Red

3 beeps, pause, 3 beeps, pause

CO LED: Off


If you hear the CO alarm horn and the CO red light is flashing, move


(CO) which can kill you. In other words, when your CO Alarm sounds,



Do a head count to check that all persons are accounted for. Do not reenter the premises, or move away from the open door or window until the emergency services responder has arrived, the premises have been aired

4. After following steps 1-3, if your CO Alarm reactivates within a 24-hour period, repeat steps 1-3 and call a qualified appliance technician to investigate for sources of CO from fuel-burning equipment and appliances, and inspect for proper operation of this equipment. If problems are identified during this inspection have the equipment serviced immediately. Note any combustion equipment not inspected by the technician, and consult the manufacturers’ instructions, or contact the manufacturers directly, for more information about CO safety and this equipment. Make sure that motor vehicles are not, and have not, been operating in an attached garage or adjacent to the residence. Write down the number of a qualified appliance

NOTE:

__________________________________________________________________

A qualified appliance technician is defined as “a person, firm, corporation, or company that either in person or through a representative, is engaged in and responsible for the installation, testing, servicing, or replac ement of heating, ventilation, air conditioning (HVAC) equipment, combustion appliances and equipment, and/or gas fireplaces or other decorative combustion

•


•









If a door is cool, open it slowly. Don’t open a hot door. Keep doors














The Smoke Alarm will remain silent for up to 15 minutes, then return to normal



After 4 minutes, if CO levels remain potentially dangerous the horn will



To deactivate this feature: Press the Test/Silence button again. The unit will go into Test Mode and the low battery warning will resume (LED flashes and

This silence feature can temporarily quiet the End of Life warning “chirp” for up to 2 days. You can silence the End of Life warning “chirp” by pressing the silence feature has been activated.


4

4

CO is an invisible, odorless, tasteless gas produced when fossil fuels do not burn completely, or are exposed to heat (usually fire). Electrical appliances



CO is a real danger now that homes are more energy efficient. “Air-tight” homes with added insulation, sealed windows, and other weatherproofing


Mild Exposure:

Extreme Exposure:

Slight headache, nausea, vomiting, fatigue (“flu-like” symptoms).

Convulsions, unconsciousness, heart and lung failure.


Because you need to be warned of a potential CO problem while you can still react in time. In many reported cases of CO exposure, victims may be aware that they are not feeling well, but become disoriented and can no longer react well enough to exit the building or get help. Also, young children and pets may be the first affected. The average healthy adult might not feel any symptoms when the CO Alarm sounds. However, people with cardiac or respiratory problems, infants, unborn babies, pregnant mothers, or elderly people can be more quickly and severely affected by CO. If you experience

Carbon monoxide is an odorless, invisible gas, which often makes it difficult to locate the source of CO after an alarm. These are a few of the factors that




Damaged or insufficient venting: corroded or disconnected water heater vent pipe, leaking chimney pipe or flue, or cracked heat exchanger, blocked or



1. Excessive spillage or reverse venting of fuel appliances caused by outdoor





• Obstructions in or unconventional vent pipe designs which can amplify



•



•


•

• In the hall near every sleeping area. If your home has multiple sleeping areas, install a unit in each. If a hall is more than 40 feet long (12 meters),

• install a unit at each end.



Early warning detection is best achieved by the installation of fire detection equipment in all rooms and areas of the household as follows: A Smoke Alarm installed in each separate sleeping area (in the vicinity, but outside bedrooms), and Heat or Smoke Alarms in the living rooms, dining rooms, bedrooms,



smoke, all units alarm. They do not operate if electricity fails.

AC with battery (DC) back-up: will operate if electricity fails, provided the installed by a qualified electrician.


“quasi sine wave” inverters will damage the Alarm . If you are not sure about



Smoke alarms are not to be used with detector guards unless the





AGENCY PLACEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS

Standards:

Alarms 217.

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Single and Multiple Station Smoke


“For your information, the National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code , NFPA 72,


29.5.1.1* Where required by other governing laws, codes, or standards for a

(2)*Outside of each separate dwelling unit sleeping area, within 21 ft (6.4 m) of any door to a sleeping room, with the distance measured along a path



(small facility)

®

(Reprinted with permission from NFPA 72 ® , National Fire Alarm and Signaling


02269. This reprinted material is not the complete and official position of the National Fire Protection Association, on the referenced subject which is

Signaling Code and NFPA 72 ® are registered trademarks of the National


This Smoke Alarm alone is not a suitable substitute for complete fire detection systems in places housing many people—like apartment buildings, condominiums, hotels, motels, dormitories, hospitals, health care facilities, nursing homes, day care facilities, or group homes of any kind. It is not a industrial facilities, commercial buildings, and special-purpose non-residential buildings which require special fire detection and alarm systems. Depending additional protection in these facilities.



(Life Safety Code), local building codes, or consult your Fire Department for

HUD MAP Program

Certain HUD battery powered Smoke Alarm applications, especially those that fall under HUD 223(f) MAP (Multi-family Accelerated Processing), may require a 10 Year sealed tamper resistant battery. This alarm does not meet




Practice the escape plan at least twice a year, making sure that everyone is involved – from kids to grandparents. Allow children to master fire escape planning and practice before holding to the sound of the Smoke/CO Alarm, or if there are infants or family members with mobility limitations, make sure that someone is assigned to assist them in fire drill and in the event of an emergency. It is recommended that you hold a fire drill while family members are sleeping in order to determine their response to the sound of the Smoke/CO Alarm while sleeping and to determine whether they may need assistance in the event of an emergency.





CO or smoke reaches the sensors. If bedroom doors are usually closed at night, we recommend you install an alarm device (Combination CO and Smoke Alarm, or separate CO Alarms and Smoke Alarms) in each bedroom and in the hallway

This Smoke/CO Alarm may not sense smoke or CO on another level of the home. Example: This alarm device, installed on the second floor, may not sense adequate early warning. Recommended minimum protection is one alarm device in every sleeping area, every bedroom, and on every level of your home. Some experts recommend battery powered Smoke and CO Alarms be used in conjunction with interconnected AC powered Smoke Alarms. For details, see “About Smoke Alarms” for details.


The alarm horn loudness meets or exceeds current UL standards of 85 dB at 10 feet (3 meters). However, if the Smoke/CO who has recently used drugs or has been drinking alcoholic beverages. This is especially true if the door is closed or only partly open. Even persons who are awake may not hear the alarm horn if the sound is blocked by distance or closed doors.

Noise from traffic, stereo, radio, television, air conditioner, or other appliances may not intended for people who are hearing impaired.

The Alarm may not have time to alarm before the fire itself causes damage, injury, or death, since smoke from some fires may not reach the unit immediately. Examples of this include persons smoking in bed, children playing with



Though this




Though this






sensors. It may not give early warning of the source of smoke or CO is in a remote part of the home, away from the alarm device.




Since these conditions can come and go, they are also hard to recreate during


CO POISONING?

A CO Alarm is an excellent means of protection. It monitors the air and sounds a loud alarm before Carbon Monoxide levels become threatening for average,



• Clean chimneys and flues yearly. Keep them free of debris, leaves, and nests for proper air flow. Also, have a professional check for rust and corrosion, cracks, or separations. These conditions can prevent proper air movement and cause backdrafting. Never “cap” or cover a chimney




• Check for exhaust backflow from CO sources. Check the draft hood on an operating furnace for a backdraft. Look for cracks on furnace heat


and doors can significantly decrease CO levels.

In addition, familiarize yourself with all enclosed materials. Read this


SMOKE/CO ALARMS



Alarms to sound when exposed to levels of CO and exposure times as described below. They are measured in parts per million (ppm) of CO over




10 and 50 MINUTES.


60 and 240 MINUTES.

*


Humidity (RH).




•

•

•

•

An exposure to 100 ppm of CO for 20 minutes may not affect average, healthy adults, but after 4 hours the same level may cause headaches.

An exposure to 400 ppm of CO may cause headaches in average, healthy adults after 35 minutes, but can cause death after 2 hours.

Standards: Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Single and Multiple Station carbon




Ethyl Acetate (200 ppm), Isopropyl Alcohol (200 ppm) and Carbon Dioxide (5000






5

5

If the Alarm...













Silence it.













Alarm may be too close to a kitchen, cooking

*


®

BRK Brands, Inc., ("BRK") the maker of First Alert ®

LIMITED WARRANTY brand products warrants that for a period of seven years from the date of purchase, this product will be free from defects in material and workmanship. BRK, at its option, will repair or replace this product or any component of the product found to be defective during the warranty period. Replacement will be made with a new or remanufactured product or component. If the product is no longer available, replacement may be made with a similar product of equal or greater value.



This warranty does not cover normal wear of parts or damage resulting from any of the following: negligent use or misuse of the product, use on improper voltage or current, use contrary to the operating instructions, disassembly, repair or alteration by anyone other than BRK or an authorized service center. Further, the warranty does not cover Acts of God,







First Alert ®

6






7

USER’S MANUAL


Features:








CONFORMS TO

UL STD 217

AND

UL STD 2034

Model SCO5




All First Alert

®

Smoke Alarms conform to regulatory requirements, including UL217 and are designed to detect particles of combustion.





INTRODUCTION












batteries at the end of their service life, removes your protection.








FCC Compliance










INSTALLATION















(4.4˚ C and 37.8˚ C).

1




KEY:

SMOKE ALARMS


SILENCE FEATURE

CO ALARMS


SMOKE/CO ALARMS




�
















4 CO Alarm LED





















































Continued...

SMOKE DETECTOR








TO LOCK THE BATTERY COMPARTMENT TO UNLOCK THE BATTERY COMPARTMENT


Alarm.

1.











Smoke/CO Alarm.



TO LOCK THE MOUNTING BRACKET TO UNLOCK THE MOUNTING BRACKET







WEEKLY TESTING













Smoke/CO Alarm.

2 3




















AB



Type of Alarm



CO LED: Flashes Red



Smoke Power/Smoke LED : Flashes Red


CO LED: Off









__________________________________________________________________




__________________________________________________________________











































4


WHAT IS CO?






































CO POISONING?














SMOKE/CO ALARMS







4 and 15 MINUTES.


10 and 50 MINUTES.


60 and 240 MINUTES.


Humidity (RH).

















Continued...

5



























Alarms 217.











(small facility)






Continued...







HUD MAP Program
















Though this













If the Alarm...





Problem...




You should...









Silence it.





















BRK Brands, Inc., ("BRK") the maker of First Alert

® brand products warrants that for a period of seven years from the date of purchase, this product will be free from defects in material and workmanship. BRK, at its option, will repair or replace this product or any component of the product found to be defective during the warranty period. Replacement will be made with a new or remanufactured product or component. If the product is no longer available, replacement may be made with a similar product of equal or greater value.













First Alert

® is a registered trademark of the First Alert Trust.

6






7

252

USER’S MANUAL


Features:








CONFORMS TO

UL STD 217

AND

UL STD 2034

Model SCO5









INTRODUCTION




















FCC Compliance










INSTALLATION















(4.4˚ C and 37.8˚ C).

1

USER’S MANUAL





KEY:

SMOKE ALARMS




Features:





SILENCE FEATURE

CO ALARMS


SMOKE/CO ALARMS





4 CO Alarm LED





CONFORMS TO

UL STD 217

AND

UL STD 2034

Model SCO5





�



















INTRODUCTION































































Continued...

• home.

correct a problem. See "Using the Silence Features" for details.



SMOKE ALARMS

• This product is intended for use in ordinary indoor locations of


SILENCE FEATURE

� family living units. It is not designed to measure CO levels in compliance with Occupational Safety and Health Administration


FCC Compliance

Carbon Monoxide Alarms). Always refer to national and local codes


Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in

• When installing on the wall, the top edge of Smoke Alarms should be placed between 4 inches (102 mm) and 12 inches (305 mm) from the

• wall/ceiling line.

When installing on the ceiling, place the alarm as close to the center as possible.

particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to







the equipment.


• Where combustion particles are produced. Combustion particles form

INSTALLATION

WHERE TO INSTALL THIS ALARM possible – in modular, mobile, or smaller homes, for example – it is recommended the Smoke Alarm be placed as far from these fuel-burning sources as possible. The placement recommendations are intended to keep these Alarms at a reasonable distance from a fuel-burning source,

For CO Alarms, the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) recommends that a CO Alarm should be centrally located outside of each separate sleeping area in the immediate vicinity of the bedrooms. For added protection, install kitchens. Air currents can draw cooking smoke into the smoke sensor

NOTE: and cause unwanted alarms.

•


will not harm the Alarm, but may increase the frequency of unwanted alarms.

prevent CO or smoke from reaching the sensors.


• unfinished attics, uninsulated or poorly insulated ceilings, porches, and garages.



•





1











Alarm.

1.







ceiling or wall as outlined below. Read “Where To Install This Alarm” before starting.

• Relocate the unit if it sounds frequent unwanted alarms. See “Where This batteries are acceptable as replacements: Duracell MN1500. These batteries




Your Smoke/CO Alarm requires two standard AA batteries. The following







4 CO Alarm LED



Alarm.

pencil, drill with 3/16” or 5mm drill bit, flathead screwdriver, hammer.

1.



TO UNLOCK THE BATTERY COMPARTMENT your area. DO NOT DISPOSE OF BATTERIES IN FIRE. BATTERIES mounting bracket. If the unit is locked to the bracket, see the section “To Unlock the Mounting Bracket.” swallowed, immediately contact your poison control center, your physician, or the National Battery Ingestion hotline at 202-625-3333 as serious injury may occur.

terminals on the unit. Match “+” to “+” and “-” to “-.” If the batteries are not fully inserted, the around junction boxes can prevent smoke from reaching the sens-



Alarm to the mounting bracket, please read the “Optional Locking of the battery compartment lock. (If you plan to relock the battery compartment, save the ment in which it is installed. All the batteries specified above are acceptable replacement batteries for this unit. Regardless of the manufacturer’s suggested battery life, you MUST replace the battery immediately once the unit starts 3. To relock the battery compartment, close


lock.





the battery door latch on the back of the




AB


TO LOCK THE MOUNTING BRACKET they are flush with the ceiling or wall.





AA batteries (included) into the shown in the diagram.

the terminals on the end of the battery with the terminals on the mounting bracket, the locking pin’s head will fit into a notch on the bracket.

cannot receive battery power.

NOTE:

WEEKLY TESTING receiving battery power.

• NEVER use an open flame of any kind to test this unit. You might




9. Attach the Smoke/CO Alarm to the mounting bracket. Line up the guides on



snaps into place.



2. Pry the Smoke/CO Alarm away from the

Smoke


CO LED: Flashes Red



Power/Smoke LED turning the Smoke/CO Alarm counterclockwise

: Flashes Red


CO LED: Off




Power/Smoke LED


Power/Smoke


number of your local emergency service here:


Smoke/CO Alarm.

to adjust the alignment.

2








Continued...


Do a head count to check that all persons are accounted for. Do not reenter the premises, or move away from the open door or window until the

3 out, and your CO Alarm remains in its normal condition.


__________________________________________________________________

NOTE: A qualified appliance tech nician is defined as “a person, firm, corporation, or company that either in person or through a representative, is engaged in and responsible for the installation, testing, servicing, or replacement of heating, ventilation, air conditioning (HVAC) equipment, combustion appliances and equipment, and/or gas fireplaces or other decorative combustion equipment.”

































Smoke/CO Alarm.

























WEEKLY TESTING






Smoke/CO Alarm.

2








3









4



Type of Alarm


Smoke


CO LED: Flashes Red





CO LED: Off









__________________________________________________________________




__________________________________________________________________

NOTE: A qualified appliance tech nician is defined as “a person, firm, corporation, or company that either in person or through a representative, is engaged in and responsible for the installation, testing, servicing, or replacement of heating, ventilation, air conditioning (HVAC) equipment, combustion appliances and equipment, and/or gas fireplaces or other decorative combustion equipment.”

SMOKE DETECTOR


RESPONDING TO AN ALARM burn completely, or are exposed to heat (usually fire). Electrical appliances

•


These fuels include: attention. NEVER ignore any alarm. Ignoring the alarm may result in injury or death.

Wood, coal, charcoal, oil, natural gas, gasoline, kerosene, and propane.

tained, are improperly ventilated, or malfunction, CO levels can rise quickly.

CO is a real danger now that homes are more energy efficient. “Air-tight” homes with added insulation, sealed windows, and other weatherproofing

• and removes your protection. Instead open a window or fan the



with ALL household members.


Medium Exposure:

Extreme Exposure:

Throbbing headache, drowsiness, confusion, fast heart rate.

Convulsions, unconsciousness, heart and lung failure.






react in time. In many reported cases of CO exposure, victims may be aware




respiratory problems, infants, unborn babies, pregnant mothers, or elderly people can be more quickly and severely affected by CO. If you experience










Fuel-burning appliances like:

When the Smoke Alarm is Silenced When the CO Alarm is Silenced gas clothes dryer.





After 4 minutes, if CO levels remain

Improper use of appliance/device:

SILENCING THE LOW BATTERY WARNING screened porch).

Transient CO Problems: “transient” or on-again-off-again CO problems can

Once the low battery warning “chirp” silence feature is activated, the unit







Test/Silence button. The horn will chirp, acknowledging that the End of Life the above situations.




















AB


WHAT IS CO?






































CO POISONING?





or oil companies and HVAC companies offer appliance inspections for a nominal fee.

all rooms, halls, storage areas, finished attics, and basements, where temperaappliances for excessive rust and scaling. Also check the flame on the burner and pilot lights. The flame should be blue. A yellow flame



•


• Check for exhaust backflow from CO sources. Check the draft hood on an operating furnace for a backdraft. Look for cracks on furnace heat install a unit at each end.


escaping into your home, open a window or a door. Opening windows

Specific requirements for Smoke Alarm installation vary from state to state and from region to region. Check with your local Fire Department for current


It is recommended AC or AC/DC units be interconnected for added protection.


SMOKE/CO ALARMS







4 and 15 MINUTES.


10 and 50 MINUTES.


60 and 240 MINUTES.


Humidity (RH).


Alarms 217.

• “For your information, the reads as follows:”

National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code , NFPA 72, healthy adults, but after 4 hours the same level may cause headaches.

• 29.5.1* Required Detection.

adults after 35 minutes, but can cause death after 2 hours.


According to Underwriters Laboratories Inc. UL2034, Section 1-1.2: “Carbon monoxide alarms covered by these requirements are intended to respond to the



























Alarms 217.











(small facility)






Continued...







HUD MAP Program
















Though this








Early warning detection is best achieved by the installation of fire detection equipment in all rooms and areas of the household as follows: A Smoke Alarm installed in each separate sleeping area (in the vicinity, but outside bedrooms), This Smoke/CO Alarm may not sense smoke or CO on another level of the and Heat or Smoke Alarms in the living rooms, dining rooms, bedrooms, kitchens, hallways, finished attics, furnace rooms, closets, utility and storage rooms, basements, and attached garages.








If the Alarm...





Problem...

are easy to install, and do not require professional installation.






with true or pure sine wave inverters. Operating this Alarm with most battery-



Silence it.

will damage the Alarm




The CO Alarm may be improperly located. Refer to unless the combination has been evaluated and found suitable for that purpose.

All these Smoke Alarms are designed to provide early warning of fires if






You should...

















CO POISONING?






253









SMOKE/CO ALARMS







4 and 15 MINUTES.


10 and 50 MINUTES.


60 and 240 MINUTES.


Humidity (RH).

















Continued...

5 below those that could cause a loss of ability to react to the dangers of Carbon

(4) On every level of a residential board and care occupancy (small facility), designed to alarm before CO levels become life threatening. This allows you precious time to leave the house and correct the problem. This is only possible




®

The CO Alarm alarm resistance to Methane (500 ppm), Butane (300 ppm), Heptane (500 ppm),

Ethyl Acetate (200 ppm), Isopropyl Alcohol (200 ppm) and Carbon Dioxide (5000


® ®




Continued...



requirements for Carbon Monoxide Alarms must be met. The Smoke Alarm portion


Continued...













6

This Smoke Alarm is suitable for use in apartments, condominiums, townhouses, hospitals, day care facilities, health care facilities, boarding houses, group homes and dormitories provided a primary fire detection system already exists to meet fire detection requirements in common areas ordinances/regulations.

This Smoke Alarm alone is not a suitable substitute for complete fire change the terms and conditions of this warranty.



detection systems in places housing many people—like apartment buildings, condominiums, hotels, motels, dormitories, hospitals, health care facilities, nursing homes, day care facilities, or group homes of any kind. It is not a suitable substitute for complete fire detection systems in warehouses, industrial facilities, commercial buildings, and special-purpose non-residential buildings which require special fire detection and alarm systems. Depending on the building codes in your area, this Smoke Alarm may be used to provide additional protection in these facilities.




HUD MAP Program

Certain HUD battery powered Smoke Alarm applications, especially those that fall under HUD 223(f) MAP (Multi-family Accelerated Processing), may require a 10 Year sealed tamper resistant battery. This alarm does not meet





adequate early warning. Recommended minimum protection is one alarm device in

First Alert



6







Though this










7

If the Alarm...





Problem...




You should...









Silence it.




































7

USER’S MANUAL


Features:








CONFORMS TO

UL STD 217

AND

UL STD 2034

Model SCO5









INTRODUCTION




















FCC Compliance










INSTALLATION















(4.4˚ C and 37.8˚ C).

1

USER’S MANUAL





KEY:

SMOKE ALARMS




Features:





SILENCE FEATURE

CO ALARMS


SMOKE/CO ALARMS





4 CO Alarm LED





CONFORMS TO

UL STD 217

AND

UL STD 2034

Model SCO5





�



















INTRODUCTION































































Continued...



• Test this Smoke/CO Alarm once a week. If the Alarm ever fails to test correctly, have it replaced immediately! If the Alarm is not

• This product is intended for use in ordinary indoor locations of

FCC Compliance


Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are

� working properly, it cannot alert you to a problem.

and your medical condition contact your physician.

SMOKE ALARMS family living units. It is not designed to measure CO levels in compliance with Occupational Safety and Health Administration

(OSHA) commercial or industrial standards. Individuals with medical conditions that may make them more sensitive to carbon monoxide may consider using warning devices which provide audible and visual signals for carbon monoxide concentrations under 30 ppm. For additional information on carbon monoxide

Carbon Monoxide Alarms). Always refer to national and local codes

• When installing on the wall, the top edge of Smoke Alarms should be

However, there is no guarantee that the interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to

• In either case, install at least 4 inches (102 mm) from where the wall and one or more of the following measures:





mobile homes (especially those built before 1978) have little or no insulation.

Warning: Changes or modifications to the product, not expressly approved of insulation, it is important to install units on inside walls only.

the equipment.


Do NOT locate this Smoke/CO Alarm: including interference that may cause undesired operation.

• Where combustion particles are produced. Combustion particles form

INSTALLATION





keep these Alarms at a reasonable distance from a fuel-burning source,

For CO Alarms, the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) recommends that a CO Alarm should be centrally located outside of each separate sleeping area in the immediate vicinity of the bedrooms. For added protection, install additional CO Alarms in each separate bedroom, and on every level of your • Within 5 feet (1.5 meters) of any cooking appliance. In air streams near home.

• kitchens. Air currents can draw cooking smoke into the smoke sensor and cause unwanted alarms.

In extremely humid areas. This Alarm should be at least 10 feet (3 meters) from a shower, sauna, humidifier, vaporizer, dishwasher, laundry room,

•

•

In direct sunlight.

In turbulent air, like near ceiling fans or open windows. Blowing air may

•

•



•

• In insect infested areas. Insects can clog the openings to the sensing






On ceilings,

1 possible. If this is not possible, install the Smoke/CO Alarm at least 4 inches










Alarm.

1.




HOW TO INSTALL THIS ALARM starting.

OPTIONAL LOCKING FEATURES single-family households where unauthorized battery or Alarm removal is not a concern.

ceiling or wall as outlined below. Read “Where To Install This Alarm” before



Your Smoke/CO Alarm requires two standard AA batteries. The following batteries are acceptable as replacements: Duracell MN1500. These batteries separate it from the unit.




4 CO Alarm LED




Alarm.

1.

Install the batteries flathead screwdriver, hammer.

before attaching the Alarm to the bracket. Insert the two (2) AA batteries

(included) into the battery compartment. Match anything else to this unit may prevent it from working properly.

to “-.” If the batteries are not fully inserted, the around junction boxes can prevent smoke from reaching the sensing chamber and prevent the unit from alarming. Only AC powered



1. Hold base firmly and twist the mounting bracket counterclockwise (left) to


DO NOT use rechargeable batteries. Clean the battery contacts and also those of the device prior to battery installation. Install batteries


1. Remove the Smoke/CO Alarm from the mounting bracket. If the unit is locked to the bracket, see the section “To Unlock the Mounting Bracket.” swallowed, immediately contact your poison control center, your

2. Insert a flathead screwdriver under the head of the locking pin, and gently pry it out of the battery compartment lock. (If you plan to relock the battery compartment, save the ment in which it is installed. All the batteries specified above are acceptable replacement batteries for this unit. Regardless of the manufacturer’s suggested







the battery door latch on the back of the



AB


TO LOCK THE MOUNTING BRACKET they are flush with the ceiling or wall.


detach one locking pin from the mounting slots using the two screws provided.

8. Before attaching the Alarm to


the terminals on the end of the

3. When you attach the Smoke/CO Alarm to the mounting bracket, the locking pin’s




2. Pry the Smoke/CO Alarm away from the

Smoke

CO LED: Flashes Red



Power/Smoke LED turning the Smoke/CO Alarm counterclockwise


CO LED: Off

: Flashes Red

Horn: 3 beeps, pause, 3 beeps, pause not fully inserted, the unit cannot receive battery power.

NOTE: up, turn the base clockwise (right) until it snaps into place.


WEEKLY TESTING receiving battery power.


9. Attach the Smoke/CO Alarm to the mounting bracket. Line up the guides on






• The will sound 3 beeps, pause, 3 beeps. The


Power/Smoke LED



Power/Smoke


Smoke/CO Alarm.

to adjust the alignment.


2







Continued...




__________________________________________________________________


































Smoke/CO Alarm.

























WEEKLY TESTING






Smoke/CO Alarm.

2








3









4




















AB



Type of Alarm


Smoke


CO LED: Flashes Red





CO LED: Off









__________________________________________________________________




__________________________________________________________________


SMOKE DETECTOR


CO is an invisible, odorless, tasteless gas produced when fossil fuels do not burn completely, or are exposed to heat (usually fire). Electrical appliances

•

•


These fuels include: injury or death.

Wood, coal, charcoal, oil, natural gas, gasoline, attention. NEVER ignore any alarm. Ignoring the alarm may result in

CO is a real danger now that homes are more energy efficient. “Air-tight” homes with added insulation, sealed windows, and other weatherproofing and removes your protection. Instead open a window or fan the





• Get out of the house as quickly as possible. Don’t stop to get



If a door is cool, open it slowly. Don’t open a hot door. Keep doors

This CO Alarm measures exposure to CO over time. It alarms if CO levels are



Because you need to be warned of a potential CO problem while you can still react in time. In many reported cases of CO exposure, victims may be aware symptoms when the CO Alarm sounds. However, people with cardiac or respiratory problems, infants, unborn babies, pregnant mothers, or elderly











Fuel-burning appliances like: fireplace, gas kitchen range or cooktop, gas clothes dryer.





After 4 minutes, if CO levels remain

Improper use of appliance/device:



be caused by outdoor conditions and other special circumstances.

The following conditions can result in transient CO situations: conditions such as:

Replace the batteries as soon as possible; this unit will not operate without battery power!



SILENCING THE END OF LIFE SIGNAL water heaters.


4





CO POISONING?


254













SMOKE/CO ALARMS







4 and 15 MINUTES.


10 and 50 MINUTES.


60 and 240 MINUTES.


Humidity (RH).

















Continued...

5


WHAT IS CO?






































CO POISONING?





RECOMMENDED LOCATIONS FOR SMOKE ALARMS, Continued a nominal fee.

all rooms, halls, storage areas, finished attics, and basements, where tempera• Make regular visual inspections of all fuel-burning appliances. Check tures normally remain between 40˚ F (4.4˚ C) and 100˚ F (37.8˚ C). Make sure no door or other obstruction could keep smoke from reaching the Smoke Alarms.


•

•



• Check for exhaust backflow from CO sources. Check the draft hood on an operating furnace for a backdraft. Look for cracks on furnace heat install a unit at each end.


escaping into your home, open a window or a door. Opening windows and doors can significantly decrease CO levels.

In addition, familiarize yourself with all enclosed materials. Read this manual in its entirety, and make sure you understand what to do if your interconnected for added protection.


SMOKE/CO ALARMS







4 and 15 MINUTES.


10 and 50 MINUTES.


60 and 240 MINUTES.


Humidity (RH).


Alarms 217.


• 29.5.1* Required Detection.

Standards:

Where required by other governing laws, codes, or standards for a

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Single and Multiple Station carbon alarms shall be installed as follows:

(1)*In all sleeping rooms and guest rooms presence of carbon monoxide from sources such as, but not limited to, exhaust of travel and fireplaces. CO Alarms are intended to alarm at carbon monoxide levels below those that could cause a loss of ability to react to the dangers of Carbon

(4) On every level of a residential board and care occupancy (small facility), including basements and excluding crawl spaces and unfinished attics precious time to leave the house and correct the problem. This is only possible if Alarms are located, installed, and maintained as described in this manual.



®

The CO Alarm




® ®




Continued...



requirements for Carbon Monoxide Alarms must be met. The Smoke Alarm portion


Continued...









HUD MAP Program

Certain HUD battery powered Smoke Alarm applications, especially those

For your records, please record: require a 10 Year sealed tamper resistant battery. This alarm does not meet adequate early warning. Recommended minimum protection is one alarm device in

First Alert



6







Though this









If the Alarm...





Problem...




You should...









Silence it.














































Alarms 217.











(small facility)






Continued...







HUD MAP Program
















Though this








Early warning detection is best achieved by the installation of fire detection equipment in all rooms and areas of the household as follows: A Smoke Alarm installed in each separate sleeping area (in the vicinity, but outside bedrooms), This Smoke/CO Alarm may not sense smoke or CO on another level of the and Heat or Smoke Alarms in the living rooms, dining rooms, bedrooms, kitchens, hallways, finished attics, furnace rooms, closets, utility and storage rooms, basements, and attached garages.








If the Alarm...

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE are easy to install, and do not require professional installation.

AC powered Smoke Alarms:

Horn does three "chirps" every minute; batteries are fresh and correctly installed. AC and AC/DC units must be installed by a qualified electrician.

The light flashes GREEN and the horn sounds power systems:

Problem...

Can be interconnected so if one unit senses


properly, and needs to be replaced.


Device is not working


with true or pure sine wave inverters. Operating this Alarm with most batterypowered UPS (uninterruptible power supply) products or square wave or

“quasi sine wave” inverters will damage the Alarm






combination has been evaluated and found suitable for that purpose.

All these Smoke Alarms are designed to provide early warning of fires if located, installed and cared for as described in the user’s manual, and if





You should...













This Smoke Alarm is suitable for use in apartments, condominiums, townhouses, hospitals, day care facilities, health care facilities, boarding houses, group homes and dormitories provided a primary fire detection system already exists to meet fire detection requirements in common areas ordinances/regulations.

This Smoke Alarm alone is not a suitable substitute for complete fire change the terms and conditions of this warranty.



detection systems in places housing many people—like apartment buildings, condominiums, hotels, motels, dormitories, hospitals, health care facilities, nursing homes, day care facilities, or group homes of any kind. It is not a suitable substitute for complete fire detection systems in warehouses, industrial facilities, commercial buildings, and special-purpose non-residential buildings which require special fire detection and alarm systems. Depending on the building codes in your area, this Smoke Alarm may be used to provide additional protection in these facilities.








7
















6






7

USER’S MANUAL


Features:








CONFORMS TO

UL STD 217

AND

UL STD 2034

Model SCO5









INTRODUCTION




















FCC Compliance










INSTALLATION















(4.4˚ C and 37.8˚ C).

1




KEY:

SMOKE ALARMS


SILENCE FEATURE

CO ALARMS


SMOKE/CO ALARMS





�







































4 CO Alarm LED





























Continued...










Alarm.

1.











Smoke/CO Alarm.










WEEKLY TESTING













Smoke/CO Alarm.

2 3




















AB



Type of Alarm


Smoke


CO LED: Flashes Red





CO LED: Off









__________________________________________________________________




__________________________________________________________________











































4


WHAT IS CO?






































CO POISONING?














SMOKE/CO ALARMS







4 and 15 MINUTES.


10 and 50 MINUTES.


60 and 240 MINUTES.


Humidity (RH).

















Continued...

5

SMOKE DETECTOR



























Alarms 217.











(small facility)


®






Continued...







HUD MAP Program
















Though this













255

If the Alarm...





Problem...




You should...









Silence it.



































6






7

USER’S MANUAL


Features:








CONFORMS TO

UL STD 217

AND

UL STD 2034

Model SCO5









INTRODUCTION




















FCC Compliance










INSTALLATION















(4.4˚ C and 37.8˚ C).

1




KEY:

SMOKE ALARMS


SILENCE FEATURE

CO ALARMS


SMOKE/CO ALARMS





�







































4 CO Alarm LED





























Continued...










Alarm.

1.











Smoke/CO Alarm.










WEEKLY TESTING













Smoke/CO Alarm.

2 3




















AB



Type of Alarm


Smoke


CO LED: Flashes Red





CO LED: Off









__________________________________________________________________




__________________________________________________________________











































4


WHAT IS CO?






































CO POISONING?














SMOKE/CO ALARMS







4 and 15 MINUTES.


10 and 50 MINUTES.


60 and 240 MINUTES.


Humidity (RH).

















Continued...

5



























Alarms 217.











(small facility)






Continued...







HUD MAP Program









Battery operated units cannot work if the batteries are missing, disconnected or dead, if the wrong type of batteries are used, or if the batteries are not installed correctly. AC units cannot work if the AC

SMOKE DETECTOR concerned about the limitations of battery or AC power, install both types of units.











Though this









If the Alarm...





Problem...




You should...









Silence it.





















BRK Brands, Inc., ("BRK") the maker of First Alert

® brand products warrants that for a period of seven years from the date of purchase, this product will be free from defects in material and workmanship. BRK, at its option, will repair or replace this product or any component of the product found to be defective during the warranty period. Replacement will be made with a new or remanufactured product or component. If the product is no longer available, replacement may be made with a similar product of equal or greater value.














6






7

256


INSTALLATION AND OPERATION MANUAL

DIRECT VENT

GAS WATER HEATER

MODELS

SW6D • SW6DE • SW6DM • SW6DEM

FOR INSTALLATION IN RECREATIONAL

VEHICLES AND MOBILE HOUSING

FOR YOUR SAFETY

WHAT TO DO IF YOU SMELL GAS

!

DO NOT TRY TO LIGHT ANY APPLIANCE.

!

DO NOT TOUCH ANY ELECTRIC SWITCH: DO NOT USE ANY PHONE IN YOUR

VEHICLE.

!

IMMEDIATELY CALL YOUR GAS SUPPLIER FROM A NEIGHBOR’S PHONE. FOLLOW

THE GAS SUPPLIER’S INSTRUCTIONS.

!

IF YOU CANNOT REACH YOUR GAS SUPPLIER, CALL THE FIRE DEPARTMENT.

FREEZE WARNING

DRAIN HEATER IF SUBJECT TO FREEZING TEMPERATURES.

WARNING: IMPROPER INSTALLATION, ADJUSTMENT, ALTERATION, SERVICE OR

MAINTENANCE CAN CAUSE INJURY OR PROPERTY DAMAGE. REFER TO THIS MANUAL.

FOR ASSISTANCE OR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION, CONSULT A QUALIFIED INSTALLER,

SERVICE AGENCY OR THE GAS SUPPLIER.

FOR YOUR SAFETY

DO NOT STORE OR USE GASOLINE OR OTHER COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS OR LIQUIDS

NEAR OR ADJACENT TO THIS HEATER OR ANY OTHER APPLIANCE. THIS APPLIANCE

SHALL NOT BE INSTALLED IN ANY LOCATION WHERE FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS OR VAPORS

ARE LIKELY TO BE PRESENT.

AN ODORANT IS ADDED TO THE GAS USED BY THIS W ATER HEATER.

INSTALLER: AFFIX THESE INSTRUCTIONS TO OR ADJACENT TO W ATER HEATER.

OW NER: RETAIN THESE INSTRUCTIONS AND W ARRANTY FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.

ALL TECHNICAL AND W ARRANTY QUESTIONS SHOULD BE DIRECTED TO THE COMPANY

LISTED ON THE W ARRANTY, OR RATING PLATE W HICH CAME W ITH YOUR W ATER HEATER.

SUBURBAN MANUFACTURING COMPANY

676 Broadway Street

Dayton, Tennessee 37321

423-775-2131

Fax: 423-775-7015

257

258


INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

W ARNING! Installation of this appliance m ust be m ade in accordance with the written instructions provided in this m anual. No agent, representative or employee of Suburban or other person has the authority to change, m odify or waive any provision of the instructions contained in this m anual.

CAUTION: If possible, do not install the water heater to where the vent can be covered or obstructed when any door on the trailer is opened. If this is not possible, then the travel of the door m ust be restricted in order to provide a 6" m inim um clearance between the water heater vent and any door whenever the door is opened.

CAUTION: Due to the differences in vinyl siding, this appliance should not be installed on vinyl siding without first consulting with the manufacturer of the siding or cutting the siding aw ay from the area around the appliance vent.

CAUTIO N: In any installation in which the vent of this appliance can be covered due to the construction of the RV or som e special feature of the RV such as slide out, pop-up etc., always insure that the appliance cannot be operated by setting the therm ostat to the positive “OFF” position and shutting off all electrical and gas supply to the appliance.

CAUTION: Do not install this appliance to where the vent term inates below a slide-out. This appliance is not to be installed under any overhang. It m ust be free and clear of any type overhang.

This installation m ust conform with the requirem ents of the authority having jurisdiction or in the absence of such requirem ents with the latest edition of the

National Fuel Gas Code ANSI Z223.1; and the latest edition of the Am erican

National Standard for Recreational Vehicles-501C. In Canada the installation should conform with the following standards.

A.

For installation in Recreational Vehicle

1.

Gas - CSA standard CSA Z240.4.2 Installation Requirem ents for Propane

Appliances and Equipm ent in Recreations Vehicles.

2.

Electrical - CSA standard C22.2 No. 148/Z240.6.2 Electrical Requirem ents for Recreational Vehicles.

3.

Plum bing - CSA standard CSA Z240.3.2 Plum bing Requirem ents for

Recreational Vehicles.

B . For installation in Mobile Housing

1.

Gas - CSA standard CSA Z240.4.1 Installation Requirem ents for Gas

Burning Appliances and Equipm ent in Mobile Hom es.

2.

Electrical - CSA standard CSA C22.1 Canadian Electrical Code Part 1.

3.

Plum bing - CSA standard CSA Z240.3.1 Plum bing Requirem ents for Mobile

Hom es.

The appliance shall be disconnected from the gas supply piping system during any pressure testing of the system .

The appliance and its gas connections shall be leak tested before placing the appliance in operation.

All air for com bustion m ust be supplied from outside the structure. Air for com bustion m ust not be supplied from occupied spaces.


Minim um clearance from com bustible construction on sides, top, floor and rear = 0 inches. Provide room for access to rear of heater for servicing.

Provide an opening flush with floor in outer wall of coach as shown. W all of coach should be framed as shown in Figure 1. Maintain inside dim ensions listed below.

Do not install on carpet unless the carpet is covered by a metal or wood shield covering the entire area underneath the water heater. If you prefer, you m ay cut away the carpet from this area.

INSTALLATION USING FLUSH MOUNT FRAME & DOOR

(See Figure 2 for Illustration)

A. Position heater into fram ed opening as illustrated. Slide unit into opening until the front of the control housing is flush with the exterior coach skin.

B.

Secure the control housing to the coach wall (fram ed opening) at the top and sides of control housing com partm ent using screws or other suitable fasteners.

Recess the screws or fasteners back far enough from the front edge of control housing (approxim ately 1 1/2") in order to clear the flange on door fram e. The door fram e, when installed, m ust not overlap onto screw or other fastener head. If due to the wall thickness, it is not possible to secure the water heater without covering the fastener head with the door fram e, it is im portant to not over tighten the fastener and distort the control housing. Over tightening of the fastener may cause water heater leaks between the control housing and the door fram e.

NOTE: Caulk around screw or fastener heads to assure water tight seal.

C. Install chocks, one on each side of water heater, as illustrated in Figure 1A.

D.

On m esa or yoder type sidewalls, flatten the wall area around the opening.

E.

Caulk around fram ed opening (trailer skin) as illustrated.

F.

Caulk around door fram e using 2 beads of silicone caulking (or suitable caulking) - one on flange to seal to control housing and one around back side of fram e to seal to coach skin. (See detail A in illustration.)

G.

Insert door fram e into control housing and secure with three (3) No. 8-15 x

3 1/2" screws provided.

H.

To install door, place the two holes in the bottom of the door over the door pins on the fram e. Close the door so that the latch protrudes through the slot in the door. Turn latch 90 degrees to fasten door.

I.

The m odule board on models SW 6D and SW 6DE is not secured to the water heater. It is to be perm anently m ounted by the installer.

The m odule board must be mounted to where it is accessible for service yet out of way of children. It should be located in a place where it cannot be subjected to m oisture, cleaning chem icals, flam m able vapors and liquids, etc.

The board and all wiring to the board must be protected in order to prevent damages and accidental contact with these parts. The module board may be m ounted with two (2) No. 6 x 5/8 screws or other suitable hardware.

INSTALLATION USING HINGED DOOR

(See Figure 3 for illustration)

A. Position heater into fram ed opening as illustrated.

B. On mesa or yoder type sidewalls, flatten the wall area around the opening.

C. Caulk around fram ed opening (trailer skin) as illustrated.

D. Lay a bead of silicone caulking (or suitable caulking) around the inner edge of the control housing (top, bottom and sides). See detail “A” in illustration. This will seal fram e to control housing.

E.

Apply a bead of silicone caulking (or suitable caulking) around back side of door fram e. See detail “A” in illustration. This will seal fram e to coach skin.

F.

Fit the door fram e into control housing (over the caulking already applied) and pull frame tight to control housing using the three (3) No. 8-15 x 3 1/2" screws provided.

G. Push water heater into fram ed opening until back side of door fram e (now attached to control housing) is against the side of the coach and firm ly attach with screws around the perim eter of the fram e. NOTE: The two (2) holes in bottom of fram e identified as “A” in Figure 3 are also used to m ount door hinge to the fram e.

H. Install chocks, one on each side of water heater, as illustrated in Figure 1A.

I. Attach door to fram e as illustrated.

J. Close the door so that the door latch protrudes through the slot in the door.

Turn latch 90 degrees to fasten door.

K. The m odule board on m odels SW 6D and SW 6DE is not secured to the water heater. It is to be perm anently m ounted by the installer.

The m odule board must be m ounted to where it is accessible for service yet out of way of children. It should be located in a place where it cannot be subjected to m oisture, cleaning chem icals, flam m able vapors and liquids, etc.

The board and all wiring to the board must be protected in order to prevent damages and accidental contact with these parts. The module board may be m ounted with two (2) No. 6 x 5/8 screws or other suitable hardware.

Figure 1A

Figure 1

2

Figure 2


Figure 3

3

259


MAKING WATER CONNECTIONS

A. W ater connections are m ade at the rear of the water heater. Refer to Figure

4 for all m odels except SW 6DM and SW 6DEM. For SW 6DM and SW 6DEM, refer to Figure 5 or 6. Connect the hot and cold water lines to the 1/2" fem ale pipe fitting provided on rear of tank. These fittings are marked “HOT” and “COLD”. NOTE:

Inside each fitting is a plastic fill tube. Its purpose is to enhance water circulation.

DO NOT REM OVE PLASTIC FILL TUBE.

IMPORTANT: Use a pipe thread com pound suitable for potable water or pipe thread tape on all connections to assure they will not leak.

B.

For ease of rem oval, it is suggested that a pipe union be installed in each water line.

C.

Fill tank with water. Open both hot and cold water faucets to expel air from tank. W hen tank is filled and water flows from faucets, close both faucets and check all connections for leaks.

CAUTION: If you use air pressure to check for leaks, the pressure must not exceed 30 PSI (in accordance with 4-9.1.1 of ANSI A119.2).

NOTE: After leak testing, drain water from tank.

MAKING GAS CONNECTIONS

A.

Connect a 3/8" gas supply line to the 3/8 flare fitting at gas valve located in the control housing. W hen m aking the gas connection, hold the gas fitting on the valve with a wrench when tightening the flare nut. Failure to hold fitting secure could result in a gas leak due to fitting being dam aged. NOTE: It will be necessary to rem ove the grom m et from the control housing, make the gas connection at the valve, then reinstall grom m et.

W ARNING! It is im perative that grom m et and gas line through grom m et be caulked air tight. If not tightly sealed, m oisture and potential harm ful flue products could vent through opening and into living area of trailer.

(See Figure 7.)

B.

Turn on gas and check all fittings and connections for leaks, using a soap and water solution. Correct even the slightest leak imm ediately.

W ARNING! Do not use an open flam e to check for leaks!

HIGH ALTITUDE DERATION

Suburban water heaters are certified by nationally recognized testing laboratories for operation without m odifications at altitudes up to 4,500 feet. Operation above this elevation m ay require derating by 4 percent for every 1,000 feet above sea level. For exam ple, at 8,000 feet, the water heater should be derated approxim ately 32 percent.

If the unit is not properly derated, lack of sufficient oxygen for com bustion m ay produce im proper burner operation. Pilot outage caused by burner lift-off or sooting from a yellow burner may occur indicating the possibility of carbon m onoxide. You m ay also notice a lack of efficiency in heating the water because of incom plete com bustion of the burner at these higher altitudes.

Consult with the local gas company, your dealer, an RV service agency or

Suburban Manufacturing Com pany for proper derating of the unit. Change-out of the orifice (derating) should be done by the dealer or a qualified service agency.

NOTE: It is im portant that once the unit has returned to lower elevation (below

4,500 feet), this high altitude deration and pilot adjustm ents (if equipped) be reversed for proper operation of the unit.

M odel SW6DM

Figure 5

M odel SW 6DEM

Figure 6

260

Figure 4

4

Figure 7

MAKING ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

12 VOLTS D.C.

A.

Applicable to following models: SW 6D, SW 6DE, SW 6DM and SW 6DEM.

B.

Refer to Figure 2 for location of D.C. junction box on models SW 6D and

SW 6DE. Refer to Figure 5 and 6 for location of D.C. junction box on models

SW 6DM and SW 6DEM.

C.

The electrical connections must be made in accordance with local codes and regulations. In the absence of local codes and regulations, refer to the latest edition of the National Electrical Code ANSI\NFPA No. 70.

In Canada, the electrical installation should conform with CSA standard CSA

C22.2 No. 148/Z240.6.2 Electrical R equirem ents for Recreational Vehicles and

CSA C22.1 Canadian Electrical C ode Part 1 when installing the unit in recreational vehicles and mobile hom es respectively.

D.

Make the 12 Volt D.C. electrical connections following the wiring diagram illustrated in Figure 8.

If the power supply is to be from a convertor, we recom m end that the converter system be wired in parallel with the battery. This will serve two purposes:

1.

Provide a constant voltage supply

2.

Filter any A.C. spikes or volt surges

W e recom m end insulated term inals be used for all electrical connections.


INSTALLATION OF MOTOR AID HEAT EXCHANGER

A.

Place copper “Y”s in heater as shown in Figure 10.

B.

Secure hoses to “Y”s with hose clam ps.

C.

Attach hose from motor-aid heat exchanger to “Y”s.

D.

Secure hoses to m otor-aid and “Y”s with clam ps.

E.

Check all connections for water leaks and proper water circulation through m otor-aid heat exchanger, with engine running.

The system should be checked annually for deterioration of heater hose and hose connections. Replace as needed.

Figure 8

MAKING ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

120 VOLTS A.C.

A.

Applicable to following models SW 6DE and SW 6DEM.

B.

Refer to Figure 2 for location of A.C. junction box on model SW 6DE. Refer to

Figure 6 for A.C. junction box on model SW 6DEM.

C.

The electrical connections must be made in accordance with local codes and regulations. In the absence of local codes and regulations, refer to the latest edition of the National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA No. 70.

In Canada, the electrical installation should conform with CSA standard CSA

C22.2 No. 148/Z240.6.2. Electrical requirem ents for Recreational Vehicles and

CSA C22.1 Canadian Electrical Code Part 1 when installing the unit in recreational vehicles and mobile hom es respectively.

D.

Check rating plate and wiring diagram (Figure 9) before proceeding. Install a fused safety switch or circuit breaker of adequate capacity between heater and electrical power source. Attach the black and white wires from the fused switch or breaker to corresponding colored wires in heater junction box. A green wire from a well grounded source must be attached to the green nut in the junction box.

CAUTION: Before applying the 120 VAC power to the water heater junction box, be sure the switch for electric elem ent is in the “OFF” position.

W ARNING! Before the switch for the electric elem ent is turned to the “ON” position, the w ater heater tank m ust be filled with water. See “Safety

W arnings”.

Figure 10

MAINTENANCE

W ARNING! If the user of this appliance fails to m aintain it in the condition in which it was shipped from the factory or if the appliance is not used solely for its intended purpose or if appliance is not maintained in accordance with the instructions in this m anual, then the risk of a fire and/or the production of carbon monoxide exists which can cause personal injury, property damage or loss of life.

W ARNING: For your safety, all repairs should be perform ed by your dealer or a qualified service person.

A.

Main Burner: Do not allow the burner to burn with a yellow flam e, because sooting will occur. (See Safety W arnings). If the burner flam e is yellow and has an erratic pattern, shut unit down and contact a qualified service agency. Do not continue operating unit with im proper burner flam e. (See Figure 11 for correct and incorrect burner flam e appearance.)

B.

Periodically inspect unit for soot. If soot is present anywhere on water heater, im m ediately shut unit down and contact your dealer or a qualified service person.

Soot is a sign of incom plete com bustion and m ust be corrected before operating water heater. Areas to check would include:

1.

Check for an obstruction in burner or the flue box.

2.

Check the screen in the door to see that no foreign m aterial has accum ulated to prevent flow of com bustion and ventilating air.

3.

Check to be sure there is no flam e present at burner orifice or burner whenever m ain gas valve is closed. This can be checked by turning the OFF/ON switch to the “OFF” position.

C.

Frequent checks should be m ade of the grom m et on the gas inlet to assure tight seal. (See “Making Gas Connections”).

D.

Periodically check wiring and wire connection to be sure wiring is not dam aged/frayed and that all term inals and connections are tight and in com pliance with codes (See “Making W ire Connections”).

Figure 11

Figure 9

5

261

262


SAFETY WARNINGS

W ARNING! It is im perative that the water heater tank be filled with water before operating the water heater. Operation of the water heater without water in the tank m ay result in dam age to the tank and/or controls. This type of dam age is not covered by the lim ited warranty.

W ARNING! Hydrogen gas m ay result if you have not used this heater for two weeks or m ore. HYDROGEN GAS IS EXTREM ELY FLAM M ABLE. To reduce the risk of injury under these conditions, open the hot water faucet for several m inutes at the kitchen sink before you use any electrical appliance connected to the hot water system . If hydrogen is present, you probably will hear an unusual sound such as air escaping through the pipe as the water begins to flow.

Hydrogen gas m ay be present even after water has been drained from the tank. Open faucet at sink and allow system to vent for several m inutes (5-

10 m inutes).

Do not sm oke or have any open flam e near the open faucet. Do not attem pt to light pilot or m ain burner. On DSI m odels, be sure the switch is “OFF”.

Should overheating occur, or the gas supply fail to shut off, shut off the m anual gas valve to the appliance before shutting off the electrical supply.

Do not use this appliance if any part has been subm erged under water.

Im m ediately call a qualified service technician to inspect the appliance and to replace any part of the control system and any gas control that has been subm erged under water.

Do not alter the operation of your water heater nor change the design/construction of your water heater. Accessories are being m arketed for RV products which we do not recom m end. For your safety, only factory authorized parts are to be used on your water heater.

Periodically inspect the vent for obstructions or presence of soot. Soot is form ed whenever com bustion is incom plete. This is your visual warning that the water heater is operating in an unsafe m anner. If soot is present, im m ediately shut the w ater heater down and contact your dealer or a qualified service person.

W hen considering add-on room s, porch or patio, attention m ust be given to the venting of your water heater. For your safety, do not term inate the vent on your water heater inside add-on room s, screen porch or onto patios. Doing so will result in products of com bustion being vented into the room s or occupied areas.

Never operate the heater if you sm ell gas. Do not assum e that the sm ell of gas in your RV is norm al. Any tim e you detect the odor of gas, it is to be considered life threatening and corrected im m ediately. Extinguish any open flam es including cigarettes and evacuate all persons from the vehicle. Shut off gas supply at LP gas bottle. (See Safety notice on front cover of this m anual.)

NOTE: Always open both the cold and hot water faucets when filling vehicle water tank to allow air pockets to be forced out of the water heater.

W hen water flows from the heater faucets, close both faucets.

W ARNING! Do not store or use com bustible materials or liquids near or adjacent to this heater. The appliance shall not be installed in any location where flam m able liquids or vapors are likely to be present.

Be sure the power is "OFF" to the water heater ignition system during any type of refueling and while vehicle is in m otion or being towed.

The therm ostat on your water heater is not adjustable. It is a tem perature sensing lim it designed to m aintain a water tem perature of 130 F (54 C).

W ater tem peratures over 130 F (54 C) can cause severe burns instantly or death from scalds; therefore, be careful when using hot water. Children, disabled and elderly are at highest risk of being scalded. Always feel water before bathing or showering.

ANODE PROTECTION

The tank in this water heater is protected by a magnesium or alum inum anode to prolong the life of the tank by absorbing the corrosive action of hot water. Under norm al use, the anode rod will deteriorate and because of this, we recom m end it be replaced yearly. NOTE: W ater with high levels of iron and/or sulfate will increase the rate of deterioration; therefore, m ore frequent replacem ent may be required. If anode rod is m ostly eaten away, replace it with a new one. (See

Figure 12)

To prevent a water leak when replacing the anode rod, a pipe thread sealant approved for potable water (such as Teflon tape) m ust be applied to the threads of the anode rod. Proper application of a thread sealant will not interfere with the anode’s tank protection.

Operating the water heater without proper anode protection will decrease tank life and will void your warranty on the tank. NOTE: Tank is drained by rem oving anode rod (See “Drain and Storage” instructions).

To extend anode life, drain water from tank whenever RV is not being used. Avoid any extended tim e of non use with water in tank.

Also, refer to section on winterizing.

W ARNING! Do not replace the anode rod with any non-Suburban accessory part, such as an “add-on” electric heating elem ent. Item s such as these are not approved to be installed in Suburban products. They could create an unsafe condition and will also void all warranties.

Figure 12

PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE

The tem perature and pressure relief valve is designed to open if the tem perature of the water within the heater reaches 210 F, or if the water pressure in the heater reaches 150 pounds. Recreational vehicle water system s are closed system s and during the water heating cycle the pressure build-up in the water system will reach

150 pounds. W hen this pressure is reached, the pressure relief valve will open and water will drip from the valve. This dripping will continue until the pressure is reduced to below 150 pounds, and the valve closes. This condition is norm al and does not indicate a defective relief valve.

W ARNING! Do not place a valve between the relief valve and the tank. Do not plug the relief valve under any circum stances.

WATER WEEPING OR DRIPPING FROM PRESSURE

RELIEF VALVE

You may experience water weeping or dripping from your water heater’s Pressure and Tem perature (P & T) Relief Valve when your water heater is operating. W ater weeping or dripping from the P & T Valve does not always mean the P & T Valve is defective. As water is heated, it expands. The water system in a recreational vehicle is a closed system and does not allow for the expansion of heated water.

W hen the pressure of the water system exceeds the relieving point of the P & T

Valve, the valve will relieve the excess pressure.

Suburban recom m ends that a check valve not be installed directly at the inlet to the water heater tank. This will increase weeping of the pressure relief valve.

W ARNING! Do not rem ove or plug the relief valve.

One way to reduce the frequency of this occurrence is to maintain an air pocket at the top of the water heater tank. This air pocket will form in the tank by design.

However, it will be reduced over time by the everyday use of your water heater.

To replenish this air pocket:

1.

Turn off water heater.

2.

Turn off cold water supply line.

3.

Open a faucet in the RV.

4.

Pull out on the handle of the Pressure Relief (P & T) Valve and allow water to flow from the valve until it stops.

5.

Release handle on P & T Valve - it should snap closed.

6.

Close faucet and turn on cold water supply; as the tank fills, the air pocket will develop.

Repeat this procedure as often as needed to reduce the frequency of the weeping of the P & T Valve. If the weeping persists after following this procedure, you m ay elect to install an expansion or accumulator tank in the cold water line between the tank and check valve to relieve the pressure caused by therm al expansion.

Contact your local dealer for assistance.

THERMOSTAT AND MANUAL RESET

M ODELS: SW 6D, SW 6DE, SW 6DM and SW 6DEM (See Figure 13)

The m odel water heaters listed above are equipped with a high tem perature limit as a cut-off device. Tem perature above 180 F will cause manual reset button to trip shutting down main burner.

To activate burner, the water tem perature must be below 110 F, push reset button to re-activate burner.

Figure 14

Figure 13

6

THERMOSTAT AND MANUAL RESET

M ODELS SW 6DE and SW 6DEM (See Figure 14)

The model water heaters listed above are equipped with a high tem perature lim it as a cut-off device. Tem perature above 180 F will cause manual reset button to trip shutting down the electric elem ent.

To activate elem ent, the water tem perature must be below 110 F, push reset button to re-activate the electric elem ent.

DRAINING AND STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS

If RV is to be stored during winter m onths, the water heater m ust be drained to prevent dam age from freezing.

1.

Turn off electrical power to water heater either at the switch from the electrical elem ent or at breaker.

2.

Shut off gas supply to water heater.

3.

Turn off pressure pum p on water system .

4.

Open both hot and cold water faucets.

5.

Remove anode rod from tank.

6.

Follow RV manufacturer’s instructions for draining entire water system .

NOTE: Be certain to refill water heater with water and rem ove all air from tank and lines before re-lighting or before turning on electrical power.

ODOR FROM HOT WATER SYSTEM

Odor from the hot water system is not a service problem and many water supplies contain sufficient am ounts of sulphur to produce an odor. The odor is sim ilar to rotten eggs and is often referred to as "sulphur water". It is not harm ful - only unpleasant to smell. Sulphur water can be caused by a chem ical action or by bacteria. The solution to elim inate is chlorination of the water system . Add about six (6) ounces of chlorinated com m on household liquid bleach to each 10 gallons in the water tank. Then run the chlorinated water throughout the system ,

SUBURBAN WATER HEATER opening each faucet one at a tim e until you sm ell the chlorine. Let the RV sit for a few days and the chlorine should take care of the problem . Then you will need to take care of the chlorine. Rem ove the chlorine by flushing the system with fresh water. This m ay take several attem pts. You may consider adding a filtering system that rem oves chlorine and prevents sulphur water. If the sulphur or rotten egg smell continues, flush the system once again as described above and replace anode rod as necessary.

REMOVING WATER HEATER

1.

Shut off gas supply and disconnect gas supply line from water heater.

2.

On all Electric Models, disconnect 120 V.A.C. supply at junction box m ounted on heater.

3.

On all DSI Models, disconnect 12 V.D.C. power supply at junction box on heater.

4.

On Models SW 6D and SW 6DE disconnect all wires at module board.

5.

Shut off water supply. Drain water from tank following instructions under

“Draining and Storage”.

6.

Disconnect hot and cold water lines from water heater.

7.

Rem ove screws or nails securing control housing to fram ed opening.

8.

Slide heater out. To reinstall, follow instructions in manual under “Installation

Instructions”.

WINTERIZING

If your water heater plum bing system is equipped with a bypass kit, use it to close off the water heater, drain the water heater com pletely and leave the water heater closed off (out of the system ) in the bypass position particularly if you are introducing antifreeze into the plum bing system . Antifreeze can be very corrosive to the anode rod creating prem ature failure and heavy sedim ent in the tank. If the plum bing system is not equipped with a bypass kit, and you intend to winterize by adding antifreeze to the system , rem ove the anode rod

(storing it for the winter) and replace it with a 3/4" drain plug.

FOR YOUR SAFETY READ BEFORE OPERATING

W ARNING! If the user of this appliance fails to m aintain it in the condition in which it was shipped from the factory or if the appliance is not used solely for its intended purpose or if appliance is not m aintained in accordance with the instructions in this m anual, then the risk of a fire and/or the production of carbon m onoxide exists which can cause personal injury, property damage or loss of life.

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

W ARNING ! If you do not follow these instructions exactly, a fire or explosion m ay result causing property damage, personal injury or loss of life.

W ARNING: Before operating water heater, be sure tank is filled with water. See “Safety W arnings”.

NO TE: E ach ignition cycle will have a 15 second purge before spark cycle if system is a three try system .

8.

If lockout occurs before m ain burner lights, turn switch to “OFF”, wait five seconds and turn switch to “ON” position. This will restart the ignition cycle.

The first start-up of the heater m ay require several ignition cycles before all air is purged from the gas lines.

If the burner will not com e on, the following item s should be checked before calling a service person.

1.

Switch turned off.

2.

Gas supply to heater is em pty or turned off.

3.

Reset button on ECO is tripped.

A . This appliance does not have a pilot. It is equipped with an ignition device which autom atically lights the burner. Do not try to light the burner by hand.

B.

BEFORE LIGHTING sm ell all around the appliance area for gas. Be sure to sm ell next to the floor because som e gas is heavier than air and will settle on the floor.

W HAT TO DO IF YOU SM ELL GAS

Do not try to light any appliance.

Do not touch any electric switch.

Do not use any phone in your building.

Im m ediately call your gas supplier from a neighbor’s phone. Follow the gas supplier’s instructions.

If you cannot reach your gas supplier, call the fire department.

C. This is an autom atic gas valve, no adjustm ents are necessary. Do not attem pt to repair the gas valve. This m ay result in a fire or explosion.

D.

Do not use this appliance if any part has been under water. Im m ediately call a qualified service technician to inspect the appliance and to replace any part of the control system and any gas control which has been under water.

E.

Before operating water heater, check the location of the vent to make sure it will not be blocked by the opening of any door on the trailer. If it can be blocked, do not operate the water heater with the door open.


1.

STOP! Read the safety inform ation provided.

2.

Turn off all electric power to the appliance.


FOR UNITS W ITH ELECTRIC ELEMENT

Electric water heaters are designed to operate with a m inimum am ount of service problem s; however, proper operation and care is essential.

By far the m ost com m on trouble with electric water heaters results from energizing the water heater before it is filled with water. Even brief operation of the electric elem ent without water in the tank will burn-out the electric heating elem ent.

To energize the electric heating elem ent, turn the switch to “ON”. The switch is located behind the water heater door in the lower left corner of the control housing. The water tem perature will be regulated by the therm ostat.

TO TURN OFF W ATER HEATER

1.

Turn switch to “OFF” position.

2.

Turn off electrical power to the appliance.

3.

Turn off gas supply.

4.

If vehicle is to be stored or heater is going to be turned off while subject to freezing tem perature, drain water heater. (See “Draining and Storage

Instructions.”) 3.

Turn “OFF” gas supply.

4.

W ait five minutes for gas to clear the area. If you sm ell gas then STOP!

Follow instructions in item B of the safety inform ation. If you don’t smell gas, go to next step.

5.

Turn “ON” gas supply.

6.

Turn on electrical power to the appliance.

7.

Turn switch to "O N" position. If the burner does not light, the system will autom atically attem pt two more tries for ignition before lock-out.

7

263

264


PARTS ILLUSTRATION AND REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Only factory authorized parts are to be used. Do not attem pt to repair

defective parts.

W hen ordering repair parts from your dealer or a distributor, always give the following inform ation:

1. Part Num ber (Not Item No.)

2.

Part Description

3.

Model No. and Serial No. of your Heater

4.

Num ber of Parts Required

38

39

41

42

34

35

36

37

29

31

32

33

24

25

26

28

16

18

20

21

11

12

13

15

6

7

8

10

1

3

Item

No.

48

49

50

51

44

45

46

47

52

53

55

56

57

PARTS LIST FOR MODELS

SW6D • SW6DE

(Figure 15)

Description

Part Num ber

SW 6D

Module Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520814

Cover, Module Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 090487

Bushing, Snap 1/2" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 070270

Bushing, Strain Relief 5/8" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230216

D.C. Junction Box Assem bly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 090517

Back Assem bly, Flue Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101682

Front, Flue Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101776

Valve, Pressure Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161157

Screw #10 x 1/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121577

SW 6DE

520814

090487

070270

Cover, Therm ostat/Hi-Lim it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 090562

Gasket, Therm ostat Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 070987

Grom m et . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 070874

Bracket, Electrode Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 063187

Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232258

Cover, Elem ent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ------

Gasket, Elem ent Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ------

Burner Assem bly with orifice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 010843

Electric Elem ent with Gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ------

Anode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232767

Grom m et . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 071246

Bushing, Snap 1/2" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ------

Switch, Electric Elem ent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ------

Gas Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170374

Bracket, Valve Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 063243

Valve, Gas (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161109

Manifold, Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171420

#10 x 1/4 (4 Required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121577

Screw #8-32 x 3/8 Hex HD. (2 Required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121958

Switch Assem bly, 12 V.D.C. T-Stat/Hi-Lim it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232282

Switch Assem bly, 120 V.A.C. T-Stat/Hi Lim it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ------

Cover, Junction Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ------

Grom m et, Gas Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 070989

Bushing, Snap 7/8" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ------

A.C. Junction Box Assem bly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ------

Nut, 10-24 Keps (Green) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121576

Bushing, Snap 7/8" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ------

Foam Jacket Assem bly Com plete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520868

Switch, Lam p and Plate Assem bly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232589

Screw 8mm - 4.0 x 1/2 Hex W asher Head (2 Required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121943

Burner Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 063444

1/4 Loxit Nut (Manifold to Burner) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171463

1/4 Loxit Nut (Manifold to Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171463

Electrode W ire (Not Shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232456

071246

070270

232362

170374

063243

161109

171420

121577

121958

232282

232306

090576

070989

230218

090575

121576

230218

520868

232589

121943

063444

171463

171463

232456

230216

090517

101682

101776

161157

121577

090562

070987

070874

063187

232258

090445

070988

010843

520789

232767

8


Figure 15

9

265


PARTS LIST FOR MODEL SW6DM

(Figures 16 and 17)

14

17

18

19

10

11

12

13

8

9

5

7

1

4

Item

No.

Description

Part Num ber

SW 6DM

Cover, Module Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 090340

Cover Junction Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 090344

Screw 10-32 x 3/8 (Green) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121702

Switch, Lam p and Plate Assem bly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232589

Bushing, Snap 7/8" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230218

Insulator, Module Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 070807

Module Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520814

Back Assem bly, Flue Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101682

Valve, Pressure Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161157

Gasket, Therm ostat Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 070987

Cover, Therm ostat/Hi-Lim it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 090562

Front, Flue Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101776

Screw 10 x 1/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121577

Grom m et . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 070874

32

34

36

37

28

29

30

31

38

39

41

42

23

25

26

27

Item

No.

21

22

Description

Part Num ber

SW 6DM

Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232258

Bracket, Electrode Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 063187

Burner Assem bly with orifice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 010843

1/4 Loxit Nut (Manifold to Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171463

Valve, Gas (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161109

Manifold Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171420

Screw 10 x 1/4 (4 Required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121577

Screw 8-32 x 3/8 Hex HD (2 Required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121958

Bracket, Valve Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 063243

Gas Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170374

Switch Assem bly 12 V.D.C. T-Stat/Hi-Lim it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232282

Grom m et . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 071246

Anode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232767

Grom m et, Gas Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 070989

Screw 8mm - 4.0 x 1/2 Hex W asher Head (2 Required) . . . . . . 121943

Burner Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 063444

1/4 Loxit Nut (Manifold to Burner) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171463

Electrode W ire (Not Shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232454

REAR VIEW

SW 6DM

Figure 16

266

FRONT VIEW

SW 6DM

Figure 17

10


PARTS LIST FOR MODEL SW6DEM

(Figures 18 and 19)

14

16

17

18

10

11

12

13

19

20

23

25

26

8

9

5

7

1

4

Item

No.

Description

Part Num ber

SW 6DEM

Cover, Module Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 090340

Cover, Junction Box (12 V.D.C.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 090344

Screw 10-32 x 3/8 (Green) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121702

Switch, Lam p and Plate Assem bly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232589

Bushing, Snap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230218

Insulator, Module Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 070807

Module Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520814

Cover, Junction Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 090464

Nut 10-24 Keps (Green) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121576

Bushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 070486

Back, Flue Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101682

Screw #10 x 1/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121577

Front, Flue Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101776

Valve, Pressure Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161157

Gasket, Therm ostat Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 070987

Cover, Therm ostat/Hi-Lim it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 090562

Grom m et (2 Required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 070874

Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232258

Bracket, Electrode Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 063187

36

37

38

39

40

41

30

32

33

34

Item

No.

28

29

48

49

50

52

53

43

44

45

47

Description

Part Num ber

SW 6DEM

Cover, Elem ent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 090445

Gasket, Elem ent Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 070988

Burner Assem bly with orifice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 010843

1/4 Loxit Nut (Manifold to Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171463

Electric Elem ent with Gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520789

Anode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232767

Grom m et . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 071246

Switch, Electric Elem ent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232362

Valve, Gas (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161109

Manifold, Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171420

Screw 10 x 1/4 (4 Required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121577

Screw #8-32 x 3/8 Hex HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121958

Bracket, Valve Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 063243

Gas Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170374

Bushing, Snap 1/2" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 070270

Switch Assem bly, 120 V.A.C. T-Stat/Hi-Lim it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232306

Switch Assem bly, 12 V.D.C. T-Stat/Hi-Lim it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232282

Grom m et, Gas Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 070989

Screw 8mm - 4.0 x 1/2 Hex W asher Head (2 Required) . . . . . . 121943

Burner Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 063444

1/4 Loxit Nut (Manifold to Burner) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171463

Electrode W ire (Not Shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232454

REAR VIEW

SW 6DEM

Figure 18

FRONT VIEW

SW 6DEM

Figure 19

11

267


TWO YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY

SUBURBAN RECREATIONAL VEHICLE WATER HEATER

TWO YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY to furnish proof of purchase date through a Bill of Sale or other payment records.

Suburban will replace any parts that are found defective within the first two years and will pay a warranty service allowance directly to the and date of installation.

For warranty service, the owner/user should contact the nearest recommended Suburban Service Center, advising them of the model and serial

THREE YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY ON TANK

LIMITATION OF WARRANTIES

SUBURBAN WILL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR:

1. Normal maintenance as outlined in the installation, operating and service instructions owner’s manual including cleaning of component parts component parts or from its use.

2. Initial checkouts and subsequent checkouts which indicate the water heater is operating properly, or diagnosis without repair.

3. Damage or repairs required as a consequence of faulty or incorrect installation or application not in conformance with Suburban instructions.

4. Failure to start and/or operate due to loose or disconnected wires; water or dirt in controls, fuel lines and gas tanks; improper gas pressure; low voltage.

5. Cleaning or adjustment of components; electrode, burner tube, pilot and thermocouple.

6. Costs incurred in gaining access to the water heater.

7. Parts or accessories not supplied by Suburban.

8.

Freight charges incurred from parts replacements.

9. Damage or repairs needed as a consequence of any misapplication, abuse, unreasonable use, unauthorized alteration, improper service, improper operation or failure to provide reasonable and necessary maintenance.

10. Suburban products whose serial number has been altered, defaced or removed.

11. Suburban products installed or warranty claims originating outside the Continental U.S.A., Alaska, Hawaii and Canada.

12.

Damage as a result of floods, winds, lightning, accidents, corrosive atmosphere or other conditions beyond the control of Suburban.

13. ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL PROPERTY, ECONOMIC OR COMMERCIAL DAMAGE OF ANY NATURE

268

THIS SUBURBAN PRODUCT.

This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state.

IF YOU HAVE A PRODUCT PROBLEM

FIRST:

If your RV has its original water heater and is still under the RV manufacturer’s warranty, follow the steps suggested by your dealer or manufacturer of the RV.

SECOND:

Contact a conveniently located recommended Suburban Service Center. Describe to them the nature of your problem, make an appointment, if necessary, and provide for delivery of your RV to the selected service center.

THIRD:

For the location of the nearest Service Center, refer to the listing provided or contact:

Suburban Manufacturing Company

Customer Service Department

676 Broadway Street

Dayton, Tennessee 37321

(423) 775-2131, Ext. 7101 www.rvcomfort.com

For future reference, you should record the following inform ation

MODEL NUMBER _________________________________

SERIAL NUMBER _________________________________

STOCK NUMBER _________________________________

DATE OF PURCHASE _____________________________

Part Number 204319

6-15-07

VIZIO TV

USER MANUAL

Models: D24h-G9, D32h-G9, D40f-G9, D50x-G9, V405-G9, V505-G9 & V655-G9

Safety & Certification

THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VIZIO

And congratulations on your new VIZIO TV.

To get the most out of your new VIZIO product, read these instructions before using your product and retain them for future reference. Be sure to inspect the package contents to ensure there are no missing or damaged parts.

PRODUCT REGISTRATION

To purchase or inquire about accessories and installation services for your VIZIO product, visit our website at www.VIZIO.com or call toll free at

(877) 698-4946.

We recommend that you register your VIZIO product at www.VIZIO.com.

WHEN READING THIS MANUAL

When you see this symbol, please read the accompanying important warning or notice. It is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating instructions.

When you see this symbol, please read the accompanying helpful tip.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Your TV is designed and manufactured to operate within defined design limits. Misuse may result in electric shock or fire. To prevent your TV from being damaged, the following instructions should be observed for the installation, use, and maintenance of your TV. Read the following safety instructions before operating your TV. Keep these instructions in a safe place for future reference.

• To reduce the risk of electric shock or component damage, switch off the power before connecting other components to your TV.

• Read these instructions.

• Keep these instructions.

• Heed all warnings.

• Follow all instructions.

• Do not use this apparatus near water.

• Clean only with dry cloth.

• Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

• Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

• Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other.

A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong.

The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

• Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.

• Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.

• Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus.

When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/ apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.

• Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.

• Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.

• Unplug the power cord before cleaning your TV.

• When moving your TV from an area of low temperature to an area of high temperature, condensation may form in the housing. Wait before turning on your TV to avoid causing fire, electric shock, or component damage.

• A distance of at least three feet should be maintained between your

TV and any heat source, such as a radiator, heater, oven, amplifier etc. Do not install your TV close to smoke. Operating your TV close to smoke or moisture may cause fire or electric shock.

• Slots and openings in the back and bottom of the cabinet are provided for ventilation. To ensure reliable operation of your TV and to protect it from overheating, be sure these openings are not blocked or covered. Do not place your TV in a bookcase or cabinet unless proper ventilation is provided.

• Never push any object into the slots and openings on your TV cabinet. Do not place any objects on the top of your TV. Doing so could short circuit parts causing a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquids on your TV.

• Your TV should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the label. If you are not sure of the type of power supplied to your home, consult your dealer or local power company.

• Do not apply pressure or throw objects at your TV. This may compromise the integrity of the TV. The manufacturer’s warranty does not cover user abuse or improper installations.

• The power cord must be replaced when using different voltage than the voltage specified. For more information, contact your dealer.

• When connected to a power outlet, power is always flowing into your

TV. To totally disconnect power, unplug the power cord.

• The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of un-isolated, dangerous voltage within the inside of your TV that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

• Do not overload power strips and extension cords. Overloading can result in fire or electric shock.

• The wall socket should be installed near your TV and easily accessible.

ii

269

270

VIZIO TV

• Only power of the marked voltage can be used for your TV. Any other voltage than the specified voltage may cause fire or electric shock.

• Do not touch the power cord during lightning. To avoid electric shock, avoid handling the power cord during electrical storms.

• Unplug your TV during a lightning storm or when it will not be used for long period of time. This will protect your TV from damage due to power surges.

• Do not attempt to repair or service your TV yourself. Opening or removing the back cover may expose you to high voltages, electric shock, and other hazards. If repair is required, contact your dealer and refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

• WARNING: Keep your TV away from moisture. Do not expose your TV to rain or moisture. If water penetrates into your TV, unplug the power cord and contact your dealer. Continuous use in this case may result in fire or electric shock.

• Do not use your TV if any abnormality occurs. If any smoke or odor becomes apparent, unplug the power cord and contact your dealer immediately. Do not try to repair your TV yourself.

• Avoid using dropped or damaged appliances. If your TV is dropped and the housing is damaged, the internal components may function abnormally. Unplug the power cord immediately and contact your dealer for repair. Continued use of your TV may cause fire or electric shock.

• Do not install your TV in an area with heavy dust or high humidity.

Operating your TV in environments with heavy dust or high humidity may cause fire or electric shock.

• Follow instructions for moving your TV. Ensure that the power cord and any other cables are unplugged before moving your TV.

• To prevent injury, this apparatus must be securely attached to the floor/wall in accordance with the installation instructions.

• When unplugging your TV,grab the head of the power plug, not the cord. Pulling on the power cord may damage the wires inside the cord and cause fire or electric shock. When your TV will not be used for an extended period of time, unplug the power cord.

• To reduce risk of electric shock, do not touch the connector with wet hands.

• Insert batteries in accordance with instructions. Incorrect polarities may cause the batteries to leak which can damage the remote control or injure the operator. Do not expose batteries to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like.

• If any of the following occurs, contact the dealer:

- The power cord fails or frays.

- Liquid sprays or any object drops into your TV.

- Your TV is exposed to rain or other moisture.

- Your TV is dropped or damaged in any way.

- The performance of your TV changes substantially.

• This apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.

• The mains plug or appliance coupler is used as the disconnect device, the disconnect device shall remain readily operable.

• CAUTION: These servicing instructions are for use by qualified service personnel only. To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not perform any servicing other than that contained in the operating instructions unless you are qualified to do so.

• The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated

DANGEROUS VOLTAGE within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical shock to persons.

• WARNING: Exposure to loud sounds can damage your hearing causing hearing loss and tinnitus (ringing or buzzing in the ears). With continued exposure to loud noises, ears may become accustomed to the sound level, which may result in permanent damage to hearing without any noticeable discomfort.

• Install the TV where it cannot be pulled, pushed or knocked over.

• Do not allow children to hang onto the product.

• Store the accessories (remote, batteries, etc.) in a location safely out of the reach of children.

• The American Academy of Pediatrics discourages television viewing for children younger than two years of age.

• WARNING: Never place a television set in an unstable location. A television set may fall, causing serious personal injury or death.

• Many injuries, particularly to children, can be avoided by taking simple precautions such as:

• Using cabinets or stands recommended by the manufacturer of the television set.

• Only using furniture that can safely support the television set.

• Ensuring the television set is not overhanging the edge of the supporting furniture.

• Not placing the television set on tall furniture (for example, cupboards or bookcases) without anchoring both the furniture and the television set to a suitable support.

• Not placing the television set on cloth or other materials that may be located between the television set and the supporting furniture.

• Educating children about the dangers of climbing on furniture to reach the television set or its controls.

• If your existing television set is being retained and relocated, the same considerations as above should be applied.

• WARNING : To prevent injury, this apparatus must be securely attached to the floor/wall in accordance with the installation instructions. iii

TELEVISION ANTENNA CONNECTION PROTECTION

If an outside antenna/satellite dish or cable system is to be connected to the TV, make sure that the antenna or cable system is electrically grounded to provide some protection against voltage surges and static charges.

Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPSA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of the grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements of the grounding electrode.

Lightning Protection

For added protection of the TV during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended or unused for long periods of time, unplug the TV from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system.

Power Lines

Do not locate the antenna near overhead light or power circuits, or where it could fall into such power lines or circuits. Remember, the screen of the coaxial cable is intended to be connected to earth in the building installation.

Ground Clamp

Antenna Lead In Wire

Electric Service Equipment

Antenna Discharge Unit

(NEC Section 810-20)

Grounding Conductors

(NEC Section 810-21)

Ground Clamps

Power Service Grounding Electrode System

(NEC ART 250, part H) iv

VIZIO TV

For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com.

Manufactured under license from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol,

DTS and the Symbol together, and DTS Studio Sound are registered trademarks and/or trademarks of DTS, Inc. in the

United States and/or other countries. © DTS, Inc. All Rights

Reserved.

For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com.

Manufactured under license from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol,

DTS and the Symbol together, and DTS Studio Sound II are registered trademarks and/or trademarks of DTS, Inc. in the

United States and/or other countries. © DTS, Inc. All Rights

Reserved.

* Only available on D50x-G9, V405-G9, V505-G9 and V655-G9

Dolby, Dolby Audio, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under license from Dolby

Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works. Copyright ©

1992-2015 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.

The terms HDMI, HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc.

Table Of Contents

Getting to Know Your TV .............................................

7

Front Panel ..........................................................................................7

Rear Panel ...........................................................................................8

Connecting Your Devices ...................................................................

11

Wall-mounting the TV .........................................................................

14

Using the Remote ...............................................................................

1 5

Completing The First-Time Setup ...............................

1 6

Using the On-Screen Menu .........................................

17

Navigating the On-Screen Menu ........................................................

17

Changing the Input Source ................................................................

17

Changing the Screen Aspect Ratio .....................................................

18

Adjusting the Picture Settings ............................................................

19

Adjusting More Picture Settings .....................................................

19

Adjusting the Color Temperature ...................................................20

Adjusting the Picture Mode Edit Settings ......................................20

Saving a Custom Picture Mode .......................................................20

Locking/Unlocking a Custom Picture Mode ...................................

21

Deleting a Custom Picture Mode ....................................................

21

Resetting a Picture Mode ................................................................

21

Adjusting the Color Tuner Settings ................................................22

Adjusting the Audio Settings ..............................................................24

Adjusting the Network Settings .........................................................25

Setting Timers .....................................................................................27

Setting the Timer .............................................................................27

Setting the Auto Power Off Feature ...............................................27

Setting Up Channels ...........................................................................28

Scanning for Channels ....................................................................28

Skipping Channels ...........................................................................28

Listening to Alternate Audio ..............................................................29

Changing the Analog Audio Language ...........................................29

Parental controls ................................................................................30

Using Parental Controls ..................................................................30

Enabling or Disabling Program Ratings .........................................30

Locking and Unlocking Channels ....................................................30

Blocking and Unblocking Content by Rating .................................30

Setting Up Closed Captioning ............................................................

31

Changing the Appearance of Digital Closed Captions ..................

31

Renaming Devices on the Input Menu ..............................................33

Changing the TV Settings ...................................................................34

Viewing System Information ...........................................................34

Changing the On-Screen Menu Language .....................................34

Setting the Time and Local Settings ...............................................35

Adjusting the CEC Settings ..............................................................35

Changing the TV Name ....................................................................36

Using the Reset & Admin Menu .........................................................37

Restoring the TV to Factory Default Settings .................................37

Turning the Power Indicator On or Off ..........................................37

Using the Info Window .......................................................................39

SmartCast Home

SM

........................................................40

What is SmartCast Home?

...............................................................40

What You Can Do with SmartCast Home .......................................40

How to Launch SmartCast Home ...................................................40

WatchFree.....................................................................41

What is WatchFree?

.........................................................................

41

What You Can Do with WatchFree..................................................

41

How to Launch WatchFree ..............................................................

41

Playing USB Media .......................................................42

Displaying USB Media .........................................................................42

Preparing Your USB Drive to Play USB Media ...............................42

Removing the USB Drive from the TV ............................................42

Troubleshooting & Technical Support ........................46

Specifications ...............................................................50

Regulatory Information ...............................................52

Limited Warranty .........................................................53

Legal Information.........................................................55

vi v

271

VIZIO TV

Getting to Know Your TV

FRONT PANEL

1

272

Remote Sensor and Power Indicator

When using the remote, aim it directly at this sensor. The power indicator flashes on when the TV turns on, then goes out after several seconds.

To keep the power indicator on as long as the TV is on, see Turning the Power Indicator On or Off.

7

1

Rear Panel - D24h-G9

HDMI - Connect an HDMI device.

Composite - Connect a composite.

Video/ L/R

Coaxial - Connect to a coaxial cable from cable, satellite, or antenna.

Stereo Audio Out - Connect 3.5 mm audio device, such as a headset or sound bar.

USB - Connect a USB thumb drive to play photo, music, or video.

Optical Audio Out - Connect to an optical/SPDIF audio device, such as home audio receiver.

Power - Press to turn on the TV. Press and hold to turn the TV off.

Volume - Press to increase or decrease the TV volume level.

VOL

Input - Press to access the input menu.

INPUT

Note: The image shown here is for illustrative purposes only and may be subject to change.

The actual number of ports and their locations may vary, depending on the model.

8

VIZIO TV

1

Rear Panel - D40f-G9


Component/Composite - Connect a component or composite.

Audio Out - Connect to an RCA device, such as sound bar.




Ethernet - Connect an Ethernet cable to modem/ router.



VOL


INPUT

Rear Panel - D32h-G9, D50x-G9, V405-G9, V505-G9 & V655-G9


Composite - Connect a composite device.

Audio Out - Connect to an RCA device, such as sound bar.




Ethernet - Connect an Ethernet cable to modem/ router.



VOL


INPUT



9

1



10

273

VIZIO TV

Connecting Your Devices

CONNECTING A DEVICE - AUDIO & VIDEO CABLE TYPES

Your TV can be used to display output from most devices.

1. Verify that your device has a video port that matches an available port on the TV (HDMI, Component, etc.).

2. Connect the appropriate cable (not included) to the TV and the device.

3. Turn the TV and your device on. Set the TV’s input to match the connection you used (HDMI-1, HDMI-2, etc.).

HDMI CABLE

HDMI

COMPONENT CABLE

R L Pr/Cr Pb/Cb Y

COMPOSITE (AV) CABLE

(Shared with Component input)

Y L R

COAXIAL CABLE

Coaxial

1

Note: The actual ports and their locations may vary, depending on the TV model.

1

11

274

CONNECTING A DEVICE - D24 h -G9 ONLY

D24h-G9 includes a Composite In / AV In port that requires additional adapters (not included).

1. Connect the appropriate cable (not included) to the TV and the device using an adapter (not included).

2. Turn the TV and your device on. Set the TV’s input to match the connection you used (Composite).

Composite input on back of TV*

Video/ L/R

Connecting to a composite device

Video / Audio L/R

Adapter (Not Included)

* The actual ports and their locations may vary, depending on the TV model.

Composite Connection on Your Device

12

CONNECTING A DEVICE - AUDIO CABLE TYPES

Your TV can be output sound to an audio device, such as a receiver or sound bar.

1. Verify that your device has audio port that matches an available port on the TV (Optical, RCA, etc).

2. Connect the appropriate cable (not included) to the TV and the device.

3. Turn the TV and your device on.

HDMI CABLE

HDMI

RCA CABLE

L R

OPTICAL/SPDIF CABLE

Optical

VIZIO TV

1

Note: The actual ports and their locations may vary, depending on the TV model.

13

1

WALL-MOUNTING THE TV

To mount your TV on a wall, you will need a wall mount. Consult the information on this page to find the appropriate mount for your TV.

Be sure the mount you choose is capable of supporting the weight of the TV.

After you have determined that you have the correct mount for your TV, you can begin the installation.

To install your TV on a wall:

1. Disconnect any cables connected to your TV.

2. Place the TV face-down on a clean, flat, stable surface. Be sure the surface is clear of debris that can scratch or damage the TV.

3. If attached, remove the stands by loosening and removing the screws.

4. Attach your TV and wall mount to the wall, carefully following the instructions that came with your mount. Use only with a UL-listed wall mount bracket rated for the weight/load of this TV.

Installing a TV on a wall requires lifting. To prevent injury or damage to the TV, ask someone to help you.



Screw Size:

Hole Depth:

Hole Pattern:

Weight w/o Stand:

D24h-G9

M4

8.5 mm

100 mm x 100 mm

6.90 lb (3.13 kg)

D32h-G9

M4

8.5 mm

100 mm x 100 mm

9.26 lb (4.20 kg)

D40f-G9

M6

10 mm

200 mm x 200 mm

14.33 lb (6.5 kg)

D50x-G9

M6

9 mm

200 mm x 200 mm

21.32 lb (9.67 kg)

V405-G9

M6

10 mm

200 mm x 200 mm

14.99 lbs (6.80 kg)

V505-G9

M6

9 mm

200 mm x 200 mm

21.32 lb (9.67 kg)

V655-G9

M6

9 mm

400 mm x 200 mm

45.81 lb (20.78 kg)

14

275

VIZIO TV

Choose a language for your TV.

English Español

Back

How are you using your TV?

Home Use

Store Demo

Where is you VIZIO TV located?

USA Mexico Canada

1

USING THE REMOTE

Note that specific buttons may vary depending on your model.

INPUT

Power

Turn television on or off

Input

Change the currently displayed input

MENU

EXIT

OK

BACK

INFO

VOL

App Launcher

Quickly launch the pictured app

Menu

Display the settings menu

Exit

Close the on-screen menu

Arrow Buttons

Navigate the on-screen menus

OK/Play/Pause

Select the highlighted menu option and play or pause content

Back

Go to the previous on-screen menu

Info

Display the info window

WatchFree™

Access WatchFree channels

(not available in Canada)

Volume Up/Down

Increase or decrease the loudness of the audio or

CC

1

4

7

2

5

8

0

3

6

9

PIC

CH

SmartCast Home SM Button

Launch SmartCast Home/Return to SmartCast Home

Screen

Closed Caption

Open the closed caption menu

Open Accessibility menu by holding down this button for 5 seconds.

Mute

Turn the audio on or off

Last

Return to the channel last viewed

Number Pad

Manually enter a channel

Pic

Cycle through the different picture setting modes

Enabled/disable talk back feature*

Dash

Use with number pad to manually enter a digital sub-channel (for example, 18-4 or 18-5)

Wide

Change the picture display size/aspect ratio

Enable/disable zoom mode*

Channel Up/Down

Change the channel

*Enabled/disabled different accessibility features by holding down each of these buttons for 5 seconds.

Replacing the Batteries

1. Find the notch on the back of the remote. Insert a coin and pry open the back cover.

2.

3.

Insert two batteries into the remote control. Make sure that the (+) and (-) symbols on the batteries match the (+) and (-) symbols inside the battery compartment.

Replace the battery cover.

In many places batteries cannot be thrown away or discarded with household waste. Please ensure you properly dispose of your batteries consistent with the laws and/or regulations where you live. For more information please visit: www.vizio.com/environment

WARNING : keep the remote control batteries away from children. It may cause choking and/or lead to a fire or chemical burn if mishandled. Do not dispose of batteries infire. Replace only with batteries of the correct type.

When needed, VIZIO recommends replacing the batteries that came with this remote with two, new Duracell ‘AAA’ alkaline batteries

15

Choose a Wi-Fi Network.

Completing The First-Time Setup

The first time you turn on the TV, the on-screen instructions will guide you through each of the steps necessary to get your TV ready for use.

Before you begin the first-time setup:

• Your TV should be installed and the power cord should be connected to an electrical outlet.

• If you have a wireless network, have the network password ready.

• If you are connecting to your network with an Ethernet cable, connect it to the Ethernet port on the TV.

2

Terms & Conditions.

Your use of this device and software functionality are covered by VIZIO and Google ‘s respective Terms of Service and Privacy Policies.

By pressing “Accept All”, you agree to be bound by the (i) VIZIO Terms of Service and Privacy Policy and (ii) the Google Terms of Service and Privacy

Policy. NOTE: Accepting the terms and policiesis a condition of using the Cast functionality of this device.

VIZIO Terms &

Conditions

VIZIO Privacy

Policy

Google Privacy

Policy

Google Terms &

Conditons

Skip For Now Accept All

Congratulations!

Start streaming your favorite shows now!

Start Watching

By the way...

You can turn your phone into the ultimate remote. The

VIZIO SmartCastTM App brings together TV Shows, movies, and more from multiple apps into one simple experience.

Download now from the App Store or Google Play.

Choose a language for your TV.

English Español

Back

1. Choose your language.


Home Use Store Demo

2. Choose home use.


USA

Mexico Canada


3. Choose your country.

Let’s set up local channels.

Next

Skip

Public Wi-Fi John’s Network Ana’s Network Encrypted

Rescan Networks Hotten Netwok Help Skip

4. Choose your Wi-Fi and enter the password.

Which room is your VIZIO TV Located?

Family Room Living Room Master Bedroom Game Room

Add Custom Location

5. Name your TV.


Next Skip

6. Scan for channels.

Terms & Conditions.

Your use of this device and software functionality are covered by VIZIO and Google ‘s respective Terms of Service and Privacy Policies.

By pressing “Accept All”, you agree to be bound by the (i) VIZIO Terms of Service and Privacy Policy and (ii) the Google Terms of Service and Privacy

Policy. NOTE: Accepting the terms and policiesis a condition of using the Cast functionality of this device.

VIZIO Terms &

Conditions

VIZIO Privacy

Policy

Google Privacy

Policy

Google Terms &

Conditons

Skip For Now Accept All

7. Accept the T&Cs and register your device.

Congratulations!

Start streaming your favorite shows now!

Start Watching

By the way...

You can turn your phone into the ultimate remote. The

VIZIO SmartCastTM App brings together TV Shows, movies, and more from multiple apps into one simple experience.

Download now from the App Store or Google Play.

All set!

16


USA

Mexico Canada


To search for local broadcast channels, make sure the cable from the antenna, wall or cable box is properly connected to your VIZIO TV.

Next

Skip

276

VIZIO TV

Using the On-Screen Menu 3

Your TV features an easy-to-use on-screen menu.

To open the on-screen menu, press the Menu button on the remote.

From this menu, you can:

• Adjust the Picture settings TV Settings

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Adjust the Audio settings

Adjust the Network settings

Set up the Timers

Adjust the Channel settings

Set up Closed Captioning

Name and adjust Inputs

Adjust TV settings

Picture

Audio

Network

Timers

Channels

Closed Captions

Input Settings

System

User Manual

• View the User Manual

NAVIGATING THE ON-SCREEN MENU

To open the on-screen menu:

1. Press the Menu button on the remote.

2. Use the Arrow buttons to highlight a menu option, and press the OK button to select that option.

While navigating the on-screen menu, you can press the

button at any time to return to the previous menu screen. The Exit button will close the on-screen menu.

CHANGING THE INPUT SOURCE

External devices, such as DVD players, Blu-ray Players, and video game consoles, can be connected to your TV. To use one of these devices with your TV, you must first change the input source using the Input menu.

To change the input sources:

1. Press the Input button on the remote. The Input menu is displayed.

2. Use the Right/Left Arrow buttons or the Input button on the remote to highlight the input you wish to view and press is displayed.

OK . The selected input

Input Name

Change Input

SMARTCAST WatchFree HDMI-1 HDMI-2 HDMI-3 HDMI-4 COMP TV

Note: Inputs may vary by TV.

You can change the input names that appear on the

Input menu to make your devices easy to recognize. See

Renaming Devices on the Input Menu for more information.

17

3

CHANGING THE SCREEN ASPECT RATIO

To change the screen aspect ratio:

Menu > System > Aspect Ratio

Use the Arrow press OK .

buttons to highlight the aspect ratio you wish to view and

Some programs have black bars on the top or sides of the picture so that the picture keeps its original shape. Examples include widescreen movies and older television programs.

Your TV can display images in different modes: Normal, Stretch, Wide,

Zoom, and Panoramic.

•

•

•

•

•

Normal (default) – No change to aspect ratio.

Stretch – When the 16:9 signal is a 4:3 image with black bars left and right, stretches to fill the screen.

Wide – Stretches a 4:3 aspect ratio to fill 16:9 screen. If a 16:9 image, adds black bars to top and bottom.

Zoom – Expands image both horizontally and vertically by 14%.

Panoramic* - Stretches a 4:3 image to fill 16:9 screen with an algorithm so the center doesn’t look stretched.

Normal Stretch Wide Zoom

Tip: The aspect ratio cannot be changed for Ultra HD content or HDR content.

*Available aspect ratio settings may vary by input source. Panoramic mode is only available for standard definition TV (480i/480p).

18

277

278

VIZIO TV

3

ADJUSTING THE PICTURE SETTINGS

Your TV can be adjusted to suit your preferences and viewing conditions.

If you save changes to the settings for a picture mode, an asterisk appears after its name (see Saving a Custom Picture Mode ).

To adjust the picture settings:

1. Press the Menu button on the remote. The on-screen menu is displayed.

2. Use the Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight Picture and press

OK. The Picture menu is displayed.

3. Use the Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight then use the Left/Right Arrow

Picture Mode ,

buttons to change the picture mode:

•

•

Standar d mode sets the picture settings to the default settings.

Calibrated mode sets the picture settings to values ideal for watching TV in a brightly-lit room.

• Calibrated Dark mode sets the picture settings to values ideal for watching TV in a dark room.

•

•

Vivid mode sets the picture settings to values that produce a brighter, more vivid picture.

Game mode reduces throughput delays and optimizes the picture settings for displaying game console output.

• Computer mode optimizes the picture settings for displaying computer output.

4. To manually change each of the picture settings, use the Up/

Down Arrow setting:

buttons on the remote to highlight that picture setting, then use the Left/Right Arrow buttons to adjust the

• Backlight - Adjusts the LED brightness to affect the overall brilliance of the picture. Backlight cannot be adjusted when starting from some picture modes.

Picture Back

Picture Mode Calibrated

•

•

Brightness - Adjusts the black level of the picture. When this setting is too low, the picture may be too dark to distinguish details.

When this setting is too high, the picture may appear faded or washed out.

Backlight 90

Brightness 50

Contrast 50

Color 50

Tint 0

Sharpness 20

More Picture

Contrast - Adjusts the white level of the picture. When this setting is too low, the picture may appear dark. When this setting is too high, the picture may appear faded or washed out. If the setting is too high or too low, detail may be difficult to distinguish in dark or bright areas of the picture.

Picture Mode Edit

Color Calibration

•

•

•

Color - Adjusts the intensity of the picture colors.

Tint - Adjusts the hue of the picture. This setting is useful in adjusting the flesh tones in the picture. If flesh appears too orange, reduce the level of color before adjusting tint.

Sharpness - Adjusts the edge sharpness of picture elements.

It can be used to sharpen non-HD (high definition) content; however, it will not produce detail that does not otherwise exist.

When you have finished adjusting the picture settings, press the Exit button on the remote.

Adjusting More Picture Settings

To adjust more picture settings:

1. From the PICTURE menu, use the

Arrow buttons to highlight More

Picture , and then press OK .

2. Use the Arrow buttons to highlight the setting you wish to adjust, then press the Left/Right Arrow change the setting:

buttons to

• Color Temperature - See Adjusting the Color Temperature.

•

•

Black Detail* Adjusts the average brightness of the picture to compensate for large areas of brightness. Select or High .

Off , Low , Medium ,

Backlight Control - When ON , it will improve the contrast ratio of the picture by adjusting backlight zones. Specific adjustments are based on content.

More Picture

Color Temperature

Black Detail*

Backlight Control

Reduce Noise

Game Low Latency

Film Mode*

Color Space**

Gamma

Back

Normal

Off

On

Off

On

Auto

2.2

•

•

•

•

•

Reduce Noise:

Diminishes artifacts in the image caused by the digitizing of image motion content. Select Off , Low , Medium , or

High .

- Reduce Block Noise files. Select Off , Low

Reduces pixelation and distortion for mpeg

, Medium , or High .

Game Low Latency - Select On when gaming.

to reduce video delay (lag)

Film Mode* or Off .

- Optimizes the picture for watching film. Select Auto

Color Space** – Select color space for the source. Video sources use

YCbCr, but PC uses RGB. Available for HDMI input only.

Gamma - Set the shape of the Gamma curve. Use lower Gamma values for bright room conditions, and higher values when it’s dark.

3. When you have finished adjusting More Picture Settings, press the Exit button on the remote.

* Not applicable to D24h-G9

**Applicable models: D50x-G9, V505-G9, V405-G9 and V655-G9

19

3

Adjusting the Color Temperature

Adjusting the color temperature changes the white balance of the picture.

To adjust the color temperature:

1. From the MORE PICTURE menu, use the Arrow buttons to highlight Color

Temperature , and then press OK .

2. Use the Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight a color temperature preset and then press OK .

• Normal is optimized for television viewing.

• Cool produces a blue-hued picture.

• Computer optimizes the picture for use as a

PC monitor.

3. When you have finished adjusting the color temperature, press the button on the remote.

Exit

Color Temperature

Normal

Cool

Computer

Back

Adjusting the Picture Mode Edit Settings

Picture Mode Edit Settings allow you to make precise adjustments to the picture and to create picture modes to save groups of picture settings.

To adjust the Picture Mode Edit settings:

1. From the PICTURE menu, use the buttons to highlight and then press OK

Arrow

Picture Mode Edit ,

. The PICTURE MODE

EDIT menu is displayed.

2. Use the Arrow buttons to highlight the setting you wish to adjust, then press OK to change the setting:

• Save Picture Mode - Save a custom picture mode.

•

•

Lock Picture Mode - Prevent changes to custom picture modes. Choose between

On or Off .

Reset Picture Mode † - Reset the picture mode settings to factory default values.

Picture Mode Edit

Save Picture Mode

Lock Picture Mode

Reset Picture Mode - Vivid

Back

Saving a Custom Picture Mode

Custom picture modes allow you to save a group of custom settings for various viewing conditions and video sources.

• Changes made while on any preset picture mode will add an asterisk on the top right corner of the preset mode.

• The custom picture mode is not automatically saved.

To save a custom picture mode:

1. From the PICTURE MODE EDIT menu, use the Arrow buttons to highlight

Save Picture Mode

OK

, and then press

. The SAVE PICTURE MODE menu is displayed.

2. Use either on-screen keyboard to enter a name for your custom picture mode.

3. Highlight Save

4. Press the screens.

Exit

and press OK .

button to exit the menu

Save Picture Mode Back s

1 j a

.@# t

2 b k u

3 l c

äêí v

4 d m w

5 e n x

6 f o

Space y

7 g p z

8 h q

0

9 r i

Save

† Only available on customized preset modes.

20

VIZIO TV

3

Locking/Unlocking a Custom Picture Mode

Custom picture modes can be locked/unlocked with a unique PIN to prevent accidental changes to their settings.

To lock all custom picture modes:

1.

From the PICTURE MODE EDIT menu, use the Arrow highlight then press OK

buttons to

Lock Picture Mode

MODE menu is displayed.

, and

. The LOCK PICTURE

2.

Use the Number Pad on your remote to enter a unique 4-digit

PIN. If a system PIN is set, then lock/ unlock. If no system PIN is set, then you will be prompted to set a PIN.

3.

Highlight Save and press OK .

4.

Press the Exit button to exit the menu screens.


Enter the System PIN to lock all custom picture modes.

System Pin Code

Cancel Save

Back

To unlock all custom picture modes:

1.

From the PICTURE MODE EDIT menu, use the Arrow highlight then press OK

buttons to


MODE menu is displayed.

, and

. The LOCK PICTURE

2.

Use the Arrow buttons to select Off.

3.

Use the Number Pad on your remote to enter your 4-digit PIN.

4.

Make any desired changes to the picture modes.

5.

Then turn ON Lock Picture Mode.

6.


Deleting a Custom Picture Mode

Custom picture modes that are no longer needed can be deleted.

Inputs assigned to a deleted custom picture mode become assigned to the Calibrated picture mode.

To delete a custom picture mode:

1.

From the PICTURE MODE EDIT menu, use the Arrow buttons to highlight

Delete Picture Mode

OK

, and then press

. The DELETE PICTURE MODE window is displayed.

2.

Use the Left/Right Arrow buttons to highlight Delete and press OK .

3.


To delete the user created Custom 1 picture mode, select the Delete button.

Delete Cancel

Resetting a Picture Mode

A preset picture mode that has been edited can be restored to the factory default settings.

To reset a customized preset picture mode:

1.

From the PICTURE MODE EDIT menu, use the Arrow buttons to highlight

Reset Picture Mode

OK

, and then press

. The RESET PICTURE MODE window is displayed.

2.

Use the Left/Right Arrow buttons to highlight Reset and press OK .

3.


Select Reset to restor the Standard picture mode to factory defaults.

Reset Cancel

21

3

Adjusting the Color Tuner Settings

The Color Tuner settings allow you to adjust the HSB color and 11 point white balance, turn color channels off for testing, and display color bar, flat, and ramp test patterns.

The Color Tuner, 11 Point White Balance, and test patterns allow technicians to manually calibrate the TV. Calibration requires specialized training, an input with precisely set colors, and a specialized light meter.

To adjust the HSB color settings :

1. From the COLOR CALIBRATION menu, use the Arrow buttons to highlight displayed.

Color Tuner , and then press OK . The Color Tuner menu is

Hue

Saturation

Brightness

Offset

Gain

Red

0

-1

-24

0

0

Green

0

5

0

0

0

Color Tuner

Blue

0

-4

-22

0

0

Cyan

0

0

0

Magenta

25

-2

0

Yellow

-14

0

0

2. Use the Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight the Hue,

Saturation, Brightness, Offset, or Gain of the color you wish to adjust.

Press the OK button.

3. Use the Left/Right Arrow buttons to adjust the value. When you are finished press the OK button to save the setting.

4. When you have finished adjusting the color tuner settings, press the

Exit button.

To turn color channels off and on:

1. From the COLOR CALIBRATION menu, use the Arrow buttons to highlight Color Tuner is displayed.

, and then press OK . The COLOR TUNER menu

Hue

Saturation

Brightness

Offset

Gain

Red

0

-1

-24

0

0

Green

0

5

0

0

0

Color Tuner

Blue

0

-4

-22

0

0

Cyan

0

0

0

Magenta

25

-2

0

Yellow

-14

0

0

2. Use the Arrow

Blue .

buttons on the remote to highlight Red , Green , or

3. Press the OK button to turn the color channel off or on. An X appears over a color channel that has been turned off.

4. Use the Arrow buttons to highlight another color channel to turn off or on. Only two color channels can be turned off at the same time.

5. When you have finished with the color channels, press the button.

Exit

To show or hide the SMPTE Test Pattern:

1. From the Color Tuner menu, use the Arrow buttons to highlight

Calibration Tests , and then press the Left/Right Arrow buttons until the SMPTE TEST PATTERN menu is displayed.

SMPT Test Pattern

Off

2. Use the Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight Off

3.

Right Arrow buttons to highlight On to show the SMPTE Pattern.

To hide the SMPTE Test Pattern, use the Left/Right highlight Off .

—or—

When you are finished, press the Exit button.

. Use the Left/

Arrow buttons to

To adjust the 11 Point White Balance settings:


Color Tuner , and then press the Left/Right Arrow buttons until the

11 POINT WHITE BALANCE menu is displayed.

Gain

5%

11 Point White Balance

Red

0

Green

0

Blue

0

To show or hide the Flat Test Pattern:


Calibration Tests , and then press the Left/Right Arrow buttons until the FLAT TEST PATTERN menu is displayed.

Flat Test Pattern

Off


Color values buttons on the remote to highlight the

you wish to adjust. Press the OK

Left/Right Arrow

Gain and

button and use the press the OK

buttons to adjust the value. When you are finished,

button to save the setting.

3. When you have finished, press the Exit button.


Right Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight

buttons to select the percentage brightness for the pattern at that brightness.

Off . Use the Left/ flat test pattern. Selecting a percentage immediately shows the flat

—or—

To disable the Flat Test Pattern, use the Left/Right highlight Off .

Arrow buttons to

3. When you are finished, press the Exit button.

22

279

VIZIO TV

To show or hide the Ramp Test Pattern:


Calibration Tests , and then press the Left/Right Arrow buttons until the RAMP TEST PATTERN menu is displayed.

Ramp Test Pattern

To show or hide the Uniformity Analyzer Test Pattern:


Calibration Test , and then press the Left/Right Arrow buttons until the UNIFORMITY ANALYZER TEST PATTERN menu is displayed.

Uniformity Analyzer Test Pattern

Off

Off


Right Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight Off

Selecting a color immediately shows that color ramp.

. Use the Left/

buttons to select the color for the ramp test pattern.

—or—

To hide the Ramp Test Pattern, use the Left/Right highlight Off .

Arrow buttons to



Right Arrow

Test Pattern. buttons on the remote to highlight

buttons to highlight On

Off . Use the Left/

to show the Uniformity Analyzer

—or—

To hide the Uniformity Analyzer Test Pattern, use the Left/Right

Arrow buttons to highlight Off .


3

3

23

280

ADJUSTING THE AUDIO SETTINGS

•

To adjust the audio settings:

1.

Press the Menu button on the remote. The on-screen menu is displayed.

Audio Back

2.

Use the Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight Audio and press OK

Audio menu is displayed.

. The

Speakers

Volume Control Display

Auto

On

•

•

•

3.

Use the Arrow buttons to highlight the setting you wish to adjust, then press Left/Right Arrow change the setting:

buttons to

Speakers

On or Off.

- Turns the built-in speakers

Volume Control Display - Toggle between On or Off to hide or display the on-screen volume slider that appears when volume is adjusted.

Surround Sound

Volume Leveling

Balance

Lip Sync

Digital Audio Out

Analog Audio Out

On

On

0

0

Auto

Fixed

Surround Sound - Surround sound uses DTS TruSurround™ to deliver an immersive surround sound experience from the TV’s internal speakers. TruSurround completes the entertainment experience by providing deep, rich bass and by delivering crisp details and clear, intelligible dialog. Select On or Off.

Volume Leveling - Volume leveling uses DTS TruVolume™ to maintain consistent volume levels during transitions between program content, AV formats, and input sources. Select On or Off.

In a few cases, volume leveling may artificially suppress volume increases, making it difficult to hear dialog or flattening sudden noises. If this occurs, turn volume leveling off.

When the TV speakers are set to On, DTS signals cannot be passed through digital audio outputs.

• Balance - Adjusts the loudness of the audio output from the left and right speakers.

•

• Lip Sync - Adjusts the synchronization between the display image and the accompanying audio track.

Digital Audio Out - Changes the type of processing for digital audio out and HDMI ARC output when connected to a home theater audio system. Select Auto, PCM, Dolby D or Bitstream.

You must select Bitstream for audio with more than two channels (3.0, 5.0, or 5.1, for example).

• Analog Audio Out - Sets the volume control properties for the RCA connector when connected to a home theater audio system. Select

Variable if you are controlling the volume with the TV’s volume controls, or select Fixed if an external audio device (sound bar or AV receiver) will control the volume.

4.

When you have finished adjusting the audio settings, press the button on the remote.

Exit

24

VIZIO TV

3

ADJUSTING THE NETWORK SETTINGS

Your TV is Internet-ready, featuring both an Ethernet port and built-in high-speed Wireless-N. D24h-G9 , D32h-G9 and D40f-G9 support

Wireless-N. D50x-G9, V405-G9, V505-G9 and V655-G9 support Wireless-AC.

If your TV is connected to a network with an Ethernet cable, you will not see the wireless network connection menu. You must unplug the Ethernet cable to set a wireless network connection

Connecting to a Wireless Network

To connect to a wireless network whose network name (SSID) is being broadcast:


The on-screen menu is displayed.

2. Use the Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight Network and press OK

The NETWORK menu is displayed.

.

3. If you do not see your wireless network displayed, highlight More Access

Points and press OK. The WIRELESS

ACCESS POINTS menu, which is a list of available wireless networks, is displayed.

4. Highlight the name of your wireless network (this is the network’s SSID) and press OK .

5. Using the on-screeen keyboard, enter your network’s password, then highlight Connect and press OK .

6. Press the Exit button on the remote.

Network

Wireless Access Points

Manual Setup

Hidden Networks

Test Connection

Back

Wired Connection Disconnected

Changing the Manual Setup Settings

Advanced users can fine-tune the network settings using the Manual Setup feature.

To change advanced network settings:

1. From the NETWORK menu, highlight

Manual Setup and press OK. The

MANUAL SETUP menu is displayed.

Manual Setup Back

DHCP Off

•

•

2. To change the settings manually, use the Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight DHCP and then use the Left/

Right Arrow buttons to change the setting to Off.

3. Use the Arrow and OK buttons to adjust each setting:

• IP Address the TV.

The IP address assigned to

•

Subnet Mask - The subnet Exit 2D

Default Gateway - Your network’s default gateway address.

Pref. DNS Server - Your preferred domain name server address.

IP Adress __. __.__.__

Subnet Mask __. __.__.__

Defult Gateway __. __.__.__

Pref. DNS Server __. __.__.__

Alt DNS Server __. __.__.__

RJ45 Mac 0:0:0:0:0:0

Wireless Mac 0:0:0:0:0:0

Save

Cancel

• Alt. DNS Server - Your alternate domain name server address.

4. Use the Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight Save and press OK .


Finding MAC Addresses for Network Setup

The security settings on your router may require you to enter the TV’s

MAC address in the router’s settings. To find the TV’s MAC address:

1. From the NETWORK menu, highlight Manual Setup and press

MANUAL SETUP menu is displayed.

OK . The

2. Find the MAC address for the TV at the bottom of the list. The MAC addresses for the connections in use are displayed:

• RJ45 MAC - The Ethernet or RJ45 MAC address may be needed to set up your network when you have connected the TV to your network when you have connected the TV to your network with an Ethernet

(Cat 5) cable.

• Wireless MAC - The Wireless (WiFi) MAC address may be needed to connect your TV to your network with WiFi.

25

3

Connecting to a Hidden Network

To connect to a wireless network whose network name (SSID) is not being broadcast:

1.

From the NETWORK menu, highlight

Hidden Network and press OK . The

ENTER ACCESS POINT NAME screen is displayed.

2.

Using the on-screen keyboard, enter your network’s name (SSID), then highlight Connect and press OK.

3.

Using the on-screen keyboard, enter your network’s password, then highlight Connect and press OK .

4.

Press the Exit button on the remote.

Back

Enter Acces Point Name

Enter your access point name. This is used to connect to an access point with a hidden SSID.

s

1 j a

.@# t

2 b k u

3 l c

äêí v

4 d m w

5 e n x

6 f o

Space y

7 g p z

8 h q

0

9 r i

Connect

Testing Your Network Connection

To test your network connection:

1.

From the NETWORK menu, highlight Test Connection and press OK .

2.

The TEST CONNECTION screen displays the connection method, network name, signal strength, and download speed of your network connection.

3.


26

281

VIZIO TV

SETTING TIMERS

Setting the Timer

When activated, the TV’s timer will turn the TV off after a set period of time.

1.


Timers Back

Sleep Timer Off 2.

Use the Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight Timers press OK displayed.

and

. The TIMERS menu is

3.

Use the Left/Right Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight the period of time after which you want the TV to go to sleep: 30, 60, 90,

120, or 180 minutes. If you don’t want the sleep timer to activate, change the setting to Off .

4.

When you have finished setting the sleep timer, press the Exit button on the remote.

Auto Power Off

Blank Screen

10 Minutes

Setting the Auto Power Off Feature

To help save energy, your TV is set by default to turn off after 10 minutes without a video or audio signal. This feature can be deactivated.

To set the Auto Power Off feature:

1.

From the TIMERS menu, use the Up/Down Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight Auto Power Off .

2.

Use the Left/Right Arrow buttons on the remote to change whether the TV will turn off.

If you don’t want the TV to turn off when there is no signal, change the setting to Off . Otherwise, select 10 minutes .

3.

When you have finished setting the auto power off time, press the

Exit button on the remote.

Using the Blank Screen Feature

To help save LED life, your TV screen can turn on or off while audio is streaming. To use the Blank Screen feature:

1.

From the TIMERS menu, use the Up/Down Arrow remote to highlight Blank Screen.

buttons on the

2.

Press the OK button to immediatly blank the screen.

3.

To exit Blank Screen, press any key.

3

282

3

SETTING UP CHANNELS

•

•

•

•

•

You can use the TV’s Channels menu to:

Find Channels

Select channels to skip

Select Analog Audio mode

Select the language for Digital Audio

Set Parental Controls

Channels

Find Channels

Skip Channels

Analog Audio

Digital Audio

Parental Control

Back

Stereo

English

Scanning for Channels

The TV may need to scan for channels before it can display programs and their associated information. A channel scan is required for free over-the-air channels (using an antenna) and cable channels from an outof-the-wall connection (without a cable box). Moving the TV to an area with different channels requires the TV to scan for channels again.

To perform an Auto Channel Scan:

1.

From the CHANNELS menu, highlight Find Channels , and press

OK . The auto channel scan begins.

2.

Wait until the channel scan is 100% complete. Highlight Done and press

OK .

3.


If the channel scan is canceled, the channels that were already discovered are retained. A new channel scan will clear all channels.

Find Channels

Channels Found

Digitial : 8

Analog: 12

45% Complete

Cancel

Back

Skipping Channels

After a channel scan is completed, you may find that some channels are too weak to watch comfortably. There may also be some channels you do not want to view. You can remove these channels from the TV’s memory with the Skip Channel feature.

Channels that have been removed with the Skip Channel feature can still be viewed if the channel is entered using the

Number Pad. If you wish to completely block a channel from being viewed, use the parental controls. See Locking and

Unlocking Channels.

To remove a channel:

1.

From the CHANNELS menu, highlight

Skip Channel , and press OK . The

SKIP CHANNEL menu is displayed.

2.

For each channel you wish to remove, use the Up/Down Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight the channel and press OK . A P appears to the right of each channel you select.

3.

When you have selected all of the channels you wish to remove, press the Exit button on the remote.

Skip Channels

0

1

2

3

4

Test 0

Test 1

Test 2

Test 3

Test 4

Back

27

28

VIZIO TV

3

LISTENING TO ALTERNATE AUDIO

Changing the Analog Audio Language

Some analog over-the-air (free) and cable channels broadcast programs in more than one language. The TV’s Analog Audio feature allows you to listen to audio in an alternate language using Secondary Audio

Programming (SAP).

Not all programs are broadcast in SAP. The Analog

Audio Language feature only works when the program being viewed is being broadcast with Secondary Audio

Programming.

To use the Analog Audio feature:

1. From the Channels menu, highlight

Analog Audio and press OK . The

Analog Audio menu is displayed.

2. Select Stereo, SAP (secondary audio programming), or Mono. Press OK .


Analog Audio

Stereo

SAP

Mono

Back

To use the Digital Language feature:

1. From the CHANNELS menu, highlight

Digital Audio displayed.

and press OK .

The DIGITAL LANGUAGE menu is

2. Select your preferred language:

English, Spanish/Video Description,

French . Press OK .


Digital Audio

English

Spanish/ Video Description

French

Back

29

3

Parental controls

USING PARENTAL CONTROLS

The TV’s parental controls allow you to prevent the TV from displaying certain channels or programs without a password.

Other devices have their own parental control settings.

•

•

The PARENTAL CONTROLS menu only appears when:

You are using the tuner to receive your TV signals, such as when you are using an antenna for Over-the-Air signals or when connected to cable TV directly from the wall (no cable box).

You have a device connected using a composite video cable or a coaxial cable, such as a VCR, satellite or cable box, or DVR.

Accessing the Parental Controls Menu

To access the PARENTAL CONTROLS menu:

1.


2.

Use the Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight Channels and press OK . The CHANNELS menu is displayed.

3.

Use the Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight Parental Controls and press OK .

4.

Enter your set System PIN.

Enabling or Disabling Program Ratings

To manage program content according to its rating, you must enable the

Program Rating feature.

To enable or disable the Program Rating feature:

1.

From the PARENTAL CONTROLS menu, highlight Locks and press OK

The LOCKS menu is displayed.

2.

Select On or Off and press OK .

.

Locking and Unlocking Channels

When a channel is locked, it will be inaccessible. Locking a channel is a good way to prevent children from viewing inappropriate material.

To lock or unlock a channel:

1.

From the PARENTAL CONTROLS menu, highlight Channel Locks and press OK . The CHANNEL LOCKS menu is displayed.

2.

Highlight the channel you want to lock or unlock and press OK .

3.

When a channel is locked, the Lock icon appears locked channel is not accessible unless the parental PIN is entered.

. The

4.

When a channel is unlocked, the

The channel is accessible.

Lock icon appears unlocked .

To set a custom PIN passcode, see Setting a System Pin.

Blocking and Unblocking Content by Rating

A channel may sometimes broadcast programs that are meant for children, and at other times broadcast programs that are meant for mature audiences. You may not want to block the channel completely using a channel lock, but you may wish to block certain programs from being viewed.

For a list of content ratings and their definitions, visit www.tvguidelines.org.

When this is the case, you can use the TV’s Rating Block feature to block content based on its rating.

•

•

•

To block or unblock content by its rating:

1.

From the PARENTAL CONTROLS menu, highlight the content type you want to adjust and press OK :

USA TV - USA television program broadcasts.

USA Movie - USA movie broadcasts.

Canadian English - Canadian English television program broadcasts.

• Canadian French - Canadian French television program broadcasts.

2.

3.

For each rating type you want to block or unblock, use the Up/Down and Left/Right Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight the rating type and press OK .

When the rating type is blocked , the Lock icon appears locked

Content with this rating and all higher ratings cannot be viewed.

.

4.

When the rating type is unblocked , the Lock unlocked viewed.

icon appears

. Content with this rating and all lower ratings can be

If you want to block all unrated content, highlight Block Unrated Shows and use the Arrow buttons on the remote to select On .

5.

When you are finished adjusting the rating level blocks, press the button on the remote.

Exit

30

283

284

VIZIO TV

3

SETTING UP CLOSED CAPTIONING

Your TV can display closed captions for programs that include them.

Closed captions display a transcription of a program’s dialogue.

If the program you are viewing is not being broadcast with closed captions, the TV will not display them.

The Closed Captions menu does not appear when an HDMI input is selected.

To activate or deactivate closed captions:

1. Press the displayed.

Menu button on the remote. The on-screen menu is

2. Use the Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight Closed Captions and press OK.

The CLOSED CAPTIONS menu is displayed.

3. Use the Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight Closed Captions and then use the Left/Right Arrow select On or Off.

buttons to

4. Use the Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight either

Closed Captions .

Analog or Digital

5. Use the Left/Right Arrow buttons on the remote to select the caption channel you wish to display, then press Exit .

Closed Captions Back

Closed Captions Off

Analog Closed Captions CC1

Digital Closed Captions CS1

Digital Style

Changing the Appearance of Digital Closed Captions

Digital closed captions can be displayed according to your preference.

See the diagram on the next page for an explanation of the parts of the closed caption area.

To change the appearance of digital closed captions:

1. From the CLOSED CAPTIONS menu, use the Arrow buttons to highlight Digital Style and press OK .

•

•

•

2. Use the Left/Right Arrow buttons on the remote to select Custom .

The DIGITAL STYLE menu appears as shown.

3. Use the Up/Down Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight the setting you wish to change, then use the Left/Right Arrow change the setting:

buttons to

•

•

Caption Style

Custom

- Choose As Broadcast to keep default settings or

to manually change each setting.

Text Style - Change the font used for the closed captioning text.

Text Size - Make the text larger or smaller.

Digital Style

•

Text Color text.

- Change the color of the text.

Text Opacity - Change the transparency of the

Text Edges - Change the effects at the edges of the text, such as raising the edges or adding drop shadows.

Back

Text Style As Broadcast

Test Size Large

Text Color Blue

Text Opacity As Broadcast

Text Edges As Broadcast

Text Edges Color As Broadcast

•

•

•

•

•

Text Edges Color - Change the color of the text edge effects.

Background Color - Change the color of the background directly behind the text.

Background Opacity - Change the transparency of the background directly behind the text.

Window Color captioning box.

- Change the color of the closed

Window Opacity - Change the opacity of the closed captioning box.

Background Color As Broadcast

Background Opacity As Broadcast

Window Color As Broadcast

Window Opacity As Broadcast

4. When you are satisfied with the appearance of the closed captions, press the Exit button on the remote.

3

31

Typical choices include:

•

•

Opaque background, transparent window background appears behind the text, expanding as the text appears.

This is the typical "As Broadcast" mode.

—Only a strip of

Opaque background and window in the same color —When text appears, the entire line fills with color at once.

In the example, the closed caption text is green, the background is black, and the window is red.

Text Background

CLOSED CAPTION TEXT SAMPLE

Window

CLOSED CAPTIONS SCREEN LAYOUT

32

VIZIO TV

3

RENAMING DEVICES ON THE INPUT MENU

You can rename the inputs to make them easier to recognize on the

Input menu. For example, if you have a DVD player connected to the

Component input, you can rename that input to display “DVD Player.”

See Changing the Input Source.

To change the name of an input:



2. Use the Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight Input Settings and press OK . The INPUT SETTINGS menu is displayed.

3. Highlight the input device that you want to rename and press OK .

To use a preset input name:

• Highlight the Name Input row and press OK .

• Highlight the input name and use the Left/Right Arrow the remote to cycle through preset input names

buttons on

—or—

To enter a custom name:

• Highlight the Name Input row and press OK .

• Enter your custom label using the on-screen keyboard.

• Highlight and press OK .

• The Input Name changes to show the custom name that you created.

4. When you have finished naming your input, press the Exit button on the remote.

Input Name

Input Settings Back

TV

HDMI-1 Blu-Ray

HDMI-2 Cable Box

HDMI-3 HDMI-3

COMP Game Console

Custom Name

CHANGING THE TV SETTINGS

Using the SYSTEM menu, you can:

• Check for updates

• View system information

• Change the on-screen menu language

• Set time zone and local settings

• Adjust the CEC settings

• Adjust the power mode settings

• Adjust to preserve Aspect Ratio or fill the screen

• Name the TV

• Review and maintain the list of paired devices

• Adjust accessibility settings

• Reset the TV settings & setup administrative controls

System Back

Check for Updates

System Information

Menu Language English

Time & Local Settings

CEC

Power Mode Quick Start

Aspect Ratio Normal

TV Name Office TV

Mobile Devices

Accessibility

Reset and Admin

Checking for System Updates

To check for a system update:

1. Press the Menu button on the remote. The on-screen Menu is displayed.

2.

3.

4.

Use the Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight System

OK . The SYSTEM menu is displayed.

Use the Arrow

Updates buttons on the remote to highlight Check for

and press OK

and press

. The TV will begin to check for updates.

If an update is found, the TV will ask to confirm the update. If no update is found, the screen will note No Update Available .

Viewing System Information

To view technical data and status information about your TV and network connection:


2. Use the Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight System


and press

3. Highlight System Information and press OK .

4. Use the Up/Down Arrow buttons to scroll through the system information.

5. When you are finished reviewing the system information, press the

Exit button on the remote.

Changing the On-Screen Menu Language

Your TV can display the on-screen menu in different languages.

To change the on-screen menu language:


The on-screen menu is displayed.

2. Use the Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight System and press OK . The

SYSTEM menu is displayed.

3. Use the Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight Menu Language press OK is displayed.

and

. The MENU LANGUAGE menu

4.

(

Highlight your preferred language

English press OK

, Español

.

, or Français ) and


Menu Language

English

Español

Français

Back

3

33

34

285

286

VIZIO TV

3

Setting the Time and Local Settings

To ensure the correct time is displayed when you press the Info button, set the TV’s time zone:


2. Use the Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight System and press OK .

The SYSTEM menu is displayed.

3. Use the Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight Time & Local Settings and press OK . The menu headed by the local date and time is displayed.

Time and Local Settings

June 11, 2018 11:48AM

Back

Time Zone Pacific (-8)

Daylight Savings Time Auto

Time Format

Country USA

4. Highlight Time Zone and press OK

The TIME ZONE menu is displayed.

.

5. Highlight your time zone and press

OK .

6. Highlight Daylight Saving Time and press OK . The DAYLIGHT SAVING

TIME menu is displayed. Choose On if it is currently Daylight Savings Time,

Off if it is Standard Time, or Auto to have the system automatically detect Daylight Savings Settings.


Adjusting the CEC Settings

The CEC function on your TV enables you to control devices connected to

HDMI (ARC) input with the included remote, without any programming.

Using CEC, your VIZIO TV remote can control:

• Power On/Off

• Volume

• Mute

Not all HDMI devices support CEC. See your device’s user manual for details.

To enable, disable, or adjust CEC settings:

1. Set up your audio device and connect it to the HDMI-1(HDMI Arc) input on the TV

2. On your audio device, select the HDMI ARC input.




and press

5. Use the Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight

The CEC menu is displayed.

CEC and press OK .

6. Highlight CEC and press OK . Select a setting and then press OK .

•

•

CEC - To use CEC, you must select Enable.

Device Discovery - To determine if your device is connected and supports CEC, select Device Discovery and then press OK .


Adjusting the Power Mode

Your TV is set to Eco Mode by default. When the TV is powered off, Eco

Mode setting uses less than 0.5W of power. Quick Start Mode enables your Display to power on faster.

Please note that by changing this setting the energy consumption required to operate this device will change.

To switch between Eco Mode and Quick Start Mode:


Menu button on the remote. The on-screen Menu is

2. Use the Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight System and press

OK . The SYSTEM Menu is displayed.

3. Use the Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight Power Mode press OK . The Power Mode Menu is displayed.

and

4. Highlight either Eco Mode or Quick Start Mode and press select.

OK to

35

Changing the TV Name

Naming your TV helps differentiate it from other cast devices you may have in your home.

To edit your TV name:


2. Use the Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight System and press OK .

The SYSTEM menu is displayed.

TV Name

Living Room TV s

1 j a

.@# t

2 b k

Back

0

9 r i

3. Use the Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight TV Name and press OK .

The TV name input menu is displayed.

4. Enter your custom name using the on-screen keyboard.


Ok

Cancel u

3 l c

äêí v

4 d m w

5 e n x

6 f o

Space y

7 g p z

8 h q

Manging Mobile Devices

Your TV can be paired with a mobile device so you can easily control your

TV across multiple devices .

To see a list of paired devices or unpair a device:

1. Press the Menu button on the remote. The on-screen Menu is displayed.


OK. The SYSTEM Menu is displayed.

3. Use the Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight Mobile Devices and press OK . The list of paired devices appears.

4. Highlight a device name to delete it and press OK .

5. Use the Left/Right Arrows to select

Yes or No when asked to confirm.

Mobile Devices

Djae’s Tablet

Ana’s Phone

Work iPad

Back

Accessibility settings

VIZIO is committed to providing intuitive, user-friendly products. Your new VIZIO TV offers several accessibility features that can help you get the most out of it.

To access the Accessibility menu:

1. Press the control.

Menu button on the remote

2. Use the Arrow and OK buttons to navigate and select System à

Accessibility .

3. Talk Back - Turn Text-to-Speech Talk

Back On or Off . Text-to-Speech Talk Back enables your TV to speak all settings changes and adjustments using the remote in English.

4. Speech Rate * - Adjusts the rate in which

Text-to-Speech is spoken. Select

Normal (Default) , or Fast .

Slow ,

5. Zoom Mode - Enlarges a section of the screen by approximately 200%.

Accessibility Back

Talk Back Off

Speech Rate Normal

Zoom Mode Off

To access the Closed Caption menu:

• Press the control.

Menu button on the remote

• Use the Arrow and OK buttons to navigate and select Closed

Captions.

To access the Video Description menu:

• Press the Menu button on the remote control.

• Use the Arrow

Channel

and OK buttons to navigate and select Settings à

à Digital Audio à Spanish/ Video Description.

3

*Available only in English.

36

VIZIO TV

USING THE RESET & ADMIN MENU

You can use the TV’s RESET & ADMIN menu to restore the TV to its factory default settings as well as access other system settings.

Using the RESET & ADMIN , you can:

• Reset the TV to factory settings

• Force the system to power off and on

• Create a system pin code to lock content and picture settings

• Enable or disable program offers and suggestions

• Enable or disable anonymous debug data for system performance.

• Start or stop the Store Demo Mode

Reset & Admin Back

Reset to Factory Defaults

Soft Power Cycle

Power Indicator On

System PIN Code

USB Power Always On

Viewing Data

VIZIO Privacy Policy

Store Demo

Restoring the TV to Factory Default Settings

All of the on-screen menu settings can be reset to the factory defaults.

If you restore the TV to the factory default settings, all changes you have made to the settings will be lost! This includes any wireless or picture settings

To restore the TV to its factory default settings:




and press

3. Highlight Reset & Admin and press OK . The RESET & ADMIN menu is displayed.

4. Highlight Reset to Factory Defaults and press OK . If you have changed the set system PIN, enter it now.

The TV displays, “Select Reset to restore all TV settings to factory defaults and clear all account information.”

5. Highlight Reset and press OK .

6. Wait for the TV to turn off. The TV will turn back on shortly afterward and the setup process will begin.

Performing a Soft Power Cycle

A soft power cycle forces the TV to turn off then on again.




and press

3. Highlight Reset & Admin and press OK . The RESET & ADMIN menu is displayed.

4. Highlight Soft Power Cycle and press OK .”

5. Highlight Yes and press OK .

6. The TV will turn off then on again

Turning the Power Indicator On or Off

The Power Indicator on the front of your TV normally does not glow when the TV is on. You can change this setting if you prefer the light to be on.

To turn the Power Indicator Light On or Off:




OK . The System menu is displayed.

3. Use the Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight Reset & Admin and press OK . The Reset & Admin menu is displayed.

4. Highlight Power Indicator and press OK .

5. Use the Left/Right Arrow buttons to select On or Off.

3

37

3

Setting a System PIN

You can set a System Pin to lock content and picture modes as well as prevent accidental system resets. The first time you select System PIN code, you will need to create a PIN. To create a PIN.



System PIN Code Back

2. Use the Arrow buttons on the remote to highlight

OK

System and press

. The SYSTEM menu is displayed.

Change the PIN used for the System PIN.

New PIN 3. Highlight Reset & Admin

OK

and press

. The RESET & ADMIN menu is displayed.

4. Highlight System PIN Code

OK .”

and press Confirm PIN

5. Enter and confirm your new PIN.

6. Highlight and select Save to confirm.

Cancel Save

Using the USB Power Feature

The USB port can be used to charge devices The two options for this feature are:

• Always On - Power is always available.

• Off When TV Off - When the TV is powered off, no power is available.

USB Power

Always On

Off When TV Off

Back

You will need to enter your current PIN code the next time you access this menu or if you’d like to change your PIN.

About Viewing Data

Video ACR collects data related to publicly available content displayed on your television/display, such as the identity of your broadcast, cable, or satellite television provider, and the television programs and commercials viewed (including time, date, channel, and whether you view them live or at a later time). We also collect unique identifiers about this TV, including the

IP address. This data is collectively referred to as “Viewing Data.” For more information about Viewing Data and how VIZIO protects its customers’ privacy, please consult our privacy policy at www.vizio.com/privacy.

When ACR collection is turned on, we may share Viewing Data with authorized data partners including analytics companies, media companies and advertisers. VIZIO and its authorized data partners use Viewing Data to generate summary analysis and reports of how users engage with content on their TVs and other devices. VIZIO Viewing Data is sometimes enhanced with household demographic data and data about digital actions (e.g. digital purchases and other consumer behavior taken by devices associated with the IP Address we collect). Viewing Data also enables our authorized data partners to deliver advertising relevant to your profile that you might find useful, both on the VIZIO TV/display and other devices sharing your IP

Address. Viewing Data is also used to help content publishers, broadcasters or content distribution services create or recommend more relevant entertainment based on summary insights, as well as helps us improve the design of our products, software and services.

You can easily turn this feature On or Off in the RESET & ADMIN menu.

If you have trouble enabling or disabling Viewing Data, please contact

VIZIO Customer Support by going to

Contact Us. support.vizio.com

and selecting

For more information, see https://www.vizio.com/viewingdata and review

VIZIO’s privacy policy at https://www.vizio.com/privacy.

38

287

VIZIO TV

USING THE INFO WINDOW

The Info Window can be displayed by pressing the Info button on the remote:

• Press the Info button one time to display the TV name, current input, picture mode, network name, and time.

Current Input Picture Mode Network Name

TV Name

Living Room HDMI-1 Wide HomeWiFi 5:00 pm Time

3

288

SmartCast Home

SM

What is SmartCast Home SM ?

SmartCast Home lets you discover, stream, and control your content like never before! Access top apps, like Netflix, Hulu, and Amazon Prime Video by using the remote to easily browse and launch content directly from the home screen. SmartCast Home makes finding something to watch easy and fun.

What you can do with SmartCast Home:

• Stream high quality entertainment.

• Launch top tier apps directly from the home screen.

• Unlock your photos and videos by mirroring your laptop or mobile device onto your TV.

• Turn your iOS or Android device into the ultimate streaming companion with the VIZIO

SmartCast Mobile app.

• Rearrange apps on your home screen just the way you like it.

• Works with Google Assistant and Amazon Alexa.

How to Launch SmartCast Home:

Begin streatming with SmartCast Home by:

• Press the SmartCast Home

—or— or button on your remote.

• Select SmartCast from the list of inputs.

Home Movies TV Shows Support Extra

1

2

Discover

3

Apps

1.

2.

3.

Marquee Content Carousel - Launch content with one click.

Discover - New or popular content across multiple apps.

Streaming Apps on your TV

INFO WINDOW

39

4

40

VIZIO TV

WatchFree™

What is WatchFree™?

VIZIO WatchFree takes your cord-cutting entertainment experience one step further! With the simple press of a button, enjoy free streaming TV with over 100 live TV channels to choose from – news, movies, sports, comedy, music and more. A built-in on-screen guide makes finding something to watch easier than ever. And it’s all FREE – no fees, no subscriptions, or logins.

What you can do with WatchFree:

• Stream over 100 live TV channels absolutely free – news, movies, sports, comedy, music and more.

• Navigate through channels, organized by genre, with an intuitive on-screen guide.

• Watch 1000’s of free movies from major studios.

• Watch the best of the internet TV.

• No logins, subscriptions or transactions fees.

How to Launch WatchFree:

To launch and begin watching entertainment offered on WatchFree:

• Press the Input button on your remote and select WatchFree

-or-

• Simply select the WatchFree app logo from the SmartCast Home app row.

1

Zoneless

2018 • 2h • TV-G • Sci-Fi

Outer space: The closest known resemblance to a perfect vacuum. It has essentially no friction, allowing countless stars, planets, and moons to move about freely. This is the story of one man’s journey in this mysterious place.

115

FAVORITES 9:00

Music

Zoneless

9:30

107

2

203

204

College Football

Network Security

The City

Fun WIth Max & Daniel

205

206 Weekend Recap

1.

2.

Show Details - Find out show information.

On-Screen Guide - Over 100 live TV and audio channels organized by genre.

10:00

Kansas C

The Kitch

4

Note : Not available in Canada.

Playing USB Media

The USB Media Player allows you to connect a USB thumb drive to your

TV and play music, video, or photos.

Preparing Your USB Drive to Play USB Media

To display USB media, you must first save your videos onto a USB thumb drive:

• The USB thumb drive must be formatted as FAT32.

• Files on the USB thumb drive must end in a supported file extension

( .mp3, .jpg, etc.)

• The player is not designed to play media from external hard drives,

MP3 players, cameras, or smartphones.

Displaying USB Media

To display your USB media:

1. Connect your USB thumb drive to the USB port on the side of the TV.

2. The TV will recognize the USB stick. Use the Arrow Keys remote to select the content you’d like to play.

on the

-OR-

3. Select USB from the bottom streaming icons on the

SmartCast Homepage.

Removing the USB Drive from the TV

To safely remove your USB drive from the TV:

1. Turn off the TV.

2. Disconnect your USB thumb drive from the USB port on the side of the TV.

Do not remove the USB thumb drive while the TV is on.

Doing so may damage the drive.

4

You can display your photos in Fullscreen. Select the photo, press OK , then highlight Fullscreen and press OK

Note : The image shown here is for illustrative purposes only and may be subject to change. The actual number of ports and their locations may vary, depending on the model.

41

42

289

290

VIZIO TV

Back Button

Highlight this button and press OK to return to the previous screen.

Connected Sources displays connected USB devices.

Music

USB1: MyFlashDrive

Current Folder

My Music

Playback Controls

Use to control audio playback. Highlight

Play/Pause, Previous, or Next and press OK .

Toggle Music/Photos

Sort by Album/Artist/Track

Sort:

View:

Browse Photos

Artist A-Z

All

Now Playing Information displays song title, album title, and artist name.

Progress Bar displays the duration of the currently-playing song.

The blue bar will lengthen as the song progresses.

3

4

5

#

1

2

Fab Apple Dream

On The Answer Is Yes

By Ana Banana

5:50

MyFlashDrive\Audio\root\My Music

Track

Starry Summer

Downspin

Mango Dream

Crystal Waters

Smooth Waves

Album

Summer Mix

Summer Mix

Beach Mix

Beach Mix

Breezy Mix

Artist

JCheesy

JCheesy

Ana Banana

The Dash

Rio Steve

8:46

Duration

2:42

6:20

8:46

4:21

7:58

Toggle between viewing all content and only viewing folders.

Page 1 of 1

Page Information

If your USB thumb drive has more files than can be displayed on a single screen, the page information is displayed here.

Album Art

If included on the USB thumb drive and associated with your music, the album art will display here.

Folder Contents/Playlist buttons on the remote.

This area displays the contents of the currently selected folder. You can browse files and folders using the Arrow and OK

MUSIC PLAYER

4

43

4

Back Button



Current Folder

Video

USB1: MyFlashDrive

My Videos

2

3

4

#

1

MyFlashDrive\Video\root\My Videos

File

Family Vacation - California

26th Birthday Party

Japan 2017

Aby’s Graduation

-

-

-

-

Date Duration

00:23:43

00:38:18

00:41:08

00:25:32

Sort by Date or File Name

Sort: Date New-Old

View: Folders

View All or View Folders

Page 1 of 1



Folder Contents/Playlist

This area displays the contents of the currently selected folder. You can browse among files using the Arrow and OK buttons on the remote.

VIDEO PLAYER

44

VIZIO TV

4

Back Button


USB1:

Photo


Current Folder root

Start Fullscreen Slideshow

Sort by Date or File Name

View Thumbnails/Folders

Adjust Slideshow Settings

View Music Files

Sort:

Start Slideshow

Name A-Z

View: Thumbnails

Settings

Browse Music

File Name: D 1920x1080

Resolution: 1920x1080

Size: 1607270KB

Back Button

Highlight and press OK to return to left column.

Current Folder

Displays the folder path.

VIZIO_2GB\Photo\root

A.jpg

D.jpg

G.jpg

B.jpg

E.jpg

Photo Information displays the name, resolution, and file size of the selected photo.

C.jpg

F.jpg

H.jpg

Page 1 of 1

I.jpg



Folder Contents

This area displays the contents of the currently selected folder. You can browse files and folders using the buttons on the remote.

Arrow and OK

PHOTO VIEWER

45

A Troubleshooting & Technical Support

Do You Have Questions? Find Answers At

SUPPORT.VIZIO.COM

Find help with: Live Chat

Support Available

• New Product Set-up

• Connecting Your Devices

• Technical Problems

• Product Updates

• And More

You can also contact our award-winning support team at:

Phone: (877) 698-4946 (TOLL-FREE)

Or text VIZIO support using your mobile device:

Text Message: (205) 301-3729

Note: This number accepts SMS/MMS messages only. No voice calls accepted.

Message and data rates may apply. Only available in the U.S.

291

292

VIZIO TV

A

Take A Moment To Register Your Product At

VIZIO.COM/PRODUCT-REGISTRATION

Why Register?

Customized Support

Get assistance quickly with your information on-hand.

News & Offers

Take advantage of the latest news and special offers from VIZIO.

Safety & Satisfaction

Stay up to date with important product updates and notifications.

REGISTER YOUR VIZIO PRODUCT NOW

47

A

HELP TOPICS

The remote is not responding.

• Make sure the batteries are properly inserted matching the

- and + symbols.

• Replace the batteries with fresh ones.

The TV displays “No Signal.”

• Press INPUT input source.

button on the remote control to select a different

• If you are using cable TV or antenna connected directly to the TV, scan for channels. See Scanning for Channels.

There is no power.

• Ensure the TV is plugged into a working electrical outlet.

• Ensure the power cable is securely attached to the TV.

• Press the Power/Standby button on the remote or on the back of the TV to turn the TV on.

The power is on, but there is no image on the screen.

• Ensure all cables are securely attached to the TV.

• Ensure all devices are connected correctly. Devices differ; see your device’s user manual for details.

• Adjust Brightness, Contrast, or Backlight.

See Adjusting the Picture Settings.

• Press the INPUT input source.

button on the remote to select a different

The sound is flat or dialog is not audible.

• Turn off Volume Leveling. See Adjusting the Audio Settings.

Where do I find information on the accessibility features of this product and other VIZIO products?

• Please visit https://www.vizio.com/accessibility, Email us at:

[email protected], or give us a call at 1-877-698-4746.

There is no sound.

• Press Volume Up on the remote control.

• Press the MUTE button on the remote to ensure mute is off.

• Check the audio settings. See Adjusting the Audio Settings.

• Check the audio connections of external devices (Blu-ray player, game console, cable/satellite box) that are connected to the TV.

• If you are using an antenna, the signal strength of the channel may be low. Ensure your antenna is connected securely to the TV and move the antenna around the room or close to a window for the best signal.

The colors on the TV don’t look right.

• Adjust the Color and Tint settings in the Picture menu. See the Picture Settings.

Adjusting

• Select a pre-set picture mode. See recommends selecting Calibrated.

Adjusting the Picture Settings.

VIZIO

• Check all cables to ensure they are securely attached.

The image quality is not good.

• For the best image quality, view high-definition programs using digital sources. Connect your devices with HDMI cables.


The picture is distorted.

• Move the TV away from electrical appliances, cars, and fluorescent lights.

• Ensure all cables are securely attached.

The buttons on the remote aren’t working.

• Ensure you are only pressing one button at a time.

• Point the remote directly at the TV when pressing a button.

• Replace the remote batteries with new ones. See

Batteries.

Replacing the

The TV image does not cover the entire screen.

• If you are using TV, AV, or Component with 480i input, go to: Menu >

System > Aspect Ratio to change the screen mode.

The TV has pixels (dots) that are always dark.

• Your HD TV is precision-manufactured using an extremely high level of technology. However, sometimes pixels may not display correctly.

These types of occurrences are inherent to this type of product and do not constitute a defective product.

I see “noise” or static on the screen.

• When your TV’s digital capabilities exceed a digital broadcast signal, the signal is up-converted (improved) to match your TV’s display capabilities. This up-converting can sometimes cause irregularities in the image.


48

VIZIO TV

A

When I change input source, the TV image changes size.

• The TV remembers the viewing mode on each input source. If the viewing mode on the new input source differs from the one on the input source you switch from, the difference may be noticeable.

• See Changing the Screen Aspect Ratio.

How do I download the VIZIO SmartCast Mobile™ app?

• Make sure your phone or tablet is connected to a Wi-Fi network.

Open a browser on your phone or tablet.

Navigate to vizio.com/smartcastapp and follow the on-screen instructions to download the VIZIO SmartCast

Mobile™ app.

How do I change the Inputs?

• Press the Input button on the back of the TV to cycle through

• the Inputs.

•

•

Make sure the VIZIO SmartCast

Press the Input button on the basic remote to cycle through the Inputs.

Mobile™ app is installed on your phone or tablet. Open the VIZIO

SmartCast Mobile™ app. Tap on the Device list and select your TV.

Tap on the Input key and select the Input of your choice.

How do I connect to my Wi-Fi network?

•

•

On your TV remote, press the Menu button then go to Network >

Select your Wi-Fi name > Enter password.

Open the VIZIO SmartCast Mobile™ app on your phone or tablet.

Tap on the device list and select your Display.

Tap on the Settings icon > Network > Wireless Access Points.

Select your Wi-Fi network from the list, enter the Wi-Fi password, and tap Connect .

How do I stream apps like Netflix to my VIZIO SmartCast™ TV?

• Download and open a Chromecast-enabled apps on your mobile device. Then tap the Cast button.

How do I exit Demo Mode

• Press and hold demo mode.

the Input button on the back of the TV to exit the

How do I watch Cable/Antenna TV channels?

• If you subscribe to cable or satellite, simply connect an HDMI cable

•

(not included) to the receiver.

If you use external antennas to watch local broadcast channels, use a coaxial cable to connect.

Some of my Channels are missing.

• Press the MENU button on your TV remote and select the channels option. Then select Find Channels.

• Open the VIZIO SmartCast Mobile™ app on your phone or tablet.

Click on: Control > Your TV/Device Name > Settings Icon >

Channels > Find Channels.

How do I disable/enable Viewing Data?

• Press the MENU button on your remote and select the System

Select or off.

Reset & Admin

option.

. Then select Viewing Data to turn the feature on

• Open the VIZIO SmartCast Mobile™ app on your phone or tablet.

Click on: Control > Your TV/Device Name > Settings Icon > System >

Reset & Admin > Viewing Data Slider.

The television will not turn on using Alexa or Google Assistant.

•

•

Ensure the television is in Quick Start mode.

Tap on Menu > System > Power Mode > Quick Start.

How do I know I am getting 4K resolution or HDR content such as

Dolby Vision?

• As you are watching content on the television, press the INFO button

• on the remote or VIZIO SmartCast Mobile™ app. You will see the current resolution being displayed along with the version of video.

HDR will show as a Dolby Vision icon, HDR10 or HLG.

The TV has pixels (dots) that are always dark.

• Your HD TV is precision-manufactured using an extremely high level of technology. However, sometimes pixels may not display correctly.

These types of occurrences are inherent to this type of product and do not constitute a defective product.

I see “noise” or static on the screen.

• When your TV’s digital capabilities exceed a digital broadcast signal, the signal is up-converted (improved) to match your TV’s display capabilities. This up-converting can sometimes cause irregularities in the image.


49

Size

Viewable Area

MOUNTING

Dimensions w/ Stand

Dimensions w/o Stand

Weight w/ Stand

Weight w/o Stand

Mounting Screw Size

Hole Pattern

PICTURE QUALITY

Maximum Resolution

LCD Backlight

Refresh Rate

INPUTS / OUTPUTS

HDMI Inputs

Component Video Inputs

Composite Video Inputs

Ethernet Input

RF Atenna Input

USB

Audio Output

OTHER

Remote Control Model

Power Consumption

Standby Power

Voltage

OSD Language

Certification

Specifications

D24h-G9

24”

23.5”

21.83” x 14.78” x 6.18”

(554.5 x 375.4 x 157.0 mm)

21.83” x 13.15” x 2.06”

(554.5 x 334.0 x 52.3 mm)

7.01 lb (3.18 kg)

6.90 lb (3.13 kg)

M4

100 mm x 100 mm

720p

Edgelit LED

60 Hz

1

0

2

0

1

1

HDMI ARC, Digital Optical

28.64” x 18.97” x 7.04”

(727.5 x 482.4 x 178.7 mm)

28.64” x 16.98” x 2.46”

(727.5 x 431.4 x 62.6 mm)

9.44 lb (4.28 kg)

9.26 lb (4.20 kg)

100 mm x 100 mm

1366 x 768 (HD)

D32h-G9

32”

31.5”

M4

Full Array LED

60 Hz

2

0

1

1

1

1

HDMI ARC, RCA, Digital Optical

D40f-G9

40”

39.5”

35.51” x 22.59” x 8.36”

(902.0 x 573.8 x 212.3 mm)

35.51” x 20.40” x 2.55”

14.55 lb (6.60 kg)

14.33 lb (6.5 kg)

M6

200 mm x 200 mm

1920 x 1080 (Full HD)

Full Array LED

60 Hz

2

1

1

1

1

1

(902.0 x 518.2 x 64.8 mm)


(1120.9 x 711.2 x 255.8 mm)

44.13” x 28.00” x 10.07”

44.13” x 25.59” x 2.42”

(1120.9 x 650.0 x 61.5 mm)

D50x-G9

50”

49.5”

21.83 lb (9.90 kg)

21.32 lb (9.67 kg)

M6

200 mm x 200 mm

3840 x 2160 (UHD)

Full Array LED

60 Hz

3

0

1

1

1

1


XRT136

45W

<0.5W

120V

English, French, Spanish

XRT136

69W

<0.5W

120V


XRT136

75W

<0.5W

120V


XRT136

135W

<0.5W

120V


UL, cUL, FCC Class B, BETS-7/

ICES-003 Class B, IC, HDMI (CEC, ARC)

Dolby Audio



Dolby Audio



Dolby Audio



Dolby Audio

B

50

293

294

VIZIO TV

Size

Viewable Area

MOUNTING

Dimensions w/ Stand

Dimensions w/o Stand

Weight w/ Stand

Weight w/o Stand

Mounting Screw Size

Hole Pattern

PICTURE QUALITY

Maximum Resolution

LCD Backlight

Refresh Rate

INPUTS / OUTPUTS

HDMI Inputs

Component Video Inputs

Composite Video Inputs

Ethernet Input

RF Atenna Input

USB

Audio Output

OTHER

Remote Control Model

Power Consumption

Standby Power

Voltage

OSD Language

Certification

Specifications

V405-G9

40”

39.5”

35.51” x 22.70” x 8.36”

(902.0 x 576.5 x 212.4 mm)

35.51” x 20.51” x 2.55”

(902.0 x 521.0 x 64.8 mm)

15.21 lb (6.90 kg)

14.99 lb (6.80 kg)

M6

200 mm x 200 mm

V505-G9

50”

49.5”

44.13” x 28.00” x 10.07”

(1120.9 x 711.2 x 255.8 mm)

44.13” x 25.59” x 2.42”

(1120.9 x 650.0 x 61.5 mm)

21.83 lb (9.90 kg)

21.32 lb (9.67 kg)

M6

200 mm x 200 mm

V655-G9

65”

64.5”

57.37” x 35.61” x 11.95”

(1457.2 x 904.6 x 303.5 mm)

57.37” x 33.10” x 2.41”

(1457.2 x 840.7 x 61.1 mm)

46.69 lb (21.18 kg)

45.81 lb (20.78 kg)

M6

400 mm x 200 mm

3840 x 2160 (UHD)

Full Array LED

60 Hz

1

1

3

0

1

1


3840 x 2160 (UHD)

Full Array LED

60 Hz

1

1

3

0

1

1


3840 x 2160 (UHD)

Full Array LED

60 Hz

1

1

3

0

1

1


XRT136

98W

<0.5W

120V


XRT136

135W

<0.5W

120V


XRT136

200W

<0.5W

120V




Dolby Audio



Dolby Audio



Dolby Audio

B

51

Regulatory Information C

FCC Class B Radio Interference Statement

NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.


Notice

The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Shielded interface cables and AC power cord, if any, must be used in order to comply with the emission limits.

The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized modification to this equipment. It is the responsibilities of the user to correct such interference.

CPC-2-1-28 d’Industrie Canada, License optionnelle pour les appareils radio de faible puissance, pour plus de détails.

Industry Canada Class B emission compliance statement

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du

Canada.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance with the FCC Rules could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.

Caution

Always use a power outlet that is properly grounded.

Canada Notice for License-Exempt Radio Apparatus

This device complies with Industry Canada’s license-exempt RSSs.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This device operates on a no-protection no-interference basis. Should the user seek to obtain protection from other radio services operating in the same TV bands, a radio license is required. Please consult Industry

Canada’s document CPC-2-1-28, Optional Licensing for Low-Power Radio

Apparatus in the TV Bands, for details.

Cet appareil est conforme aux CNR exempts de licence d’Industrie

Canada. Son fonctionnement est sujet aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. le dispositif ne doit pas produire de brouillage préjudiciable, et

2. ce dispositif doit accepter tout brouillage reçu, y compris un brouillage susceptible de provoquer un fonctionnement indésirable

Cet appareil fonctionne sur une base sans protection et sans interférence. Dans le cas où l’utilisateur cherche à obtenir de la protection des autres services de radio fonctionnant sur les mêmes bandes TV, aucune license est requise. Veuillez consulter le document

52

VIZIO TV

Limited Warranty D

UNITED STATES AND CANADA

BY USING YOUR VIZIO PRODUCT YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ALL

THE TERMS OF THIS WARRANTY. BEFORE USING YOUR VIZIO PRODUCT,

PLEASE READ THIS WARRANTY CAREFULLY. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO

THE TERMS OF THIS WARRANTY, DO NOT USE THE VIZIO PRODUCT AND,

WITHIN THIRTY (30) DAYS OF THE DATE OF PURCHASE, RETURN IT FOR A

REFUND TO THE AUTHORIZED RETAILER WHERE YOU PURCHASED IT.

This warranty contains a binding arbitration agreement and a class action waiver for United States residents. If you live in the United States, the binding arbitration agreement and class action waiver affect your rights under this warranty. Please read the text under the section titled

“Binding Arbitration Agreement; Class Action Waiver (U.S. Residents

Only)” carefully.

How Long This Warranty Lasts

For non-commercial use, VIZIO warrants the product on the terms set forth below for one (1) year from the date of original purchase. For commercial use, VIZIO warrants this product on the terms set forth below for ninety (90) days from the date of original purchase.

What This Warranty Covers

VIZIO warrants the product against defects in materials and workmanship when the product is used normally in accordance with

VIZIO’s user guides and manuals.

Except where restricted by law, this warranty applies only to the original purchaser of a new product. The purchase must have been made from an authorized retailer in the United States (including Puerto Rico) or

Canada. The product must also be located in the country where it was purchased at the time of warranty service.

Zero Bright Pixel Defect Guarantee (Displays Only)

Your product may qualify for a warranty against “zero bright pixel” defects for the duration of the warranty on select new product purchases. To determine if this guarantee applies to your product, refer to the model’s product information page at www.vizio.com, look for the “zero bright pixel” guarantee on the box, or contact VIZIO Technical

Support at the email address or telephone number below.

How to Get Service

Before obtaining warranty service, you may visit www.vizio.com for additional help and troubleshooting. To obtain warranty service, contact

VIZIO Technical Support via email at [email protected] or via phone at 877 MY VIZIO (877-698-4946).

Your Obligations Before Service

You must obtain pre-authorization before sending your product to a

VIZIO service center. You may be required to supply a purchase receipt

(or copy) to show that the product is within the warranty period. When you return a product to a VIZIO service center, you must ship the product in its original packaging or in packaging that affords an equal degree of protection. VIZIO Technical Support will provide instructions for packing and shipping the product to the VIZIO service center. ALL

USER DATA AND DOWNLOADED APPLICATIONS STORED ON A PRODUCT

WILL BE DELETED IN THE COURSE OF SOME IN-HOME AND ALL SHIP-IN

WARRANTY SERVICE. If this occurs, your product will be restored to its original state. You will be responsible for restoring all applicable user data and downloaded applications. Recovery and reinstallation of user data and downloaded applications is not covered under this warranty.

In order to protect your personal information, VIZIO recommends that you always clear all personal information from the product before it is serviced, regardless of the servicer.

VIZIO’s Responsibilities

If VIZIO determines that a product is covered by this warranty, VIZIO will

(at its option) repair or replace it, or refund the purchase price to you.

There will be no charge for parts or labor during the warranty period.

Replacement parts may be new or recertified at VIZIO’s option and sole discretion. Replacement parts and VIZIO’s labor are warranted for the remaining portion of the original warranty or for ninety (90) days from warranty service, whichever is longer.

Types of Service

TVs that are 32 inches or larger will usually be serviced in-home. In-home service requires complete and easy access to the product and does not include de-installation or re-installation of the product. In-home service is subject to availability. VIZIO will provide other service options when in-home service is not available.All other VIZIO products must be sent to a VIZIO service center to obtain warranty service. VIZIO is not responsible for transportation costs to the service center, but VIZIO will cover return shipping to the customer.

What This Warranty Does Not Cover

This warranty does not cover: (a) cosmetic damage; (b) normal wear and tear; (c) improper operation; (d) improper voltage supply or power surges; (e) signal issues; (f) damage from shipping; (g) acts of God; (h) customer misuse, modifications or adjustments; (i) installation, set-up, or repairs attempted by anyone other than by a VIZIO authorized service center; (j) products with unreadable or removed serial numbers; (k) products requiring routine maintenance; or (l) products sold “AS IS”,

“CLEARANCE”, “FACTORY RECERTIFIED”, or by a non-authorized reseller.

If you feel VIZIO has not met its obligations under this warranty, you may attempt to resolve the issue informally with VIZIO. If you are unable to resolve the issue informally and wish to file a formal claim against

VIZIO, and if you are a resident of the United States, you must submit your claim to binding arbitration according to the procedures described below, unless an exception applies. Submitting a claim to binding arbitration means that you do not have the right to have your claim heard by a judge or jury. Instead your claim will be heard by a neutral arbitrator.

Binding Arbitration Agreement; Class Action Waiver

UNLESS YOU HAVE BROUGHT AN ELIGIBLE CLAIM IN SMALL CLAIMS

COURT OR HAVE OPTED OUT AS DESCRIBED BELOW, ANY CONTROVERSY

OR CLAIM RELATING IN ANY WAY TO YOUR VIZIO PRODUCT, INCLUDING

ANY CONTROVERSY OR CLAIM ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THIS

WARRANTY, A BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY, OR THE VIZIO PRODUCT’S

SALE, CONDITION OR PERFORMANCE, WILL BE SETTLED BY BINDING

ARBITRATION ADMINISTERED BY THE AMERICAN ARBITRATION

ASSOCIATION AND CONDUCTED BY A SINGLE ARBITRATOR APPOINTED

BY THE AMERICAN ARBITRATION ASSOCIATION, IN ACCORDANCE WITH

ITS COMMERCIAL ARBITRATION RULES AND ITS SUPPLEMENTARY

PROCEDURES FOR CONSUMER-RELATED DISPUTES. You may learn more about the American Arbitration Association and its rules for arbitration by visiting www.adr.org or by calling 800-778-7879. Since this warranty concerns a transaction in interstate or international commerce, the

Federal Arbitration Act will apply.

The filing fees to begin and carry out arbitration will be shared between you and VIZIO, but in no event will your fees ever exceed the amount allowable by the American Arbitration Association, at which point VIZIO will cover all additional administrative fees and expenses. VIZIO waives its right to recover attorneys’ fees in connection with any arbitration under this warranty. If you are the prevailing party in an arbitration to which the Supplementary Procedures for Consumer-Related Disputes applies, then you are entitled to recover attorneys’ fees as the arbitrator may determine.

The dispute will be governed by the laws of the state or territory in which you resided at the time of your purchase (if in the United States). The place of arbitration will be Irvine, California, or your county of residence

(if in the United States). The arbitrator will have no authority to award punitive or other damages not measured by the prevailing party’s actual damages, except as may be required by statute. The arbitrator will not award consequential damages, and any award will be limited

53

D to monetary damages and will include no equitable relief, injunction, or direction to any party other than the direction to pay a monetary amount. Judgment on the award rendered by the arbitrator will be binding and final, except for any right of appeal provided by the Federal

Arbitration Act, and may be entered in any court having jurisdiction.

Except as may be required by law, neither you nor VIZIO nor an arbitrator may disclose the existence, content, or results of any arbitration under this warranty without the prior written consent of you and VIZIO.

ANY DISPUTE, WHETHER IN ARBITRATION, IN COURT, OR OTHERWISE,

WILL BE CONDUCTED SOLELY ON AN INDIVIDUAL BASIS. VIZIO AND YOU

AGREE THAT NO PARTY WILL HAVE THE RIGHT OR AUTHORITY FOR ANY

DISPUTE TO BE ARBITRATED AS A CLASS ACTION, A PRIVATE ATTORNEY

GENERAL ACTION, OR IN ANY OTHER PROCEEDING IN WHICH EITHER

PARTY ACTS OR PROPOSES TO ACT IN A REPRESENTATIVE CAPACITY.

NO ARBITRATION OR PROCEEDING WILL BE JOINED, CONSOLIDATED,

OR COMBINED WITH ANOTHER ARBITRATION OR PROCEEDING

WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF ALL PARTIES TO ANY SUCH

ARBITRATION OR PROCEEDING.

Exceptions to Binding Arbitration Agreement and Class Action Waiver

IF YOU DO NOT WISH TO BE BOUND BY THE BINDING ARBITRATION

AGREEMENT AND CLASS ACTION WAIVER, THEN: (1) you must notify

VIZIO in writing within sixty (60) days of the date that you purchased the product; (2) your written notification must be mailed to VIZIO at 39 Tesla,

Irvine, CA 92618, Attn: Legal Department; and (3) your written notification must include (a) your name, (b) your address, (c) the date you purchased the product, and (d) a clear statement that you wish to opt out of the binding arbitration agreement and class action waiver.

In addition, you may pursue a claim in small claims court in your county of residence (if in the United States) or in Orange County, California.

In such case the provisions of the section titled “Binding Arbitration

Agreement; Class Action Waiver (U.S. Residents)” will not apply.

Exclusions and Limitations

TO THE GREATEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THERE ARE

NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THOSE DESCRIBED ABOVE.

ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WILL BE

LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD SET FORTH ABOVE.

SOME STATES AND PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW

LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY

NOT APPLY TO YOU.

VIZIO WILL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF

INFORMATION OR DATA, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST REVENUE OR

LOST PROFITS, OR OTHER INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF VIZIO HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, AND EVEN IF THE REMEDY FAILS OF ITS

ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. SOME STATES AND PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW

THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY

TO YOU.

IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER REMEDY FOR ANY AND ALL LOSSES AND

DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY CAUSE WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING

VIZIO’S NEGLIGENCE, ALLEGED DAMAGE, OR DEFECTIVE GOODS, NO

MATTER WHETHER SUCH DEFECTS ARE DISCOVERABLE OR LATENT),

VIZIO MAY, AT ITS SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE OPTION AND IN ITS DISCRETION,

REPAIR OR REPLACE YOUR PRODUCT, OR REFUND ITS PURCHASE

PRICE. AS NOTED, SOME STATES AND PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW

THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY

TO YOU.

How the Law Applies

This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights, which vary from state to state and province to province. This warranty applies to the greatest extent permitted by applicable law.

General

No employee or agent of VIZIO may modify this warranty. If any term of this warranty, other than the class action waiver, is found to be unenforceable, that term will be severed from this warranty and all other terms will remain in effect. If the class action waiver is found to be unenforceable, then the entire section titled “Binding Arbitration

Agreement; Class Action Waiver (U.S. Residents Only)” will not apply. This warranty applies to the maximum extent not prohibited by law.

Changes to Warranty

This warranty may change without notice, but any change will not affect your original warranty. Check www.vizio.com for the most current version.

54

295

296

VIZIO TV

Legal Information E

Software Licenses

All software is provided subject to a software license agreement(s) and you agree that you will be bound by such license agreement(s) in addition to these terms. Your use of this product is subject to VIZIO’s privacy policy, which may be updated from time to time, and is available to view at http://www.vizio.com/privacy.

Export Regulations

Customer acknowledges that the VIZIO products, which include technology and software, are subject to customs and export control laws in the United States (“US”). The products may also be subject to the customs and export control laws and regulations of the country in which the products are manufactured and/or received.

Internet Connectivity

Network conditions, environmental and other factors may negatively affect connectivity and the resulting video quality, if any. The applications and content of the applications pictured herein or described in accompanying documentation may only be available in certain countries or languages, may require additional fees or subscription charges, and may be subject to future updates, modifications or discontinuation without notice. VIZIO has no control over third party applications or content and assumes no responsibility for the availability or interruption of such applications or content. Additional third party terms, conditions and restrictions apply.

Information in this User Manual is subject to change without notice. To review the most updated version of this User Manual and the associated

Quick Start Guide, go to http://www.vizio.com.

© 2019 VIZIO, Inc. All Right Reserved.

This User Manual may not be copied in whole or in part without the written permission of VIZIO, Inc. VIZIO, Inc. has made reasonable efforts to ensure the accuracy of the information provided herein. All product specifications, functionality, features, configurations, performance, design and other product information described herein are subject to change without notice. VIZIO, Inc. is not responsible for typographical, technical, or descriptive errors.

VIZIO, the VIZIO logo, the V logo, and other terms and phrases are trademarks or registered trademarks of VIZIO, Inc.

The terms HDMI, HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the

HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing

Administrator, Inc.

Dolby, Dolby Vision, Dolby Audio, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under license from

Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works. Copyright ©

1992-2015 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.

Google Play logo, YouTube, and Chromecast built-in are trademarks of

Google LLC.

Other names of companies, products, and services used in this User

Manual may be trademarks, trade names or service marks of others and VIZIO, Inc. disclaims any interest in trademarks, trade names or service marks other than its own. Mention of non-VIZIO products is for informational purposes only.

App services featured on the included IR remote may vary and may not be available in all regions.

4K or HDR availability varies by app and may be subject to subscription fees, internet service, and device capabilities.

Other names of companies, products, and services used in this User

Manual may be trademarks, trade names or service marks of others and VIZIO, Inc. disclaims any interest in trademarks, trade names or service marks other than its own. Mention of non-VIZIO products is for informational purposes only.

Battery Disposal

Caution: This product may be shipped with batteries.Do not dispose of batteries in a fire or withordinaryhouseholdwaste.

Batteries may explode and can cause damage. Replace batteries only with the same or equivalent type of battery recommended by VIZIO. The disposal of batteries may be regulated by your state.For more information on recycling or properly disposing of your batteries, please check with your state or go to www.

vizio.com/environment.

Product Recycling

The disposal and recycling of consumer electronic products may be regulated by your state. Always properly dispose of your VIZIO products in accordance with local laws and regulations. VIZIO supports the proper recycling of our products. For information on how to properly recycle your VIZIO products and to learn more about consumer electronics recycling laws, please go to www.

vizio.com/environment or call (800) 374-3473.

Packaging Disposal

VIZIO encourages the recycling of the packaging used for this product.

Please break-down all boxes and recycle eligible materials according to local laws and regulations. For more information please go to www.vizio.

com/environment or call (800) 374-3473.

Accessibility

For information on the accessibility features of this product and other

VIZIO products please visit: https://www.vizio.com/accessibility

Email: [email protected]

Phone: 1-877-698-4746

© 2019 VIZIO INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

190812SL

55

SERVICE DEPARTMENT

228 INDUSTRIAL AVE

HOHENWALD, TENNESSEE 38462

TOLL FREE: 888-526-3978

EMAIL: [email protected]

SEE OUR VIDEOS AT OLIVERTRAVELTRAILERS.COM